Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
The Project Gutenberg eBook of Japanese Fairy Tales
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will
have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using
this eBook.
Title: Japanese Fairy Tales
Author: Yei Theodora Ozaki
Release date: May 1, 2003 [eBook #4018]
Most recently updated: November 4, 2021
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/4018
Credits: Charles Franks, Greg Weeks and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team. HTML version by Al Haines.
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK JAPANESE
FAIRY TALES ***
J a p a n e s e F a i r y Ta l e s
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will
have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using
this eBook.
Title: Japanese Fairy Tales
Author: Yei Theodora Ozaki
Release date: May 1, 2003 [eBook #4018]
Most recently updated: November 4, 2021
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/4018
Credits: Charles Franks, Greg Weeks and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team. HTML version by Al Haines.
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK JAPANESE
FAIRY TALES ***
J a p a n e s e F a i r y Ta l e s
Page 4
COMPILED BY
by Yei Theodora Ozaki
Profusely Illustrated by Japanese Artists
by Yei Theodora Ozaki
Profusely Illustrated by Japanese Artists
Page 5
Contents
PREFACE
JAPANESE FAIRY TALES
MY LORD BAG OF RICE
THE TONGUE-CUT SPARROW
THE STORY OF URASHIMA TARO, THE FISHER LAD
THE FARMER AND THE BADGER
THE “SHINANSHA,” OR THE SOUTH POINTING CARRIAGE
THE ADVENTURES OF KINTARO, THE GOLDEN BOY
THE STORY OF PRINCESS HASE. A STORY OF OLD JAPAN
THE STORY OF THE MAN WHO DID NOT WISH TO DIE
THE BAMBOO-CUTTER AND THE MOON-CHILD
THE MIRROR OF MATSUYAMA A STORY OF OLD JAPAN
THE GOBLIN OF ADACHIGAHARA
THE SAGACIOUS MONKEY AND THE BOAR
THE HAPPY HUNTER AND THE SKILLFUL FISHER
THE STORY OF THE OLD MAN WHO MADE WITHERED TREES TO
FLOWER
THE JELLY FISH AND THE MONKEY
THE QUARREL OF THE MONKEY AND THE CRAB
THE WHITE HARE AND THE CROCODILES
THE STORY OF PRINCE YAMATO TAKE
MOMOTARO, OR THE STORY OF THE SON OF A PEACH
THE OGRE OF RASHOMON
HOW AN OLD MAN LOST HIS WEN
THE STONES OF FIVE COLORS AND THE EMPRESS JOKWA. AN
OLD CHINESE STORY
PREFACE
JAPANESE FAIRY TALES
MY LORD BAG OF RICE
THE TONGUE-CUT SPARROW
THE STORY OF URASHIMA TARO, THE FISHER LAD
THE FARMER AND THE BADGER
THE “SHINANSHA,” OR THE SOUTH POINTING CARRIAGE
THE ADVENTURES OF KINTARO, THE GOLDEN BOY
THE STORY OF PRINCESS HASE. A STORY OF OLD JAPAN
THE STORY OF THE MAN WHO DID NOT WISH TO DIE
THE BAMBOO-CUTTER AND THE MOON-CHILD
THE MIRROR OF MATSUYAMA A STORY OF OLD JAPAN
THE GOBLIN OF ADACHIGAHARA
THE SAGACIOUS MONKEY AND THE BOAR
THE HAPPY HUNTER AND THE SKILLFUL FISHER
THE STORY OF THE OLD MAN WHO MADE WITHERED TREES TO
FLOWER
THE JELLY FISH AND THE MONKEY
THE QUARREL OF THE MONKEY AND THE CRAB
THE WHITE HARE AND THE CROCODILES
THE STORY OF PRINCE YAMATO TAKE
MOMOTARO, OR THE STORY OF THE SON OF A PEACH
THE OGRE OF RASHOMON
HOW AN OLD MAN LOST HIS WEN
THE STONES OF FIVE COLORS AND THE EMPRESS JOKWA. AN
OLD CHINESE STORY
Page 6
TO
ELEANOR MARION-CRAWFORD.
I DEDICATE THIS BOOK TO YOU AND TO THE
SWEET CHILD-FRIENDSHIP THAT YOU GAVE ME IN
THE DAYS SPENT WITH YOU BY THE SOUTHERN
SEA, WHEN YOU USED TO LISTEN WITH
UNFEIGNED PLEASURE TO THESE FAIRY STORIES
FROM FAR JAPAN. MAY THEY NOW REMIND YOU
OF MY CHANGELESS LOVE AND REMEMBRANCE.
Y. T. O.
Tokio, 1908.
ELEANOR MARION-CRAWFORD.
I DEDICATE THIS BOOK TO YOU AND TO THE
SWEET CHILD-FRIENDSHIP THAT YOU GAVE ME IN
THE DAYS SPENT WITH YOU BY THE SOUTHERN
SEA, WHEN YOU USED TO LISTEN WITH
UNFEIGNED PLEASURE TO THESE FAIRY STORIES
FROM FAR JAPAN. MAY THEY NOW REMIND YOU
OF MY CHANGELESS LOVE AND REMEMBRANCE.
Y. T. O.
Tokio, 1908.
Page 7
PREFACE
This collection of Japanese fairy tales is the outcome of a suggestion
made to me indirectly through a friend by Mr. Andrew Lang. They have
been translated from the modern version written by Sadanami Sanjin. These
stories are not literal translations, and though the Japanese story and all
quaint Japanese expressions have been faithfully preserved, they have been
told more with the view to interest young readers of the West than the
technical student of folk-lore.
Grateful acknowledgment is due to Mr. Y. Yasuoka, Miss Fusa Okamoto,
my brother Nobumori Ozaki, Dr. Yoshihiro Takaki, and Miss Kameko
Yamao, who have helped me with translations.
The story which I have named “The Story of the Man who did not Wish
to Die” is taken from a little book written a hundred years ago by one
Shinsui Tamenaga. It is named Chosei Furo, or “Longevity.” “The Bamboo-
cutter and the Moon-child” is taken from the classic “Taketari Monogatari,”
and is NOT classed by the Japanese among their fairy tales, though it really
belongs to this class of literature.
The pictures were drawn by Mr. Kakuzo Fujiyama, a Tokio artist.
In telling these stories in English I have followed my fancy in adding
such touches of local color or description as they seemed to need or as
pleased me, and in one or two instances I have gathered in an incident from
another version. At all times, among my friends, both young and old,
English or American, I have always found eager listeners to the beautiful
legends and fairy tales of Japan, and in telling them I have also found that
they were still unknown to the vast majority, and this has encouraged me to
write them for the children of the West.
Y. T. O.
Tokio, 1908.
This collection of Japanese fairy tales is the outcome of a suggestion
made to me indirectly through a friend by Mr. Andrew Lang. They have
been translated from the modern version written by Sadanami Sanjin. These
stories are not literal translations, and though the Japanese story and all
quaint Japanese expressions have been faithfully preserved, they have been
told more with the view to interest young readers of the West than the
technical student of folk-lore.
Grateful acknowledgment is due to Mr. Y. Yasuoka, Miss Fusa Okamoto,
my brother Nobumori Ozaki, Dr. Yoshihiro Takaki, and Miss Kameko
Yamao, who have helped me with translations.
The story which I have named “The Story of the Man who did not Wish
to Die” is taken from a little book written a hundred years ago by one
Shinsui Tamenaga. It is named Chosei Furo, or “Longevity.” “The Bamboo-
cutter and the Moon-child” is taken from the classic “Taketari Monogatari,”
and is NOT classed by the Japanese among their fairy tales, though it really
belongs to this class of literature.
The pictures were drawn by Mr. Kakuzo Fujiyama, a Tokio artist.
In telling these stories in English I have followed my fancy in adding
such touches of local color or description as they seemed to need or as
pleased me, and in one or two instances I have gathered in an incident from
another version. At all times, among my friends, both young and old,
English or American, I have always found eager listeners to the beautiful
legends and fairy tales of Japan, and in telling them I have also found that
they were still unknown to the vast majority, and this has encouraged me to
write them for the children of the West.
Y. T. O.
Tokio, 1908.
Page 8
JAPANESE FAIRY TALES
Page 9
MY LORD BAG OF RICE
Long, long ago there lived, in Japan a brave warrior known to all as
Tawara Toda, or “My Lord Bag of Rice.” His true name was Fujiwara
Hidesato, and there is a very interesting story of how he came to change his
name.
One day he sallied forth in search of adventures, for he had the nature of
a warrior and could not bear to be idle. So he buckled on his two swords,
took his huge bow, much taller than himself, in his hand, and slinging his
quiver on his back started out. He had not gone far when he came to the
bridge of Seta-no-Karashi spanning one end of the beautiful Lake Biwa. No
sooner had he set foot on the bridge than he saw lying right across his path
a huge serpent-dragon. Its body was so big that it looked like the trunk of a
large pine tree and it took up the whole width of the bridge. One of its huge
claws rested on the parapet of one side of the bridge, while its tail lay right
against the other. The monster seemed to be asleep, and as it breathed, fire
and smoke came out of its nostrils.
At first Hidesato could not help feeling alarmed at the sight of this
horrible reptile lying in his path, for he must either turn back or walk right
over its body. He was a brave man, however, and putting aside all fear went
forward dauntlessly. Crunch, crunch! he stepped now on the dragon’s body,
now between its coils, and without even one glance backward he went on
his way.
He had only gone a few steps when he heard some one calling him from
behind. On turning back he was much surprised to see that the monster
dragon had entirely disappeared and in its place was a strange-looking man,
who was bowing most ceremoniously to the ground. His red hair streamed
over his shoulders and was surmounted by a crown in the shape of a
dragon’s head, and his sea-green dress was patterned with shells. Hidesato
knew at once that this was no ordinary mortal and he wondered much at the
strange occurrence. Where had the dragon gone in such a short space of
Long, long ago there lived, in Japan a brave warrior known to all as
Tawara Toda, or “My Lord Bag of Rice.” His true name was Fujiwara
Hidesato, and there is a very interesting story of how he came to change his
name.
One day he sallied forth in search of adventures, for he had the nature of
a warrior and could not bear to be idle. So he buckled on his two swords,
took his huge bow, much taller than himself, in his hand, and slinging his
quiver on his back started out. He had not gone far when he came to the
bridge of Seta-no-Karashi spanning one end of the beautiful Lake Biwa. No
sooner had he set foot on the bridge than he saw lying right across his path
a huge serpent-dragon. Its body was so big that it looked like the trunk of a
large pine tree and it took up the whole width of the bridge. One of its huge
claws rested on the parapet of one side of the bridge, while its tail lay right
against the other. The monster seemed to be asleep, and as it breathed, fire
and smoke came out of its nostrils.
At first Hidesato could not help feeling alarmed at the sight of this
horrible reptile lying in his path, for he must either turn back or walk right
over its body. He was a brave man, however, and putting aside all fear went
forward dauntlessly. Crunch, crunch! he stepped now on the dragon’s body,
now between its coils, and without even one glance backward he went on
his way.
He had only gone a few steps when he heard some one calling him from
behind. On turning back he was much surprised to see that the monster
dragon had entirely disappeared and in its place was a strange-looking man,
who was bowing most ceremoniously to the ground. His red hair streamed
over his shoulders and was surmounted by a crown in the shape of a
dragon’s head, and his sea-green dress was patterned with shells. Hidesato
knew at once that this was no ordinary mortal and he wondered much at the
strange occurrence. Where had the dragon gone in such a short space of
Page 10
time? Or had it transformed itself into this man, and what did the whole
thing mean? While these thoughts passed through his mind he had come up
to the man on the bridge and now addressed him:
“Was it you that called me just now?”
“Yes, it was I,” answered the man: “I have an earnest request to make to
you. Do you think you can grant it to me?”
“If it is in my power to do so I will,” answered Hidesato, “but first tell
me who you are?”
“I am the Dragon King of the Lake, and my home is in these waters just
under this bridge.”
“And what is it you have to ask of me?” said Hidesato.
“I want you to kill my mortal enemy the centipede, who lives on the
mountain beyond,” and the Dragon King pointed to a high peak on the
opposite shore of the lake.
“I have lived now for many years in this lake and I have a large family of
children and grand-children. For some time past we have lived in terror, for
a monster centipede has discovered our home, and night after night it comes
and carries off one of my family. I am powerless to save them. If it goes on
much longer like this, not only shall I lose all my children, but I myself
must fall a victim to the monster. I am, therefore, very unhappy, and in my
extremity I determined to ask the help of a human being. For many days
with this intention I have waited on the bridge in the shape of the horrible
serpent-dragon that you saw, in the hope that some strong brave man would
come along. But all who came this way, as soon as they saw me were
terrified and ran away as fast as they could. You are the first man I have
found able to look at me without fear, so I knew at once that you were a
man of great courage. I beg you to have pity upon me. Will you not help me
and kill my enemy the centipede?”
Hidesato felt very sorry for the Dragon King on hearing his story, and
readily promised to do what he could to help him. The warrior asked where
the centipede lived, so that he might attack the creature at once. The Dragon
King replied that its home was on the mountain Mikami, but that as it came
every night at a certain hour to the palace of the lake, it would be better to
wait till then. So Hidesato was conducted to the palace of the Dragon King,
under the bridge. Strange to say, as he followed his host downwards the
thing mean? While these thoughts passed through his mind he had come up
to the man on the bridge and now addressed him:
“Was it you that called me just now?”
“Yes, it was I,” answered the man: “I have an earnest request to make to
you. Do you think you can grant it to me?”
“If it is in my power to do so I will,” answered Hidesato, “but first tell
me who you are?”
“I am the Dragon King of the Lake, and my home is in these waters just
under this bridge.”
“And what is it you have to ask of me?” said Hidesato.
“I want you to kill my mortal enemy the centipede, who lives on the
mountain beyond,” and the Dragon King pointed to a high peak on the
opposite shore of the lake.
“I have lived now for many years in this lake and I have a large family of
children and grand-children. For some time past we have lived in terror, for
a monster centipede has discovered our home, and night after night it comes
and carries off one of my family. I am powerless to save them. If it goes on
much longer like this, not only shall I lose all my children, but I myself
must fall a victim to the monster. I am, therefore, very unhappy, and in my
extremity I determined to ask the help of a human being. For many days
with this intention I have waited on the bridge in the shape of the horrible
serpent-dragon that you saw, in the hope that some strong brave man would
come along. But all who came this way, as soon as they saw me were
terrified and ran away as fast as they could. You are the first man I have
found able to look at me without fear, so I knew at once that you were a
man of great courage. I beg you to have pity upon me. Will you not help me
and kill my enemy the centipede?”
Hidesato felt very sorry for the Dragon King on hearing his story, and
readily promised to do what he could to help him. The warrior asked where
the centipede lived, so that he might attack the creature at once. The Dragon
King replied that its home was on the mountain Mikami, but that as it came
every night at a certain hour to the palace of the lake, it would be better to
wait till then. So Hidesato was conducted to the palace of the Dragon King,
under the bridge. Strange to say, as he followed his host downwards the
Page 11
waters parted to let them pass, and his clothes did not even feel damp as he
passed through the flood. Never had Hidesato seen anything so beautiful as
this palace built of white marble beneath the lake. He had often heard of the
Sea King’s palace at the bottom of the sea, where all the servants and
retainers were salt-water fishes, but here was a magnificent building in the
heart of Lake Biwa. The dainty goldfishes, red carp, and silvery trout,
waited upon the Dragon King and his guest.
Hidesato was astonished at the feast that was spread for him. The dishes
were crystallized lotus leaves and flowers, and the chopsticks were of the
rarest ebony. As soon as they sat down, the sliding doors opened and ten
lovely goldfish dancers came out, and behind them followed ten red-carp
musicians with the koto and the samisen. Thus the hours flew by till
midnight, and the beautiful music and dancing had banished all thoughts of
the centipede. The Dragon King was about to pledge the warrior in a fresh
cup of wine when the palace was suddenly shaken by a tramp, tramp! as if a
mighty army had begun to march not far away.
Hidesato and his host both rose to their feet and rushed to the balcony,
and the warrior saw on the opposite mountain two great balls of glowing
fire coming nearer and nearer. The Dragon King stood by the warrior’s side
trembling with fear.
“The centipede! The centipede! Those two balls of fire are its eyes. It is
coming for its prey! Now is the time to kill it.”
Hidesato looked where his host pointed, and, in the dim light of the starlit
evening, behind the two balls of fire he saw the long body of an enormous
centipede winding round the mountains, and the light in its hundred feet
glowed like so many distant lanterns moving slowly towards the shore.
Hidesato showed not the least sign of fear. He tried to calm the Dragon
King.
“Don’t be afraid. I shall surely kill the centipede. Just bring me my bow
and arrows.”
The Dragon King did as he was bid, and the warrior noticed that he had
only three arrows left in his quiver. He took the bow, and fitting an arrow to
the notch, took careful aim and let fly.
The arrow hit the centipede right in the middle of its head, but instead of
penetrating, it glanced off harmless and fell to the ground.
passed through the flood. Never had Hidesato seen anything so beautiful as
this palace built of white marble beneath the lake. He had often heard of the
Sea King’s palace at the bottom of the sea, where all the servants and
retainers were salt-water fishes, but here was a magnificent building in the
heart of Lake Biwa. The dainty goldfishes, red carp, and silvery trout,
waited upon the Dragon King and his guest.
Hidesato was astonished at the feast that was spread for him. The dishes
were crystallized lotus leaves and flowers, and the chopsticks were of the
rarest ebony. As soon as they sat down, the sliding doors opened and ten
lovely goldfish dancers came out, and behind them followed ten red-carp
musicians with the koto and the samisen. Thus the hours flew by till
midnight, and the beautiful music and dancing had banished all thoughts of
the centipede. The Dragon King was about to pledge the warrior in a fresh
cup of wine when the palace was suddenly shaken by a tramp, tramp! as if a
mighty army had begun to march not far away.
Hidesato and his host both rose to their feet and rushed to the balcony,
and the warrior saw on the opposite mountain two great balls of glowing
fire coming nearer and nearer. The Dragon King stood by the warrior’s side
trembling with fear.
“The centipede! The centipede! Those two balls of fire are its eyes. It is
coming for its prey! Now is the time to kill it.”
Hidesato looked where his host pointed, and, in the dim light of the starlit
evening, behind the two balls of fire he saw the long body of an enormous
centipede winding round the mountains, and the light in its hundred feet
glowed like so many distant lanterns moving slowly towards the shore.
Hidesato showed not the least sign of fear. He tried to calm the Dragon
King.
“Don’t be afraid. I shall surely kill the centipede. Just bring me my bow
and arrows.”
The Dragon King did as he was bid, and the warrior noticed that he had
only three arrows left in his quiver. He took the bow, and fitting an arrow to
the notch, took careful aim and let fly.
The arrow hit the centipede right in the middle of its head, but instead of
penetrating, it glanced off harmless and fell to the ground.
Page 12
Nothing daunted, Hidesato took another arrow, fitted it to the notch of the
bow and let fly. Again the arrow hit the mark, it struck the centipede right in
the middle of its head, only to glance off and fall to the ground. The
centipede was invulnerable to weapons! When the Dragon King saw that
even this brave warrior’s arrows were powerless to kill the centipede, he
lost heart and began to tremble with fear.
The warrior saw that he had now only one arrow left in his quiver, and if
this one failed he could not kill the centipede. He looked across the waters.
The huge reptile had wound its horrid body seven times round the mountain
and would soon come down to the lake. Nearer and nearer gleamed fireballs
of eyes, and the light of its hundred feet began to throw reflections in the
still waters of the lake.
Then suddenly the warrior remembered that he had heard that human
saliva was deadly to centipedes. But this was no ordinary centipede. This
was so monstrous that even to think of such a creature made one creep with
horror. Hidesato determined to try his last chance. So taking his last arrow
and first putting the end of it in his mouth, he fitted the notch to his bow,
took careful aim once more and let fly.
This time the arrow again hit the centipede right in the middle of its head,
but instead of glancing off harmlessly as before, it struck home to the
creature’s brain. Then with a convulsive shudder the serpentine body
stopped moving, and the fiery light of its great eyes and hundred feet
darkened to a dull glare like the sunset of a stormy day, and then went out in
blackness. A great darkness now overspread the heavens, the thunder rolled
and the lightning flashed, and the wind roared in fury, and it seemed as if
the world were coming to an end. The Dragon King and his children and
retainers all crouched in different parts of the palace, frightened to death,
for the building was shaken to its foundation. At last the dreadful night was
over. Day dawned beautiful and clear. The centipede was gone from the
mountain.
Then Hidesato called to the Dragon King to come out with him on the
balcony, for the centipede was dead and he had nothing more to fear.
Then all the inhabitants of the palace came out with joy, and Hidesato
pointed to the lake. There lay the body of the dead centipede floating on the
water, which was dyed red with its blood.
bow and let fly. Again the arrow hit the mark, it struck the centipede right in
the middle of its head, only to glance off and fall to the ground. The
centipede was invulnerable to weapons! When the Dragon King saw that
even this brave warrior’s arrows were powerless to kill the centipede, he
lost heart and began to tremble with fear.
The warrior saw that he had now only one arrow left in his quiver, and if
this one failed he could not kill the centipede. He looked across the waters.
The huge reptile had wound its horrid body seven times round the mountain
and would soon come down to the lake. Nearer and nearer gleamed fireballs
of eyes, and the light of its hundred feet began to throw reflections in the
still waters of the lake.
Then suddenly the warrior remembered that he had heard that human
saliva was deadly to centipedes. But this was no ordinary centipede. This
was so monstrous that even to think of such a creature made one creep with
horror. Hidesato determined to try his last chance. So taking his last arrow
and first putting the end of it in his mouth, he fitted the notch to his bow,
took careful aim once more and let fly.
This time the arrow again hit the centipede right in the middle of its head,
but instead of glancing off harmlessly as before, it struck home to the
creature’s brain. Then with a convulsive shudder the serpentine body
stopped moving, and the fiery light of its great eyes and hundred feet
darkened to a dull glare like the sunset of a stormy day, and then went out in
blackness. A great darkness now overspread the heavens, the thunder rolled
and the lightning flashed, and the wind roared in fury, and it seemed as if
the world were coming to an end. The Dragon King and his children and
retainers all crouched in different parts of the palace, frightened to death,
for the building was shaken to its foundation. At last the dreadful night was
over. Day dawned beautiful and clear. The centipede was gone from the
mountain.
Then Hidesato called to the Dragon King to come out with him on the
balcony, for the centipede was dead and he had nothing more to fear.
Then all the inhabitants of the palace came out with joy, and Hidesato
pointed to the lake. There lay the body of the dead centipede floating on the
water, which was dyed red with its blood.
Page 13
The gratitude of the Dragon King knew no bounds. The whole family
came and bowed down before the warrior, calling him their preserver and
the bravest warrior in all Japan.
Another feast was prepared, more sumptuous than the first. All kinds of
fish, prepared in every imaginable way, raw, stewed, boiled and roasted,
served on coral trays and crystal dishes, were put before him, and the wine
was the best that Hidesato had ever tasted in his life. To add to the beauty of
everything the sun shone brightly, the lake glittered like a liquid diamond,
and the palace was a thousand times more beautiful by day than by night.
His host tried to persuade the warrior to stay a few days, but Hidesato
insisted on going home, saying that he had now finished what he had come
to do, and must return. The Dragon King and his family were all very sorry
to have him leave so soon, but since he would go they begged him to accept
a few small presents (so they said) in token of their gratitude to him for
delivering them forever from their horrible enemy the centipede.
As the warrior stood in the porch taking leave, a train of fish was
suddenly transformed into a retinue of men, all wearing ceremonial robes
and dragon’s crowns on their heads to show that they were servants of the
great Dragon King. The presents that they carried were as follows:
First, a large bronze bell.
Second, a bag of rice.
Third, a roll of silk.
Fourth, a cooking pot.
Fifth, a bell.
Hidesato did not want to accept all these presents, but as the Dragon
King insisted, he could not well refuse.
The Dragon King himself accompanied the warrior as far as the bridge,
and then took leave of him with many bows and good wishes, leaving the
procession of servants to accompany Hidesato to his house with the
presents.
The warrior’s household and servants had been very much concerned
when they found that he did not return the night before, but they finally
concluded that he had been kept by the violent storm and had taken shelter
somewhere. When the servants on the watch for his return caught sight of
him they called to every one that he was approaching, and the whole
came and bowed down before the warrior, calling him their preserver and
the bravest warrior in all Japan.
Another feast was prepared, more sumptuous than the first. All kinds of
fish, prepared in every imaginable way, raw, stewed, boiled and roasted,
served on coral trays and crystal dishes, were put before him, and the wine
was the best that Hidesato had ever tasted in his life. To add to the beauty of
everything the sun shone brightly, the lake glittered like a liquid diamond,
and the palace was a thousand times more beautiful by day than by night.
His host tried to persuade the warrior to stay a few days, but Hidesato
insisted on going home, saying that he had now finished what he had come
to do, and must return. The Dragon King and his family were all very sorry
to have him leave so soon, but since he would go they begged him to accept
a few small presents (so they said) in token of their gratitude to him for
delivering them forever from their horrible enemy the centipede.
As the warrior stood in the porch taking leave, a train of fish was
suddenly transformed into a retinue of men, all wearing ceremonial robes
and dragon’s crowns on their heads to show that they were servants of the
great Dragon King. The presents that they carried were as follows:
First, a large bronze bell.
Second, a bag of rice.
Third, a roll of silk.
Fourth, a cooking pot.
Fifth, a bell.
Hidesato did not want to accept all these presents, but as the Dragon
King insisted, he could not well refuse.
The Dragon King himself accompanied the warrior as far as the bridge,
and then took leave of him with many bows and good wishes, leaving the
procession of servants to accompany Hidesato to his house with the
presents.
The warrior’s household and servants had been very much concerned
when they found that he did not return the night before, but they finally
concluded that he had been kept by the violent storm and had taken shelter
somewhere. When the servants on the watch for his return caught sight of
him they called to every one that he was approaching, and the whole
Page 14
household turned out to meet him, wondering much what the retinue of
men, bearing presents and banners, that followed him, could mean.
As soon as the Dragon King’s retainers had put down the presents they
vanished, and Hidesato told all that had happened to him.
The presents which he had received from the grateful Dragon King were
found to be of magic power. The bell only was ordinary, and as Hidesato
had no use for it he presented it to the temple near by, where it was hung up,
to boom out the hour of day over the surrounding neighborhood.
The single bag of rice, however much was taken from it day after day for
the meals of the knight and his whole family, never grew less—the supply
in the bag was inexhaustible.
The roll of silk, too, never grew shorter, though time after time long
pieces were cut off to make the warrior a new suit of clothes to go to Court
in at the New Year.
The cooking pot was wonderful, too. No matter what was put into it, it
cooked deliciously whatever was wanted without any firing—truly a very
economical saucepan.
The fame of Hidesato’s fortune spread far and wide, and as there was no
need for him to spend money on rice or silk or firing, he became very rich
and prosperous, and was henceforth known as My Lord Bag of Rice.
men, bearing presents and banners, that followed him, could mean.
As soon as the Dragon King’s retainers had put down the presents they
vanished, and Hidesato told all that had happened to him.
The presents which he had received from the grateful Dragon King were
found to be of magic power. The bell only was ordinary, and as Hidesato
had no use for it he presented it to the temple near by, where it was hung up,
to boom out the hour of day over the surrounding neighborhood.
The single bag of rice, however much was taken from it day after day for
the meals of the knight and his whole family, never grew less—the supply
in the bag was inexhaustible.
The roll of silk, too, never grew shorter, though time after time long
pieces were cut off to make the warrior a new suit of clothes to go to Court
in at the New Year.
The cooking pot was wonderful, too. No matter what was put into it, it
cooked deliciously whatever was wanted without any firing—truly a very
economical saucepan.
The fame of Hidesato’s fortune spread far and wide, and as there was no
need for him to spend money on rice or silk or firing, he became very rich
and prosperous, and was henceforth known as My Lord Bag of Rice.
Page 15
THE TONGUE-CUT SPARROW
Long, long ago in Japan there lived an old man and his wife. The old man
was a good, kind-hearted, hard-working old fellow, but his wife was a
regular cross-patch, who spoiled the happiness of her home by her scolding
tongue. She was always grumbling about something from morning to night.
The old man had for a long time ceased to take any notice of her crossness.
He was out most of the day at work in the fields, and as he had no child, for
his amusement when he came home, he kept a tame sparrow. He loved the
little bird just as much as if she had been his child.
When he came back at night after his hard day’s work in the open air it
was his only pleasure to pet the sparrow, to talk to her and to teach her little
tricks, which she learned very quickly. The old man would open her cage
and let her fly about the room, and they would play together. Then when
supper-time came, he always saved some tit-bits from his meal with which
to feed his little bird.
Now one day the old man went out to chop wood in the forest, and the
old woman stopped at home to wash clothes. The day before, she had made
some starch, and now when she came to look for it, it was all gone; the
bowl which she had filled full yesterday was quite empty.
While she was wondering who could have used or stolen the starch,
down flew the pet sparrow, and bowing her little feathered head—a trick
which she had been taught by her master—the pretty bird chirped and said:
“It is I who have taken the starch. I thought it was some food put out for
me in that basin, and I ate it all. If I have made a mistake I beg you to
forgive me! tweet, tweet, tweet!”
You see from this that the sparrow was a truthful bird, and the old woman
ought to have been willing to forgive her at once when she asked her pardon
so nicely. But not so.
Long, long ago in Japan there lived an old man and his wife. The old man
was a good, kind-hearted, hard-working old fellow, but his wife was a
regular cross-patch, who spoiled the happiness of her home by her scolding
tongue. She was always grumbling about something from morning to night.
The old man had for a long time ceased to take any notice of her crossness.
He was out most of the day at work in the fields, and as he had no child, for
his amusement when he came home, he kept a tame sparrow. He loved the
little bird just as much as if she had been his child.
When he came back at night after his hard day’s work in the open air it
was his only pleasure to pet the sparrow, to talk to her and to teach her little
tricks, which she learned very quickly. The old man would open her cage
and let her fly about the room, and they would play together. Then when
supper-time came, he always saved some tit-bits from his meal with which
to feed his little bird.
Now one day the old man went out to chop wood in the forest, and the
old woman stopped at home to wash clothes. The day before, she had made
some starch, and now when she came to look for it, it was all gone; the
bowl which she had filled full yesterday was quite empty.
While she was wondering who could have used or stolen the starch,
down flew the pet sparrow, and bowing her little feathered head—a trick
which she had been taught by her master—the pretty bird chirped and said:
“It is I who have taken the starch. I thought it was some food put out for
me in that basin, and I ate it all. If I have made a mistake I beg you to
forgive me! tweet, tweet, tweet!”
You see from this that the sparrow was a truthful bird, and the old woman
ought to have been willing to forgive her at once when she asked her pardon
so nicely. But not so.
Page 16
The old woman had never loved the sparrow, and had often quarreled
with her husband for keeping what she called a dirty bird about the house,
saying that it only made extra work for her. Now she was only too delighted
to have some cause of complaint against the pet. She scolded and even
cursed the poor little bird for her bad behavior, and not content with using
these harsh, unfeeling words, in a fit of rage she seized the sparrow—who
all this time had spread out her wings and bowed her head before the old
woman, to show how sorry she was—and fetched the scissors and cut off
the poor little bird’s tongue.
“I suppose you took my starch with that tongue! Now you may see what
it is like to go without it!” And with these dreadful words she drove the bird
away, not caring in the least what might happen to it and without the
smallest pity for its suffering, so unkind was she!
The old woman, after she had driven the sparrow away, made some more
rice-paste, grumbling all the time at the trouble, and after starching all her
clothes, spread the things on boards to dry in the sun, instead of ironing
them as they do in England.
In the evening the old man came home. As usual, on the way back he
looked forward to the time when he should reach his gate and see his pet
come flying and chirping to meet him, ruffling out her feathers to show her
joy, and at last coming to rest on his shoulder. But to-night the old man was
very disappointed, for not even the shadow of his dear sparrow was to be
seen.
He quickened his steps, hastily drew off his straw sandals, and stepped on
to the veranda. Still no sparrow was to be seen. He now felt sure that his
wife, in one of her cross tempers, had shut the sparrow up in its cage. So he
called her and said anxiously:
“Where is Suzume San (Miss Sparrow) today?”
The old woman pretended not to know at first, and answered:
“Your sparrow? I am sure I don’t know. Now I come to think of it, I
haven’t seen her all the afternoon. I shouldn’t wonder if the ungrateful bird
had flown away and left you after all your petting!”
But at last, when the old man gave her no peace, but asked her again and
again, insisting that she must know what had happened to his pet, she
confessed all. She told him crossly how the sparrow had eaten the rice-paste
with her husband for keeping what she called a dirty bird about the house,
saying that it only made extra work for her. Now she was only too delighted
to have some cause of complaint against the pet. She scolded and even
cursed the poor little bird for her bad behavior, and not content with using
these harsh, unfeeling words, in a fit of rage she seized the sparrow—who
all this time had spread out her wings and bowed her head before the old
woman, to show how sorry she was—and fetched the scissors and cut off
the poor little bird’s tongue.
“I suppose you took my starch with that tongue! Now you may see what
it is like to go without it!” And with these dreadful words she drove the bird
away, not caring in the least what might happen to it and without the
smallest pity for its suffering, so unkind was she!
The old woman, after she had driven the sparrow away, made some more
rice-paste, grumbling all the time at the trouble, and after starching all her
clothes, spread the things on boards to dry in the sun, instead of ironing
them as they do in England.
In the evening the old man came home. As usual, on the way back he
looked forward to the time when he should reach his gate and see his pet
come flying and chirping to meet him, ruffling out her feathers to show her
joy, and at last coming to rest on his shoulder. But to-night the old man was
very disappointed, for not even the shadow of his dear sparrow was to be
seen.
He quickened his steps, hastily drew off his straw sandals, and stepped on
to the veranda. Still no sparrow was to be seen. He now felt sure that his
wife, in one of her cross tempers, had shut the sparrow up in its cage. So he
called her and said anxiously:
“Where is Suzume San (Miss Sparrow) today?”
The old woman pretended not to know at first, and answered:
“Your sparrow? I am sure I don’t know. Now I come to think of it, I
haven’t seen her all the afternoon. I shouldn’t wonder if the ungrateful bird
had flown away and left you after all your petting!”
But at last, when the old man gave her no peace, but asked her again and
again, insisting that she must know what had happened to his pet, she
confessed all. She told him crossly how the sparrow had eaten the rice-paste
Page 17
she had specially made for starching her clothes, and how when the sparrow
had confessed to what she had done, in great anger she had taken her
scissors and cut out her tongue, and how finally she had driven the bird
away and forbidden her to return to the house again.
Then the old woman showed her husband the sparrow’s tongue, saying:
“Here is the tongue I cut off! Horrid little bird, why did it eat all my
starch?”
“How could you be so cruel? Oh! how could you so cruel?” was all that
the old man could answer. He was too kind-hearted to punish his be shrew
of a wife, but he was terribly distressed at what had happened to his poor
little sparrow.
“What a dreadful misfortune for my poor Suzume San to lose her
tongue!” he said to himself. “She won’t be able to chirp any more, and
surely the pain of the cutting of it out in that rough way must have made her
ill! Is there nothing to be done?”
The old man shed many tears after his cross wife had gone to sleep.
While he wiped away the tears with the sleeve of his cotton robe, a bright
thought comforted him: he would go and look for the sparrow on the
morrow. Having decided this he was able to go to sleep at last.
The next morning he rose early, as soon as ever the day broke, and
snatching a hasty breakfast, started out over the hills and through the
woods, stopping at every clump of bamboos to cry:
“Where, oh where does my tongue-cut sparrow stay? Where, oh where,
does my tongue-cut sparrow stay!”
He never stopped to rest for his noonday meal, and it was far on in the
afternoon when he found himself near a large bamboo wood. Bamboo
groves are the favorite haunts of sparrows, and there sure enough at the
edge of the wood he saw his own dear sparrow waiting to welcome him. He
could hardly believe his eyes for joy, and ran forward quickly to greet her.
She bowed her little head and went through a number of the tricks her
master had taught her, to show her pleasure at seeing her old friend again,
and, wonderful to relate, she could talk as of old. The old man told her how
sorry he was for all that had happened, and inquired after her tongue,
wondering how she could speak so well without it. Then the sparrow
opened her beak and showed him that a new tongue had grown in place of
had confessed to what she had done, in great anger she had taken her
scissors and cut out her tongue, and how finally she had driven the bird
away and forbidden her to return to the house again.
Then the old woman showed her husband the sparrow’s tongue, saying:
“Here is the tongue I cut off! Horrid little bird, why did it eat all my
starch?”
“How could you be so cruel? Oh! how could you so cruel?” was all that
the old man could answer. He was too kind-hearted to punish his be shrew
of a wife, but he was terribly distressed at what had happened to his poor
little sparrow.
“What a dreadful misfortune for my poor Suzume San to lose her
tongue!” he said to himself. “She won’t be able to chirp any more, and
surely the pain of the cutting of it out in that rough way must have made her
ill! Is there nothing to be done?”
The old man shed many tears after his cross wife had gone to sleep.
While he wiped away the tears with the sleeve of his cotton robe, a bright
thought comforted him: he would go and look for the sparrow on the
morrow. Having decided this he was able to go to sleep at last.
The next morning he rose early, as soon as ever the day broke, and
snatching a hasty breakfast, started out over the hills and through the
woods, stopping at every clump of bamboos to cry:
“Where, oh where does my tongue-cut sparrow stay? Where, oh where,
does my tongue-cut sparrow stay!”
He never stopped to rest for his noonday meal, and it was far on in the
afternoon when he found himself near a large bamboo wood. Bamboo
groves are the favorite haunts of sparrows, and there sure enough at the
edge of the wood he saw his own dear sparrow waiting to welcome him. He
could hardly believe his eyes for joy, and ran forward quickly to greet her.
She bowed her little head and went through a number of the tricks her
master had taught her, to show her pleasure at seeing her old friend again,
and, wonderful to relate, she could talk as of old. The old man told her how
sorry he was for all that had happened, and inquired after her tongue,
wondering how she could speak so well without it. Then the sparrow
opened her beak and showed him that a new tongue had grown in place of
Page 18
the old one, and begged him not to think any more about the past, for she
was quite well now. Then the old man knew that his sparrow was a fairy,
and no common bird. It would be difficult to exaggerate the old man’s
rejoicing now. He forgot all his troubles, he forgot even how tired he was,
for he had found his lost sparrow, and instead of being ill and without a
tongue as he had feared and expected to find her, she was well and happy
and with a new tongue, and without a sign of the ill-treatment she had
received from his wife. And above all she was a fairy.
The sparrow asked him to follow her, and flying before him she led him
to a beautiful house in the heart of the bamboo grove. The old man was
utterly astonished when he entered the house to find what a beautiful place
it was. It was built of the whitest wood, the soft cream-colored mats which
took the place of carpets were the finest he had ever seen, and the cushions
that the sparrow brought out for him to sit on were made of the finest silk
and crape. Beautiful vases and lacquer boxes adorned the tokonoma[1] of
every room.
[1] An alcove where precious objects are displayed.
The sparrow led the old man to the place of honor, and then, taking her
place at a humble distance, she thanked him with many polite bows for all
the kindness he had shown her for many long years.
Then the Lady Sparrow, as we will now call her, introduced all her family
to the old man. This done, her daughters, robed in dainty crape gowns,
brought in on beautiful old-fashioned trays a feast of all kinds of delicious
foods, till the old man began to think he must be dreaming. In the middle of
the dinner some of the sparrow’s daughters performed a wonderful dance,
called the “suzume-odori” or the “Sparrow’s dance,” to amuse the guest.
Never had the old man enjoyed himself so much. The hours flew by too
quickly in this lovely spot, with all these fairy sparrows to wait upon him
and to feast him and to dance before him.
But the night came on and the darkness reminded him that he had a long
way to go and must think about taking his leave and return home. He
thanked his kind hostess for her splendid entertainment, and begged her for
his sake to forget all she had suffered at the hands of his cross old wife. He
told the Lady Sparrow that it was a great comfort and happiness to him to
find her in such a beautiful home and to know that she wanted for nothing.
was quite well now. Then the old man knew that his sparrow was a fairy,
and no common bird. It would be difficult to exaggerate the old man’s
rejoicing now. He forgot all his troubles, he forgot even how tired he was,
for he had found his lost sparrow, and instead of being ill and without a
tongue as he had feared and expected to find her, she was well and happy
and with a new tongue, and without a sign of the ill-treatment she had
received from his wife. And above all she was a fairy.
The sparrow asked him to follow her, and flying before him she led him
to a beautiful house in the heart of the bamboo grove. The old man was
utterly astonished when he entered the house to find what a beautiful place
it was. It was built of the whitest wood, the soft cream-colored mats which
took the place of carpets were the finest he had ever seen, and the cushions
that the sparrow brought out for him to sit on were made of the finest silk
and crape. Beautiful vases and lacquer boxes adorned the tokonoma[1] of
every room.
[1] An alcove where precious objects are displayed.
The sparrow led the old man to the place of honor, and then, taking her
place at a humble distance, she thanked him with many polite bows for all
the kindness he had shown her for many long years.
Then the Lady Sparrow, as we will now call her, introduced all her family
to the old man. This done, her daughters, robed in dainty crape gowns,
brought in on beautiful old-fashioned trays a feast of all kinds of delicious
foods, till the old man began to think he must be dreaming. In the middle of
the dinner some of the sparrow’s daughters performed a wonderful dance,
called the “suzume-odori” or the “Sparrow’s dance,” to amuse the guest.
Never had the old man enjoyed himself so much. The hours flew by too
quickly in this lovely spot, with all these fairy sparrows to wait upon him
and to feast him and to dance before him.
But the night came on and the darkness reminded him that he had a long
way to go and must think about taking his leave and return home. He
thanked his kind hostess for her splendid entertainment, and begged her for
his sake to forget all she had suffered at the hands of his cross old wife. He
told the Lady Sparrow that it was a great comfort and happiness to him to
find her in such a beautiful home and to know that she wanted for nothing.
Page 19
It was his anxiety to know how she fared and what had really happened to
her that had led him to seek her. Now he knew that all was well he could
return home with a light heart. If ever she wanted him for anything she had
only to send for him and he would come at once.
The Lady Sparrow begged him to stay and rest several days and enjoy the
change, but the old man said he must return to his old wife—who would
probably be cross at his not coming home at the usual time—and to his
work, and there-fore, much as he wished to do so, he could not accept her
kind invitation. But now that he knew where the Lady Sparrow lived he
would come to see her whenever he had the time.
When the Lady Sparrow saw that she could not persuade the old man to
stay longer, she gave an order to some of her servants, and they at once
brought in two boxes, one large and the other small. These were placed
before the old man, and the Lady Sparrow asked him to choose whichever
he liked for a present, which she wished to give him.
The old man could not refuse this kind proposal, and he chose the smaller
box, saying:
“I am now too old and feeble to carry the big and heavy box. As you are
so kind as to say that I may take whichever I like, I will choose the small
one, which will be easier for me to carry.”
Then the sparrows all helped him put it on his back and went to the gate
to see him off, bidding him good-by with many bows and entreating him to
come again whenever he had the time. Thus the old man and his pet
sparrow separated quite happily, the sparrow showing not the least ill-will
for all the unkindness she had suffered at the hands of the old wife. Indeed,
she only felt sorrow for the old man who had to put up with it all his life.
When the old man reached home he found his wife even crosser than
usual, for it was late on in the night and she had been waiting up for him for
a long time.
“Where have you been all this time?” she asked in a big voice. “Why do
you come back so late?”
The old man tried to pacify her by showing her the box of presents he
had brought back with him, and then he told her of all that had happened to
him, and how wonderfully he had been entertained at the sparrow’s house.
her that had led him to seek her. Now he knew that all was well he could
return home with a light heart. If ever she wanted him for anything she had
only to send for him and he would come at once.
The Lady Sparrow begged him to stay and rest several days and enjoy the
change, but the old man said he must return to his old wife—who would
probably be cross at his not coming home at the usual time—and to his
work, and there-fore, much as he wished to do so, he could not accept her
kind invitation. But now that he knew where the Lady Sparrow lived he
would come to see her whenever he had the time.
When the Lady Sparrow saw that she could not persuade the old man to
stay longer, she gave an order to some of her servants, and they at once
brought in two boxes, one large and the other small. These were placed
before the old man, and the Lady Sparrow asked him to choose whichever
he liked for a present, which she wished to give him.
The old man could not refuse this kind proposal, and he chose the smaller
box, saying:
“I am now too old and feeble to carry the big and heavy box. As you are
so kind as to say that I may take whichever I like, I will choose the small
one, which will be easier for me to carry.”
Then the sparrows all helped him put it on his back and went to the gate
to see him off, bidding him good-by with many bows and entreating him to
come again whenever he had the time. Thus the old man and his pet
sparrow separated quite happily, the sparrow showing not the least ill-will
for all the unkindness she had suffered at the hands of the old wife. Indeed,
she only felt sorrow for the old man who had to put up with it all his life.
When the old man reached home he found his wife even crosser than
usual, for it was late on in the night and she had been waiting up for him for
a long time.
“Where have you been all this time?” she asked in a big voice. “Why do
you come back so late?”
The old man tried to pacify her by showing her the box of presents he
had brought back with him, and then he told her of all that had happened to
him, and how wonderfully he had been entertained at the sparrow’s house.
Page 20
“Now let us see what is in the box,” said the old man, not giving her time
to grumble again. “You must help me open it.” And they both sat down
before the box and opened it.
To their utter astonishment they found the box filled to the brim with
gold and silver coins and many other precious things. The mats of their little
cottage fairly glittered as they took out the things one by one and put them
down and handled them over and over again. The old man was overjoyed at
the sight of the riches that were now his. Beyond his brightest expectations
was the sparrow’s gift, which would enable him to give up work and live in
ease and comfort the rest of his days.
He said: “Thanks to my good little sparrow! Thanks to my good little
sparrow!” many times.
But the old woman, after the first moments of surprise and satisfaction at
the sight of the gold and silver were over, could not suppress the greed of
her wicked nature. She now began to reproach the old man for not having
brought home the big box of presents, for in the innocence of his heart he
had told her how he had refused the large box of presents which the
sparrows had offered him, preferring the smaller one because it was light
and easy to carry home.
“You silly old man,” said she, “Why did you not bring the large box? Just
think what we have lost. We might have had twice as much silver and gold
as this. You are certainly an old fool!” she screamed, and then went to bed
as angry as she could be.
The old man now wished that he had said nothing about the big box, but
it was too late; the greedy old woman, not contented with the good luck
which had so unexpectedly befallen them and which she so little deserved,
made up her mind, if possible, to get more.
Early the next morning she got up and made the old man describe the
way to the sparrow’s house. When he saw what was in her mind he tried to
keep her from going, but it was useless. She would not listen to one word he
said. It is strange that the old woman did not feel ashamed of going to see
the sparrow after the cruel way she had treated her in cutting off her tongue
in a fit of rage. But her greed to get the big box made her forget everything
else. It did not even enter her thoughts that the sparrows might be angry
with her—as, indeed, they were—and might punish her for what she had
done.
to grumble again. “You must help me open it.” And they both sat down
before the box and opened it.
To their utter astonishment they found the box filled to the brim with
gold and silver coins and many other precious things. The mats of their little
cottage fairly glittered as they took out the things one by one and put them
down and handled them over and over again. The old man was overjoyed at
the sight of the riches that were now his. Beyond his brightest expectations
was the sparrow’s gift, which would enable him to give up work and live in
ease and comfort the rest of his days.
He said: “Thanks to my good little sparrow! Thanks to my good little
sparrow!” many times.
But the old woman, after the first moments of surprise and satisfaction at
the sight of the gold and silver were over, could not suppress the greed of
her wicked nature. She now began to reproach the old man for not having
brought home the big box of presents, for in the innocence of his heart he
had told her how he had refused the large box of presents which the
sparrows had offered him, preferring the smaller one because it was light
and easy to carry home.
“You silly old man,” said she, “Why did you not bring the large box? Just
think what we have lost. We might have had twice as much silver and gold
as this. You are certainly an old fool!” she screamed, and then went to bed
as angry as she could be.
The old man now wished that he had said nothing about the big box, but
it was too late; the greedy old woman, not contented with the good luck
which had so unexpectedly befallen them and which she so little deserved,
made up her mind, if possible, to get more.
Early the next morning she got up and made the old man describe the
way to the sparrow’s house. When he saw what was in her mind he tried to
keep her from going, but it was useless. She would not listen to one word he
said. It is strange that the old woman did not feel ashamed of going to see
the sparrow after the cruel way she had treated her in cutting off her tongue
in a fit of rage. But her greed to get the big box made her forget everything
else. It did not even enter her thoughts that the sparrows might be angry
with her—as, indeed, they were—and might punish her for what she had
done.
Page 21
Ever since the Lady Sparrow had returned home in the sad plight in
which they had first found her, weeping and bleeding from the mouth, her
whole family and relations had done little else but speak of the cruelty of
the old woman. “How could she,” they asked each other, “inflict such a
heavy punishment for such a trifling offense as that of eating some rice-
paste by mistake?” They all loved the old man who was so kind and good
and patient under all his troubles, but the old woman they hated, and they
determined, if ever they had the chance, to punish her as she deserved. They
had not long to wait.
After walking for some hours the old woman had at last found the
bamboo grove which she had made her husband carefully describe, and
now she stood before it crying out:
“Where is the tongue-cut sparrow’s house? Where is the tongue-cut
sparrow’s house?”
At last she saw the eaves of the house peeping out from amongst the
bamboo foliage. She hastened to the door and knocked loudly.
When the servants told the Lady Sparrow that her old mistress was at the
door asking to see her, she was somewhat surprised at the unexpected visit,
after all that had taken place, and she wondered not a little at the boldness
of the old woman in venturing to come to the house. The Lady Sparrow,
however, was a polite bird, and so she went out to greet the old woman,
remembering that she had once been her mistress.
The old woman intended, however, to waste no time in words, she went
right to the point, without the least shame, and said:
“You need not trouble to entertain me as you did my old man. I have
come myself to get the box which he so stupidly left behind. I shall soon
take my leave if you will give me the big box—that is all I want!”
The Lady Sparrow at once consented, and told her servants to bring out
the big box. The old woman eagerly seized it and hoisted it on her back, and
without even stopping to thank the Lady Sparrow began to hurry
homewards.
The box was so heavy that she could not walk fast, much less run, as she
would have liked to do, so anxious was she to get home and see what was
inside the box, but she had often to sit down and rest herself by the way.
which they had first found her, weeping and bleeding from the mouth, her
whole family and relations had done little else but speak of the cruelty of
the old woman. “How could she,” they asked each other, “inflict such a
heavy punishment for such a trifling offense as that of eating some rice-
paste by mistake?” They all loved the old man who was so kind and good
and patient under all his troubles, but the old woman they hated, and they
determined, if ever they had the chance, to punish her as she deserved. They
had not long to wait.
After walking for some hours the old woman had at last found the
bamboo grove which she had made her husband carefully describe, and
now she stood before it crying out:
“Where is the tongue-cut sparrow’s house? Where is the tongue-cut
sparrow’s house?”
At last she saw the eaves of the house peeping out from amongst the
bamboo foliage. She hastened to the door and knocked loudly.
When the servants told the Lady Sparrow that her old mistress was at the
door asking to see her, she was somewhat surprised at the unexpected visit,
after all that had taken place, and she wondered not a little at the boldness
of the old woman in venturing to come to the house. The Lady Sparrow,
however, was a polite bird, and so she went out to greet the old woman,
remembering that she had once been her mistress.
The old woman intended, however, to waste no time in words, she went
right to the point, without the least shame, and said:
“You need not trouble to entertain me as you did my old man. I have
come myself to get the box which he so stupidly left behind. I shall soon
take my leave if you will give me the big box—that is all I want!”
The Lady Sparrow at once consented, and told her servants to bring out
the big box. The old woman eagerly seized it and hoisted it on her back, and
without even stopping to thank the Lady Sparrow began to hurry
homewards.
The box was so heavy that she could not walk fast, much less run, as she
would have liked to do, so anxious was she to get home and see what was
inside the box, but she had often to sit down and rest herself by the way.
Page 22
While she was staggering along under the heavy load, her desire to open
the box became too great to be resisted. She could wait no longer, for she
supposed this big box to be full of gold and silver and precious jewels like
the small one her husband had received.
At last this greedy and selfish old woman put down the box by the
wayside and opened it carefully, expecting to gloat her eyes on a mine of
wealth. What she saw, however, so terrified her that she nearly lost her
senses. As soon as she lifted the lid, a number of horrible and frightful
looking demons bounced out of the box and surrounded her as if they
intended to kill her. Not even in nightmares had she ever seen such horrible
creatures as her much-coveted box contained. A demon with one huge eye
right in the middle of its forehead came and glared at her, monsters with
gaping mouths looked as if they would devour her, a huge snake coiled and
hissed about her, and a big frog hopped and croaked towards her.
The old woman had never been so frightened in her life, and ran from the
spot as fast as her quaking legs would carry her, glad to escape alive. When
she reached home she fell to the floor and told her husband with tears all
that had happened to her, and how she had been nearly killed by the demons
in the box.
Then she began to blame the sparrow, but the old man stopped her at
once, saying:
“Don’t blame the sparrow, it is your wickedness which has at last met
with its reward. I only hope this may be a lesson to you in the future!”
The old woman said nothing more, and from that day she repented of her
cross, unkind ways, and by degrees became a good old woman, so that her
husband hardly knew her to be the same person, and they spent their last
days together happily, free from want or care, spending carefully the
treasure the old man had received from his pet, the tongue-cut sparrow.
the box became too great to be resisted. She could wait no longer, for she
supposed this big box to be full of gold and silver and precious jewels like
the small one her husband had received.
At last this greedy and selfish old woman put down the box by the
wayside and opened it carefully, expecting to gloat her eyes on a mine of
wealth. What she saw, however, so terrified her that she nearly lost her
senses. As soon as she lifted the lid, a number of horrible and frightful
looking demons bounced out of the box and surrounded her as if they
intended to kill her. Not even in nightmares had she ever seen such horrible
creatures as her much-coveted box contained. A demon with one huge eye
right in the middle of its forehead came and glared at her, monsters with
gaping mouths looked as if they would devour her, a huge snake coiled and
hissed about her, and a big frog hopped and croaked towards her.
The old woman had never been so frightened in her life, and ran from the
spot as fast as her quaking legs would carry her, glad to escape alive. When
she reached home she fell to the floor and told her husband with tears all
that had happened to her, and how she had been nearly killed by the demons
in the box.
Then she began to blame the sparrow, but the old man stopped her at
once, saying:
“Don’t blame the sparrow, it is your wickedness which has at last met
with its reward. I only hope this may be a lesson to you in the future!”
The old woman said nothing more, and from that day she repented of her
cross, unkind ways, and by degrees became a good old woman, so that her
husband hardly knew her to be the same person, and they spent their last
days together happily, free from want or care, spending carefully the
treasure the old man had received from his pet, the tongue-cut sparrow.
Page 23
THE STORY OF URASHIMA TARO, THE FISHER
LAD
Long, long ago in the province of Tango there lived on the shore of Japan
in the little fishing village of Mizu-no-ye a young fisherman named
Urashima Taro. His father had been a fisherman before him, and his skill
had more than doubly descended to his son, for Urashima was the most
skillful fisher in all that country side, and could catch more Bonito and Tai
in a day than his comrades could in a week.
But in the little fishing village, more than for being a clever fisher of the
sea was he known for his kind heart. In his whole life he had never hurt
anything, either great or small, and when a boy, his companions had always
laughed at him, for he would never join with them in teasing animals, but
always tried to keep them from this cruel sport.
One soft summer twilight he was going home at the end of a day’s
fishing when he came upon a group of children. They were all screaming
and talking at the tops of their voices, and seemed to be in a state of great
excitement about something, and on his going up to them to see what was
the matter he saw that they were tormenting a tortoise. First one boy pulled
it this way, then another boy pulled it that way, while a third child beat it
with a stick, and the fourth hammered its shell with a stone.
Now Urashima felt very sorry for the poor tortoise and made up his mind
to rescue it. He spoke to the boys:
“Look here, boys, you are treating that poor tortoise so badly that it will
soon die!”
The boys, who were all of an age when children seem to delight in being
cruel to animals, took no notice of Urashima’s gentle reproof, but went on
teasing it as before. One of the older boys answered:
LAD
Long, long ago in the province of Tango there lived on the shore of Japan
in the little fishing village of Mizu-no-ye a young fisherman named
Urashima Taro. His father had been a fisherman before him, and his skill
had more than doubly descended to his son, for Urashima was the most
skillful fisher in all that country side, and could catch more Bonito and Tai
in a day than his comrades could in a week.
But in the little fishing village, more than for being a clever fisher of the
sea was he known for his kind heart. In his whole life he had never hurt
anything, either great or small, and when a boy, his companions had always
laughed at him, for he would never join with them in teasing animals, but
always tried to keep them from this cruel sport.
One soft summer twilight he was going home at the end of a day’s
fishing when he came upon a group of children. They were all screaming
and talking at the tops of their voices, and seemed to be in a state of great
excitement about something, and on his going up to them to see what was
the matter he saw that they were tormenting a tortoise. First one boy pulled
it this way, then another boy pulled it that way, while a third child beat it
with a stick, and the fourth hammered its shell with a stone.
Now Urashima felt very sorry for the poor tortoise and made up his mind
to rescue it. He spoke to the boys:
“Look here, boys, you are treating that poor tortoise so badly that it will
soon die!”
The boys, who were all of an age when children seem to delight in being
cruel to animals, took no notice of Urashima’s gentle reproof, but went on
teasing it as before. One of the older boys answered:
Page 24
“Who cares whether it lives or dies? We do not. Here, boys, go on, go
on!”
And they began to treat the poor tortoise more cruelly than ever.
Urashima waited a moment, turning over in his mind what would be the
best way to deal with the boys. He would try to persuade them to give the
tortoise up to him, so he smiled at them and said:
“I am sure you are all good, kind boys! Now won’t you give me the
tortoise? I should like to have it so much!”
“No, we won’t give you the tortoise,” said one of the boys. “Why should
we? We caught it ourselves.”
“What you say is true,” said Urashima, “but I do not ask you to give it to
me for nothing. I will give you some money for it—in other words, the
Ojisan (Uncle) will buy it of you. Won’t that do for you, my boys?” He held
up the money to them, strung on a piece of string through a hole in the
center of each coin. “Look, boys, you can buy anything you like with this
money. You can do much more with this money than you can with that poor
tortoise. See what good boys you are to listen to me.”
The boys were not bad boys at all, they were only mischievous, and as
Urashima spoke they were won by his kind smile and gentle words and
began “to be of his spirit,” as they say in Japan. Gradually they all came up
to him, the ringleader of the little band holding out the tortoise to him.
“Very well, Ojisan, we will give you the tortoise if you will give us the
money!” And Urashima took the tortoise and gave the money to the boys,
who, calling to each other, scampered away and were soon out of sight.
Then Urashima stroked the tortoise’s back, saying as he did so:
“Oh, you poor thing! Poor thing!—there, there! you are safe now! They
say that a stork lives for a thousand years, but the tortoise for ten thousand
years. You have the longest life of any creature in this world, and you were
in great danger of having that precious life cut short by those cruel boys.
Luckily I was passing by and saved you, and so life is still yours. Now I am
going to take you back to your home, the sea, at once. Do not let yourself be
caught again, for there might be no one to save you next time!”
All the time that the kind fisherman was speaking he was walking
quickly to the shore and out upon the rocks; then putting the tortoise into
on!”
And they began to treat the poor tortoise more cruelly than ever.
Urashima waited a moment, turning over in his mind what would be the
best way to deal with the boys. He would try to persuade them to give the
tortoise up to him, so he smiled at them and said:
“I am sure you are all good, kind boys! Now won’t you give me the
tortoise? I should like to have it so much!”
“No, we won’t give you the tortoise,” said one of the boys. “Why should
we? We caught it ourselves.”
“What you say is true,” said Urashima, “but I do not ask you to give it to
me for nothing. I will give you some money for it—in other words, the
Ojisan (Uncle) will buy it of you. Won’t that do for you, my boys?” He held
up the money to them, strung on a piece of string through a hole in the
center of each coin. “Look, boys, you can buy anything you like with this
money. You can do much more with this money than you can with that poor
tortoise. See what good boys you are to listen to me.”
The boys were not bad boys at all, they were only mischievous, and as
Urashima spoke they were won by his kind smile and gentle words and
began “to be of his spirit,” as they say in Japan. Gradually they all came up
to him, the ringleader of the little band holding out the tortoise to him.
“Very well, Ojisan, we will give you the tortoise if you will give us the
money!” And Urashima took the tortoise and gave the money to the boys,
who, calling to each other, scampered away and were soon out of sight.
Then Urashima stroked the tortoise’s back, saying as he did so:
“Oh, you poor thing! Poor thing!—there, there! you are safe now! They
say that a stork lives for a thousand years, but the tortoise for ten thousand
years. You have the longest life of any creature in this world, and you were
in great danger of having that precious life cut short by those cruel boys.
Luckily I was passing by and saved you, and so life is still yours. Now I am
going to take you back to your home, the sea, at once. Do not let yourself be
caught again, for there might be no one to save you next time!”
All the time that the kind fisherman was speaking he was walking
quickly to the shore and out upon the rocks; then putting the tortoise into
Page 25
the water he watched the animal disappear, and turned homewards himself,
for he was tired and the sun had set.
The next morning Urashima went out as usual in his boat. The weather
was fine and the sea and sky were both blue and soft in the tender haze of
the summer morning. Urashima got into his boat and dreamily pushed out
to sea, throwing his line as he did so. He soon passed the other fishing boats
and left them behind him till they were lost to sight in the distance, and his
boat drifted further and further out upon the blue waters. Somehow, he
knew not why, he felt unusually happy that morning; and he could not help
wishing that, like the tortoise he set free the day before, he had thousands of
years to live instead of his own short span of human life.
He was suddenly startled from his reverie by hearing his own name
called:
“Urashima, Urashima!”
Clear as a bell and soft as the summer wind the name floated over the
sea.
He stood up and looked in every direction, thinking that one of the other
boats had overtaken him, but gaze as he might over the wide expanse of
water, near or far there was no sign of a boat, so the voice could not have
come from any human being.
Startled, and wondering who or what it was that had called him so
clearly, he looked in all directions round about him and saw that without his
knowing it a tortoise had come to the side of the boat. Urashima saw with
surprise that it was the very tortoise he had rescued the day before.
“Well, Mr. Tortoise,” said Urashima, “was it you who called my name
just now?”
The tortoise nodded its head several times and said:
“Yes, it was I. Yesterday in your honorable shadow (o kage sama de) my
life was saved, and I have come to offer you my thanks and to tell you how
grateful I am for your kindness to me.”
“Indeed,” said Urashima, “that is very polite of you. Come up into the
boat. I would offer you a smoke, but as you are a tortoise doubtless you do
not smoke,” and the fisherman laughed at the joke.
“He-he-he-he!” laughed the tortoise; “sake (rice wine) is my favorite
refreshment, but I do not care for tobacco.”
for he was tired and the sun had set.
The next morning Urashima went out as usual in his boat. The weather
was fine and the sea and sky were both blue and soft in the tender haze of
the summer morning. Urashima got into his boat and dreamily pushed out
to sea, throwing his line as he did so. He soon passed the other fishing boats
and left them behind him till they were lost to sight in the distance, and his
boat drifted further and further out upon the blue waters. Somehow, he
knew not why, he felt unusually happy that morning; and he could not help
wishing that, like the tortoise he set free the day before, he had thousands of
years to live instead of his own short span of human life.
He was suddenly startled from his reverie by hearing his own name
called:
“Urashima, Urashima!”
Clear as a bell and soft as the summer wind the name floated over the
sea.
He stood up and looked in every direction, thinking that one of the other
boats had overtaken him, but gaze as he might over the wide expanse of
water, near or far there was no sign of a boat, so the voice could not have
come from any human being.
Startled, and wondering who or what it was that had called him so
clearly, he looked in all directions round about him and saw that without his
knowing it a tortoise had come to the side of the boat. Urashima saw with
surprise that it was the very tortoise he had rescued the day before.
“Well, Mr. Tortoise,” said Urashima, “was it you who called my name
just now?”
The tortoise nodded its head several times and said:
“Yes, it was I. Yesterday in your honorable shadow (o kage sama de) my
life was saved, and I have come to offer you my thanks and to tell you how
grateful I am for your kindness to me.”
“Indeed,” said Urashima, “that is very polite of you. Come up into the
boat. I would offer you a smoke, but as you are a tortoise doubtless you do
not smoke,” and the fisherman laughed at the joke.
“He-he-he-he!” laughed the tortoise; “sake (rice wine) is my favorite
refreshment, but I do not care for tobacco.”
Page 26
“Indeed,” said Urashima, “I regret very much that I have no “sake” in my
boat to offer you, but come up and dry your back in the sun—tortoises
always love to do that.”
So the tortoise climbed into the boat, the fisherman helping him, and
after an exchange of complimentary speeches the tortoise said:
“Have you ever seen Rin Gin, the Palace of the Dragon King of the Sea,
Urashima?”
The fisherman shook his head and replied; “No; year after year the sea
has been my home, but though I have often heard of the Dragon King’s
realm under the sea I have never yet set eyes on that wonderful place. It
must be very far away, if it exists at all!”
“Is that really so? You have never seen the Sea King’s Palace? Then you
have missed seeing one of the most wonderful sights in the whole universe.
It is far away at the bottom of the sea, but if I take you there we shall soon
reach the place. If you would like to see the Sea King’s land I will be your
guide.”
“I should like to go there, certainly, and you are very kind to think of
taking me, but you must remember that I am only a poor mortal and have
not the power of swimming like a sea creature such as you are—”
Before the fisherman could say more the tortoise stopped him, saying:
“What? You need not swim yourself. If you will ride on my back I will
take you without any trouble on your part.”
“But,” said Urashima, “how is it possible for me to ride on your small
back?”
“It may seem absurd to you, but I assure you that you can do so. Try at
once! Just come and get on my back, and see if it is as impossible as you
think!”
As the tortoise finished speaking, Urashima looked at its shell, and
strange to say he saw that the creature had suddenly grown so big that a
man could easily sit on its back.
“This is strange indeed!” said Urashima; “then. Mr. Tortoise, with your
kind permission I will get on your back. Dokoisho!”[2] he exclaimed as he
jumped on.
[2] “All right” (only used by lower classes).
boat to offer you, but come up and dry your back in the sun—tortoises
always love to do that.”
So the tortoise climbed into the boat, the fisherman helping him, and
after an exchange of complimentary speeches the tortoise said:
“Have you ever seen Rin Gin, the Palace of the Dragon King of the Sea,
Urashima?”
The fisherman shook his head and replied; “No; year after year the sea
has been my home, but though I have often heard of the Dragon King’s
realm under the sea I have never yet set eyes on that wonderful place. It
must be very far away, if it exists at all!”
“Is that really so? You have never seen the Sea King’s Palace? Then you
have missed seeing one of the most wonderful sights in the whole universe.
It is far away at the bottom of the sea, but if I take you there we shall soon
reach the place. If you would like to see the Sea King’s land I will be your
guide.”
“I should like to go there, certainly, and you are very kind to think of
taking me, but you must remember that I am only a poor mortal and have
not the power of swimming like a sea creature such as you are—”
Before the fisherman could say more the tortoise stopped him, saying:
“What? You need not swim yourself. If you will ride on my back I will
take you without any trouble on your part.”
“But,” said Urashima, “how is it possible for me to ride on your small
back?”
“It may seem absurd to you, but I assure you that you can do so. Try at
once! Just come and get on my back, and see if it is as impossible as you
think!”
As the tortoise finished speaking, Urashima looked at its shell, and
strange to say he saw that the creature had suddenly grown so big that a
man could easily sit on its back.
“This is strange indeed!” said Urashima; “then. Mr. Tortoise, with your
kind permission I will get on your back. Dokoisho!”[2] he exclaimed as he
jumped on.
[2] “All right” (only used by lower classes).
Page 27
The tortoise, with an unmoved face, as if this strange proceeding were
quite an ordinary event, said:
“Now we will set out at our leisure,” and with these words he leapt into
the sea with Urashima on his back. Down through the water the tortoise
dived. For a long time these two strange companions rode through the sea.
Urashima never grew tired, nor his clothes moist with the water. At last, far
away in the distance a magnificent gate appeared, and behind the gate, the
long, sloping roofs of a palace on the horizon.
“Ya,” exclaimed Urashima. “That looks like the gate of some large palace
just appearing! Mr. Tortoise, can you tell what that place is we can now
see?”
“That is the great gate of the Rin Gin Palace, the large roof that you see
behind the gate is the Sea King’s Palace itself.”
“Then we have at last come to the realm of the Sea King and to his
Palace,” said Urashima.
“Yes, indeed,” answered the tortoise, “and don’t you think we have come
very quickly?” And while he was speaking the tortoise reached the side of
the gate. “And here we are, and you must please walk from here.”
The tortoise now went in front, and speaking to the gatekeeper, said:
“This is Urashima Taro, from the country of Japan. I have had the honor
of bringing him as a visitor to this kingdom. Please show him the way.”
Then the gatekeeper, who was a fish, at once led the way through the gate
before them.
The red bream, the flounder, the sole, the cuttlefish, and all the chief
vassals of the Dragon King of the Sea now came out with courtly bows to
welcome the stranger.
“Urashima Sama, Urashima Sama! welcome to the Sea Palace, the home
of the Dragon King of the Sea. Thrice welcome are you, having come from
such a distant country. And you, Mr. Tortoise, we are greatly indebted to
you for all your trouble in bringing Urashima here.” Then, turning again to
Urashima, they said, “Please follow us this way,” and from here the whole
band of fishes became his guides.
Urashima, being only a poor fisher lad, did not know how to behave in a
palace; but, strange though it was all to him, he did not feel ashamed or
embarrassed, but followed his kind guides quite calmly where they led to
quite an ordinary event, said:
“Now we will set out at our leisure,” and with these words he leapt into
the sea with Urashima on his back. Down through the water the tortoise
dived. For a long time these two strange companions rode through the sea.
Urashima never grew tired, nor his clothes moist with the water. At last, far
away in the distance a magnificent gate appeared, and behind the gate, the
long, sloping roofs of a palace on the horizon.
“Ya,” exclaimed Urashima. “That looks like the gate of some large palace
just appearing! Mr. Tortoise, can you tell what that place is we can now
see?”
“That is the great gate of the Rin Gin Palace, the large roof that you see
behind the gate is the Sea King’s Palace itself.”
“Then we have at last come to the realm of the Sea King and to his
Palace,” said Urashima.
“Yes, indeed,” answered the tortoise, “and don’t you think we have come
very quickly?” And while he was speaking the tortoise reached the side of
the gate. “And here we are, and you must please walk from here.”
The tortoise now went in front, and speaking to the gatekeeper, said:
“This is Urashima Taro, from the country of Japan. I have had the honor
of bringing him as a visitor to this kingdom. Please show him the way.”
Then the gatekeeper, who was a fish, at once led the way through the gate
before them.
The red bream, the flounder, the sole, the cuttlefish, and all the chief
vassals of the Dragon King of the Sea now came out with courtly bows to
welcome the stranger.
“Urashima Sama, Urashima Sama! welcome to the Sea Palace, the home
of the Dragon King of the Sea. Thrice welcome are you, having come from
such a distant country. And you, Mr. Tortoise, we are greatly indebted to
you for all your trouble in bringing Urashima here.” Then, turning again to
Urashima, they said, “Please follow us this way,” and from here the whole
band of fishes became his guides.
Urashima, being only a poor fisher lad, did not know how to behave in a
palace; but, strange though it was all to him, he did not feel ashamed or
embarrassed, but followed his kind guides quite calmly where they led to
Page 28
the inner palace. When he reached the portals a beautiful Princess with her
attendant maidens came out to welcome him. She was more beautiful than
any human being, and was robed in flowing garments of red and soft green
like the under side of a wave, and golden threads glimmered through the
folds of her gown. Her lovely black hair streamed over her shoulders in the
fashion of a king’s daughter many hundreds of years ago, and when she
spoke her voice sounded like music over the water. Urashima was lost in
wonder while he looked upon her, and he could not speak. Then he
remembered that he ought to bow, but before he could make a low
obeisance the Princess took him by the hand and led him to a beautiful hall,
and to the seat of honor at the upper end, and bade him be seated.
“Urashima Taro, it gives me the highest pleasure to welcome you to my
father’s kingdom,” said the Princess. “Yesterday you set free a tortoise, and
I have sent for you to thank you for saving my life, for I was that tortoise.
Now if you like you shall live here forever in the land of eternal youth,
where summer never dies and where sorrow never comes, and I will be
your bride if you will, and we will live together happily forever
afterwards!”
And as Urashima listened to her sweet words and gazed upon her lovely
face his heart was filled with a great wonder and joy, and he answered her,
wondering if it was not all a dream:
“Thank you a thousand times for your kind speech. There is nothing I
could wish for more than to be permitted to stay here with you in this
beautiful land, of which I have often heard, but have never seen to this day.
Beyond all words, this is the most wonderful place I have ever seen.”
While he was speaking a train of fishes appeared, all dressed in
ceremonial, trailing garments. One by one, silently and with stately steps,
they entered the hall, bearing on coral trays delicacies of fish and seaweed,
such as no one can dream of, and this wondrous feast was set before the
bride and bridegroom. The bridal was celebrated with dazzling splendor,
and in the Sea King’s realm there was great rejoicing. As soon as the young
pair had pledged themselves in the wedding cup of wine, three times three,
music was played, and songs were sung, and fishes with silver scales and
golden tails stepped in from the waves and danced. Urashima enjoyed
himself with all his heart. Never in his whole life had he sat down to such a
marvelous feast.
attendant maidens came out to welcome him. She was more beautiful than
any human being, and was robed in flowing garments of red and soft green
like the under side of a wave, and golden threads glimmered through the
folds of her gown. Her lovely black hair streamed over her shoulders in the
fashion of a king’s daughter many hundreds of years ago, and when she
spoke her voice sounded like music over the water. Urashima was lost in
wonder while he looked upon her, and he could not speak. Then he
remembered that he ought to bow, but before he could make a low
obeisance the Princess took him by the hand and led him to a beautiful hall,
and to the seat of honor at the upper end, and bade him be seated.
“Urashima Taro, it gives me the highest pleasure to welcome you to my
father’s kingdom,” said the Princess. “Yesterday you set free a tortoise, and
I have sent for you to thank you for saving my life, for I was that tortoise.
Now if you like you shall live here forever in the land of eternal youth,
where summer never dies and where sorrow never comes, and I will be
your bride if you will, and we will live together happily forever
afterwards!”
And as Urashima listened to her sweet words and gazed upon her lovely
face his heart was filled with a great wonder and joy, and he answered her,
wondering if it was not all a dream:
“Thank you a thousand times for your kind speech. There is nothing I
could wish for more than to be permitted to stay here with you in this
beautiful land, of which I have often heard, but have never seen to this day.
Beyond all words, this is the most wonderful place I have ever seen.”
While he was speaking a train of fishes appeared, all dressed in
ceremonial, trailing garments. One by one, silently and with stately steps,
they entered the hall, bearing on coral trays delicacies of fish and seaweed,
such as no one can dream of, and this wondrous feast was set before the
bride and bridegroom. The bridal was celebrated with dazzling splendor,
and in the Sea King’s realm there was great rejoicing. As soon as the young
pair had pledged themselves in the wedding cup of wine, three times three,
music was played, and songs were sung, and fishes with silver scales and
golden tails stepped in from the waves and danced. Urashima enjoyed
himself with all his heart. Never in his whole life had he sat down to such a
marvelous feast.
Page 29
When the feast was over the Princes asked the bridegroom if he would
like to walk through the palace and see all there was to be seen. Then the
happy fisherman, following his bride, the Sea King’s daughter, was shown
all the wonders of that enchanted land where youth and joy go hand in hand
and neither time nor age can touch them. The palace was built of coral and
adorned with pearls, and the beauties and wonders of the place were so
great that the tongue fails to describe them.
But, to Urashima, more wonderful than the palace was the garden that
surrounded it. Here was to be seen at one time the scenery of the four
different seasons; the beauties of summer and winter, spring and autumn,
were displayed to the wondering visitor at once.
First, when he looked to the east, the plum and cherry trees were seen in
full bloom, the nightingales sang in the pink avenues, and butterflies flitted
from flower to flower.
Looking to the south all the trees were green in the fullness of summer,
and the day cicala and the night cricket chirruped loudly.
Looking to the west the autumn maples were ablaze like a sunset sky, and
the chrysanthemums were in perfection.
Looking to the north the change made Urashima start, for the ground was
silver white with snow, and trees and bamboos were also covered with snow
and the pond was thick with ice.
And each day there were new joys and new wonders for Urashima, and
so great was his happiness that he forgot everything, even the home he had
left behind and his parents and his own country, and three days passed
without his even thinking of all he had left behind. Then his mind came
back to him and he remembered who he was, and that he did not belong to
this wonderful land or the Sea King’s palace, and he said to himself:
“O dear! I must not stay on here, for I have an old father and mother at
home. What can have happened to them all this time? How anxious they
must have been these days when I did not return as usual. I must go back at
once without letting one more day pass.” And he began to prepare for the
journey in great haste.
Then he went to his beautiful wife, the Princess, and bowing low before
her he said:
like to walk through the palace and see all there was to be seen. Then the
happy fisherman, following his bride, the Sea King’s daughter, was shown
all the wonders of that enchanted land where youth and joy go hand in hand
and neither time nor age can touch them. The palace was built of coral and
adorned with pearls, and the beauties and wonders of the place were so
great that the tongue fails to describe them.
But, to Urashima, more wonderful than the palace was the garden that
surrounded it. Here was to be seen at one time the scenery of the four
different seasons; the beauties of summer and winter, spring and autumn,
were displayed to the wondering visitor at once.
First, when he looked to the east, the plum and cherry trees were seen in
full bloom, the nightingales sang in the pink avenues, and butterflies flitted
from flower to flower.
Looking to the south all the trees were green in the fullness of summer,
and the day cicala and the night cricket chirruped loudly.
Looking to the west the autumn maples were ablaze like a sunset sky, and
the chrysanthemums were in perfection.
Looking to the north the change made Urashima start, for the ground was
silver white with snow, and trees and bamboos were also covered with snow
and the pond was thick with ice.
And each day there were new joys and new wonders for Urashima, and
so great was his happiness that he forgot everything, even the home he had
left behind and his parents and his own country, and three days passed
without his even thinking of all he had left behind. Then his mind came
back to him and he remembered who he was, and that he did not belong to
this wonderful land or the Sea King’s palace, and he said to himself:
“O dear! I must not stay on here, for I have an old father and mother at
home. What can have happened to them all this time? How anxious they
must have been these days when I did not return as usual. I must go back at
once without letting one more day pass.” And he began to prepare for the
journey in great haste.
Then he went to his beautiful wife, the Princess, and bowing low before
her he said:
Page 30
“Indeed, I have been very happy with you for a long time, Otohime
Sama” (for that was her name), “and you have been kinder to me than any
words can tell. But now I must say good-by. I must go back to my old
parents.”
Then Otohime Sama began to weep, and said softly and sadly:
“Is it not well with you here, Urashima, that you wish to leave me so
soon? Where is the haste? Stay with me yet another day only!”
But Urashima had remembered his old parents, and in Japan the duty to
parents is stronger than everything else, stronger even than pleasure or love,
and he would not be persuaded, but answered:
“Indeed, I must go. Do not think that I wish to leave you. It is not that. I
must go and see my old parents. Let me go for one day and I will come
back to you.”
“Then,” said the Princess sorrowfully, “there is nothing to be done. I will
send you back to-day to your father and mother, and instead of trying to
keep you with me one more day, I shall give you this as a token of our love
—please take it back with you;” and she brought him a beautiful lacquer
box tied about with a silken cord and tassels of red silk.
Urashima had received so much from the Princess already that he felt
some compunction in taking the gift, and said:
“It does not seem right for me to take yet another gift from you after all
the many favors I have received at your hands, but because it is your wish I
will do so,” and then he added:
“Tell me what is this box?”
“That,” answered the Princess “is the tamate-bako (Box of the Jewel
Hand), and it contains something very precious. You must not open this
box, whatever happens! If you open it something dreadful will happen to
you! Now promise me that you will never open this box!”
And Urashima promised that he would never, never open the box
whatever happened.
Then bidding good-by to Otohime Sama he went down to the seashore,
the Princess and her attendants following him, and there he found a large
tortoise waiting for him.
Sama” (for that was her name), “and you have been kinder to me than any
words can tell. But now I must say good-by. I must go back to my old
parents.”
Then Otohime Sama began to weep, and said softly and sadly:
“Is it not well with you here, Urashima, that you wish to leave me so
soon? Where is the haste? Stay with me yet another day only!”
But Urashima had remembered his old parents, and in Japan the duty to
parents is stronger than everything else, stronger even than pleasure or love,
and he would not be persuaded, but answered:
“Indeed, I must go. Do not think that I wish to leave you. It is not that. I
must go and see my old parents. Let me go for one day and I will come
back to you.”
“Then,” said the Princess sorrowfully, “there is nothing to be done. I will
send you back to-day to your father and mother, and instead of trying to
keep you with me one more day, I shall give you this as a token of our love
—please take it back with you;” and she brought him a beautiful lacquer
box tied about with a silken cord and tassels of red silk.
Urashima had received so much from the Princess already that he felt
some compunction in taking the gift, and said:
“It does not seem right for me to take yet another gift from you after all
the many favors I have received at your hands, but because it is your wish I
will do so,” and then he added:
“Tell me what is this box?”
“That,” answered the Princess “is the tamate-bako (Box of the Jewel
Hand), and it contains something very precious. You must not open this
box, whatever happens! If you open it something dreadful will happen to
you! Now promise me that you will never open this box!”
And Urashima promised that he would never, never open the box
whatever happened.
Then bidding good-by to Otohime Sama he went down to the seashore,
the Princess and her attendants following him, and there he found a large
tortoise waiting for him.
Page 31
He quickly mounted the creature’s back and was carried away over the
shining sea into the East. He looked back to wave his hand to Otohime
Sama till at last he could see her no more, and the land of the Sea King and
the roofs of the wonderful palace were lost in the far, far distance. Then,
with his face turned eagerly towards his own land, he looked for the rising
of the blue hills on the horizon before him.
At last the tortoise carried him into the bay he knew so well, and to the
shore from whence he had set out. He stepped on to the shore and looked
about him while the tortoise rode away back to the Sea King’s realm.
But what is the strange fear that seizes Urashima as he stands and looks
about him? Why does he gaze so fixedly at the people that pass him by, and
why do they in turn stand and look at him? The shore is the same and the
hills are the same, but the people that he sees walking past him have very
different faces to those he had known so well before.
Wondering what it can mean he walks quickly towards his old home.
Even that looks different, but a house stands on the spot, and he calls out:
“Father, I have just returned!” and he was about to enter, when he saw a
strange man coming out.
“Perhaps my parents have moved while I have been away, and have gone
somewhere else,” was the fisherman’s thought. Somehow he began to feel
strangely anxious, he could not tell why.
“Excuse me,” said he to the man who was staring at him, “but till within
the last few days I have lived in this house. My name is Urashima Taro.
Where have my parents gone whom I left here?”
A very bewildered expression came over the face of the man, and, still
gazing intently on Urashima’s face, he said:
“What? Are you Urashima Taro?”
“Yes,” said the fisherman, “I am Urashima Taro!”
“Ha, ha!” laughed the man, “you must not make such jokes. It is true that
once upon a time a man called Urashima Taro did live in this village, but
that is a story three hundred years old. He could not possibly be alive now!”
When Urashima heard these strange words he was frightened, and said:
“Please, please, you must not joke with me, I am greatly perplexed. I am
really Urashima Taro, and I certainly have not lived three hundred years.
shining sea into the East. He looked back to wave his hand to Otohime
Sama till at last he could see her no more, and the land of the Sea King and
the roofs of the wonderful palace were lost in the far, far distance. Then,
with his face turned eagerly towards his own land, he looked for the rising
of the blue hills on the horizon before him.
At last the tortoise carried him into the bay he knew so well, and to the
shore from whence he had set out. He stepped on to the shore and looked
about him while the tortoise rode away back to the Sea King’s realm.
But what is the strange fear that seizes Urashima as he stands and looks
about him? Why does he gaze so fixedly at the people that pass him by, and
why do they in turn stand and look at him? The shore is the same and the
hills are the same, but the people that he sees walking past him have very
different faces to those he had known so well before.
Wondering what it can mean he walks quickly towards his old home.
Even that looks different, but a house stands on the spot, and he calls out:
“Father, I have just returned!” and he was about to enter, when he saw a
strange man coming out.
“Perhaps my parents have moved while I have been away, and have gone
somewhere else,” was the fisherman’s thought. Somehow he began to feel
strangely anxious, he could not tell why.
“Excuse me,” said he to the man who was staring at him, “but till within
the last few days I have lived in this house. My name is Urashima Taro.
Where have my parents gone whom I left here?”
A very bewildered expression came over the face of the man, and, still
gazing intently on Urashima’s face, he said:
“What? Are you Urashima Taro?”
“Yes,” said the fisherman, “I am Urashima Taro!”
“Ha, ha!” laughed the man, “you must not make such jokes. It is true that
once upon a time a man called Urashima Taro did live in this village, but
that is a story three hundred years old. He could not possibly be alive now!”
When Urashima heard these strange words he was frightened, and said:
“Please, please, you must not joke with me, I am greatly perplexed. I am
really Urashima Taro, and I certainly have not lived three hundred years.
Page 32
Till four or five days ago I lived on this spot. Tell me what I want to know
without more joking, please.”
But the man’s face grew more and more grave, and he answered:
“You may or may not be Urashima Taro, I don’t know. But the Urashima
Taro of whom I have heard is a man who lived three hundred years ago.
Perhaps you are his spirit come to revisit your old home?”
“Why do you mock me?” said Urashima. “I am no spirit! I am a living
man—do you not see my feet;” and “don-don,” he stamped on the ground,
first with one foot and then with the other to show the man. (Japanese
ghosts have no feet.)
“But Urashima Taro lived three hundred years ago, that is all I know; it is
written in the village chronicles,” persisted the man, who could not believe
what the fisherman said.
Urashima was lost in bewilderment and trouble. He stood looking all
around him, terribly puzzled, and, indeed, something in the appearance of
everything was different to what he remembered before he went away, and
the awful feeling came over him that what the man said was perhaps true.
He seemed to be in a strange dream. The few days he had spent in the Sea
King’s palace beyond the sea had not been days at all: they had been
hundreds of years, and in that time his parents had died and all the people
he had ever known, and the village had written down his story. There was
no use in staying here any longer. He must get back to his beautiful wife
beyond the sea.
He made his way back to the beach, carrying in his hand the box which
the Princess had given him. But which was the way? He could not find it
alone! Suddenly he remembered the box, the tamate-bako.
“The Princess told me when she gave me the box never to open it—that it
contained a very precious thing. But now that I have no home, now that I
have lost everything that was dear to me here, and my heart grows thin with
sadness, at such a time, if I open the box, surely I shall find something that
will help me, something that will show me the way back to my beautiful
Princess over the sea. There is nothing else for me to do now. Yes, yes, I
will open the box and look in!”
And so his heart consented to this act of disobedience, and he tried to
persuade himself that he was doing the right thing in breaking his promise.
without more joking, please.”
But the man’s face grew more and more grave, and he answered:
“You may or may not be Urashima Taro, I don’t know. But the Urashima
Taro of whom I have heard is a man who lived three hundred years ago.
Perhaps you are his spirit come to revisit your old home?”
“Why do you mock me?” said Urashima. “I am no spirit! I am a living
man—do you not see my feet;” and “don-don,” he stamped on the ground,
first with one foot and then with the other to show the man. (Japanese
ghosts have no feet.)
“But Urashima Taro lived three hundred years ago, that is all I know; it is
written in the village chronicles,” persisted the man, who could not believe
what the fisherman said.
Urashima was lost in bewilderment and trouble. He stood looking all
around him, terribly puzzled, and, indeed, something in the appearance of
everything was different to what he remembered before he went away, and
the awful feeling came over him that what the man said was perhaps true.
He seemed to be in a strange dream. The few days he had spent in the Sea
King’s palace beyond the sea had not been days at all: they had been
hundreds of years, and in that time his parents had died and all the people
he had ever known, and the village had written down his story. There was
no use in staying here any longer. He must get back to his beautiful wife
beyond the sea.
He made his way back to the beach, carrying in his hand the box which
the Princess had given him. But which was the way? He could not find it
alone! Suddenly he remembered the box, the tamate-bako.
“The Princess told me when she gave me the box never to open it—that it
contained a very precious thing. But now that I have no home, now that I
have lost everything that was dear to me here, and my heart grows thin with
sadness, at such a time, if I open the box, surely I shall find something that
will help me, something that will show me the way back to my beautiful
Princess over the sea. There is nothing else for me to do now. Yes, yes, I
will open the box and look in!”
And so his heart consented to this act of disobedience, and he tried to
persuade himself that he was doing the right thing in breaking his promise.
Page 33
Slowly, very slowly, he untied the red silk cord, slowly and wonderingly
he lifted the lid of the precious box. And what did he find? Strange to say
only a beautiful little purple cloud rose out of the box in three soft wisps.
For an instant it covered his face and wavered over him as if loath to go,
and then it floated away like vapor over the sea.
Urashima, who had been till that moment like a strong and handsome
youth of twenty-four, suddenly became very, very old. His back doubled up
with age, his hair turned snowy white, his face wrinkled and he fell down
dead on the beach.
Poor Urashima! because of his disobedience he could never return to the
Sea King’s realm or the lovely Princess beyond the sea.
Little children, never be disobedient to those who are wiser than you for
disobedience was the beginning of all the miseries and sorrows of life.
he lifted the lid of the precious box. And what did he find? Strange to say
only a beautiful little purple cloud rose out of the box in three soft wisps.
For an instant it covered his face and wavered over him as if loath to go,
and then it floated away like vapor over the sea.
Urashima, who had been till that moment like a strong and handsome
youth of twenty-four, suddenly became very, very old. His back doubled up
with age, his hair turned snowy white, his face wrinkled and he fell down
dead on the beach.
Poor Urashima! because of his disobedience he could never return to the
Sea King’s realm or the lovely Princess beyond the sea.
Little children, never be disobedient to those who are wiser than you for
disobedience was the beginning of all the miseries and sorrows of life.
Page 34
THE FARMER AND THE BADGER
Long, long ago, there lived an old farmer and his wife who had made
their home in the mountains, far from any town. Their only neighbor was a
bad and malicious badger. This badger used to come out every night and run
across to the farmer’s field and spoil the vegetables and the rice which the
farmer spent his time in carefully cultivating. The badger at last grew so
ruthless in his mischievous work, and did so much harm everywhere on the
farm, that the good-natured farmer could not stand it any longer, and
determined to put a stop to it. So he lay in wait day after day and night after
night, with a big club, hoping to catch the badger, but all in vain. Then he
laid traps for the wicked animal.
The farmer’s trouble and patience was rewarded, for one fine day on
going his rounds he found the badger caught in a hole he had dug for that
purpose. The farmer was delighted at having caught his enemy, and carried
him home securely bound with rope. When he reached the house the farmer
said to his wife:
“I have at last caught the bad badger. You must keep an eye on him while
I am out at work and not let him escape, because I want to make him into
soup to-night.”
Saying this, he hung the badger up to the rafters of his storehouse and
went out to his work in the fields. The badger was in great distress, for he
did not at all like the idea of being made into soup that night, and he
thought and thought for a long time, trying to hit upon some plan by which
he might escape. It was hard to think clearly in his uncomfortable position,
for he had been hung upside down. Very near him, at the entrance to the
storehouse, looking out towards the green fields and the trees and the
pleasant sunshine, stood the farmer’s old wife pounding barley. She looked
tired and old. Her face was seamed with many wrinkles, and was as brown
as leather, and every now and then she stopped to wipe the perspiration
which rolled down her face.
Long, long ago, there lived an old farmer and his wife who had made
their home in the mountains, far from any town. Their only neighbor was a
bad and malicious badger. This badger used to come out every night and run
across to the farmer’s field and spoil the vegetables and the rice which the
farmer spent his time in carefully cultivating. The badger at last grew so
ruthless in his mischievous work, and did so much harm everywhere on the
farm, that the good-natured farmer could not stand it any longer, and
determined to put a stop to it. So he lay in wait day after day and night after
night, with a big club, hoping to catch the badger, but all in vain. Then he
laid traps for the wicked animal.
The farmer’s trouble and patience was rewarded, for one fine day on
going his rounds he found the badger caught in a hole he had dug for that
purpose. The farmer was delighted at having caught his enemy, and carried
him home securely bound with rope. When he reached the house the farmer
said to his wife:
“I have at last caught the bad badger. You must keep an eye on him while
I am out at work and not let him escape, because I want to make him into
soup to-night.”
Saying this, he hung the badger up to the rafters of his storehouse and
went out to his work in the fields. The badger was in great distress, for he
did not at all like the idea of being made into soup that night, and he
thought and thought for a long time, trying to hit upon some plan by which
he might escape. It was hard to think clearly in his uncomfortable position,
for he had been hung upside down. Very near him, at the entrance to the
storehouse, looking out towards the green fields and the trees and the
pleasant sunshine, stood the farmer’s old wife pounding barley. She looked
tired and old. Her face was seamed with many wrinkles, and was as brown
as leather, and every now and then she stopped to wipe the perspiration
which rolled down her face.
Page 35
“Dear lady,” said the wily badger, “you must be very weary doing such
heavy work in your old age. Won’t you let me do that for you? My arms are
very strong, and I could relieve you for a little while!”
“Thank you for your kindness,” said the old woman, “but I cannot let you
do this work for me because I must not untie you, for you might escape if I
did, and my husband would be very angry if he came home and found you
gone.”
Now, the badger is one of the most cunning of animals, and he said again
in a very sad, gentle, voice:
“You are very unkind. You might untie me, for I promise not to try to
escape. If you are afraid of your husband, I will let you bind me again
before his return when I have finished pounding the barley. I am so tired
and sore tied up like this. If you would only let me down for a few minutes
I would indeed be thankful!”
The old woman had a good and simple nature, and could not think badly
of any one. Much less did she think that the badger was only deceiving her
in order to get away. She felt sorry, too, for the animal as she turned to look
at him. He looked in such a sad plight hanging downwards from the ceiling
by his legs, which were all tied together so tightly that the rope and the
knots were cutting into the skin. So in the kindness of her heart, and
believing the creature’s promise that he would not run away, she untied the
cord and let him down.
The old woman then gave him the wooden pestle and told him to do the
work for a short time while she rested. He took the pestle, but instead of
doing the work as he was told, the badger at once sprang upon the old
woman and knocked her down with the heavy piece of wood. He then killed
her and cut her up and made soup of her, and waited for the return of the old
farmer. The old man worked hard in his fields all day, and as he worked he
thought with pleasure that no more now would his labor be spoiled by the
destructive badger.
Towards sunset he left his work and turned to go home. He was very
tired, but the thought of the nice supper of hot badger soup awaiting his
return cheered him. The thought that the badger might get free and take
revenge on the poor old woman never once came into his mind.
The badger meanwhile assumed the old woman’s form, and as soon as he
saw the old farmer approaching came out to greet him on the veranda of the
heavy work in your old age. Won’t you let me do that for you? My arms are
very strong, and I could relieve you for a little while!”
“Thank you for your kindness,” said the old woman, “but I cannot let you
do this work for me because I must not untie you, for you might escape if I
did, and my husband would be very angry if he came home and found you
gone.”
Now, the badger is one of the most cunning of animals, and he said again
in a very sad, gentle, voice:
“You are very unkind. You might untie me, for I promise not to try to
escape. If you are afraid of your husband, I will let you bind me again
before his return when I have finished pounding the barley. I am so tired
and sore tied up like this. If you would only let me down for a few minutes
I would indeed be thankful!”
The old woman had a good and simple nature, and could not think badly
of any one. Much less did she think that the badger was only deceiving her
in order to get away. She felt sorry, too, for the animal as she turned to look
at him. He looked in such a sad plight hanging downwards from the ceiling
by his legs, which were all tied together so tightly that the rope and the
knots were cutting into the skin. So in the kindness of her heart, and
believing the creature’s promise that he would not run away, she untied the
cord and let him down.
The old woman then gave him the wooden pestle and told him to do the
work for a short time while she rested. He took the pestle, but instead of
doing the work as he was told, the badger at once sprang upon the old
woman and knocked her down with the heavy piece of wood. He then killed
her and cut her up and made soup of her, and waited for the return of the old
farmer. The old man worked hard in his fields all day, and as he worked he
thought with pleasure that no more now would his labor be spoiled by the
destructive badger.
Towards sunset he left his work and turned to go home. He was very
tired, but the thought of the nice supper of hot badger soup awaiting his
return cheered him. The thought that the badger might get free and take
revenge on the poor old woman never once came into his mind.
The badger meanwhile assumed the old woman’s form, and as soon as he
saw the old farmer approaching came out to greet him on the veranda of the
Page 36
little house, saying:
“So you have come back at last. I have made the badger soup and have
been waiting for you for a long time.”
The old farmer quickly took off his straw sandals and sat down before his
tiny dinner-tray. The innocent man never even dreamed that it was not his
wife but the badger who was waiting upon him, and asked at once for the
soup. Then the badger suddenly transformed himself back to his natural
form and cried out:
“You wife-eating old man! Look out for the bones in the kitchen!”
Laughing loudly and derisively he escaped out of the house and ran away
to his den in the hills. The old man was left behind alone. He could hardly
believe what he had seen and heard. Then when he understood the whole
truth he was so scared and horrified that he fainted right away. After a while
he came round and burst into tears. He cried loudly and bitterly. He rocked
himself to and fro in his hopeless grief. It seemed too terrible to be real that
his faithful old wife had been killed and cooked by the badger while he was
working quietly in the fields, knowing nothing of what was going on at
home, and congratulating himself on having once for all got rid of the
wicked animal who had so often spoiled his fields. And oh! the horrible
thought; he had very nearly drunk the soup which the creature had made of
his poor old woman. “Oh dear, oh dear, oh dear!” he wailed aloud. Now, not
far away there lived in the same mountain a kind, good-natured old rabbit.
He heard the old man crying and sobbing and at once set out to see what
was the matter, and if there was anything he could do to help his neighbor.
The old man told him all that had happened. When the rabbit heard the
story he was very angry at the wicked and deceitful badger, and told the old
man to leave everything to him and he would avenge his wife’s death. The
farmer was at last comforted, and, wiping away his tears, thanked the rabbit
for his goodness in coming to him in his distress.
The rabbit, seeing that the farmer was growing calmer, went back to his
home to lay his plans for the punishment of the badger.
The next day the weather was fine, and the rabbit went out to find the
badger. He was not to be seen in the woods or on the hillside or in the fields
anywhere, so the rabbit went to his den and found the badger hiding there,
for the animal had been afraid to show himself ever since he had escaped
from the farmer’s house, for fear of the old man’s wrath.
“So you have come back at last. I have made the badger soup and have
been waiting for you for a long time.”
The old farmer quickly took off his straw sandals and sat down before his
tiny dinner-tray. The innocent man never even dreamed that it was not his
wife but the badger who was waiting upon him, and asked at once for the
soup. Then the badger suddenly transformed himself back to his natural
form and cried out:
“You wife-eating old man! Look out for the bones in the kitchen!”
Laughing loudly and derisively he escaped out of the house and ran away
to his den in the hills. The old man was left behind alone. He could hardly
believe what he had seen and heard. Then when he understood the whole
truth he was so scared and horrified that he fainted right away. After a while
he came round and burst into tears. He cried loudly and bitterly. He rocked
himself to and fro in his hopeless grief. It seemed too terrible to be real that
his faithful old wife had been killed and cooked by the badger while he was
working quietly in the fields, knowing nothing of what was going on at
home, and congratulating himself on having once for all got rid of the
wicked animal who had so often spoiled his fields. And oh! the horrible
thought; he had very nearly drunk the soup which the creature had made of
his poor old woman. “Oh dear, oh dear, oh dear!” he wailed aloud. Now, not
far away there lived in the same mountain a kind, good-natured old rabbit.
He heard the old man crying and sobbing and at once set out to see what
was the matter, and if there was anything he could do to help his neighbor.
The old man told him all that had happened. When the rabbit heard the
story he was very angry at the wicked and deceitful badger, and told the old
man to leave everything to him and he would avenge his wife’s death. The
farmer was at last comforted, and, wiping away his tears, thanked the rabbit
for his goodness in coming to him in his distress.
The rabbit, seeing that the farmer was growing calmer, went back to his
home to lay his plans for the punishment of the badger.
The next day the weather was fine, and the rabbit went out to find the
badger. He was not to be seen in the woods or on the hillside or in the fields
anywhere, so the rabbit went to his den and found the badger hiding there,
for the animal had been afraid to show himself ever since he had escaped
from the farmer’s house, for fear of the old man’s wrath.
Page 37
The rabbit called out:
“Why are you not out on such a beautiful day? Come out with me, and
we will go and cut grass on the hills together.”
The badger, never doubting but that the rabbit was his friend, willingly
consented to go out with him, only too glad to get away from the
neighborhood of the farmer and the fear of meeting him. The rabbit led the
way miles away from their homes, out on the hills where the grass grew tall
and thick and sweet. They both set to work to cut down as much as they
could carry home, to store it up for their winter’s food. When they had each
cut down all they wanted they tied it in bundles and then started
homewards, each carrying his bundle of grass on his back. This time the
rabbit made the badger go first.
When they had gone a little way the rabbit took out a flint and steel, and,
striking it over the badger’s back as he stepped along in front, set his bundle
of grass on fire. The badger heard the flint striking, and asked:
“What is that noise. ‘Crack, crack’?”
“Oh, that is nothing.” replied the rabbit; “I only said ‘Crack, crack’
because this mountain is called Crackling Mountain.”
The fire soon spread in the bundle of dry grass on the badger’s back. The
badger, hearing the crackle of the burning grass, asked, “What is that?”
“Now we have come to the ‘Burning Mountain,’” answered the rabbit.
By this time the bundle was nearly burned out and all the hair had been
burned off the badger’s back. He now knew what had happened by the
smell of the smoke of the burning grass. Screaming with pain the badger
ran as fast as he could to his hole. The rabbit followed and found him lying
on his bed groaning with pain.
“What an unlucky fellow you are!” said the rabbit. “I can’t imagine how
this happened! I will bring you some medicine which will heal your back
quickly!”
The rabbit went away glad and smiling to think that the punishment upon
the badger had already begun. He hoped that the badger would die of his
burns, for he felt that nothing could be too bad for the animal, who was
guilty of murdering a poor helpless old woman who had trusted him. He
went home and made an ointment by mixing some sauce and red pepper
together.
“Why are you not out on such a beautiful day? Come out with me, and
we will go and cut grass on the hills together.”
The badger, never doubting but that the rabbit was his friend, willingly
consented to go out with him, only too glad to get away from the
neighborhood of the farmer and the fear of meeting him. The rabbit led the
way miles away from their homes, out on the hills where the grass grew tall
and thick and sweet. They both set to work to cut down as much as they
could carry home, to store it up for their winter’s food. When they had each
cut down all they wanted they tied it in bundles and then started
homewards, each carrying his bundle of grass on his back. This time the
rabbit made the badger go first.
When they had gone a little way the rabbit took out a flint and steel, and,
striking it over the badger’s back as he stepped along in front, set his bundle
of grass on fire. The badger heard the flint striking, and asked:
“What is that noise. ‘Crack, crack’?”
“Oh, that is nothing.” replied the rabbit; “I only said ‘Crack, crack’
because this mountain is called Crackling Mountain.”
The fire soon spread in the bundle of dry grass on the badger’s back. The
badger, hearing the crackle of the burning grass, asked, “What is that?”
“Now we have come to the ‘Burning Mountain,’” answered the rabbit.
By this time the bundle was nearly burned out and all the hair had been
burned off the badger’s back. He now knew what had happened by the
smell of the smoke of the burning grass. Screaming with pain the badger
ran as fast as he could to his hole. The rabbit followed and found him lying
on his bed groaning with pain.
“What an unlucky fellow you are!” said the rabbit. “I can’t imagine how
this happened! I will bring you some medicine which will heal your back
quickly!”
The rabbit went away glad and smiling to think that the punishment upon
the badger had already begun. He hoped that the badger would die of his
burns, for he felt that nothing could be too bad for the animal, who was
guilty of murdering a poor helpless old woman who had trusted him. He
went home and made an ointment by mixing some sauce and red pepper
together.
Page 38
He carried this to the badger, but before putting it on he told him that it
would cause him great pain, but that he must bear it patiently, because it
was a very wonderful medicine for burns and scalds and such wounds. The
badger thanked him and begged him to apply it at once. But no language
can describe the agony of the badger as soon as the red pepper had been
pasted all over his sore back. He rolled over and over and howled loudly.
The rabbit, looking on, felt that the farmer’s wife was beginning to be
avenged.
The badger was in bed for about a month; but at last, in spite of the red
pepper application, his burns healed and he got well. When the rabbit saw
that the badger was getting well, he thought of another plan by which he
could compass the creature’s death. So he went one day to pay the badger a
visit and to congratulate him on his recovery.
During the conversation the rabbit mentioned that he was going fishing,
and described how pleasant fishing was when the weather was fine and the
sea smooth.
The badger listened with pleasure to the rabbit’s account of the way he
passed his time now, and forgot all his pains and his month’s illness, and
thought what fun it would be if he could go fishing too; so he asked the
rabbit if he would take him the next time he went out to fish. This was just
what the rabbit wanted, so he agreed.
Then he went home and built two boats, one of wood and the other of
clay. At last they were both finished, and as the rabbit stood and looked at
his work he felt that all his trouble would be well rewarded if his plan
succeeded, and he could manage to kill the wicked badger now.
The day came when the rabbit had arranged to take the badger fishing.
He kept the wooden boat himself and gave the badger the clay boat. The
badger, who knew nothing about boats, was delighted with his new boat and
thought how kind it was of the rabbit to give it to him. They both got into
their boats and set out. After going some distance from the shore the rabbit
proposed that they should try their boats and see which one could go the
quickest. The badger fell in with the proposal, and they both set to work to
row as fast as they could for some time. In the middle of the race the badger
found his boat going to pieces, for the water now began to soften the clay.
He cried out in great fear to the rabbit to help him. But the rabbit answered
that he was avenging the old woman’s murder, and that this had been his
would cause him great pain, but that he must bear it patiently, because it
was a very wonderful medicine for burns and scalds and such wounds. The
badger thanked him and begged him to apply it at once. But no language
can describe the agony of the badger as soon as the red pepper had been
pasted all over his sore back. He rolled over and over and howled loudly.
The rabbit, looking on, felt that the farmer’s wife was beginning to be
avenged.
The badger was in bed for about a month; but at last, in spite of the red
pepper application, his burns healed and he got well. When the rabbit saw
that the badger was getting well, he thought of another plan by which he
could compass the creature’s death. So he went one day to pay the badger a
visit and to congratulate him on his recovery.
During the conversation the rabbit mentioned that he was going fishing,
and described how pleasant fishing was when the weather was fine and the
sea smooth.
The badger listened with pleasure to the rabbit’s account of the way he
passed his time now, and forgot all his pains and his month’s illness, and
thought what fun it would be if he could go fishing too; so he asked the
rabbit if he would take him the next time he went out to fish. This was just
what the rabbit wanted, so he agreed.
Then he went home and built two boats, one of wood and the other of
clay. At last they were both finished, and as the rabbit stood and looked at
his work he felt that all his trouble would be well rewarded if his plan
succeeded, and he could manage to kill the wicked badger now.
The day came when the rabbit had arranged to take the badger fishing.
He kept the wooden boat himself and gave the badger the clay boat. The
badger, who knew nothing about boats, was delighted with his new boat and
thought how kind it was of the rabbit to give it to him. They both got into
their boats and set out. After going some distance from the shore the rabbit
proposed that they should try their boats and see which one could go the
quickest. The badger fell in with the proposal, and they both set to work to
row as fast as they could for some time. In the middle of the race the badger
found his boat going to pieces, for the water now began to soften the clay.
He cried out in great fear to the rabbit to help him. But the rabbit answered
that he was avenging the old woman’s murder, and that this had been his
Page 39
intention all along, and that he was happy to think that the badger had at last
met his deserts for all his evil crimes, and was to drown with no one to help
him. Then he raised his oar and struck at the badger with all his strength till
he fell with the sinking clay boat and was seen no more.
Thus at last he kept his promise to the old farmer. The rabbit now turned
and rowed shorewards, and having landed and pulled his boat upon the
beach, hurried back to tell the old farmer everything, and how the badger,
his enemy, had been killed.
The old farmer thanked him with tears in his eyes. He said that till now
he could never sleep at night or be at peace in the daytime, thinking of how
his wife’s death was unavenged, but from this time he would be able to
sleep and eat as of old. He begged the rabbit to stay with him and share his
home, so from this day the rabbit went to stay with the old farmer and they
both lived together as good friends to the end of their days.
met his deserts for all his evil crimes, and was to drown with no one to help
him. Then he raised his oar and struck at the badger with all his strength till
he fell with the sinking clay boat and was seen no more.
Thus at last he kept his promise to the old farmer. The rabbit now turned
and rowed shorewards, and having landed and pulled his boat upon the
beach, hurried back to tell the old farmer everything, and how the badger,
his enemy, had been killed.
The old farmer thanked him with tears in his eyes. He said that till now
he could never sleep at night or be at peace in the daytime, thinking of how
his wife’s death was unavenged, but from this time he would be able to
sleep and eat as of old. He begged the rabbit to stay with him and share his
home, so from this day the rabbit went to stay with the old farmer and they
both lived together as good friends to the end of their days.
Page 40
THE “SHINANSHA,” OR THE SOUTH POINTING
CARRIAGE
The compass, with its needle always pointing to the North, is quite a
common thing, and no one thinks that it is remarkable now, though when it
was first invented it must have been a wonder.
Now long ago in China, there was a still more wonderful invention called
the shinansha. This was a kind of chariot with the figure of a man on it
always pointing to the South. No matter how the chariot was placed the
figure always wheeled about and pointed to the South.
This curious instrument was invented by Kotei, one of the three Chinese
Emperors of the Mythological age. Kotei was the son of the Emperor Yuhi.
Before he was born his mother had a vision which foretold that her son
would be a great man.
One summer evening she went out to walk in the meadows to seek the
cool breezes which blow at the end of the day and to gaze with pleasure at
the star-lit heavens above her. As she looked at the North Star, strange to
relate, it shot forth vivid flashes of lightning in every direction. Soon after
this her son Kotei came into the world.
Kotei in time grew to manhood and succeeded his father the Emperor
Yuhi. His early reign was greatly troubled by the rebel Shiyu. This rebel
wanted to make himself King, and many were the battles which he fought
to this end. Shiyu was a wicked magician, his head was made of iron, and
there was no man that could conquer him.
At last Kotei declared war against the rebel and led his army to battle,
and the two armies met on a plain called Takuroku. The Emperor boldly
attacked the enemy, but the magician brought down a dense fog upon the
battlefield, and while the royal army were wandering about in confusion,
CARRIAGE
The compass, with its needle always pointing to the North, is quite a
common thing, and no one thinks that it is remarkable now, though when it
was first invented it must have been a wonder.
Now long ago in China, there was a still more wonderful invention called
the shinansha. This was a kind of chariot with the figure of a man on it
always pointing to the South. No matter how the chariot was placed the
figure always wheeled about and pointed to the South.
This curious instrument was invented by Kotei, one of the three Chinese
Emperors of the Mythological age. Kotei was the son of the Emperor Yuhi.
Before he was born his mother had a vision which foretold that her son
would be a great man.
One summer evening she went out to walk in the meadows to seek the
cool breezes which blow at the end of the day and to gaze with pleasure at
the star-lit heavens above her. As she looked at the North Star, strange to
relate, it shot forth vivid flashes of lightning in every direction. Soon after
this her son Kotei came into the world.
Kotei in time grew to manhood and succeeded his father the Emperor
Yuhi. His early reign was greatly troubled by the rebel Shiyu. This rebel
wanted to make himself King, and many were the battles which he fought
to this end. Shiyu was a wicked magician, his head was made of iron, and
there was no man that could conquer him.
At last Kotei declared war against the rebel and led his army to battle,
and the two armies met on a plain called Takuroku. The Emperor boldly
attacked the enemy, but the magician brought down a dense fog upon the
battlefield, and while the royal army were wandering about in confusion,
Page 41
trying to find their way, Shiyu retreated with his troops, laughing at having
fooled the royal army.
No matter however strong and brave the Emperor’s soldiers were, the
rebel with his magic could always escape in the end.
Kotei returned to his Palace, and thought and pondered deeply as to how
he should conquer the magician, for he was determined not to give up yet.
After a long time he invented the shinansha with the figure of a man always
pointing South, for there were no compasses in those days. With this
instrument to show him the way he need not fear the dense fogs raised up
by the magician to confound his men.
Kotei again declared war against Shiyu. He placed the shinansha in front
of his army and led the way to the battlefield.
The battle began in earnest. The rebel was being driven backward by the
royal troops when he again resorted to magic, and upon his saying some
strange words in a loud voice, immediately a dense fog came down upon
the battlefield.
But this time no soldier minded the fog, not one was confused. Kotei by
pointing to the shinansha could find his way and directed the army without
a single mistake. He closely pursued the rebel army and drove them
backward till they came to a big river. This river Kotei and his men found
was swollen by the floods and impossible to cross.
Shiyu by using his magic art quickly passed over with his army and shut
himself up in a fortress on the opposite bank.
When Kotei found his march checked he was wild with disappointment,
for he had very nearly overtaken the rebel when the river stopped him.
He could do nothing, for there were no boats in those days, so the
Emperor ordered his tent to be pitched in the pleasantest spot that the place
afforded.
One day he stepped forth from his tent and after walking about for a short
time he came to a pond. Here he sat down on the bank and was lost in
thought.
It was autumn. The trees growing along the edge of the water were
shedding their leaves, which floated hither and thither on the surface of the
pond. By and by, Kotei’s attention was attracted to a spider on the brink of
the water. The little insect was trying to get on to one of the floating leaves
fooled the royal army.
No matter however strong and brave the Emperor’s soldiers were, the
rebel with his magic could always escape in the end.
Kotei returned to his Palace, and thought and pondered deeply as to how
he should conquer the magician, for he was determined not to give up yet.
After a long time he invented the shinansha with the figure of a man always
pointing South, for there were no compasses in those days. With this
instrument to show him the way he need not fear the dense fogs raised up
by the magician to confound his men.
Kotei again declared war against Shiyu. He placed the shinansha in front
of his army and led the way to the battlefield.
The battle began in earnest. The rebel was being driven backward by the
royal troops when he again resorted to magic, and upon his saying some
strange words in a loud voice, immediately a dense fog came down upon
the battlefield.
But this time no soldier minded the fog, not one was confused. Kotei by
pointing to the shinansha could find his way and directed the army without
a single mistake. He closely pursued the rebel army and drove them
backward till they came to a big river. This river Kotei and his men found
was swollen by the floods and impossible to cross.
Shiyu by using his magic art quickly passed over with his army and shut
himself up in a fortress on the opposite bank.
When Kotei found his march checked he was wild with disappointment,
for he had very nearly overtaken the rebel when the river stopped him.
He could do nothing, for there were no boats in those days, so the
Emperor ordered his tent to be pitched in the pleasantest spot that the place
afforded.
One day he stepped forth from his tent and after walking about for a short
time he came to a pond. Here he sat down on the bank and was lost in
thought.
It was autumn. The trees growing along the edge of the water were
shedding their leaves, which floated hither and thither on the surface of the
pond. By and by, Kotei’s attention was attracted to a spider on the brink of
the water. The little insect was trying to get on to one of the floating leaves
Page 42
near by. It did so at last, and was soon floating over the water to the other
side of the pond.
This little incident made the clever Emperor think that he might try to
make something that could carry himself and his men over the river in the
same way that the leaf had carried over the spider. He set to work and
persevered till he invented the first boat. When he found that it was a
success he set all his men to make more, and in time there were enough
boats for the whole army.
Kotei now took his army across the river, and attacked Shiyu’s
headquarters. He gained a complete victory, and so put an end to the war
which had troubled his country for so long.
This wise and good Emperor did not rest till he had secured peace and
prosperity throughout his whole land. He was beloved by his subjects, who
now enjoyed their happiness of peace for many long years under him. He
spent a great deal of time in making inventions which would benefit his
people, and he succeeded in many besides the boat and the South Pointing
shinansha.
He had reigned about a hundred years when one day, as Kotei was
looking upwards, the sky became suddenly red, and something came
glittering like gold towards the earth. As it came nearer Kotei saw that it
was a great Dragon. The Dragon approached and bowed down its head
before the Emperor. The Empress and the courtiers were so frightened that
they ran away screaming.
But the Emperor only smiled and called to them to stop, and said:
“Do not be afraid. This is a messenger from Heaven. My time here is
finished!” He then mounted the Dragon, which began to ascend towards the
sky.
When the Empress and the courtiers saw this they all cried out together:
“Wait a moment! We wish to come too.” And they all ran and caught hold
of the Dragon’s beard and tried to mount him.
But it was impossible for so many people to ride on the Dragon. Several
of them hung on to the creature’s beard so that when it tried to mount the
hair was pulled out and they fell to the ground.
Meanwhile the Empress and a few of the courtiers were safely seated on
the Dragon’s back. The Dragon flew up so high in the heavens that in a
side of the pond.
This little incident made the clever Emperor think that he might try to
make something that could carry himself and his men over the river in the
same way that the leaf had carried over the spider. He set to work and
persevered till he invented the first boat. When he found that it was a
success he set all his men to make more, and in time there were enough
boats for the whole army.
Kotei now took his army across the river, and attacked Shiyu’s
headquarters. He gained a complete victory, and so put an end to the war
which had troubled his country for so long.
This wise and good Emperor did not rest till he had secured peace and
prosperity throughout his whole land. He was beloved by his subjects, who
now enjoyed their happiness of peace for many long years under him. He
spent a great deal of time in making inventions which would benefit his
people, and he succeeded in many besides the boat and the South Pointing
shinansha.
He had reigned about a hundred years when one day, as Kotei was
looking upwards, the sky became suddenly red, and something came
glittering like gold towards the earth. As it came nearer Kotei saw that it
was a great Dragon. The Dragon approached and bowed down its head
before the Emperor. The Empress and the courtiers were so frightened that
they ran away screaming.
But the Emperor only smiled and called to them to stop, and said:
“Do not be afraid. This is a messenger from Heaven. My time here is
finished!” He then mounted the Dragon, which began to ascend towards the
sky.
When the Empress and the courtiers saw this they all cried out together:
“Wait a moment! We wish to come too.” And they all ran and caught hold
of the Dragon’s beard and tried to mount him.
But it was impossible for so many people to ride on the Dragon. Several
of them hung on to the creature’s beard so that when it tried to mount the
hair was pulled out and they fell to the ground.
Meanwhile the Empress and a few of the courtiers were safely seated on
the Dragon’s back. The Dragon flew up so high in the heavens that in a
Page 43
short time the inmates of the Palace, who had been left behind disappointed,
could see them no more.
After some time a bow and an arrow dropped to the earth in the courtyard
of the Palace. They were recognized as having belonged to the Emperor
Kotei. The courtiers took them up carefully and preserved them as sacred
relics in the Palace.
could see them no more.
After some time a bow and an arrow dropped to the earth in the courtyard
of the Palace. They were recognized as having belonged to the Emperor
Kotei. The courtiers took them up carefully and preserved them as sacred
relics in the Palace.
Page 44
THE ADVENTURES OF KINTARO, THE
GOLDEN BOY
Long, long ago there lived in Kyoto a brave soldier named Kintoki. Now
he fell in love with a beautiful lady and married her. Not long after this,
through the malice of some of his friends, he fell into disgrace at Court and
was dismissed. This misfortune so preyed upon his mind that he did not
long survive his dismissal—he died, leaving behind him his beautiful young
wife to face the world alone. Fearing her husband’s enemies, she fled to the
Ashigara Mountains as soon as her husband was dead, and there in the
lonely forests where no one ever came except woodcutters, a little boy was
born to her. She called him Kintaro or the Golden Boy. Now the remarkable
thing about this child was his great strength, and as he grew older he grew
stronger and stronger, so that by the time he was eight years of age he was
able to cut down trees as quickly as the woodcutters. Then his mother gave
him a large ax, and he used to go out in the forest and help the woodcutters,
who called him “Wonder-child,” and his mother the “Old Nurse of the
Mountains,” for they did not know her high rank. Another favorite pastime
of Kintaro’s was to smash up rocks and stones. You can imagine how strong
he was!
Quite unlike other boys, Kintaro, grew up all alone in the mountain
wilds, and as he had no companions he made friends with all the animals
and learned to understand them and to speak their strange talk. By degrees
they all grew quite tame and looked upon Kintaro as their master, and he
used them as his servants and messengers. But his special retainers were the
bear, the deer, the monkey and the hare.
The bear often brought her cubs for Kintaro to romp with, and when she
came to take them home Kintaro would get on her back and have a ride to
her cave. He was very fond of the deer too, and would often put his arms
GOLDEN BOY
Long, long ago there lived in Kyoto a brave soldier named Kintoki. Now
he fell in love with a beautiful lady and married her. Not long after this,
through the malice of some of his friends, he fell into disgrace at Court and
was dismissed. This misfortune so preyed upon his mind that he did not
long survive his dismissal—he died, leaving behind him his beautiful young
wife to face the world alone. Fearing her husband’s enemies, she fled to the
Ashigara Mountains as soon as her husband was dead, and there in the
lonely forests where no one ever came except woodcutters, a little boy was
born to her. She called him Kintaro or the Golden Boy. Now the remarkable
thing about this child was his great strength, and as he grew older he grew
stronger and stronger, so that by the time he was eight years of age he was
able to cut down trees as quickly as the woodcutters. Then his mother gave
him a large ax, and he used to go out in the forest and help the woodcutters,
who called him “Wonder-child,” and his mother the “Old Nurse of the
Mountains,” for they did not know her high rank. Another favorite pastime
of Kintaro’s was to smash up rocks and stones. You can imagine how strong
he was!
Quite unlike other boys, Kintaro, grew up all alone in the mountain
wilds, and as he had no companions he made friends with all the animals
and learned to understand them and to speak their strange talk. By degrees
they all grew quite tame and looked upon Kintaro as their master, and he
used them as his servants and messengers. But his special retainers were the
bear, the deer, the monkey and the hare.
The bear often brought her cubs for Kintaro to romp with, and when she
came to take them home Kintaro would get on her back and have a ride to
her cave. He was very fond of the deer too, and would often put his arms
Page 45
round the creature’s neck to show that its long horns did not frighten him.
Great was the fun they all had together.
One day, as usual, Kintaro went up into the mountains, followed by the
bear, the deer, the monkey, and the hare. After walking for some time up hill
and down dale and over rough roads, they suddenly came out upon a wide
and grassy plain covered with pretty wild flowers.
Here, indeed, was a nice place where they could all have a good romp
together. The deer rubbed his horns against a tree for pleasure, the monkey
scratched his back, the hare smoothed his long ears, and the bear gave a
grunt of satisfaction.
Kintaro said, “Here is a place for a good game. What do you all say to a
wrestling match?”
The bear being the biggest and the oldest, answered for the others:
“That will be great fun,” said she. “I am the strongest animal, so I will
make the platform for the wrestlers;” and she set to work with a will to dig
up the earth and to pat it into shape.
“All right,” said Kintaro, “I will look on while you all wrestle with each
other. I shall give a prize to the one who wins in each round.”
“What fun! we shall all try to get the prize,” said the bear.
The deer, the monkey and the hare set to work to help the bear raise the
platform on which they were all to wrestle. When this was finished, Kintaro
cried out:
“Now begin! the monkey and the hare shall open the sports and the deer
shall be umpire. Now, Mr. Deer, you are to be umpire!”
“He, he!” answered the deer. “I will be umpire. Now, Mr. Monkey and
Mr. Hare, if you are both ready, please walk out and take your places on the
platform.”
Then the monkey and the hare both hopped out, quickly and nimbly, to
the wrestling platform. The deer, as umpire, stood between the two and
called out:
“Red-back! Red-back!” (this to the monkey, who has a red back in
Japan). “Are you ready?”
Then he turned to the hare:
“Long-ears! Long-ears! are you ready?”
Great was the fun they all had together.
One day, as usual, Kintaro went up into the mountains, followed by the
bear, the deer, the monkey, and the hare. After walking for some time up hill
and down dale and over rough roads, they suddenly came out upon a wide
and grassy plain covered with pretty wild flowers.
Here, indeed, was a nice place where they could all have a good romp
together. The deer rubbed his horns against a tree for pleasure, the monkey
scratched his back, the hare smoothed his long ears, and the bear gave a
grunt of satisfaction.
Kintaro said, “Here is a place for a good game. What do you all say to a
wrestling match?”
The bear being the biggest and the oldest, answered for the others:
“That will be great fun,” said she. “I am the strongest animal, so I will
make the platform for the wrestlers;” and she set to work with a will to dig
up the earth and to pat it into shape.
“All right,” said Kintaro, “I will look on while you all wrestle with each
other. I shall give a prize to the one who wins in each round.”
“What fun! we shall all try to get the prize,” said the bear.
The deer, the monkey and the hare set to work to help the bear raise the
platform on which they were all to wrestle. When this was finished, Kintaro
cried out:
“Now begin! the monkey and the hare shall open the sports and the deer
shall be umpire. Now, Mr. Deer, you are to be umpire!”
“He, he!” answered the deer. “I will be umpire. Now, Mr. Monkey and
Mr. Hare, if you are both ready, please walk out and take your places on the
platform.”
Then the monkey and the hare both hopped out, quickly and nimbly, to
the wrestling platform. The deer, as umpire, stood between the two and
called out:
“Red-back! Red-back!” (this to the monkey, who has a red back in
Japan). “Are you ready?”
Then he turned to the hare:
“Long-ears! Long-ears! are you ready?”
Page 46
Both the little wrestlers faced each other while the deer raised a leaf on
high as signal. When he dropped the leaf the monkey and the hare rushed
upon each other, crying “Yoisho, yoisho!”
While the monkey and the hare wrestled, the deer called out
encouragingly or shouted warnings to each of them as the hare or the
monkey pushed each other near the edge of the platform and were in danger
of falling over.
“Red-back! Red-back! stand your ground!” called out the deer.
“Long-ears! Long-ears! be strong, be strong—don’t let the monkey beat
you!” grunted the bear.
So the monkey and the hare, encouraged by their friends, tried their very
hardest to beat each other. The hare at last gained on the monkey. The
monkey seemed to trip up, and the hare giving him a good push sent him
flying off the platform with a bound.
The poor monkey sat up rubbing his back, and his face was very long as
he screamed angrily. “Oh, oh! how my back hurts—my back hurts me!”
Seeing the monkey in this plight on the ground, the deer holding his leaf
on high said:
“This round is finished—the hare has won.”
Kintaro then opened his luncheon box and taking out a rice-dumpling,
gave it to the hare saying:
“Here is your prize, and you have earned, it well!”
Now the monkey got up looking very cross, and as they say in Japan “his
stomach stood up,” for he felt that he had not been fairly beaten. So he said
to Kintaro and the others who were standing by:
“I have not been fairly beaten. My foot slipped and I tumbled. Please
give me another chance and let the hare wrestle with me for another round.”
Then Kintaro consenting, the hare and the monkey began to wrestle
again. Now, as every one knows, the monkey is a cunning animal by nature,
and he made up his mind to get the best of the hare this time if it were
possible. To do this, he thought that the best and surest way would be to get
hold of the hare’s long ear. This he soon managed to do. The hare was quite
thrown off his guard by the pain of having his long ear pulled so hard, and
the monkey seizing his opportunity at last, caught hold of one of the hare’s
high as signal. When he dropped the leaf the monkey and the hare rushed
upon each other, crying “Yoisho, yoisho!”
While the monkey and the hare wrestled, the deer called out
encouragingly or shouted warnings to each of them as the hare or the
monkey pushed each other near the edge of the platform and were in danger
of falling over.
“Red-back! Red-back! stand your ground!” called out the deer.
“Long-ears! Long-ears! be strong, be strong—don’t let the monkey beat
you!” grunted the bear.
So the monkey and the hare, encouraged by their friends, tried their very
hardest to beat each other. The hare at last gained on the monkey. The
monkey seemed to trip up, and the hare giving him a good push sent him
flying off the platform with a bound.
The poor monkey sat up rubbing his back, and his face was very long as
he screamed angrily. “Oh, oh! how my back hurts—my back hurts me!”
Seeing the monkey in this plight on the ground, the deer holding his leaf
on high said:
“This round is finished—the hare has won.”
Kintaro then opened his luncheon box and taking out a rice-dumpling,
gave it to the hare saying:
“Here is your prize, and you have earned, it well!”
Now the monkey got up looking very cross, and as they say in Japan “his
stomach stood up,” for he felt that he had not been fairly beaten. So he said
to Kintaro and the others who were standing by:
“I have not been fairly beaten. My foot slipped and I tumbled. Please
give me another chance and let the hare wrestle with me for another round.”
Then Kintaro consenting, the hare and the monkey began to wrestle
again. Now, as every one knows, the monkey is a cunning animal by nature,
and he made up his mind to get the best of the hare this time if it were
possible. To do this, he thought that the best and surest way would be to get
hold of the hare’s long ear. This he soon managed to do. The hare was quite
thrown off his guard by the pain of having his long ear pulled so hard, and
the monkey seizing his opportunity at last, caught hold of one of the hare’s
Page 47
legs and sent him sprawling in the middle of the dais. The monkey was now
the victor and received, a rice-dumpling from Kintaro, which pleased him
so much that he quite forgot his sore back.
The deer now came up and asked the hare if he felt ready for another
round, and if so whether he would try a round with him, and the hare
consenting, they both stood up to wrestle. The bear came forward as
umpire.
The deer with long horns and the hare with long ears, it must have been
an amusing sight to those who watched this queer match. Suddenly the deer
went down on one of his knees, and the bear with the leaf on high declared
him beaten. In this way, sometimes the one, sometimes the other,
conquering, the little party amused themselves till they were tired.
At last Kintaro got up and said:
“This is enough for to-day. What a nice place we have found for
wrestling; let us come again to-morrow. Now, we will all go home. Come
along!” So saying, Kintaro led the way while the animals followed.
After walking some little distance they came out on the banks of a river
flowing through a valley. Kintaro and his four furry friends stood and
looked about for some means of crossing. Bridge there was none. The river
rushed “don, don” on its way. All the animals looked serious, wondering
how they could cross the stream and get home that evening.
Kintaro, however, said:
“Wait a moment. I will make a good bridge for you all in a few minutes.”
The bear, the deer, the monkey and the hare looked at him to see what he
would do now.
Kintaro went from one tree to another that grew along the river bank. At
last he stopped in front of a very large tree that was growing at the water’s
edge. He took hold of the trunk and pulled it with all his might, once, twice,
thrice! At the third pull, so great was Kintaro’s strength that the roots gave
way, and “meri, meri” (crash, crash), over fell the tree, forming an excellent
bridge across the stream.
“There,” said Kintaro, “what do you think of my bridge? It is quite safe,
so follow me,” and he stepped across first. The four animals followed.
Never had they seen any one so strong before, and they all exclaimed:
“How strong he is! how strong he is!”
the victor and received, a rice-dumpling from Kintaro, which pleased him
so much that he quite forgot his sore back.
The deer now came up and asked the hare if he felt ready for another
round, and if so whether he would try a round with him, and the hare
consenting, they both stood up to wrestle. The bear came forward as
umpire.
The deer with long horns and the hare with long ears, it must have been
an amusing sight to those who watched this queer match. Suddenly the deer
went down on one of his knees, and the bear with the leaf on high declared
him beaten. In this way, sometimes the one, sometimes the other,
conquering, the little party amused themselves till they were tired.
At last Kintaro got up and said:
“This is enough for to-day. What a nice place we have found for
wrestling; let us come again to-morrow. Now, we will all go home. Come
along!” So saying, Kintaro led the way while the animals followed.
After walking some little distance they came out on the banks of a river
flowing through a valley. Kintaro and his four furry friends stood and
looked about for some means of crossing. Bridge there was none. The river
rushed “don, don” on its way. All the animals looked serious, wondering
how they could cross the stream and get home that evening.
Kintaro, however, said:
“Wait a moment. I will make a good bridge for you all in a few minutes.”
The bear, the deer, the monkey and the hare looked at him to see what he
would do now.
Kintaro went from one tree to another that grew along the river bank. At
last he stopped in front of a very large tree that was growing at the water’s
edge. He took hold of the trunk and pulled it with all his might, once, twice,
thrice! At the third pull, so great was Kintaro’s strength that the roots gave
way, and “meri, meri” (crash, crash), over fell the tree, forming an excellent
bridge across the stream.
“There,” said Kintaro, “what do you think of my bridge? It is quite safe,
so follow me,” and he stepped across first. The four animals followed.
Never had they seen any one so strong before, and they all exclaimed:
“How strong he is! how strong he is!”
Page 48
While all this was going on by the river a woodcutter, who happened to
be standing on a rock overlooking the stream, had seen all that passed
beneath him. He watched with great surprise Kintaro and his animal
companions. He rubbed his eyes to be sure that he was not dreaming when
he saw this boy pull over a tree by the roots and throw it across the stream
to form a bridge.
The woodcutter, for such he seemed to be by his dress, marveled at all he
saw, and said to himself:
“This is no ordinary child. Whose son can he be? I will find out before
this day is done.”
He hastened after the strange party and crossed the bridge behind them.
Kintaro knew nothing of all this, and little guessed that he was being
followed. On reaching the other side of the river he and the animals
separated, they to their lairs in the woods and he to his mother, who was
waiting for him.
As soon as he entered the cottage, which stood like a matchbox in the
heart of the pine-woods, he went to greet his mother, saying:
“Okkasan (mother), here I am!”
“O, Kimbo!” said his mother with a bright smile, glad to see her boy
home safe after the long day. “How late you are to-day. I feared that
something had happened to you. Where have you been all the time?”
“I took my four friends, the bear, the deer, the monkey, and the hare, up
into the hills, and there I made them try a wrestling match, to see which was
the strongest. We all enjoyed the sport, and are going to the same place to-
morrow to have another match.”
“Now tell me who is the strongest of all?” asked his mother, pretending
not to know.
“Oh, mother,” said Kintaro, “don’t you know that I am the strongest?
There was no need for me to wrestle with any of them.”
“But next to you then, who is the strongest?”
“The bear comes next to me in strength,” answered Kintaro.
“And after the bear?” asked his mother again.
“Next to the bear it is not easy to say which is the strongest, for the deer,
the monkey, and the hare all seem to be as strong as each other,” said
be standing on a rock overlooking the stream, had seen all that passed
beneath him. He watched with great surprise Kintaro and his animal
companions. He rubbed his eyes to be sure that he was not dreaming when
he saw this boy pull over a tree by the roots and throw it across the stream
to form a bridge.
The woodcutter, for such he seemed to be by his dress, marveled at all he
saw, and said to himself:
“This is no ordinary child. Whose son can he be? I will find out before
this day is done.”
He hastened after the strange party and crossed the bridge behind them.
Kintaro knew nothing of all this, and little guessed that he was being
followed. On reaching the other side of the river he and the animals
separated, they to their lairs in the woods and he to his mother, who was
waiting for him.
As soon as he entered the cottage, which stood like a matchbox in the
heart of the pine-woods, he went to greet his mother, saying:
“Okkasan (mother), here I am!”
“O, Kimbo!” said his mother with a bright smile, glad to see her boy
home safe after the long day. “How late you are to-day. I feared that
something had happened to you. Where have you been all the time?”
“I took my four friends, the bear, the deer, the monkey, and the hare, up
into the hills, and there I made them try a wrestling match, to see which was
the strongest. We all enjoyed the sport, and are going to the same place to-
morrow to have another match.”
“Now tell me who is the strongest of all?” asked his mother, pretending
not to know.
“Oh, mother,” said Kintaro, “don’t you know that I am the strongest?
There was no need for me to wrestle with any of them.”
“But next to you then, who is the strongest?”
“The bear comes next to me in strength,” answered Kintaro.
“And after the bear?” asked his mother again.
“Next to the bear it is not easy to say which is the strongest, for the deer,
the monkey, and the hare all seem to be as strong as each other,” said
Page 49
Kintaro.
Suddenly Kintaro and his mother were startled by a voice from outside.
“Listen to me, little boy! Next time you go, take this old man with you to
the wrestling match. He would like to join the sport too!”
It was the old woodcutter who had followed Kintaro from the river. He
slipped off his clogs and entered the cottage. Yama-uba and her son were
both taken by surprise. They looked at the intruder wonderingly and saw
that he was some one they had never seen before.
“Who are you?” they both exclaimed.
Then the woodcutter laughed and said:
“It does not matter who I am yet, but let us see who has the strongest arm
—this boy or myself?”
Then Kintaro, who had lived all his life in the forest, answered the old
man without any ceremony, saying:
“We will have a try if you wish it, but you must not be angry whoever is
beaten.”
Then Kintaro and the woodcutter both put out their right arms and
grasped each other’s hands. For a long time Kintaro and the old man
wrestled together in this way, each trying to bend the other’s arm, but the
old man was very strong, and the strange pair were evenly matched. At last
the old man desisted, declaring it a drawn game.
“You are, indeed, a very strong child. There are few men who can boast
of the strength of my right arm!” said the woodcutter. “I saw you first on
the banks of the river a few hours ago, when you pulled up that large tree to
make a bridge across the torrent. Hardly able to believe what I saw I
followed you home. Your strength of arm, which I have just tried, proves
what I saw this afternoon. When you are full-grown you will surely be the
strongest man in all Japan. It is a pity that you are hidden away in these
wild mountains.”
Then he turned to Kintaro’s mother:
“And you, mother, have you no thought of taking your child to the
Capital, and of teaching him to carry a sword as befits a samurai (a
Japanese knight)?”
Suddenly Kintaro and his mother were startled by a voice from outside.
“Listen to me, little boy! Next time you go, take this old man with you to
the wrestling match. He would like to join the sport too!”
It was the old woodcutter who had followed Kintaro from the river. He
slipped off his clogs and entered the cottage. Yama-uba and her son were
both taken by surprise. They looked at the intruder wonderingly and saw
that he was some one they had never seen before.
“Who are you?” they both exclaimed.
Then the woodcutter laughed and said:
“It does not matter who I am yet, but let us see who has the strongest arm
—this boy or myself?”
Then Kintaro, who had lived all his life in the forest, answered the old
man without any ceremony, saying:
“We will have a try if you wish it, but you must not be angry whoever is
beaten.”
Then Kintaro and the woodcutter both put out their right arms and
grasped each other’s hands. For a long time Kintaro and the old man
wrestled together in this way, each trying to bend the other’s arm, but the
old man was very strong, and the strange pair were evenly matched. At last
the old man desisted, declaring it a drawn game.
“You are, indeed, a very strong child. There are few men who can boast
of the strength of my right arm!” said the woodcutter. “I saw you first on
the banks of the river a few hours ago, when you pulled up that large tree to
make a bridge across the torrent. Hardly able to believe what I saw I
followed you home. Your strength of arm, which I have just tried, proves
what I saw this afternoon. When you are full-grown you will surely be the
strongest man in all Japan. It is a pity that you are hidden away in these
wild mountains.”
Then he turned to Kintaro’s mother:
“And you, mother, have you no thought of taking your child to the
Capital, and of teaching him to carry a sword as befits a samurai (a
Japanese knight)?”
Page 50
“You are very kind to take so much interest in my son.” replied the
mother; “but he is as you see, wild and uneducated, and I fear it would be
very difficult to do as you say. Because of his great strength as an infant I
hid him away in this unknown part of the country, for he hurt every one that
came near him. I have often wished that I could, one day, see my boy a
knight wearing two swords, but as we have no influential friend to
introduce us at the Capital, I fear my hope will never come true.”
“You need not trouble yourself about that. To tell you the truth I am no
woodcutter! I am one of the great generals of Japan. My name is Sadamitsu,
and I am a vassal of the powerful Lord Minamoto-no-Raiko. He ordered me
to go round the country and look for boys who give promise of remarkable
strength, so that they may be trained as soldiers for his army. I thought that I
could best do this by assuming the disguise of a woodcutter. By good
fortune, I have thus unexpectedly come across your son. Now if you really
wish him to be a SAMURAI (a knight), I will take him and present him to
the Lord Raiko as a candidate for his service. What do you say to this?”
As the kind general gradually unfolded his plan the mother’s heart was
filled with a great joy. She saw that here was a wonderful chance of the one
wish of her life being fulfilled—that of seeing Kintaro a SAMURAI before
she died.
Bowing her head to the ground, she replied:
“I will then intrust my son to you if you really mean what you say.”
Kintaro had all this time been sitting by his mother’s side listening to
what they said. When his mother finished speaking, he exclaimed:
“Oh, joy! joy! I am to go with the general and one day I shall be a
SAMURAI!”
Thus Kintaro’s fate was settled, and the general decided to start for the
Capital at once, taking Kintaro with him. It need hardly be said that Yama-
uba was sad at parting with her boy, for he was all that was left to her. But
she hid her grief with a strong face, as they say in Japan. She knew that it
was for her boy’s good that he should leave her now, and she must not
discourage him just as he was setting out. Kintaro promised never to forget
her, and said that as soon as he was a knight wearing two swords he would
build her a home and take care of her in her old age.
mother; “but he is as you see, wild and uneducated, and I fear it would be
very difficult to do as you say. Because of his great strength as an infant I
hid him away in this unknown part of the country, for he hurt every one that
came near him. I have often wished that I could, one day, see my boy a
knight wearing two swords, but as we have no influential friend to
introduce us at the Capital, I fear my hope will never come true.”
“You need not trouble yourself about that. To tell you the truth I am no
woodcutter! I am one of the great generals of Japan. My name is Sadamitsu,
and I am a vassal of the powerful Lord Minamoto-no-Raiko. He ordered me
to go round the country and look for boys who give promise of remarkable
strength, so that they may be trained as soldiers for his army. I thought that I
could best do this by assuming the disguise of a woodcutter. By good
fortune, I have thus unexpectedly come across your son. Now if you really
wish him to be a SAMURAI (a knight), I will take him and present him to
the Lord Raiko as a candidate for his service. What do you say to this?”
As the kind general gradually unfolded his plan the mother’s heart was
filled with a great joy. She saw that here was a wonderful chance of the one
wish of her life being fulfilled—that of seeing Kintaro a SAMURAI before
she died.
Bowing her head to the ground, she replied:
“I will then intrust my son to you if you really mean what you say.”
Kintaro had all this time been sitting by his mother’s side listening to
what they said. When his mother finished speaking, he exclaimed:
“Oh, joy! joy! I am to go with the general and one day I shall be a
SAMURAI!”
Thus Kintaro’s fate was settled, and the general decided to start for the
Capital at once, taking Kintaro with him. It need hardly be said that Yama-
uba was sad at parting with her boy, for he was all that was left to her. But
she hid her grief with a strong face, as they say in Japan. She knew that it
was for her boy’s good that he should leave her now, and she must not
discourage him just as he was setting out. Kintaro promised never to forget
her, and said that as soon as he was a knight wearing two swords he would
build her a home and take care of her in her old age.
Page 51
All the animals, those he had tamed to serve him, the bear, the deer, the
monkey, and the hare, as soon as they found out that he was going away,
came to ask if they might attend him as usual. When they learned that he
was going away for good they followed him to the foot of the mountain to
see him off.
“Kimbo,” said his mother, “mind and be a good boy.”
“Mr. Kintaro,” said the faithful animals, “we wish you good health on
your travels.”
Then they all climbed a tree to see the last of him, and from that height
they watched him and his shadow gradually grow smaller and smaller, till
he was lost to sight.
The general Sadamitsu went on his way rejoicing at having so
unexpectedly found such a prodigy as Kintaro.
Having arrived at their destination the general took Kintaro at once to his
Lord, Minamoto-no-Raiko, and told him all about Kintaro and how he had
found the child. Lord Raiko was delighted with the story, and having
commanded Kintaro to be brought to him, made him one of his vassals at
once.
Lord Raiko’s army was famous for its band called “The Four Braves.”
These warriors were chosen by himself from amongst the bravest and
strongest of his soldiers, and the small and well-picked band was
distinguished throughout the whole of Japan for the dauntless courage of its
men.
When Kintaro grew up to be a man his master made him the Chief of the
Four Braves. He was by far the strongest of them all. Soon after this event,
news was brought to the city that a cannibal monster had taken up his abode
not far away and that people were stricken with fear. Lord Raiko ordered
Kintaro to the rescue. He immediately started off, delighted at the prospect
of trying his sword.
Surprising the monster in its den, he made short work of cutting off its
great head, which he carried back in triumph to his master.
Kintaro now rose to be the greatest hero of his country, and great was the
power and honor and wealth that came to him. He now kept his promise and
built a comfortable home for his old mother, who lived happily with him in
the Capital to the end of her days.
monkey, and the hare, as soon as they found out that he was going away,
came to ask if they might attend him as usual. When they learned that he
was going away for good they followed him to the foot of the mountain to
see him off.
“Kimbo,” said his mother, “mind and be a good boy.”
“Mr. Kintaro,” said the faithful animals, “we wish you good health on
your travels.”
Then they all climbed a tree to see the last of him, and from that height
they watched him and his shadow gradually grow smaller and smaller, till
he was lost to sight.
The general Sadamitsu went on his way rejoicing at having so
unexpectedly found such a prodigy as Kintaro.
Having arrived at their destination the general took Kintaro at once to his
Lord, Minamoto-no-Raiko, and told him all about Kintaro and how he had
found the child. Lord Raiko was delighted with the story, and having
commanded Kintaro to be brought to him, made him one of his vassals at
once.
Lord Raiko’s army was famous for its band called “The Four Braves.”
These warriors were chosen by himself from amongst the bravest and
strongest of his soldiers, and the small and well-picked band was
distinguished throughout the whole of Japan for the dauntless courage of its
men.
When Kintaro grew up to be a man his master made him the Chief of the
Four Braves. He was by far the strongest of them all. Soon after this event,
news was brought to the city that a cannibal monster had taken up his abode
not far away and that people were stricken with fear. Lord Raiko ordered
Kintaro to the rescue. He immediately started off, delighted at the prospect
of trying his sword.
Surprising the monster in its den, he made short work of cutting off its
great head, which he carried back in triumph to his master.
Kintaro now rose to be the greatest hero of his country, and great was the
power and honor and wealth that came to him. He now kept his promise and
built a comfortable home for his old mother, who lived happily with him in
the Capital to the end of her days.
Page 52
Is not this the story of a great hero?
Page 53
THE STORY OF PRINCESS HASE.
A STORY OF OLD JAPAN
Many, many years ago there lived in Nara, the ancient Capital of Japan, a
wise State minister, by name Prince Toyonari Fujiwara. His wife was a
noble, good, and beautiful woman called Princess Murasaki (Violet). They
had been married by their respective families according to Japanese custom
when very young, and had lived together happily ever since. They had,
however, one cause for great sorrow, for as the years went by no child was
born to them. This made them very unhappy, for they both longed to see a
child of their own who would grow up to gladden their old age, carry on the
family name, and keep up the ancestral rites when they were dead. The
Prince and his lovely wife, after long consultation and much thought,
determined to make a pilgrimage to the temple of Hase-no-Kwannon
(Goddess of Mercy at Hase), for they believed, according to the beautiful
tradition of their religion, that the Mother of Mercy, Kwannon, comes to
answer the prayers of mortals in the form that they need the most. Surely
after all these years of prayer she would come to them in the form of a
beloved child in answer to their special pilgrimage, for that was the greatest
need of their two lives. Everything else they had that this life could give
them, but it was all as nothing because the cry of their hearts was
unsatisfied.
So the Prince Toyonari and his wife went to the temple of Kwannon at
Hase and stayed there for a long time, both daily offering incense and
praying to Kwannon, the Heavenly Mother, to grant them the desire of their
whole lives. And their prayer was answered.
A daughter was born at last to the Princess Murasaki, and great was the
joy of her heart. On presenting the child to her husband, they both decided
to call her Hase-Hime, or the Princess of Hase, because she was the gift of
A STORY OF OLD JAPAN
Many, many years ago there lived in Nara, the ancient Capital of Japan, a
wise State minister, by name Prince Toyonari Fujiwara. His wife was a
noble, good, and beautiful woman called Princess Murasaki (Violet). They
had been married by their respective families according to Japanese custom
when very young, and had lived together happily ever since. They had,
however, one cause for great sorrow, for as the years went by no child was
born to them. This made them very unhappy, for they both longed to see a
child of their own who would grow up to gladden their old age, carry on the
family name, and keep up the ancestral rites when they were dead. The
Prince and his lovely wife, after long consultation and much thought,
determined to make a pilgrimage to the temple of Hase-no-Kwannon
(Goddess of Mercy at Hase), for they believed, according to the beautiful
tradition of their religion, that the Mother of Mercy, Kwannon, comes to
answer the prayers of mortals in the form that they need the most. Surely
after all these years of prayer she would come to them in the form of a
beloved child in answer to their special pilgrimage, for that was the greatest
need of their two lives. Everything else they had that this life could give
them, but it was all as nothing because the cry of their hearts was
unsatisfied.
So the Prince Toyonari and his wife went to the temple of Kwannon at
Hase and stayed there for a long time, both daily offering incense and
praying to Kwannon, the Heavenly Mother, to grant them the desire of their
whole lives. And their prayer was answered.
A daughter was born at last to the Princess Murasaki, and great was the
joy of her heart. On presenting the child to her husband, they both decided
to call her Hase-Hime, or the Princess of Hase, because she was the gift of
Page 54
the Kwannon at that place. They both reared her with great care and
tenderness, and the child grew in strength and beauty.
When the little girl was five years old her mother fell dangerously ill and
all the doctors and their medicines could not save her. A little before she
breathed her last she called her daughter to her, and gently stroking her
head, said:
“Hase-Hime, do you know that your mother cannot live any longer?
Though I die, you must grow up a good girl. Do your best not to give
trouble to your nurse or any other of your family. Perhaps your father will
marry again and some one will fill my place as your mother. If so do not
grieve for me, but look upon your father’s second wife as your true mother,
and be obedient and filial to both her and your father. Remember when you
are grown up to be submissive to those who are your superiors, and to be
kind to all those who are under you. Don’t forget this. I die with the hope
that you will grow up a model woman.”
Hase-Hime listened in an attitude of respect while her mother spoke, and
promised to do all that she was told. There is a proverb which says “As the
soul is at three so it is at one hundred,” and so Hase-Hime grew up as her
mother had wished, a good and obedient little Princess, though she was now
too young to understand how great was the loss of her mother.
Not long after the death of his first wife, Prince Toyonari married again, a
lady of noble birth named Princess Terute. Very different in character, alas!
to the good and wise Princess Murasaki, this woman had a cruel, bad heart.
She did not love her step-daughter at all, and was often very unkind to the
little motherless girl, saying to herself:
“This is not my child! this is not my child!”
But Hase-Hime bore every unkindness with patience, and even waited
upon her step-mother kindly and obeyed her in every way and never gave
any trouble, just as she had been trained by her own good mother, so that
the Lady Terute had no cause for complaint against her.
The little Princess was very diligent, and her favorite studies were music
and poetry. She would spend several hours practicing every day, and her
father had the most proficient of masters he could find to teach her the koto
(Japanese harp), the art of writing letters and verse. When she was twelve
years of age she could play so beautifully that she and her step-mother were
summoned to the Palace to perform before the Emperor.
tenderness, and the child grew in strength and beauty.
When the little girl was five years old her mother fell dangerously ill and
all the doctors and their medicines could not save her. A little before she
breathed her last she called her daughter to her, and gently stroking her
head, said:
“Hase-Hime, do you know that your mother cannot live any longer?
Though I die, you must grow up a good girl. Do your best not to give
trouble to your nurse or any other of your family. Perhaps your father will
marry again and some one will fill my place as your mother. If so do not
grieve for me, but look upon your father’s second wife as your true mother,
and be obedient and filial to both her and your father. Remember when you
are grown up to be submissive to those who are your superiors, and to be
kind to all those who are under you. Don’t forget this. I die with the hope
that you will grow up a model woman.”
Hase-Hime listened in an attitude of respect while her mother spoke, and
promised to do all that she was told. There is a proverb which says “As the
soul is at three so it is at one hundred,” and so Hase-Hime grew up as her
mother had wished, a good and obedient little Princess, though she was now
too young to understand how great was the loss of her mother.
Not long after the death of his first wife, Prince Toyonari married again, a
lady of noble birth named Princess Terute. Very different in character, alas!
to the good and wise Princess Murasaki, this woman had a cruel, bad heart.
She did not love her step-daughter at all, and was often very unkind to the
little motherless girl, saying to herself:
“This is not my child! this is not my child!”
But Hase-Hime bore every unkindness with patience, and even waited
upon her step-mother kindly and obeyed her in every way and never gave
any trouble, just as she had been trained by her own good mother, so that
the Lady Terute had no cause for complaint against her.
The little Princess was very diligent, and her favorite studies were music
and poetry. She would spend several hours practicing every day, and her
father had the most proficient of masters he could find to teach her the koto
(Japanese harp), the art of writing letters and verse. When she was twelve
years of age she could play so beautifully that she and her step-mother were
summoned to the Palace to perform before the Emperor.
Page 55
It was the Festival of the Cherry Flowers, and there were great festivities
at the Court. The Emperor threw himself into the enjoyment of the season,
and commanded that Princess Hase should perform before him on the koto,
and that her mother Princess Terute should accompany her on the flute.
The Emperor sat on a raised dais, before which was hung a curtain of
finely-sliced bamboo and purple tassels, so that His Majesty might see all
and not be seen, for no ordinary subject was allowed to look upon his
sacred face.
Hase-Hime was a skilled musician though so young, and often astonished
her masters by her wonderful memory and talent. On this momentous
occasion she played well. But Princess Terute, her step-mother, who was a
lazy woman and never took the trouble to practice daily, broke down in her
accompaniment and had to request one of the Court ladies to take her place.
This was a great disgrace, and she was furiously jealous to think that she
had failed where her step-daughter succeeded; and to make matters worse
the Emperor sent many beautiful gifts to the little Princess to reward her for
playing so well at the Palace.
There was also now another reason why Princess Terute hated her step-
daughter, for she had had the good fortune to have a son born to her, and in
her inmost heart she kept saying:
“If only Hase-Hime were not here, my son would have all the love of his
father.”
And never having learned to control herself, she allowed this wicked
thought to grow into the awful desire of taking her step-daughter’s life.
So one day she secretly ordered some poison and poisoned some sweet
wine. This poisoned wine she put into a bottle. Into another similar bottle
she poured some good wine. It was the occasion of the Boys’ Festival on
the fifth of May, and Hase-Hime was playing with her little brother. All his
toys of warriors and heroes were spread out and she was telling him
wonderful stories about each of them. They were both enjoying themselves
and laughing merrily with their attendants when his mother entered with the
two bottles of wine and some delicious cakes.
“You are both so good and happy.” said the wicked Princess Terute with a
smile, “that I have brought you some sweet wine as a reward—and here are
some nice cakes for my good children.”
at the Court. The Emperor threw himself into the enjoyment of the season,
and commanded that Princess Hase should perform before him on the koto,
and that her mother Princess Terute should accompany her on the flute.
The Emperor sat on a raised dais, before which was hung a curtain of
finely-sliced bamboo and purple tassels, so that His Majesty might see all
and not be seen, for no ordinary subject was allowed to look upon his
sacred face.
Hase-Hime was a skilled musician though so young, and often astonished
her masters by her wonderful memory and talent. On this momentous
occasion she played well. But Princess Terute, her step-mother, who was a
lazy woman and never took the trouble to practice daily, broke down in her
accompaniment and had to request one of the Court ladies to take her place.
This was a great disgrace, and she was furiously jealous to think that she
had failed where her step-daughter succeeded; and to make matters worse
the Emperor sent many beautiful gifts to the little Princess to reward her for
playing so well at the Palace.
There was also now another reason why Princess Terute hated her step-
daughter, for she had had the good fortune to have a son born to her, and in
her inmost heart she kept saying:
“If only Hase-Hime were not here, my son would have all the love of his
father.”
And never having learned to control herself, she allowed this wicked
thought to grow into the awful desire of taking her step-daughter’s life.
So one day she secretly ordered some poison and poisoned some sweet
wine. This poisoned wine she put into a bottle. Into another similar bottle
she poured some good wine. It was the occasion of the Boys’ Festival on
the fifth of May, and Hase-Hime was playing with her little brother. All his
toys of warriors and heroes were spread out and she was telling him
wonderful stories about each of them. They were both enjoying themselves
and laughing merrily with their attendants when his mother entered with the
two bottles of wine and some delicious cakes.
“You are both so good and happy.” said the wicked Princess Terute with a
smile, “that I have brought you some sweet wine as a reward—and here are
some nice cakes for my good children.”
Page 56
And she filled two cups from the different bottles.
Hase-Hime, never dreaming of the dreadful part her step-mother was
acting, took one of the cups of wine and gave to her little step brother the
other that had been poured out for him.
The wicked woman had carefully marked the poisoned bottle, but on
coming into the room she had grown nervous, and pouring out the wine
hurriedly had unconsciously given the poisoned cup to her own child. All
this time she was anxiously watching the little Princess, but to her
amazement no change whatever took place in the young girl’s face.
Suddenly the little boy screamed and threw himself on the floor, doubled up
with pain. His mother flew to him, taking the precaution to upset the two
tiny jars of wine which she had brought into the room, and lifted him up.
The attendants rushed for the doctor, but nothing could save the child—he
died within the hour in his mother’s arms. Doctors did not know much in
those ancient times, and it was thought that the wine had disagreed with the
boy, causing convulsions of which he died.
Thus was the wicked woman punished in losing her own child when she
had tried to do away with her step-daughter; but instead of blaming herself
she began to hate Hase-Hime more than ever in the bitterness and
wretchedness of her own heart, and she eagerly watched for an opportunity
to do her harm, which was, however, long in coming.
When Hase-Hime was thirteen years of age, she had already become
mentioned as a poetess of some merit. This was an accomplishment very
much cultivated by the women of old Japan and one held in high esteem.
It was the rainy season at Nara, and floods were reported every day as
doing damage in the neighborhood. The river Tatsuta, which flowed
through the Imperial Palace grounds, was swollen to the top of its banks,
and the roaring of the torrents of water rushing along a narrow bed so
disturbed the Emperor’s rest day and night, that a serious nervous disorder
was the result. An Imperial Edict was sent forth to all the Buddhist temples
commanding the priests to offer up continuous prayers to Heaven to stop
the noise of the flood. But this was of no avail.
Then it was whispered in Court circles that the Princess Hase, the
daughter of Prince Toyonari Fujiwara, second minister at Court, was the
most gifted poetess of the day, though still so young, and her masters
confirmed the report. Long ago, a beautiful and gifted maiden-poetess had
Hase-Hime, never dreaming of the dreadful part her step-mother was
acting, took one of the cups of wine and gave to her little step brother the
other that had been poured out for him.
The wicked woman had carefully marked the poisoned bottle, but on
coming into the room she had grown nervous, and pouring out the wine
hurriedly had unconsciously given the poisoned cup to her own child. All
this time she was anxiously watching the little Princess, but to her
amazement no change whatever took place in the young girl’s face.
Suddenly the little boy screamed and threw himself on the floor, doubled up
with pain. His mother flew to him, taking the precaution to upset the two
tiny jars of wine which she had brought into the room, and lifted him up.
The attendants rushed for the doctor, but nothing could save the child—he
died within the hour in his mother’s arms. Doctors did not know much in
those ancient times, and it was thought that the wine had disagreed with the
boy, causing convulsions of which he died.
Thus was the wicked woman punished in losing her own child when she
had tried to do away with her step-daughter; but instead of blaming herself
she began to hate Hase-Hime more than ever in the bitterness and
wretchedness of her own heart, and she eagerly watched for an opportunity
to do her harm, which was, however, long in coming.
When Hase-Hime was thirteen years of age, she had already become
mentioned as a poetess of some merit. This was an accomplishment very
much cultivated by the women of old Japan and one held in high esteem.
It was the rainy season at Nara, and floods were reported every day as
doing damage in the neighborhood. The river Tatsuta, which flowed
through the Imperial Palace grounds, was swollen to the top of its banks,
and the roaring of the torrents of water rushing along a narrow bed so
disturbed the Emperor’s rest day and night, that a serious nervous disorder
was the result. An Imperial Edict was sent forth to all the Buddhist temples
commanding the priests to offer up continuous prayers to Heaven to stop
the noise of the flood. But this was of no avail.
Then it was whispered in Court circles that the Princess Hase, the
daughter of Prince Toyonari Fujiwara, second minister at Court, was the
most gifted poetess of the day, though still so young, and her masters
confirmed the report. Long ago, a beautiful and gifted maiden-poetess had
Page 57
moved Heaven by praying in verse, had brought down rain upon a land
famished with drought—so said the ancient biographers of the poetess Ono-
no-Komachi. If the Princess Hase were to write a poem and offer it in
prayer, might it not stop the noise of the rushing river and remove the cause
of the Imperial illness? What the Court said at last reached the ears of the
Emperor himself, and he sent an order to the minister Prince Toyonari to
this effect.
Great indeed was Hase-Hime’s fear and astonishment when her father
sent for her and told her what was required of her. Heavy, indeed, was the
duty that was laid on her young shoulders—that of saving the Emperor’s
life by the merit of her verse.
At last the day came and her poem was finished. It was written on a
leaflet of paper heavily flecked with gold-dust. With her father and
attendants and some of the Court officials, she proceeded to the bank of the
roaring torrent and raising up her heart to Heaven, she read the poem she
had composed, aloud, lifting it heavenwards in her two hands.
Strange indeed it seemed to all those standing round. The waters ceased
their roaring, and the river was quiet in direct answer to her prayer. After
this the Emperor soon recovered his health.
His Majesty was highly pleased, and sent for her to the Palace and
rewarded her with the rank of Chinjo—that of Lieutenant-General—to
distinguish her. From that time she was called Chinjo-hime, or the
Lieutenant-General Princess, and respected and loved by all.
There was only one person who was not pleased at Hase-Hime’s success.
That one was her stepmother. Forever brooding over the death of her own
child whom she had killed when trying to poison her step-daughter, she had
the mortification of seeing her rise to power and honor, marked by Imperial
favor and the admiration of the whole Court. Her envy and jealousy burned
in her heart like fire. Many were the lies she carried to her husband about
Hase-Hime, but all to no purpose. He would listen to none of her tales,
telling her sharply that she was quite mistaken.
At last the step-mother, seizing the opportunity of her husband’s absence,
ordered one of her old servants to take the innocent girl to the Hibari
Mountains, the wildest part of the country, and to kill her there. She
invented a dreadful story about the little Princess, saying that this was the
only way to prevent disgrace falling upon the family—by killing her.
famished with drought—so said the ancient biographers of the poetess Ono-
no-Komachi. If the Princess Hase were to write a poem and offer it in
prayer, might it not stop the noise of the rushing river and remove the cause
of the Imperial illness? What the Court said at last reached the ears of the
Emperor himself, and he sent an order to the minister Prince Toyonari to
this effect.
Great indeed was Hase-Hime’s fear and astonishment when her father
sent for her and told her what was required of her. Heavy, indeed, was the
duty that was laid on her young shoulders—that of saving the Emperor’s
life by the merit of her verse.
At last the day came and her poem was finished. It was written on a
leaflet of paper heavily flecked with gold-dust. With her father and
attendants and some of the Court officials, she proceeded to the bank of the
roaring torrent and raising up her heart to Heaven, she read the poem she
had composed, aloud, lifting it heavenwards in her two hands.
Strange indeed it seemed to all those standing round. The waters ceased
their roaring, and the river was quiet in direct answer to her prayer. After
this the Emperor soon recovered his health.
His Majesty was highly pleased, and sent for her to the Palace and
rewarded her with the rank of Chinjo—that of Lieutenant-General—to
distinguish her. From that time she was called Chinjo-hime, or the
Lieutenant-General Princess, and respected and loved by all.
There was only one person who was not pleased at Hase-Hime’s success.
That one was her stepmother. Forever brooding over the death of her own
child whom she had killed when trying to poison her step-daughter, she had
the mortification of seeing her rise to power and honor, marked by Imperial
favor and the admiration of the whole Court. Her envy and jealousy burned
in her heart like fire. Many were the lies she carried to her husband about
Hase-Hime, but all to no purpose. He would listen to none of her tales,
telling her sharply that she was quite mistaken.
At last the step-mother, seizing the opportunity of her husband’s absence,
ordered one of her old servants to take the innocent girl to the Hibari
Mountains, the wildest part of the country, and to kill her there. She
invented a dreadful story about the little Princess, saying that this was the
only way to prevent disgrace falling upon the family—by killing her.
Page 58
Katoda, her vassal, was bound to obey his mistress. Anyhow, he saw that
it would be the wisest plan to pretend obedience in the absence of the girl’s
father, so he placed Hase-Hime in a palanquin and accompanied her to the
most solitary place he could find in the wild district. The poor child knew
there was no good in protesting to her unkind step-mother at being sent
away in this strange manner, so she went as she was told.
But the old servant knew that the young Princess was quite innocent of
all the things her step-mother had invented to him as reasons for her
outrageous orders, and he determined to save her life. Unless he killed her,
however, he could not return to his cruel task-mistress, so he decided to stay
out in the wilderness. With the help of some peasants he soon built a little
cottage, and having sent secretly for his wife to come, these two good old
people did all in their power to take care of the now unfortunate Princess.
She all the time trusted in her father, knowing that as soon as he returned
home and found her absent, he would search for her.
Prince Toyonari, after some weeks, came home, and was told by his wife
that his daughter Hime had done something wrong and had run away for
fear of being punished. He was nearly ill with anxiety. Every one in the
house told the same story—that Hase-Hime had suddenly disappeared, none
of them knew why or whither. For fear of scandal he kept the matter quiet
and searched everywhere he could think of, but all to no purpose.
One day, trying to forget his terrible worry, he called all his men together
and told them to make ready for a several days’ hunt in the mountains. They
were soon ready and mounted, waiting at the gate for their lord. He rode
hard and fast to the district of the Hibari Mountains, a great company
following him. He was soon far ahead of every one, and at last found
himself in a narrow picturesque valley.
Looking round and admiring the scenery, he noticed a tiny house on one
of the hills quite near, and then he distinctly heard a beautiful clear voice
reading aloud. Seized with curiosity as to who could be studying so
diligently in such a lonely spot, he dismounted, and leaving his horse to his
groom, he walked up the hillside and approached the cottage. As he drew
nearer his surprise increased, for he could see that the reader was a beautiful
girl. The cottage was wide open and she was sitting facing the view.
Listening attentively, he heard her reading the Buddhist scriptures with
great devotion. More and more curious, he hurried on to the tiny gate and
it would be the wisest plan to pretend obedience in the absence of the girl’s
father, so he placed Hase-Hime in a palanquin and accompanied her to the
most solitary place he could find in the wild district. The poor child knew
there was no good in protesting to her unkind step-mother at being sent
away in this strange manner, so she went as she was told.
But the old servant knew that the young Princess was quite innocent of
all the things her step-mother had invented to him as reasons for her
outrageous orders, and he determined to save her life. Unless he killed her,
however, he could not return to his cruel task-mistress, so he decided to stay
out in the wilderness. With the help of some peasants he soon built a little
cottage, and having sent secretly for his wife to come, these two good old
people did all in their power to take care of the now unfortunate Princess.
She all the time trusted in her father, knowing that as soon as he returned
home and found her absent, he would search for her.
Prince Toyonari, after some weeks, came home, and was told by his wife
that his daughter Hime had done something wrong and had run away for
fear of being punished. He was nearly ill with anxiety. Every one in the
house told the same story—that Hase-Hime had suddenly disappeared, none
of them knew why or whither. For fear of scandal he kept the matter quiet
and searched everywhere he could think of, but all to no purpose.
One day, trying to forget his terrible worry, he called all his men together
and told them to make ready for a several days’ hunt in the mountains. They
were soon ready and mounted, waiting at the gate for their lord. He rode
hard and fast to the district of the Hibari Mountains, a great company
following him. He was soon far ahead of every one, and at last found
himself in a narrow picturesque valley.
Looking round and admiring the scenery, he noticed a tiny house on one
of the hills quite near, and then he distinctly heard a beautiful clear voice
reading aloud. Seized with curiosity as to who could be studying so
diligently in such a lonely spot, he dismounted, and leaving his horse to his
groom, he walked up the hillside and approached the cottage. As he drew
nearer his surprise increased, for he could see that the reader was a beautiful
girl. The cottage was wide open and she was sitting facing the view.
Listening attentively, he heard her reading the Buddhist scriptures with
great devotion. More and more curious, he hurried on to the tiny gate and
Page 59
entered the little garden, and looking up beheld his lost daughter Hase-
Hime. She was so intent on what she was saying that she neither heard nor
saw her father till he spoke.
“Hase-Hime!” he cried, “it is you, my Hase-Hime!”
Taken by surprise, she could hardly realize that it was her own dear father
who was calling her, and for a moment she was utterly bereft of the power
to speak or move.
“My father, my father! It is indeed you—oh, my father!” was all she
could say, and running to him she caught hold of his thick sleeve, and
burying her face burst into a passion of tears.
Her father stroked her dark hair, asking her gently to tell him all that had
happened, but she only wept on, and he wondered if he were not really
dreaming.
Then the faithful old servant Katoda came out, and bowing himself to the
ground before his master, poured out the long tale of wrong, telling him all
that had happened, and how it was that he found his daughter in such a wild
and desolate spot with only two old servants to take care of her.
The Prince’s astonishment and indignation knew no bounds. He gave up
the hunt at once and hurried home with his daughter. One of the company
galloped ahead to inform the household of the glad news, and the step-
mother hearing what had happened, and fearful of meeting her husband
now that her wickedness was discovered, fled from the house and returned
in disgrace to her father’s roof, and nothing more was heard of her.
The old servant Katoda was rewarded with the highest promotion in his
master’s service, and lived happily to the end of his days, devoted to the
little Princess, who never forgot that she owed her life to this faithful
retainer. She was no longer troubled by an unkind step-mother, and her days
passed happily and quietly with her father.
As Prince Toyonari had no son, he adopted a younger son of one of the
Court nobles to be his heir, and to marry his daughter Hase-Hime, and in a
few years the marriage took place. Hase-Hime lived to a good old age, and
all said that she was the wisest, most devout, and most beautiful mistress
that had ever reigned in Prince Toyonari’s ancient house. She had the joy of
presenting her son, the future lord of the family, to her father just before he
retired from active life.
Hime. She was so intent on what she was saying that she neither heard nor
saw her father till he spoke.
“Hase-Hime!” he cried, “it is you, my Hase-Hime!”
Taken by surprise, she could hardly realize that it was her own dear father
who was calling her, and for a moment she was utterly bereft of the power
to speak or move.
“My father, my father! It is indeed you—oh, my father!” was all she
could say, and running to him she caught hold of his thick sleeve, and
burying her face burst into a passion of tears.
Her father stroked her dark hair, asking her gently to tell him all that had
happened, but she only wept on, and he wondered if he were not really
dreaming.
Then the faithful old servant Katoda came out, and bowing himself to the
ground before his master, poured out the long tale of wrong, telling him all
that had happened, and how it was that he found his daughter in such a wild
and desolate spot with only two old servants to take care of her.
The Prince’s astonishment and indignation knew no bounds. He gave up
the hunt at once and hurried home with his daughter. One of the company
galloped ahead to inform the household of the glad news, and the step-
mother hearing what had happened, and fearful of meeting her husband
now that her wickedness was discovered, fled from the house and returned
in disgrace to her father’s roof, and nothing more was heard of her.
The old servant Katoda was rewarded with the highest promotion in his
master’s service, and lived happily to the end of his days, devoted to the
little Princess, who never forgot that she owed her life to this faithful
retainer. She was no longer troubled by an unkind step-mother, and her days
passed happily and quietly with her father.
As Prince Toyonari had no son, he adopted a younger son of one of the
Court nobles to be his heir, and to marry his daughter Hase-Hime, and in a
few years the marriage took place. Hase-Hime lived to a good old age, and
all said that she was the wisest, most devout, and most beautiful mistress
that had ever reigned in Prince Toyonari’s ancient house. She had the joy of
presenting her son, the future lord of the family, to her father just before he
retired from active life.
Page 60
To this day there is preserved a piece of needle-work in one of the
Buddhist temples of Kioto. It is a beautiful piece of tapestry, with the figure
of Buddha embroidered in the silky threads drawn from the stem of the
lotus. This is said to have been the work of the hands of the good Princess
Hase.
Buddhist temples of Kioto. It is a beautiful piece of tapestry, with the figure
of Buddha embroidered in the silky threads drawn from the stem of the
lotus. This is said to have been the work of the hands of the good Princess
Hase.
Page 61
THE STORY OF THE MAN WHO DID NOT WISH
TO DIE
Long, long ago there lived a man called Sentaro. His surname meant
“Millionaire,” but although he was not so rich as all that, he was still very
far removed from being poor. He had inherited a small fortune from his
father and lived on this, spending his time carelessly, without any serious
thoughts of work, till he was about thirty-two years of age.
One day, without any reason whatsoever, the thought of death and
sickness came to him. The idea of falling ill or dying made him very
wretched.
“I should like to live,” he said to himself, “till I am five or six hundred
years old at least, free from all sickness. The ordinary span of a man’s life is
very short.”
He wondered whether it were possible, by living simply and frugally
henceforth, to prolong his life as long as he wished.
He knew there were many stories in ancient history of emperors who had
lived a thousand years, and there was a Princess of Yamato, who, it was
said, lived to the age of five hundred. This was the latest story of a very
long life record.
Sentaro had often heard the tale of the Chinese King named Shin-no-
Shiko. He was one of the most able and powerful rulers in Chinese history.
He built all the large palaces, and also the famous great wall of China. He
had everything in the world he could wish for, but in spite of all his
happiness and the luxury and the splendor of his Court, the wisdom of his
councilors and the glory of his reign, he was miserable because he knew
that one day he must die and leave it all.
When Shin-no-Shiko went to bed at night, when he rose in the morning,
as he went through his day, the thought of death was always with him. He
TO DIE
Long, long ago there lived a man called Sentaro. His surname meant
“Millionaire,” but although he was not so rich as all that, he was still very
far removed from being poor. He had inherited a small fortune from his
father and lived on this, spending his time carelessly, without any serious
thoughts of work, till he was about thirty-two years of age.
One day, without any reason whatsoever, the thought of death and
sickness came to him. The idea of falling ill or dying made him very
wretched.
“I should like to live,” he said to himself, “till I am five or six hundred
years old at least, free from all sickness. The ordinary span of a man’s life is
very short.”
He wondered whether it were possible, by living simply and frugally
henceforth, to prolong his life as long as he wished.
He knew there were many stories in ancient history of emperors who had
lived a thousand years, and there was a Princess of Yamato, who, it was
said, lived to the age of five hundred. This was the latest story of a very
long life record.
Sentaro had often heard the tale of the Chinese King named Shin-no-
Shiko. He was one of the most able and powerful rulers in Chinese history.
He built all the large palaces, and also the famous great wall of China. He
had everything in the world he could wish for, but in spite of all his
happiness and the luxury and the splendor of his Court, the wisdom of his
councilors and the glory of his reign, he was miserable because he knew
that one day he must die and leave it all.
When Shin-no-Shiko went to bed at night, when he rose in the morning,
as he went through his day, the thought of death was always with him. He
Page 62
could not get away from it. Ah—if only he could find the “Elixir of Life,”
he would be happy.
The Emperor at last called a meeting of his courtiers and asked them all
if they could not find for him the “Elixir of Life” of which he had so often
read and heard.
One old courtier, Jofuku by name, said that far away across the seas there
was a country called Horaizan, and that certain hermits lived there who
possessed the secret of the “Elixir of Life.” Whoever drank of this
wonderful draught lived forever.
The Emperor ordered Jofuku to set out for the land of Horaizan, to find
the hermits, and to bring him back a phial of the magic elixir. He gave
Jofuku one of his best junks, fitted it out for him, and loaded it with great
quantities of treasures and precious stones for Jofuku to take as presents to
the hermits.
Jofuku sailed for the land of Horaizan, but he never returned to the
waiting Emperor; but ever since that time Mount Fuji has been said to be
the fabled Horaizan and the home of hermits who had the secret of the
elixir, and Jofuku has been worshiped as their patron god.
Now Sentaro determined to set out to find the hermits, and if he could, to
become one, so that he might obtain the water of perpetual life. He
remembered that as a child he had been told that not only did these hermits
live on Mount Fuji, but that they were said to inhabit all the very high
peaks.
So he left his old home to the care of his relatives, and started out on his
quest. He traveled through all the mountainous regions of the land, climbing
to the tops of the highest peaks, but never a hermit did he find.
At last, after wandering in an unknown region for many days, he met a
hunter.
“Can you tell me,” asked Sentaro, “where the hermits live who have the
Elixir of Life?”
“No.” said the hunter; “I can’t tell you where such hermits live, but there
is a notorious robber living in these parts. It is said that he is chief of a band
of two hundred followers.”
This odd answer irritated Sentaro very much, and he thought how foolish
it was to waste more time in looking for the hermits in this way, so he
he would be happy.
The Emperor at last called a meeting of his courtiers and asked them all
if they could not find for him the “Elixir of Life” of which he had so often
read and heard.
One old courtier, Jofuku by name, said that far away across the seas there
was a country called Horaizan, and that certain hermits lived there who
possessed the secret of the “Elixir of Life.” Whoever drank of this
wonderful draught lived forever.
The Emperor ordered Jofuku to set out for the land of Horaizan, to find
the hermits, and to bring him back a phial of the magic elixir. He gave
Jofuku one of his best junks, fitted it out for him, and loaded it with great
quantities of treasures and precious stones for Jofuku to take as presents to
the hermits.
Jofuku sailed for the land of Horaizan, but he never returned to the
waiting Emperor; but ever since that time Mount Fuji has been said to be
the fabled Horaizan and the home of hermits who had the secret of the
elixir, and Jofuku has been worshiped as their patron god.
Now Sentaro determined to set out to find the hermits, and if he could, to
become one, so that he might obtain the water of perpetual life. He
remembered that as a child he had been told that not only did these hermits
live on Mount Fuji, but that they were said to inhabit all the very high
peaks.
So he left his old home to the care of his relatives, and started out on his
quest. He traveled through all the mountainous regions of the land, climbing
to the tops of the highest peaks, but never a hermit did he find.
At last, after wandering in an unknown region for many days, he met a
hunter.
“Can you tell me,” asked Sentaro, “where the hermits live who have the
Elixir of Life?”
“No.” said the hunter; “I can’t tell you where such hermits live, but there
is a notorious robber living in these parts. It is said that he is chief of a band
of two hundred followers.”
This odd answer irritated Sentaro very much, and he thought how foolish
it was to waste more time in looking for the hermits in this way, so he
Page 63
decided to go at once to the shrine of Jofuku, who is worshiped as the
patron god of the hermits in the south of Japan.
Sentaro reached the shrine and prayed for seven days, entreating Jofuku
to show him the way to a hermit who could give him what he wanted so
much to find.
At midnight of the seventh day, as Sentaro knelt in the temple, the door
of the innermost shrine flew open, and Jofuku appeared in a luminous
cloud, and calling to Sentaro to come nearer, spoke thus:
“Your desire is a very selfish one and cannot be easily granted. You think
that you would like to become a hermit so as to find the Elixir of Life. Do
you know how hard a hermit’s life is? A hermit is only allowed to eat fruit
and berries and the bark of pine trees; a hermit must cut himself off from
the world so that his heart may become as pure as gold and free from every
earthly desire. Gradually after following these strict rules, the hermit ceases
to feel hunger or cold or heat, and his body becomes so light that he can
ride on a crane or a carp, and can walk on water without getting his feet
wet.”
“You, Sentaro, are fond of good living and of every comfort. You are not
even like an ordinary man, for you are exceptionally idle, and more
sensitive to heat and cold than most people. You would never be able to go
barefoot or to wear only one thin dress in the winter time! Do you think that
you would ever have the patience or the endurance to live a hermit’s life?”
“In answer to your prayer, however, I will help you in another way. I will
send you to the country of Perpetual Life, where death never comes—where
the people live forever!”
Saying this, Jofuku put into Sentaro’s hand a little crane made of paper,
telling him to sit on its back and it would carry him there.
Sentaro obeyed wonderingly. The crane grew large enough for him to
ride on it with comfort. It then spread its wings, rose high in the air, and
flew away over the mountains right out to sea.
Sentaro was at first quite frightened; but by degrees he grew accustomed
to the swift flight through the air. On and on they went for thousands of
miles. The bird never stopped for rest or food, but as it was a paper bird it
doubtless did not require any nourishment, and strange to say, neither did
Sentaro.
patron god of the hermits in the south of Japan.
Sentaro reached the shrine and prayed for seven days, entreating Jofuku
to show him the way to a hermit who could give him what he wanted so
much to find.
At midnight of the seventh day, as Sentaro knelt in the temple, the door
of the innermost shrine flew open, and Jofuku appeared in a luminous
cloud, and calling to Sentaro to come nearer, spoke thus:
“Your desire is a very selfish one and cannot be easily granted. You think
that you would like to become a hermit so as to find the Elixir of Life. Do
you know how hard a hermit’s life is? A hermit is only allowed to eat fruit
and berries and the bark of pine trees; a hermit must cut himself off from
the world so that his heart may become as pure as gold and free from every
earthly desire. Gradually after following these strict rules, the hermit ceases
to feel hunger or cold or heat, and his body becomes so light that he can
ride on a crane or a carp, and can walk on water without getting his feet
wet.”
“You, Sentaro, are fond of good living and of every comfort. You are not
even like an ordinary man, for you are exceptionally idle, and more
sensitive to heat and cold than most people. You would never be able to go
barefoot or to wear only one thin dress in the winter time! Do you think that
you would ever have the patience or the endurance to live a hermit’s life?”
“In answer to your prayer, however, I will help you in another way. I will
send you to the country of Perpetual Life, where death never comes—where
the people live forever!”
Saying this, Jofuku put into Sentaro’s hand a little crane made of paper,
telling him to sit on its back and it would carry him there.
Sentaro obeyed wonderingly. The crane grew large enough for him to
ride on it with comfort. It then spread its wings, rose high in the air, and
flew away over the mountains right out to sea.
Sentaro was at first quite frightened; but by degrees he grew accustomed
to the swift flight through the air. On and on they went for thousands of
miles. The bird never stopped for rest or food, but as it was a paper bird it
doubtless did not require any nourishment, and strange to say, neither did
Sentaro.
Page 64
After several days they reached an island. The crane flew some distance
inland and then alighted.
As soon as Sentaro got down from the bird’s back, the crane folded up of
its own accord and flew into his pocket.
Now Sentaro began to look about him wonderingly, curious to see what
the country of Perpetual Life was like. He walked first round about the
country and then through the town. Everything was, of course, quite
strange, and different from his own land. But both the land and the people
seemed prosperous, so he decided that it would be good for him to stay
there and took up lodgings at one of the hotels.
The proprietor was a kind man, and when Sentaro told him that he was a
stranger and had come to live there, he promised to arrange everything that
was necessary with the governor of the city concerning Sentaro’s sojourn
there. He even found a house for his guest, and in this way Sentaro obtained
his great wish and became a resident in the country of Perpetual Life.
Within the memory of all the islanders no man had ever died there, and
sickness was a thing unknown. Priests had come over from India and China
and told them of a beautiful country called Paradise, where happiness and
bliss and contentment fill all men’s hearts, but its gates could only be
reached by dying. This tradition was handed down for ages from generation
to generation—but none knew exactly what death was except that it led to
Paradise.
Quite unlike Sentaro and other ordinary people, instead of having a great
dread of death, they all, both rich and poor, longed for it as something good
and desirable. They were all tired of their long, long lives, and longed to go
to the happy land of contentment called Paradise of which the priests had
told them centuries ago.
All this Sentaro soon found out by talking to the islanders. He found
himself, according to his ideas, in the land of Topsyturvydom. Everything
was upside down. He had wished to escape from dying. He had come to the
land of Perpetual Life with great relief and joy, only to find that the
inhabitants themselves, doomed never to die, would consider it bliss to find
death.
What he had hitherto considered poison these people ate as good food,
and all the things to which he had been accustomed as food they rejected.
Whenever any merchants from other countries arrived, the rich people
inland and then alighted.
As soon as Sentaro got down from the bird’s back, the crane folded up of
its own accord and flew into his pocket.
Now Sentaro began to look about him wonderingly, curious to see what
the country of Perpetual Life was like. He walked first round about the
country and then through the town. Everything was, of course, quite
strange, and different from his own land. But both the land and the people
seemed prosperous, so he decided that it would be good for him to stay
there and took up lodgings at one of the hotels.
The proprietor was a kind man, and when Sentaro told him that he was a
stranger and had come to live there, he promised to arrange everything that
was necessary with the governor of the city concerning Sentaro’s sojourn
there. He even found a house for his guest, and in this way Sentaro obtained
his great wish and became a resident in the country of Perpetual Life.
Within the memory of all the islanders no man had ever died there, and
sickness was a thing unknown. Priests had come over from India and China
and told them of a beautiful country called Paradise, where happiness and
bliss and contentment fill all men’s hearts, but its gates could only be
reached by dying. This tradition was handed down for ages from generation
to generation—but none knew exactly what death was except that it led to
Paradise.
Quite unlike Sentaro and other ordinary people, instead of having a great
dread of death, they all, both rich and poor, longed for it as something good
and desirable. They were all tired of their long, long lives, and longed to go
to the happy land of contentment called Paradise of which the priests had
told them centuries ago.
All this Sentaro soon found out by talking to the islanders. He found
himself, according to his ideas, in the land of Topsyturvydom. Everything
was upside down. He had wished to escape from dying. He had come to the
land of Perpetual Life with great relief and joy, only to find that the
inhabitants themselves, doomed never to die, would consider it bliss to find
death.
What he had hitherto considered poison these people ate as good food,
and all the things to which he had been accustomed as food they rejected.
Whenever any merchants from other countries arrived, the rich people
Page 65
rushed to them eager to buy poisons. These they swallowed eagerly, hoping
for death to come so that they might go to Paradise.
But what were deadly poisons in other lands were without effect in this
strange place, and people who swallowed them with the hope of dying, only
found that in a short time they felt better in health instead of worse.
Vainly they tried to imagine what death could be like. The wealthy would
have given all their money and all their goods if they could but shorten their
lives to two or three hundred years even. Without any change to live on
forever seemed to this people wearisome and sad.
In the chemist shops there was a drug which was in constant demand,
because after using it for a hundred years, it was supposed to turn the hair
slightly gray and to bring about disorders of the stomach.
Sentaro was astonished to find that the poisonous globe-fish was served
up in restaurants as a delectable dish, and hawkers in the streets went about
selling sauces made of Spanish flies. He never saw any one ill after eating
these horrible things, nor did he ever see any one with as much as a cold.
Sentaro was delighted. He said to himself that he would never grow tired
of living, and that he considered it profane to wish for death. He was the
only happy man on the island. For his part he wished to live thousands of
years and to enjoy life. He set himself up in business, and for the present
never even dreamed of going back to his native land.
As years went by, however, things did not go as smoothly as at first. He
had heavy losses in business, and several times some affairs went wrong
with his neighbors. This caused him great annoyance.
Time passed like the flight of an arrow for him, for he was busy from
morning till night. Three hundred years went by in this monotonous way,
and then at last he began to grow tired of life in this country, and he longed
to see his own land and his old home. However long he lived here, life
would always be the same, so was it not foolish and wearisome to stay on
here forever?
Sentaro, in his wish to escape from the country of Perpetual Life,
recollected Jofuku, who had helped him before when he was wishing to
escape from death—and he prayed to the saint to bring him back to his own
land again.
for death to come so that they might go to Paradise.
But what were deadly poisons in other lands were without effect in this
strange place, and people who swallowed them with the hope of dying, only
found that in a short time they felt better in health instead of worse.
Vainly they tried to imagine what death could be like. The wealthy would
have given all their money and all their goods if they could but shorten their
lives to two or three hundred years even. Without any change to live on
forever seemed to this people wearisome and sad.
In the chemist shops there was a drug which was in constant demand,
because after using it for a hundred years, it was supposed to turn the hair
slightly gray and to bring about disorders of the stomach.
Sentaro was astonished to find that the poisonous globe-fish was served
up in restaurants as a delectable dish, and hawkers in the streets went about
selling sauces made of Spanish flies. He never saw any one ill after eating
these horrible things, nor did he ever see any one with as much as a cold.
Sentaro was delighted. He said to himself that he would never grow tired
of living, and that he considered it profane to wish for death. He was the
only happy man on the island. For his part he wished to live thousands of
years and to enjoy life. He set himself up in business, and for the present
never even dreamed of going back to his native land.
As years went by, however, things did not go as smoothly as at first. He
had heavy losses in business, and several times some affairs went wrong
with his neighbors. This caused him great annoyance.
Time passed like the flight of an arrow for him, for he was busy from
morning till night. Three hundred years went by in this monotonous way,
and then at last he began to grow tired of life in this country, and he longed
to see his own land and his old home. However long he lived here, life
would always be the same, so was it not foolish and wearisome to stay on
here forever?
Sentaro, in his wish to escape from the country of Perpetual Life,
recollected Jofuku, who had helped him before when he was wishing to
escape from death—and he prayed to the saint to bring him back to his own
land again.
Page 66
No sooner did he pray than the paper crane popped out of his pocket.
Sentaro was amazed to see that it had remained undamaged after all these
years. Once more the bird grew and grew till it was large enough for him to
mount it. As he did so, the bird spread its wings and flew, swiftly out across
the sea in the direction of Japan.
Such was the willfulness of the man’s nature that he looked back and
regretted all he had left behind. He tried to stop the bird in vain. The crane
held on its way for thousands of miles across the ocean.
Then a storm came on, and the wonderful paper crane got damp,
crumpled up, and fell into the sea. Sentaro fell with it. Very much frightened
at the thought of being drowned, he cried out loudly to Jofuku to save him.
He looked round, but there was no ship in sight. He swallowed a quantity of
sea-water, which only increased his miserable plight. While he was thus
struggling to keep himself afloat, he saw a monstrous shark swimming
towards him. As it came nearer it opened its huge mouth ready to devour
him. Sentaro was all but paralyzed with fear now that he felt his end so
near, and screamed out as loudly as ever he could to Jofuku to come and
rescue him.
Lo, and behold, Sentaro was awakened by his own screams, to find that
during his long prayer he had fallen asleep before the shrine, and that all his
extraordinary and frightful adventures had been only a wild dream. He was
in a cold perspiration with fright, and utterly bewildered.
Suddenly a bright light came towards him, and in the light stood a
messenger. The messenger held a book in his hand, and spoke to Sentaro:
“I am sent to you by Jofuku, who in answer to your prayer, has permitted
you in a dream to see the land of Perpetual Life. But you grew weary of
living there, and begged to be allowed to return to your native land so that
you might die. Jofuku, so that he might try you, allowed you to drop into
the sea, and then sent a shark to swallow you up. Your desire for death was
not real, for even at that moment you cried out loudly and shouted for
help.”
“It is also vain for you to wish to become a hermit, or to find the Elixir of
Life. These things are not for such as you—your life is not austere enough.
It is best for you to go back to your paternal home, and to live a good and
industrious life. Never neglect to keep the anniversaries of your ancestors,
and make it your duty to provide for your children’s future. Thus will you
Sentaro was amazed to see that it had remained undamaged after all these
years. Once more the bird grew and grew till it was large enough for him to
mount it. As he did so, the bird spread its wings and flew, swiftly out across
the sea in the direction of Japan.
Such was the willfulness of the man’s nature that he looked back and
regretted all he had left behind. He tried to stop the bird in vain. The crane
held on its way for thousands of miles across the ocean.
Then a storm came on, and the wonderful paper crane got damp,
crumpled up, and fell into the sea. Sentaro fell with it. Very much frightened
at the thought of being drowned, he cried out loudly to Jofuku to save him.
He looked round, but there was no ship in sight. He swallowed a quantity of
sea-water, which only increased his miserable plight. While he was thus
struggling to keep himself afloat, he saw a monstrous shark swimming
towards him. As it came nearer it opened its huge mouth ready to devour
him. Sentaro was all but paralyzed with fear now that he felt his end so
near, and screamed out as loudly as ever he could to Jofuku to come and
rescue him.
Lo, and behold, Sentaro was awakened by his own screams, to find that
during his long prayer he had fallen asleep before the shrine, and that all his
extraordinary and frightful adventures had been only a wild dream. He was
in a cold perspiration with fright, and utterly bewildered.
Suddenly a bright light came towards him, and in the light stood a
messenger. The messenger held a book in his hand, and spoke to Sentaro:
“I am sent to you by Jofuku, who in answer to your prayer, has permitted
you in a dream to see the land of Perpetual Life. But you grew weary of
living there, and begged to be allowed to return to your native land so that
you might die. Jofuku, so that he might try you, allowed you to drop into
the sea, and then sent a shark to swallow you up. Your desire for death was
not real, for even at that moment you cried out loudly and shouted for
help.”
“It is also vain for you to wish to become a hermit, or to find the Elixir of
Life. These things are not for such as you—your life is not austere enough.
It is best for you to go back to your paternal home, and to live a good and
industrious life. Never neglect to keep the anniversaries of your ancestors,
and make it your duty to provide for your children’s future. Thus will you
Page 67
live to a good old age and be happy, but give up the vain desire to escape
death, for no man can do that, and by this time you have surely found out
that even when selfish desires are granted they do not bring happiness.”
“In this book I give you there are many precepts good for you to know—
if you study them, you will be guided in the way I have pointed out to you.”
The angel disappeared as soon as he had finished speaking, and Sentaro
took the lesson to heart. With the book in his hand he returned to his old
home, and giving up all his old vain wishes, tried to live a good and useful
life and to observe the lessons taught him in the book, and he and his house
prospered henceforth.
death, for no man can do that, and by this time you have surely found out
that even when selfish desires are granted they do not bring happiness.”
“In this book I give you there are many precepts good for you to know—
if you study them, you will be guided in the way I have pointed out to you.”
The angel disappeared as soon as he had finished speaking, and Sentaro
took the lesson to heart. With the book in his hand he returned to his old
home, and giving up all his old vain wishes, tried to live a good and useful
life and to observe the lessons taught him in the book, and he and his house
prospered henceforth.
Page 68
THE BAMBOO-CUTTER AND THE MOON-
CHILD
Long, long ago, there lived an old bamboo wood-cutter. He was very
poor and sad also, for no child had Heaven sent to cheer his old age, and in
his heart there was no hope of rest from work till he died and was laid in the
quiet grave. Every morning he went forth into the woods and hills wherever
the bamboo reared its lithe green plumes against the sky. When he had
made his choice, he would cut down these feathers of the forest, and
splitting them lengthwise, or cutting them into joints, would carry the
bamboo wood home and make it into various articles for the household, and
he and his old wife gained a small livelihood by selling them.
One morning as usual he had gone out to his work, and having found a
nice clump of bamboos, had set to work to cut some of them down.
Suddenly the green grove of bamboos was flooded with a bright soft light,
as if the full moon had risen over the spot. Looking round in astonishment,
he saw that the brilliance was streaming from one bamboo. The old man,
full of wonder, dropped his ax and went towards the light. On nearer
approach he saw that this soft splendor came from a hollow in the green
bamboo stem, and still more wonderful to behold, in the midst of the
brilliance stood a tiny human being, only three inches in height, and
exquisitely beautiful in appearance.
“You must be sent to be my child, for I find you here among the bamboos
where lies my daily work,” said the old man, and taking the little creature in
his hand he took it home to his wife to bring up. The tiny girl was so
exceedingly beautiful and so small, that the old woman put her into a basket
to safeguard her from the least possibility of being hurt in any way.
The old couple were now very happy, for it had been a lifelong regret that
they had no children of their own, and with joy they now expended all the
CHILD
Long, long ago, there lived an old bamboo wood-cutter. He was very
poor and sad also, for no child had Heaven sent to cheer his old age, and in
his heart there was no hope of rest from work till he died and was laid in the
quiet grave. Every morning he went forth into the woods and hills wherever
the bamboo reared its lithe green plumes against the sky. When he had
made his choice, he would cut down these feathers of the forest, and
splitting them lengthwise, or cutting them into joints, would carry the
bamboo wood home and make it into various articles for the household, and
he and his old wife gained a small livelihood by selling them.
One morning as usual he had gone out to his work, and having found a
nice clump of bamboos, had set to work to cut some of them down.
Suddenly the green grove of bamboos was flooded with a bright soft light,
as if the full moon had risen over the spot. Looking round in astonishment,
he saw that the brilliance was streaming from one bamboo. The old man,
full of wonder, dropped his ax and went towards the light. On nearer
approach he saw that this soft splendor came from a hollow in the green
bamboo stem, and still more wonderful to behold, in the midst of the
brilliance stood a tiny human being, only three inches in height, and
exquisitely beautiful in appearance.
“You must be sent to be my child, for I find you here among the bamboos
where lies my daily work,” said the old man, and taking the little creature in
his hand he took it home to his wife to bring up. The tiny girl was so
exceedingly beautiful and so small, that the old woman put her into a basket
to safeguard her from the least possibility of being hurt in any way.
The old couple were now very happy, for it had been a lifelong regret that
they had no children of their own, and with joy they now expended all the
Page 69
love of their old age on the little child who had come to them in so
marvelous a manner.
From this time on, the old man often found gold in the notches of the
bamboos when he hewed them down and cut them up; not only gold, but
precious stones also, so that by degrees he became rich. He built himself a
fine house, and was no longer known as the poor bamboo woodcutter, but
as a wealthy man.
Three months passed quickly away, and in that time the bamboo child
had, wonderful to say, become a full-grown girl, so her foster-parents did up
her hair and dressed her in beautiful kimonos. She was of such wondrous
beauty that they placed her behind the screens like a princess, and allowed
no one to see her, waiting upon her themselves. It seemed as if she were
made of light, for the house was filled with a soft shining, so that even in
the dark of night it was like daytime. Her presence seemed to have a benign
influence on those there. Whenever the old man felt sad, he had only to look
upon his foster-daughter and his sorrow vanished, and he became as happy
as when he was a youth.
At last the day came for the naming of their new-found child, so the old
couple called in a celebrated name-giver, and he gave her the name of
Princess Moonlight, because her body gave forth so much soft bright light
that she might have been a daughter of the Moon God.
For three days the festival was kept up with song and dance and music.
All the friends and relations of the old couple were present, and great was
their enjoyment of the festivities held to celebrate the naming of Princess
Moonlight. Everyone who saw her declared that there never had been seen
any one so lovely; all the beauties throughout the length and breadth of the
land would grow pale beside her, so they said. The fame of the Princess’s
loveliness spread far and wide, and many were the suitors who desired to
win her hand, or even so much as to see her.
Suitors from far and near posted themselves outside the house, and made
little holes in the fence, in the hope of catching a glimpse of the Princess as
she went from one room to the other along the veranda. They stayed there
day and night, sacrificing even their sleep for a chance of seeing her, but all
in vain. Then they approached the house, and tried to speak to the old man
and his wife or some of the servants, but not even this was granted them.
marvelous a manner.
From this time on, the old man often found gold in the notches of the
bamboos when he hewed them down and cut them up; not only gold, but
precious stones also, so that by degrees he became rich. He built himself a
fine house, and was no longer known as the poor bamboo woodcutter, but
as a wealthy man.
Three months passed quickly away, and in that time the bamboo child
had, wonderful to say, become a full-grown girl, so her foster-parents did up
her hair and dressed her in beautiful kimonos. She was of such wondrous
beauty that they placed her behind the screens like a princess, and allowed
no one to see her, waiting upon her themselves. It seemed as if she were
made of light, for the house was filled with a soft shining, so that even in
the dark of night it was like daytime. Her presence seemed to have a benign
influence on those there. Whenever the old man felt sad, he had only to look
upon his foster-daughter and his sorrow vanished, and he became as happy
as when he was a youth.
At last the day came for the naming of their new-found child, so the old
couple called in a celebrated name-giver, and he gave her the name of
Princess Moonlight, because her body gave forth so much soft bright light
that she might have been a daughter of the Moon God.
For three days the festival was kept up with song and dance and music.
All the friends and relations of the old couple were present, and great was
their enjoyment of the festivities held to celebrate the naming of Princess
Moonlight. Everyone who saw her declared that there never had been seen
any one so lovely; all the beauties throughout the length and breadth of the
land would grow pale beside her, so they said. The fame of the Princess’s
loveliness spread far and wide, and many were the suitors who desired to
win her hand, or even so much as to see her.
Suitors from far and near posted themselves outside the house, and made
little holes in the fence, in the hope of catching a glimpse of the Princess as
she went from one room to the other along the veranda. They stayed there
day and night, sacrificing even their sleep for a chance of seeing her, but all
in vain. Then they approached the house, and tried to speak to the old man
and his wife or some of the servants, but not even this was granted them.
Page 70
Still, in spite of all this disappointment they stayed on day after day, and
night after night, and counted it as nothing, so great was their desire to see
the Princess.
At last, however, most of the men, seeing how hopeless their quest was,
lost heart and hope both, and returned to their homes. All except five
Knights, whose ardor and determination, instead of waning, seemed to wax
greater with obstacles. These five men even went without their meals, and
took snatches of whatever they could get brought to them, so that they
might always stand outside the dwelling. They stood there in all weathers,
in sunshine and in rain.
Sometimes they wrote letters to the Princess, but no answer was
vouchsafed to them. Then when letters failed to draw any reply, they wrote
poems to her telling her of the hopeless love which kept them from sleep,
from food, from rest, and even from their homes. Still Princes Moonlight
gave no sign of having received their verses.
In this hopeless state the winter passed. The snow and frost and the cold
winds gradually gave place to the gentle warmth of spring. Then the
summer came, and the sun burned white and scorching in the heavens
above and on the earth beneath, and still these faithful Knights kept watch
and waited. At the end of these long months they called out to the old
bamboo-cutter and entreated him to have some mercy upon them and to
show them the Princess, but he answered only that as he was not her real
father he could not insist on her obeying him against her wishes.
The five Knights on receiving this stern answer returned to their several
homes, and pondered over the best means of touching the proud Princess’s
heart, even so much as to grant them a hearing. They took their rosaries in
hand and knelt before their household shrines, and burned precious incense,
praying to Buddha to give them their heart’s desire. Thus several days
passed, but even so they could not rest in their homes.
So again they set out for the bamboo-cutter’s house. This time the old
man came out to see them, and they asked him to let them know if it was
the Princess’s resolution never to see any man whatsoever, and they
implored him to speak for them and to tell her the greatness of their love,
and how long they had waited through the cold of winter and the heat of
summer, sleepless and roofless through all weathers, without food and
without rest, in the ardent hope of winning her, and they were willing to
night after night, and counted it as nothing, so great was their desire to see
the Princess.
At last, however, most of the men, seeing how hopeless their quest was,
lost heart and hope both, and returned to their homes. All except five
Knights, whose ardor and determination, instead of waning, seemed to wax
greater with obstacles. These five men even went without their meals, and
took snatches of whatever they could get brought to them, so that they
might always stand outside the dwelling. They stood there in all weathers,
in sunshine and in rain.
Sometimes they wrote letters to the Princess, but no answer was
vouchsafed to them. Then when letters failed to draw any reply, they wrote
poems to her telling her of the hopeless love which kept them from sleep,
from food, from rest, and even from their homes. Still Princes Moonlight
gave no sign of having received their verses.
In this hopeless state the winter passed. The snow and frost and the cold
winds gradually gave place to the gentle warmth of spring. Then the
summer came, and the sun burned white and scorching in the heavens
above and on the earth beneath, and still these faithful Knights kept watch
and waited. At the end of these long months they called out to the old
bamboo-cutter and entreated him to have some mercy upon them and to
show them the Princess, but he answered only that as he was not her real
father he could not insist on her obeying him against her wishes.
The five Knights on receiving this stern answer returned to their several
homes, and pondered over the best means of touching the proud Princess’s
heart, even so much as to grant them a hearing. They took their rosaries in
hand and knelt before their household shrines, and burned precious incense,
praying to Buddha to give them their heart’s desire. Thus several days
passed, but even so they could not rest in their homes.
So again they set out for the bamboo-cutter’s house. This time the old
man came out to see them, and they asked him to let them know if it was
the Princess’s resolution never to see any man whatsoever, and they
implored him to speak for them and to tell her the greatness of their love,
and how long they had waited through the cold of winter and the heat of
summer, sleepless and roofless through all weathers, without food and
without rest, in the ardent hope of winning her, and they were willing to
Page 71
consider this long vigil as pleasure if she would but give them one chance
of pleading their cause with her.
The old man lent a willing ear to their tale of love, for in his inmost heart
he felt sorry for these faithful suitors and would have liked to see his lovely
foster-daughter married to one of them. So he went in to Princess
Moonlight and said reverently:
“Although you have always seemed to me to be a heavenly being, yet I
have had the trouble of bringing you up as my own child and you have been
glad of the protection of my roof. Will you refuse to do as I wish?”
Then Princess Moonlight replied that there was nothing she would not do
for him, that she honored and loved him as her own father, and that as for
herself she could not remember the time before she came to earth.
The old man listened with great joy as she spoke these dutiful words.
Then he told her how anxious he was to see her safely and happily married
before he died.
“I am an old man, over seventy years of age, and my end may come any
time now. It is necessary and right that you should see these five suitors and
choose one of them.”
“Oh, why,” said the Princess in distress, “must I do this? I have no wish
to marry now.”
“I found you,” answered the old man, “many years ago, when you were a
little creature three inches high, in the midst of a great white light. The light
streamed from the bamboo in which you were hid and led me to you. So I
have always thought that you were more than mortal woman. While I am
alive it is right for you to remain as you are if you wish to do so, but some
day I shall cease to be and who will take care of you then? Therefore I pray
you to meet these five brave men one at a time and make up your mind to
marry one of them!”
Then the Princess answered that she felt sure that she was not as beautiful
as perhaps report made her out to be, and that even if she consented to
marry any one of them, not really knowing her before, his heart might
change afterwards. So as she did not feel sure of them, even though her
father told her they were worthy Knights, she did not feel it wise to see
them.
of pleading their cause with her.
The old man lent a willing ear to their tale of love, for in his inmost heart
he felt sorry for these faithful suitors and would have liked to see his lovely
foster-daughter married to one of them. So he went in to Princess
Moonlight and said reverently:
“Although you have always seemed to me to be a heavenly being, yet I
have had the trouble of bringing you up as my own child and you have been
glad of the protection of my roof. Will you refuse to do as I wish?”
Then Princess Moonlight replied that there was nothing she would not do
for him, that she honored and loved him as her own father, and that as for
herself she could not remember the time before she came to earth.
The old man listened with great joy as she spoke these dutiful words.
Then he told her how anxious he was to see her safely and happily married
before he died.
“I am an old man, over seventy years of age, and my end may come any
time now. It is necessary and right that you should see these five suitors and
choose one of them.”
“Oh, why,” said the Princess in distress, “must I do this? I have no wish
to marry now.”
“I found you,” answered the old man, “many years ago, when you were a
little creature three inches high, in the midst of a great white light. The light
streamed from the bamboo in which you were hid and led me to you. So I
have always thought that you were more than mortal woman. While I am
alive it is right for you to remain as you are if you wish to do so, but some
day I shall cease to be and who will take care of you then? Therefore I pray
you to meet these five brave men one at a time and make up your mind to
marry one of them!”
Then the Princess answered that she felt sure that she was not as beautiful
as perhaps report made her out to be, and that even if she consented to
marry any one of them, not really knowing her before, his heart might
change afterwards. So as she did not feel sure of them, even though her
father told her they were worthy Knights, she did not feel it wise to see
them.
Page 72
“All you say is very reasonable,” said the old man, “but what kind of
men will you consent to see? I do not call these five men who have waited
on you for months, light-hearted. They have stood outside this house
through the winter and the summer, often denying themselves food and
sleep so that they may win you. What more can you demand?”
Then Princess Moonlight said she must make further trial of their love
before she would grant their request to interview her. The five warriors
were to prove their love by each bringing her from distant countries
something that she desired to possess.
That same evening the suitors arrived and began to play their flutes in
turn, and to sing their self-composed songs telling of their great and tireless
love. The bamboo-cutter went out to them and offered them his sympathy
for all they had endured and all the patience they had shown in their desire
to win his foster-daughter. Then he gave them her message, that she would
consent to marry whosoever was successful in bringing her what she
wanted. This was to test them.
The five all accepted the trial, and thought it an excellent plan, for it
would prevent jealousy between them.
Princess Moonlight then sent word to the First Knight that she requested
him to bring her the stone bowl which had belonged to Buddha in India.
The Second Knight was asked to go to the Mountain of Horai, said to be
situated in the Eastern Sea, and to bring her a branch of the wonderful tree
that grew on its summit. The roots of this tree were of silver, the trunk of
gold, and the branches bore as fruit white jewels.
The Third Knight was told to go to China and search for the fire-rat and
to bring her its skin.
The Fourth Knight was told to search for the dragon that carried on its
head the stone radiating five colors and to bring the stone to her.
The Fifth Knight was to find the swallow which carried a shell in its
stomach and to bring the shell to her.
The old man thought these very hard tasks and hesitated to carry the
messages, but the Princess would make no other conditions. So her
commands were issued word for word to the five men who, when they
heard what was required of them, were all disheartened and disgusted at
men will you consent to see? I do not call these five men who have waited
on you for months, light-hearted. They have stood outside this house
through the winter and the summer, often denying themselves food and
sleep so that they may win you. What more can you demand?”
Then Princess Moonlight said she must make further trial of their love
before she would grant their request to interview her. The five warriors
were to prove their love by each bringing her from distant countries
something that she desired to possess.
That same evening the suitors arrived and began to play their flutes in
turn, and to sing their self-composed songs telling of their great and tireless
love. The bamboo-cutter went out to them and offered them his sympathy
for all they had endured and all the patience they had shown in their desire
to win his foster-daughter. Then he gave them her message, that she would
consent to marry whosoever was successful in bringing her what she
wanted. This was to test them.
The five all accepted the trial, and thought it an excellent plan, for it
would prevent jealousy between them.
Princess Moonlight then sent word to the First Knight that she requested
him to bring her the stone bowl which had belonged to Buddha in India.
The Second Knight was asked to go to the Mountain of Horai, said to be
situated in the Eastern Sea, and to bring her a branch of the wonderful tree
that grew on its summit. The roots of this tree were of silver, the trunk of
gold, and the branches bore as fruit white jewels.
The Third Knight was told to go to China and search for the fire-rat and
to bring her its skin.
The Fourth Knight was told to search for the dragon that carried on its
head the stone radiating five colors and to bring the stone to her.
The Fifth Knight was to find the swallow which carried a shell in its
stomach and to bring the shell to her.
The old man thought these very hard tasks and hesitated to carry the
messages, but the Princess would make no other conditions. So her
commands were issued word for word to the five men who, when they
heard what was required of them, were all disheartened and disgusted at
Page 73
what seemed to them the impossibility of the tasks given them and returned
to their own homes in despair.
But after a time, when they thought of the Princess, the love in their
hearts revived for her, and they resolved to make an attempt to get what she
desired of them.
The First Knight sent word to the Princess that he was starting out that
day on the quest of Buddha’s bowl, and he hoped soon to bring it to her. But
he had not the courage to go all the way to India, for in those days traveling
was very difficult and full of danger, so he went to one of the temples in
Kyoto and took a stone bowl from the altar there, paying the priest a large
sum of money for it. He then wrapped it in a cloth of gold and, waiting
quietly for three years, returned and carried it to the old man.
Princess Moonlight wondered that the Knight should have returned so
soon. She took the bowl from its gold wrapping, expecting it to make the
room full of light, but it did not shine at all, so she knew that it was a sham
thing and not the true bowl of Buddha. She returned it at once and refused
to see him. The Knight threw the bowl away and returned to his home in
despair. He gave up now all hopes of ever winning the Princess.
The Second Knight told his parents that he needed change of air for his
health, for he was ashamed to tell them that love for the Princess Moonlight
was the real cause of his leaving them. He then left his home, at the same
time sending word to the Princess that he was setting out for Mount Horai
in the hope of getting her a branch of the gold and silver tree which she so
much wished to have. He only allowed his servants to accompany him half-
way, and then sent them back. He reached the seashore and embarked on a
small ship, and after sailing away for three days he landed and employed
several carpenters to build him a house contrived in such a way that no one
could get access to it. He then shut himself up with six skilled jewelers, and
endeavored to make such a gold and silver branch as he thought would
satisfy the Princess as having come from the wonderful tree growing on
Mount Horai. Every one whom he had asked declared that Mount Horai
belonged to the land of fable and not to fact.
When the branch was finished, he took his journey home and tried to
make himself look as if he were wearied and worn out with travel. He put
the jeweled branch into a lacquer box and carried it to the bamboo-cutter,
begging him to present it to the Princess.
to their own homes in despair.
But after a time, when they thought of the Princess, the love in their
hearts revived for her, and they resolved to make an attempt to get what she
desired of them.
The First Knight sent word to the Princess that he was starting out that
day on the quest of Buddha’s bowl, and he hoped soon to bring it to her. But
he had not the courage to go all the way to India, for in those days traveling
was very difficult and full of danger, so he went to one of the temples in
Kyoto and took a stone bowl from the altar there, paying the priest a large
sum of money for it. He then wrapped it in a cloth of gold and, waiting
quietly for three years, returned and carried it to the old man.
Princess Moonlight wondered that the Knight should have returned so
soon. She took the bowl from its gold wrapping, expecting it to make the
room full of light, but it did not shine at all, so she knew that it was a sham
thing and not the true bowl of Buddha. She returned it at once and refused
to see him. The Knight threw the bowl away and returned to his home in
despair. He gave up now all hopes of ever winning the Princess.
The Second Knight told his parents that he needed change of air for his
health, for he was ashamed to tell them that love for the Princess Moonlight
was the real cause of his leaving them. He then left his home, at the same
time sending word to the Princess that he was setting out for Mount Horai
in the hope of getting her a branch of the gold and silver tree which she so
much wished to have. He only allowed his servants to accompany him half-
way, and then sent them back. He reached the seashore and embarked on a
small ship, and after sailing away for three days he landed and employed
several carpenters to build him a house contrived in such a way that no one
could get access to it. He then shut himself up with six skilled jewelers, and
endeavored to make such a gold and silver branch as he thought would
satisfy the Princess as having come from the wonderful tree growing on
Mount Horai. Every one whom he had asked declared that Mount Horai
belonged to the land of fable and not to fact.
When the branch was finished, he took his journey home and tried to
make himself look as if he were wearied and worn out with travel. He put
the jeweled branch into a lacquer box and carried it to the bamboo-cutter,
begging him to present it to the Princess.
Page 74
The old man was quite deceived by the travel-stained appearance of the
Knight, and thought that he had only just returned from his long journey
with the branch. So he tried to persuade the Princess to consent to see the
man. But she remained silent and looked very sad. The old man began to
take out the branch and praised it as a wonderful treasure to be found
nowhere in the whole land. Then he spoke of the Knight, how handsome
and how brave he was to have undertaken a journey to so remote a place as
the Mount of Horai.
Princess Moonlight took the branch in her hand and looked at it carefully.
She then told her foster-parent that she knew it was impossible for the man
to have obtained a branch from the gold and silver tree growing on Mount
Horai so quickly or so easily, and she was sorry to say she believed it
artificial.
The old man then went out to the expectant Knight, who had now
approached the house, and asked where he had found the branch. Then the
man did not scruple to make up a long story.
“Two years ago I took a ship and started in search of Mount Horai. After
going before the wind for some time I reached the far Eastern Sea. Then a
great storm arose and I was tossed about for many days, losing all count of
the points of the compass, and finally we were blown ashore on an
unknown island. Here I found the place inhabited by demons who at one
time threatened to kill and eat me. However, I managed to make friends
with these horrible creatures, and they helped me and my sailors to repair
the boat, and I set sail again. Our food gave out, and we suffered much from
sickness on board. At last, on the five-hundredth day from the day of
starting, I saw far off on the horizon what looked like the peak of a
mountain. On nearer approach, this proved to be an island, in the center of
which rose a high mountain. I landed, and after wandering about for two or
three days, I saw a shining being coming towards me on the beach, holding
in his hands a golden bowl. I went up to him and asked him if I had, by
good chance, found the island of Mount Horai, and he answered:”
“‘Yes, this is Mount Horai!’”
“With much difficulty I climbed to the summit, here stood the golden tree
growing with silver roots in the ground. The wonders of that strange land
are many, and if I began to tell you about them I could never stop. In spite
of my wish to stay there long, on breaking off the branch I hurried back.
Knight, and thought that he had only just returned from his long journey
with the branch. So he tried to persuade the Princess to consent to see the
man. But she remained silent and looked very sad. The old man began to
take out the branch and praised it as a wonderful treasure to be found
nowhere in the whole land. Then he spoke of the Knight, how handsome
and how brave he was to have undertaken a journey to so remote a place as
the Mount of Horai.
Princess Moonlight took the branch in her hand and looked at it carefully.
She then told her foster-parent that she knew it was impossible for the man
to have obtained a branch from the gold and silver tree growing on Mount
Horai so quickly or so easily, and she was sorry to say she believed it
artificial.
The old man then went out to the expectant Knight, who had now
approached the house, and asked where he had found the branch. Then the
man did not scruple to make up a long story.
“Two years ago I took a ship and started in search of Mount Horai. After
going before the wind for some time I reached the far Eastern Sea. Then a
great storm arose and I was tossed about for many days, losing all count of
the points of the compass, and finally we were blown ashore on an
unknown island. Here I found the place inhabited by demons who at one
time threatened to kill and eat me. However, I managed to make friends
with these horrible creatures, and they helped me and my sailors to repair
the boat, and I set sail again. Our food gave out, and we suffered much from
sickness on board. At last, on the five-hundredth day from the day of
starting, I saw far off on the horizon what looked like the peak of a
mountain. On nearer approach, this proved to be an island, in the center of
which rose a high mountain. I landed, and after wandering about for two or
three days, I saw a shining being coming towards me on the beach, holding
in his hands a golden bowl. I went up to him and asked him if I had, by
good chance, found the island of Mount Horai, and he answered:”
“‘Yes, this is Mount Horai!’”
“With much difficulty I climbed to the summit, here stood the golden tree
growing with silver roots in the ground. The wonders of that strange land
are many, and if I began to tell you about them I could never stop. In spite
of my wish to stay there long, on breaking off the branch I hurried back.
Page 75
With utmost speed it has taken me four hundred days to get back, and, as
you see, my clothes are still damp from exposure on the long sea voyage. I
have not even waited to change my raiment, so anxious was I to bring the
branch to the Princess quickly.”
Just at this moment the six jewelers, who had been employed on the
making of the branch, but not yet paid by the Knight, arrived at the house
and sent in a petition to the Princess to be paid for their labor. They said that
they had worked for over a thousand days making the branch of gold, with
its silver twigs and its jeweled fruit, that was now presented to her by the
Knight, but as yet they had received nothing in payment. So this Knight’s
deception was thus found out, and the Princess, glad of an escape from one
more importunate suitor, was only too pleased to send back the branch. She
called in the workmen and had them paid liberally, and they went away
happy. But on the way home they were overtaken by the disappointed man,
who beat them till they were nearly dead, for letting out the secret, and they
barely escaped with their lives. The Knight then returned home, raging in
his heart; and in despair of ever winning the Princess gave up society and
retired to a solitary life among the mountains.
Now the Third Knight had a friend in China, so he wrote to him to get the
skin of the fire-rat. The virtue of any part of this animal was that no fire
could harm it. He promised his friend any amount of money he liked to ask
if only he could get him the desired article. As soon as the news came that
the ship on which his friend had sailed home had come into port, he rode
seven days on horseback to meet him. He handed his friend a large sum of
money, and received the fire-rat’s skin. When he reached home he put it
carefully in a box and sent it in to the Princess while he waited outside for
her answer.
The bamboo-cutter took the box from the Knight and, as usual, carried it
in to her and tried to coax her to see the Knight at once, but Princess
Moonlight refused, saying that she must first put the skin to test by putting
it into the fire. If it were the real thing it would not burn. So she took off the
crape wrapper and opened the box, and then threw the skin into the fire. The
skin crackled and burnt up at once, and the Princess knew that this man also
had not fulfilled his word. So the Third Knight failed also.
Now the Fourth Knight was no more enterprising than the rest. Instead of
starting out on the quest of the dragon bearing on its head the five-color-
you see, my clothes are still damp from exposure on the long sea voyage. I
have not even waited to change my raiment, so anxious was I to bring the
branch to the Princess quickly.”
Just at this moment the six jewelers, who had been employed on the
making of the branch, but not yet paid by the Knight, arrived at the house
and sent in a petition to the Princess to be paid for their labor. They said that
they had worked for over a thousand days making the branch of gold, with
its silver twigs and its jeweled fruit, that was now presented to her by the
Knight, but as yet they had received nothing in payment. So this Knight’s
deception was thus found out, and the Princess, glad of an escape from one
more importunate suitor, was only too pleased to send back the branch. She
called in the workmen and had them paid liberally, and they went away
happy. But on the way home they were overtaken by the disappointed man,
who beat them till they were nearly dead, for letting out the secret, and they
barely escaped with their lives. The Knight then returned home, raging in
his heart; and in despair of ever winning the Princess gave up society and
retired to a solitary life among the mountains.
Now the Third Knight had a friend in China, so he wrote to him to get the
skin of the fire-rat. The virtue of any part of this animal was that no fire
could harm it. He promised his friend any amount of money he liked to ask
if only he could get him the desired article. As soon as the news came that
the ship on which his friend had sailed home had come into port, he rode
seven days on horseback to meet him. He handed his friend a large sum of
money, and received the fire-rat’s skin. When he reached home he put it
carefully in a box and sent it in to the Princess while he waited outside for
her answer.
The bamboo-cutter took the box from the Knight and, as usual, carried it
in to her and tried to coax her to see the Knight at once, but Princess
Moonlight refused, saying that she must first put the skin to test by putting
it into the fire. If it were the real thing it would not burn. So she took off the
crape wrapper and opened the box, and then threw the skin into the fire. The
skin crackled and burnt up at once, and the Princess knew that this man also
had not fulfilled his word. So the Third Knight failed also.
Now the Fourth Knight was no more enterprising than the rest. Instead of
starting out on the quest of the dragon bearing on its head the five-color-
Page 76
radiating jewel, he called all his servants together and gave them the order
to seek for it far and wide in Japan and in China, and he strictly forbade any
of them to return till they had found it.
His numerous retainers and servants started out in different directions,
with no intention, however, of obeying what they considered an impossible
order. They simply took a holiday, went to pleasant country places together,
and grumbled at their master’s unreasonableness.
The Knight meanwhile, thinking that his retainers could not fail to find
the jewel, repaired to his house, and fitted it up beautifully for the reception
of the Princess, he felt so sure of winning her.
One year passed away in weary waiting, and still his men did not return
with the dragon-jewel. The Knight became desperate. He could wait no
longer, so taking with him only two men he hired a ship and commanded
the captain to go in search of the dragon; the captain and the sailors refused
to undertake what they said was an absurd search, but the Knight compelled
them at last to put out to sea.
When they had been but a few days out they encountered a great storm
which lasted so long that, by the time its fury abated, the Knight had
determined to give up the hunt of the dragon. They were at last blown on
shore, for navigation was primitive in those days. Worn out with his travels
and anxiety, the fourth suitor gave himself up to rest. He had caught a very
heavy cold, and had to go to bed with a swollen face.
The governor of the place, hearing of his plight, sent messengers with a
letter inviting him to his house. While he was there thinking over all his
troubles, his love for the Princess turned to anger, and he blamed her for all
the hardships he had undergone. He thought that it was quite probable she
had wished to kill him so that she might be rid of him, and in order to carry
out her wish had sent him upon his impossible quest.
At this point all the servants he had sent out to find the jewel came to see
him, and were surprised to find praise instead of displeasure awaiting them.
Their master told them that he was heartily sick of adventure, and said that
he never intended to go near the Princess’s house again in the future.
Like all the rest, the Fifth Knight failed in his quest—he could not find
the swallow’s shell.
to seek for it far and wide in Japan and in China, and he strictly forbade any
of them to return till they had found it.
His numerous retainers and servants started out in different directions,
with no intention, however, of obeying what they considered an impossible
order. They simply took a holiday, went to pleasant country places together,
and grumbled at their master’s unreasonableness.
The Knight meanwhile, thinking that his retainers could not fail to find
the jewel, repaired to his house, and fitted it up beautifully for the reception
of the Princess, he felt so sure of winning her.
One year passed away in weary waiting, and still his men did not return
with the dragon-jewel. The Knight became desperate. He could wait no
longer, so taking with him only two men he hired a ship and commanded
the captain to go in search of the dragon; the captain and the sailors refused
to undertake what they said was an absurd search, but the Knight compelled
them at last to put out to sea.
When they had been but a few days out they encountered a great storm
which lasted so long that, by the time its fury abated, the Knight had
determined to give up the hunt of the dragon. They were at last blown on
shore, for navigation was primitive in those days. Worn out with his travels
and anxiety, the fourth suitor gave himself up to rest. He had caught a very
heavy cold, and had to go to bed with a swollen face.
The governor of the place, hearing of his plight, sent messengers with a
letter inviting him to his house. While he was there thinking over all his
troubles, his love for the Princess turned to anger, and he blamed her for all
the hardships he had undergone. He thought that it was quite probable she
had wished to kill him so that she might be rid of him, and in order to carry
out her wish had sent him upon his impossible quest.
At this point all the servants he had sent out to find the jewel came to see
him, and were surprised to find praise instead of displeasure awaiting them.
Their master told them that he was heartily sick of adventure, and said that
he never intended to go near the Princess’s house again in the future.
Like all the rest, the Fifth Knight failed in his quest—he could not find
the swallow’s shell.
Page 77
By this time the fame of Princess Moonlight’s beauty had reached the
ears of the Emperor, and he sent one of the Court ladies to see if she were
really as lovely as report said; if so he would summon her to the Palace and
make her one of the ladies-in-waiting.
When the Court lady arrived, in spite of her father’s entreaties, Princess
Moonlight refused to see her. The Imperial messenger insisted, saying it
was the Emperor’s order. Then Princess Moonlight told the old man that if
she was forced to go to the Palace in obedience to the Emperor’s order, she
would vanish from the earth.
When the Emperor was told of her persistence in refusing to obey his
summons, and that if pressed to obey she would disappear altogether from
sight, he determined to go and see her. So he planned to go on a hunting
excursion in the neighborhood of the bamboo-cutter’s house, and see the
Princess himself. He sent word to the old man of his intention, and he
received consent to the scheme. The next day the Emperor set out with his
retinue, which he soon managed to outride. He found the bamboo-cutter’s
house and dismounted. He then entered the house and went straight to
where the Princess was sitting with her attendant maidens.
Never had he seen any one so wonderfully beautiful, and he could not but
look at her, for she was more lovely than any human being as she shone in
her own soft radiance. When Princess Moonlight became aware that a
stranger was looking at her she tried to escape from the room, but the
Emperor caught her and begged her to listen to what he had to say. Her only
answer was to hide her face in her sleeves.
The Emperor fell deeply in love with her, and begged her to come to the
Court, where he would give her a position of honor and everything she
could wish for. He was about to send for one of the Imperial palanquins to
take her back with him at once, saying that her grace and beauty should
adorn a Court, and not be hidden in a bamboo-cutter’s cottage.
But the Princess stopped him. She said that if she were forced to go to the
Palace she would turn at once into a shadow, and even as she spoke she
began to lose her form. Her figure faded from his sight while he looked.
The Emperor then promised to leave her free if only she would resume
her former shape, which she did.
It was now time for him to return, for his retinue would be wondering
what had happened to their Royal master when they missed him for so long.
ears of the Emperor, and he sent one of the Court ladies to see if she were
really as lovely as report said; if so he would summon her to the Palace and
make her one of the ladies-in-waiting.
When the Court lady arrived, in spite of her father’s entreaties, Princess
Moonlight refused to see her. The Imperial messenger insisted, saying it
was the Emperor’s order. Then Princess Moonlight told the old man that if
she was forced to go to the Palace in obedience to the Emperor’s order, she
would vanish from the earth.
When the Emperor was told of her persistence in refusing to obey his
summons, and that if pressed to obey she would disappear altogether from
sight, he determined to go and see her. So he planned to go on a hunting
excursion in the neighborhood of the bamboo-cutter’s house, and see the
Princess himself. He sent word to the old man of his intention, and he
received consent to the scheme. The next day the Emperor set out with his
retinue, which he soon managed to outride. He found the bamboo-cutter’s
house and dismounted. He then entered the house and went straight to
where the Princess was sitting with her attendant maidens.
Never had he seen any one so wonderfully beautiful, and he could not but
look at her, for she was more lovely than any human being as she shone in
her own soft radiance. When Princess Moonlight became aware that a
stranger was looking at her she tried to escape from the room, but the
Emperor caught her and begged her to listen to what he had to say. Her only
answer was to hide her face in her sleeves.
The Emperor fell deeply in love with her, and begged her to come to the
Court, where he would give her a position of honor and everything she
could wish for. He was about to send for one of the Imperial palanquins to
take her back with him at once, saying that her grace and beauty should
adorn a Court, and not be hidden in a bamboo-cutter’s cottage.
But the Princess stopped him. She said that if she were forced to go to the
Palace she would turn at once into a shadow, and even as she spoke she
began to lose her form. Her figure faded from his sight while he looked.
The Emperor then promised to leave her free if only she would resume
her former shape, which she did.
It was now time for him to return, for his retinue would be wondering
what had happened to their Royal master when they missed him for so long.
Page 78
So he bade her good-by, and left the house with a sad heart. Princess
Moonlight was for him the most beautiful woman in the world; all others
were dark beside her, and he thought of her night and day. His Majesty now
spent much of his time in writing poems, telling her of his love and
devotion, and sent them to her, and though she refused to see him again she
answered with many verses of her own composing, which told him gently
and kindly that she could never marry any one on this earth. These little
songs always gave him pleasure.
At this time her foster-parents noticed that night after night the Princess
would sit on her balcony and gaze for hours at the moon, in a spirit of the
deepest dejection, ending always in a burst of tears. One night the old man
found her thus weeping as if her heart were broken, and he besought her to
tell him the reason of her sorrow.
With many tears she told him that he had guessed rightly when he
supposed her not to belong to this world—that she had in truth come from
the moon, and that her time on earth would soon be over. On the fifteenth
day of that very month of August her friends from the moon would come to
fetch her, and she would have to return. Her parents were both there, but
having spent a lifetime on the earth she had forgotten them, and also the
moon-world to which she belonged. It made her weep, she said, to think of
leaving her kind foster-parents, and the home where she had been happy for
so long.
When her attendants heard this they were very sad, and could not eat or
drink for sadness at the thought that the Princess was so soon to leave them.
The Emperor, as soon as the news was carried to him, sent messengers to
the house to find out if the report were true or not.
The old bamboo-cutter went out to meet the Imperial messengers. The
last few days of sorrow had told upon the old man; he had aged greatly, and
looked much more than his seventy years. Weeping bitterly, he told them
that the report was only too true, but he intended, however, to make
prisoners of the envoys from the moon, and to do all he could to prevent the
Princess from being carried back.
The men returned and told His Majesty all that had passed. On the
fifteenth day of that month the Emperor sent a guard of two thousand
warriors to watch the house. One thousand stationed themselves on the roof,
another thousand kept watch round all the entrances of the house. All were
Moonlight was for him the most beautiful woman in the world; all others
were dark beside her, and he thought of her night and day. His Majesty now
spent much of his time in writing poems, telling her of his love and
devotion, and sent them to her, and though she refused to see him again she
answered with many verses of her own composing, which told him gently
and kindly that she could never marry any one on this earth. These little
songs always gave him pleasure.
At this time her foster-parents noticed that night after night the Princess
would sit on her balcony and gaze for hours at the moon, in a spirit of the
deepest dejection, ending always in a burst of tears. One night the old man
found her thus weeping as if her heart were broken, and he besought her to
tell him the reason of her sorrow.
With many tears she told him that he had guessed rightly when he
supposed her not to belong to this world—that she had in truth come from
the moon, and that her time on earth would soon be over. On the fifteenth
day of that very month of August her friends from the moon would come to
fetch her, and she would have to return. Her parents were both there, but
having spent a lifetime on the earth she had forgotten them, and also the
moon-world to which she belonged. It made her weep, she said, to think of
leaving her kind foster-parents, and the home where she had been happy for
so long.
When her attendants heard this they were very sad, and could not eat or
drink for sadness at the thought that the Princess was so soon to leave them.
The Emperor, as soon as the news was carried to him, sent messengers to
the house to find out if the report were true or not.
The old bamboo-cutter went out to meet the Imperial messengers. The
last few days of sorrow had told upon the old man; he had aged greatly, and
looked much more than his seventy years. Weeping bitterly, he told them
that the report was only too true, but he intended, however, to make
prisoners of the envoys from the moon, and to do all he could to prevent the
Princess from being carried back.
The men returned and told His Majesty all that had passed. On the
fifteenth day of that month the Emperor sent a guard of two thousand
warriors to watch the house. One thousand stationed themselves on the roof,
another thousand kept watch round all the entrances of the house. All were
Page 79
well trained archers, with bows and arrows. The bamboo-cutter and his wife
hid Princess Moonlight in an inner room.
The old man gave orders that no one was to sleep that night, all in the
house were to keep a strict watch, and be ready to protect the Princess. With
these precautions, and the help of the Emperor’s men-at-arms, he hoped to
withstand the moon-messengers, but the Princess told him that all these
measures to keep her would be useless, and that when her people came for
her nothing whatever could prevent them from carrying out their purpose.
Even the Emperors men would be powerless. Then she added with tears that
she was very, very sorry to leave him and his wife, whom she had learned to
love as her parents, that if she could do as she liked she would stay with
them in their old age, and try to make some return for all the love and
kindness they had showered upon her during all her earthly life.
The night wore on! The yellow harvest moon rose high in the heavens,
flooding the world asleep with her golden light. Silence reigned over the
pine and the bamboo forests, and on the roof where the thousand men-at-
arms waited.
Then the night grew gray towards the dawn and all hoped that the danger
was over—that Princess Moonlight would not have to leave them after all.
Then suddenly the watchers saw a cloud form round the moon—and while
they looked this cloud began to roll earthwards. Nearer and nearer it came,
and every one saw with dismay that its course lay towards the house.
In a short time the sky was entirely obscured, till at last the cloud lay
over the dwelling only ten feet off the ground. In the midst of the cloud
there stood a flying chariot, and in the chariot a band of luminous beings.
One amongst them who looked like a king and appeared to be the chief
stepped out of the chariot, and, poised in air, called to the old man to come
out.
“The time has come,” he said, “for Princess Moonlight to return to the
moon from whence she came. She committed a grave fault, and as a
punishment was sent to live down here for a time. We know what good care
you have taken of the Princess, and we have rewarded you for this and have
sent you wealth and prosperity. We put the gold in the bamboos for you to
find.”
“I have brought up this Princess for twenty years and never once has she
done a wrong thing, therefore the lady you are seeking cannot be this one,”
hid Princess Moonlight in an inner room.
The old man gave orders that no one was to sleep that night, all in the
house were to keep a strict watch, and be ready to protect the Princess. With
these precautions, and the help of the Emperor’s men-at-arms, he hoped to
withstand the moon-messengers, but the Princess told him that all these
measures to keep her would be useless, and that when her people came for
her nothing whatever could prevent them from carrying out their purpose.
Even the Emperors men would be powerless. Then she added with tears that
she was very, very sorry to leave him and his wife, whom she had learned to
love as her parents, that if she could do as she liked she would stay with
them in their old age, and try to make some return for all the love and
kindness they had showered upon her during all her earthly life.
The night wore on! The yellow harvest moon rose high in the heavens,
flooding the world asleep with her golden light. Silence reigned over the
pine and the bamboo forests, and on the roof where the thousand men-at-
arms waited.
Then the night grew gray towards the dawn and all hoped that the danger
was over—that Princess Moonlight would not have to leave them after all.
Then suddenly the watchers saw a cloud form round the moon—and while
they looked this cloud began to roll earthwards. Nearer and nearer it came,
and every one saw with dismay that its course lay towards the house.
In a short time the sky was entirely obscured, till at last the cloud lay
over the dwelling only ten feet off the ground. In the midst of the cloud
there stood a flying chariot, and in the chariot a band of luminous beings.
One amongst them who looked like a king and appeared to be the chief
stepped out of the chariot, and, poised in air, called to the old man to come
out.
“The time has come,” he said, “for Princess Moonlight to return to the
moon from whence she came. She committed a grave fault, and as a
punishment was sent to live down here for a time. We know what good care
you have taken of the Princess, and we have rewarded you for this and have
sent you wealth and prosperity. We put the gold in the bamboos for you to
find.”
“I have brought up this Princess for twenty years and never once has she
done a wrong thing, therefore the lady you are seeking cannot be this one,”
Page 80
said the old man. “I pray you to look elsewhere.”
Then the messenger called aloud, saying:
“Princess Moonlight, come out from this lowly dwelling. Rest not here
another moment.”
At these words the screens of the Princess’s room slid open of their own
accord, revealing the Princess shining in her own radiance, bright and
wonderful and full of beauty.
The messenger led her forth and placed her in the chariot. She looked
back, and saw with pity the deep sorrow of the old man. She spoke to him
many comforting words, and told him that it was not her will to leave him
and that he must always think of her when looking at the moon.
The bamboo-cutter implored to be allowed to accompany her, but this
was not allowed. The Princess took off her embroidered outer garment and
gave it to him as a keepsake.
One of the moon beings in the chariot held a wonderful coat of wings,
another had a phial full of the Elixir of Life which was given the Princess to
drink. She swallowed a little and was about to give the rest to the old man,
but she was prevented from doing so.
The robe of wings was about to be put upon her shoulders, but she said:
“Wait a little. I must not forget my good friend the Emperor. I must write
him once more to say good-by while still in this human form.”
In spite of the impatience of the messengers and charioteers she kept
them waiting while she wrote. She placed the phial of the Elixir of Life with
the letter, and, giving them to the old man, she asked him to deliver them to
the Emperor.
Then the chariot began to roll heavenwards towards the moon, and as
they all gazed with tearful eyes at the receding Princess, the dawn broke,
and in the rosy light of day the moon-chariot and all in it were lost amongst
the fleecy clouds that were now wafted across the sky on the wings of the
morning wind.
Princess Moonlight’s letter was carried to the Palace. His Majesty was
afraid to touch the Elixir of Life, so he sent it with the letter to the top of the
most sacred mountain in the land. Mount Fuji, and there the Royal
emissaries burnt it on the summit at sunrise. So to this day people say there
is smoke to be seen rising from the top of Mount Fuji to the clouds.
Then the messenger called aloud, saying:
“Princess Moonlight, come out from this lowly dwelling. Rest not here
another moment.”
At these words the screens of the Princess’s room slid open of their own
accord, revealing the Princess shining in her own radiance, bright and
wonderful and full of beauty.
The messenger led her forth and placed her in the chariot. She looked
back, and saw with pity the deep sorrow of the old man. She spoke to him
many comforting words, and told him that it was not her will to leave him
and that he must always think of her when looking at the moon.
The bamboo-cutter implored to be allowed to accompany her, but this
was not allowed. The Princess took off her embroidered outer garment and
gave it to him as a keepsake.
One of the moon beings in the chariot held a wonderful coat of wings,
another had a phial full of the Elixir of Life which was given the Princess to
drink. She swallowed a little and was about to give the rest to the old man,
but she was prevented from doing so.
The robe of wings was about to be put upon her shoulders, but she said:
“Wait a little. I must not forget my good friend the Emperor. I must write
him once more to say good-by while still in this human form.”
In spite of the impatience of the messengers and charioteers she kept
them waiting while she wrote. She placed the phial of the Elixir of Life with
the letter, and, giving them to the old man, she asked him to deliver them to
the Emperor.
Then the chariot began to roll heavenwards towards the moon, and as
they all gazed with tearful eyes at the receding Princess, the dawn broke,
and in the rosy light of day the moon-chariot and all in it were lost amongst
the fleecy clouds that were now wafted across the sky on the wings of the
morning wind.
Princess Moonlight’s letter was carried to the Palace. His Majesty was
afraid to touch the Elixir of Life, so he sent it with the letter to the top of the
most sacred mountain in the land. Mount Fuji, and there the Royal
emissaries burnt it on the summit at sunrise. So to this day people say there
is smoke to be seen rising from the top of Mount Fuji to the clouds.
Page 81
THE MIRROR OF MATSUYAMA
A STORY OF OLD JAPAN
Long years ago in old Japan there lived in the Province of Echigo, a very
remote part of Japan even in these days, a man and his wife. When this
story begins they had been married for some years and were blessed with
one little daughter. She was the joy and pride of both their lives, and in her
they stored an endless source of happiness for their old age.
What golden letter days in their memory were these that had marked her
growing up from babyhood; the visit to the temple when she was just thirty
days old, her proud mother carrying her, robed in ceremonial kimono, to be
put under the patronage of the family’s household god; then her first dolls
festival, when her parents gave her a set of dolls and their miniature
belongings, to be added to as year succeeded year; and perhaps the most
important occasion of all, on her third birthday, when her first OBI (broad
brocade sash) of scarlet and gold was tied round her small waist, a sign that
she had crossed the threshold of girlhood and left infancy behind. Now that
she was seven years of age, and had learned to talk and to wait upon her
parents in those several little ways so dear to the hearts of fond parents,
their cup of happiness seemed full. There could not be found in the whole
of the Island Empire a happier little family.
One day there was much excitement in the home, for the father had been
suddenly summoned to the capital on business. In these days of railways
and jinrickshas and other rapid modes of traveling, it is difficult to realize
what such a journey as that from Matsuyama to Kyoto meant. The roads
were rough and bad, and ordinary people had to walk every step of the way,
whether the distance were one hundred or several hundred miles. Indeed, in
those days it was as great an undertaking to go up to the capital as it is for a
Japanese to make a voyage to Europe now.
A STORY OF OLD JAPAN
Long years ago in old Japan there lived in the Province of Echigo, a very
remote part of Japan even in these days, a man and his wife. When this
story begins they had been married for some years and were blessed with
one little daughter. She was the joy and pride of both their lives, and in her
they stored an endless source of happiness for their old age.
What golden letter days in their memory were these that had marked her
growing up from babyhood; the visit to the temple when she was just thirty
days old, her proud mother carrying her, robed in ceremonial kimono, to be
put under the patronage of the family’s household god; then her first dolls
festival, when her parents gave her a set of dolls and their miniature
belongings, to be added to as year succeeded year; and perhaps the most
important occasion of all, on her third birthday, when her first OBI (broad
brocade sash) of scarlet and gold was tied round her small waist, a sign that
she had crossed the threshold of girlhood and left infancy behind. Now that
she was seven years of age, and had learned to talk and to wait upon her
parents in those several little ways so dear to the hearts of fond parents,
their cup of happiness seemed full. There could not be found in the whole
of the Island Empire a happier little family.
One day there was much excitement in the home, for the father had been
suddenly summoned to the capital on business. In these days of railways
and jinrickshas and other rapid modes of traveling, it is difficult to realize
what such a journey as that from Matsuyama to Kyoto meant. The roads
were rough and bad, and ordinary people had to walk every step of the way,
whether the distance were one hundred or several hundred miles. Indeed, in
those days it was as great an undertaking to go up to the capital as it is for a
Japanese to make a voyage to Europe now.
Page 82
So the wife was very anxious while she helped her husband get ready for
the long journey, knowing what an arduous task lay before him. Vainly she
wished that she could accompany him, but the distance was too great for the
mother and child to go, and besides that, it was the wife’s duty to take care
of the home.
All was ready at last, and the husband stood in the porch with his little
family round him.
“Do not be anxious, I will come back soon,” said the man. “While I am
away take care of everything, and especially of our little daughter.”
“Yes, we shall be all right—but you—you must take care of yourself and
delay not a day in coming back to us,” said the wife, while the tears fell like
rain from her eyes.
The little girl was the only one to smile, for she was ignorant of the
sorrow of parting, and did not know that going to the capital was at all
different from walking to the next village, which her father did very often.
She ran to his side, and caught hold of his long sleeve to keep him a
moment.
“Father, I will be very good while I am waiting for you to come back, so
please bring me a present.”
As the father turned to take a last look at his weeping wife and smiling,
eager child, he felt as if some one were pulling him back by the hair, so
hard was it for him to leave them behind, for they had never been separated
before. But he knew that he must go, for the call was imperative. With a
great effort he ceased to think, and resolutely turning away he went quickly
down the little garden and out through the gate. His wife, catching up the
child in her arms, ran as far as the gate, and watched him as he went down
the road between the pines till he was lost in the haze of the distance and all
she could see was his quaint peaked hat, and at last that vanished too.
“Now father has gone, you and I must take care of everything till he
comes back,” said the mother, as she made her way back to the house.
“Yes, I will be very good,” said the child, nodding her head, “and when
father comes home please tell him how good I have been, and then perhaps
he will give me a present.”
“Father is sure to bring you something that you want very much. I know,
for I asked him to bring you a doll. You must think of father every day, and
the long journey, knowing what an arduous task lay before him. Vainly she
wished that she could accompany him, but the distance was too great for the
mother and child to go, and besides that, it was the wife’s duty to take care
of the home.
All was ready at last, and the husband stood in the porch with his little
family round him.
“Do not be anxious, I will come back soon,” said the man. “While I am
away take care of everything, and especially of our little daughter.”
“Yes, we shall be all right—but you—you must take care of yourself and
delay not a day in coming back to us,” said the wife, while the tears fell like
rain from her eyes.
The little girl was the only one to smile, for she was ignorant of the
sorrow of parting, and did not know that going to the capital was at all
different from walking to the next village, which her father did very often.
She ran to his side, and caught hold of his long sleeve to keep him a
moment.
“Father, I will be very good while I am waiting for you to come back, so
please bring me a present.”
As the father turned to take a last look at his weeping wife and smiling,
eager child, he felt as if some one were pulling him back by the hair, so
hard was it for him to leave them behind, for they had never been separated
before. But he knew that he must go, for the call was imperative. With a
great effort he ceased to think, and resolutely turning away he went quickly
down the little garden and out through the gate. His wife, catching up the
child in her arms, ran as far as the gate, and watched him as he went down
the road between the pines till he was lost in the haze of the distance and all
she could see was his quaint peaked hat, and at last that vanished too.
“Now father has gone, you and I must take care of everything till he
comes back,” said the mother, as she made her way back to the house.
“Yes, I will be very good,” said the child, nodding her head, “and when
father comes home please tell him how good I have been, and then perhaps
he will give me a present.”
“Father is sure to bring you something that you want very much. I know,
for I asked him to bring you a doll. You must think of father every day, and
Page 83
pray for a safe journey till he comes back.”
“O, yes, when he comes home again how happy I shall be,” said the
child, clapping her hands, and her face growing bright with joy at the glad
thought. It seemed to the mother as she looked at the child’s face that her
love for her grew deeper and deeper.
Then she set to work to make the winter clothes for the three of them.
She set up her simple wooden spinning-wheel and spun the thread before
she began to weave the stuffs. In the intervals of her work she directed the
little girl’s games and taught her to read the old stories of her country. Thus
did the wife find consolation in work during the lonely days of her
husband’s absence. While the time was thus slipping quickly by in the quiet
home, the husband finished his business and returned.
It would have been difficult for any one who did not know the man well
to recognize him. He had traveled day after day, exposed to all weathers, for
about a month altogether, and was sunburnt to bronze, but his fond wife and
child knew him at a glance, and flew to meet him from either side, each
catching hold of one of his sleeves in their eager greeting. Both the man and
his wife rejoiced to find each other well. It seemed a very long time to all
till—the mother and child helping—his straw sandals were untied, his large
umbrella hat taken off, and he was again in their midst in the old familiar
sitting-room that had been so empty while he was away.
As soon as they had sat down on the white mats, the father opened a
bamboo basket that he had brought in with him, and took out a beautiful
doll and a lacquer box full of cakes.
“Here,” he said to the little girl, “is a present for you. It is a prize for
taking care of mother and the house so well while I was away.”
“Thank you,” said the child, as she bowed her head to the ground, and
then put out her hand just like a little maple leaf with its eager wide-spread
fingers to take the doll and the box, both of which, coming from the capital,
were prettier than anything she had ever seen. No words can tell how
delighted the little girl was—her face seemed as if it would melt with joy,
and she had no eyes and no thought for anything else.
Again the husband dived into the basket, and brought out this time a
square wooden box, carefully tied up with red and white string, and handing
it to his wife, said:
“O, yes, when he comes home again how happy I shall be,” said the
child, clapping her hands, and her face growing bright with joy at the glad
thought. It seemed to the mother as she looked at the child’s face that her
love for her grew deeper and deeper.
Then she set to work to make the winter clothes for the three of them.
She set up her simple wooden spinning-wheel and spun the thread before
she began to weave the stuffs. In the intervals of her work she directed the
little girl’s games and taught her to read the old stories of her country. Thus
did the wife find consolation in work during the lonely days of her
husband’s absence. While the time was thus slipping quickly by in the quiet
home, the husband finished his business and returned.
It would have been difficult for any one who did not know the man well
to recognize him. He had traveled day after day, exposed to all weathers, for
about a month altogether, and was sunburnt to bronze, but his fond wife and
child knew him at a glance, and flew to meet him from either side, each
catching hold of one of his sleeves in their eager greeting. Both the man and
his wife rejoiced to find each other well. It seemed a very long time to all
till—the mother and child helping—his straw sandals were untied, his large
umbrella hat taken off, and he was again in their midst in the old familiar
sitting-room that had been so empty while he was away.
As soon as they had sat down on the white mats, the father opened a
bamboo basket that he had brought in with him, and took out a beautiful
doll and a lacquer box full of cakes.
“Here,” he said to the little girl, “is a present for you. It is a prize for
taking care of mother and the house so well while I was away.”
“Thank you,” said the child, as she bowed her head to the ground, and
then put out her hand just like a little maple leaf with its eager wide-spread
fingers to take the doll and the box, both of which, coming from the capital,
were prettier than anything she had ever seen. No words can tell how
delighted the little girl was—her face seemed as if it would melt with joy,
and she had no eyes and no thought for anything else.
Again the husband dived into the basket, and brought out this time a
square wooden box, carefully tied up with red and white string, and handing
it to his wife, said:
Page 84
“And this is for you.”
The wife took the box, and opening it carefully took out a metal disk with
a handle attached. One side was bright and shining like a crystal, and the
other was covered with raised figures of pine-trees and storks, which had
been carved out of its smooth surface in lifelike reality. Never had she seen
such a thing in her life, for she had been born and bred in the rural province
of Echigo. She gazed into the shining disk, and looking up with surprise and
wonder pictured on her face, she said:
“I see somebody looking at me in this round thing! What is it that you
have given me?”
The husband laughed and said:
“Why, it is your own face that you see. What I have brought you is called
a mirror, and whoever looks into its clear surface can see their own form
reflected there. Although there are none to be found in this out of the way
place, yet they have been in use in the capital from the most ancient times.
There the mirror is considered a very necessary requisite for a woman to
possess. There is an old proverb that ‘As the sword is the soul of a samurai,
so is the mirror the soul of a woman,’ and according to popular tradition, a
woman’s mirror is an index to her own heart—if she keeps it bright and
clear, so is her heart pure and good. It is also one of the treasures that form
the insignia of the Emperor. So you must lay great store by your mirror, and
use it carefully.”
The wife listened to all her husband told her, and was pleased at learning
so much that was new to her. She was still more pleased at the precious gift
—his token of remembrance while he had been away.
“If the mirror represents my soul, I shall certainly treasure it as a valuable
possession, and never will I use it carelessly.” Saying so, she lifted it as
high as her forehead, in grateful acknowledgment of the gift, and then shut
it up in its box and put it away.
The wife saw that her husband was very tired, and set about serving the
evening meal and making everything as comfortable as she could for him. It
seemed to the little family as if they had not known what true happiness
was before, so glad were they to be together again, and this evening the
father had much to tell of his journey and of all he had seen at the great
capital.
The wife took the box, and opening it carefully took out a metal disk with
a handle attached. One side was bright and shining like a crystal, and the
other was covered with raised figures of pine-trees and storks, which had
been carved out of its smooth surface in lifelike reality. Never had she seen
such a thing in her life, for she had been born and bred in the rural province
of Echigo. She gazed into the shining disk, and looking up with surprise and
wonder pictured on her face, she said:
“I see somebody looking at me in this round thing! What is it that you
have given me?”
The husband laughed and said:
“Why, it is your own face that you see. What I have brought you is called
a mirror, and whoever looks into its clear surface can see their own form
reflected there. Although there are none to be found in this out of the way
place, yet they have been in use in the capital from the most ancient times.
There the mirror is considered a very necessary requisite for a woman to
possess. There is an old proverb that ‘As the sword is the soul of a samurai,
so is the mirror the soul of a woman,’ and according to popular tradition, a
woman’s mirror is an index to her own heart—if she keeps it bright and
clear, so is her heart pure and good. It is also one of the treasures that form
the insignia of the Emperor. So you must lay great store by your mirror, and
use it carefully.”
The wife listened to all her husband told her, and was pleased at learning
so much that was new to her. She was still more pleased at the precious gift
—his token of remembrance while he had been away.
“If the mirror represents my soul, I shall certainly treasure it as a valuable
possession, and never will I use it carelessly.” Saying so, she lifted it as
high as her forehead, in grateful acknowledgment of the gift, and then shut
it up in its box and put it away.
The wife saw that her husband was very tired, and set about serving the
evening meal and making everything as comfortable as she could for him. It
seemed to the little family as if they had not known what true happiness
was before, so glad were they to be together again, and this evening the
father had much to tell of his journey and of all he had seen at the great
capital.
Page 85
Time passed away in the peaceful home, and the parents saw their
fondest hopes realized as their daughter grew from childhood into a
beautiful girl of sixteen. As a gem of priceless value is held in its proud
owner’s hand, so had they reared her with unceasing love and care: and now
their pains were more than doubly rewarded. What a comfort she was to her
mother as she went about the house taking her part in the housekeeping, and
how proud her father was of her, for she daily reminded him of her mother
when he had first married her.
But, alas! in this world nothing lasts forever. Even the moon is not
always perfect in shape, but loses its roundness with time, and flowers
bloom and then fade. So at last the happiness of this family was broken up
by a great sorrow. The good and gentle wife and mother was one day taken
ill.
In the first days of her illness the father and daughter thought that it was
only a cold, and were not particularly anxious. But the days went by and
still the mother did not get better; she only grew worse, and the doctor was
puzzled, for in spite of all he did the poor woman grew weaker day by day.
The father and daughter were stricken with grief, and day or night the girl
never left her mother’s side. But in spite of all their efforts the woman’s life
was not to be saved.
One day as the girl sat near her mother’s bed, trying to hide with a cheery
smile the gnawing trouble at her heart, the mother roused herself and taking
her daughter’s hand, gazed earnestly and lovingly into her eyes. Her breath
was labored and she spoke with difficulty:
“My daughter. I am sure that nothing can save me now. When I am dead,
promise me to take care of your dear father and to try to be a good and
dutiful woman.”
“Oh, mother,” said the girl as the tears rushed to her eyes, “you must not
say such things. All you have to do is to make haste and get well—that will
bring the greatest happiness to father and myself.”
“Yes, I know, and it is a comfort to me in my last days to know how
greatly you long for me to get better, but it is not to be. Do not look so
sorrowful, for it was so ordained in my previous state of existence that I
should die in this life just at this time; knowing this, I am quite resigned to
my fate. And now I have something to give you whereby to remember me
when I am gone.”
fondest hopes realized as their daughter grew from childhood into a
beautiful girl of sixteen. As a gem of priceless value is held in its proud
owner’s hand, so had they reared her with unceasing love and care: and now
their pains were more than doubly rewarded. What a comfort she was to her
mother as she went about the house taking her part in the housekeeping, and
how proud her father was of her, for she daily reminded him of her mother
when he had first married her.
But, alas! in this world nothing lasts forever. Even the moon is not
always perfect in shape, but loses its roundness with time, and flowers
bloom and then fade. So at last the happiness of this family was broken up
by a great sorrow. The good and gentle wife and mother was one day taken
ill.
In the first days of her illness the father and daughter thought that it was
only a cold, and were not particularly anxious. But the days went by and
still the mother did not get better; she only grew worse, and the doctor was
puzzled, for in spite of all he did the poor woman grew weaker day by day.
The father and daughter were stricken with grief, and day or night the girl
never left her mother’s side. But in spite of all their efforts the woman’s life
was not to be saved.
One day as the girl sat near her mother’s bed, trying to hide with a cheery
smile the gnawing trouble at her heart, the mother roused herself and taking
her daughter’s hand, gazed earnestly and lovingly into her eyes. Her breath
was labored and she spoke with difficulty:
“My daughter. I am sure that nothing can save me now. When I am dead,
promise me to take care of your dear father and to try to be a good and
dutiful woman.”
“Oh, mother,” said the girl as the tears rushed to her eyes, “you must not
say such things. All you have to do is to make haste and get well—that will
bring the greatest happiness to father and myself.”
“Yes, I know, and it is a comfort to me in my last days to know how
greatly you long for me to get better, but it is not to be. Do not look so
sorrowful, for it was so ordained in my previous state of existence that I
should die in this life just at this time; knowing this, I am quite resigned to
my fate. And now I have something to give you whereby to remember me
when I am gone.”
Page 86
Putting her hand out, she took from the side of the pillow a square
wooden box tied up with a silken cord and tassels. Undoing this very
carefully, she took out of the box the mirror that her husband had given her
years ago.
“When you were still a little child your father went up to the capital and
brought me back as a present this treasure; it is called a mirror. This I give
you before I die. If, after I have ceased to be in this life, you are lonely and
long to see me sometimes, then take out this mirror and in the clear and
shining surface you will always see me—so will you be able to meet with
me often and tell me all your heart; and though I shall not be able to speak,
I shall understand and sympathize with you, whatever may happen to you in
the future.” With these words the dying woman handed the mirror to her
daughter.
The mind of the good mother seemed to be now at rest, and sinking back
without another word her spirit passed quietly away that day.
The bereaved father and daughter were wild with grief, and they
abandoned themselves to their bitter sorrow. They felt it to be impossible to
take leave of the loved woman who till now had filled their whole lives and
to commit her body to the earth. But this frantic burst of grief passed, and
then they took possession of their own hearts again, crushed though they
were in resignation. In spite of this the daughter’s life seemed to her
desolate. Her love for her dead mother did not grow less with time, and so
keen was her remembrance, that everything in daily life, even the falling of
the rain and the blowing of the wind, reminded her of her mother’s death
and of all that they had loved and shared together. One day when her father
was out, and she was fulfilling her household duties alone, her loneliness
and sorrow seemed more than she could bear. She threw herself down in her
mother’s room and wept as if her heart would break. Poor child, she longed
just for one glimpse of the loved face, one sound of the voice calling her pet
name, or for one moment’s forgetfulness of the aching void in her heart.
Suddenly she sat up. Her mother’s last words had rung through her memory
hitherto dulled by grief.
“Oh! my mother told me when she gave me the mirror as a parting gift,
that whenever I looked into it I should be able to meet her—to see her. I had
nearly forgotten her last words—how stupid I am; I will get the mirror now
and see if it can possibly be true!”
wooden box tied up with a silken cord and tassels. Undoing this very
carefully, she took out of the box the mirror that her husband had given her
years ago.
“When you were still a little child your father went up to the capital and
brought me back as a present this treasure; it is called a mirror. This I give
you before I die. If, after I have ceased to be in this life, you are lonely and
long to see me sometimes, then take out this mirror and in the clear and
shining surface you will always see me—so will you be able to meet with
me often and tell me all your heart; and though I shall not be able to speak,
I shall understand and sympathize with you, whatever may happen to you in
the future.” With these words the dying woman handed the mirror to her
daughter.
The mind of the good mother seemed to be now at rest, and sinking back
without another word her spirit passed quietly away that day.
The bereaved father and daughter were wild with grief, and they
abandoned themselves to their bitter sorrow. They felt it to be impossible to
take leave of the loved woman who till now had filled their whole lives and
to commit her body to the earth. But this frantic burst of grief passed, and
then they took possession of their own hearts again, crushed though they
were in resignation. In spite of this the daughter’s life seemed to her
desolate. Her love for her dead mother did not grow less with time, and so
keen was her remembrance, that everything in daily life, even the falling of
the rain and the blowing of the wind, reminded her of her mother’s death
and of all that they had loved and shared together. One day when her father
was out, and she was fulfilling her household duties alone, her loneliness
and sorrow seemed more than she could bear. She threw herself down in her
mother’s room and wept as if her heart would break. Poor child, she longed
just for one glimpse of the loved face, one sound of the voice calling her pet
name, or for one moment’s forgetfulness of the aching void in her heart.
Suddenly she sat up. Her mother’s last words had rung through her memory
hitherto dulled by grief.
“Oh! my mother told me when she gave me the mirror as a parting gift,
that whenever I looked into it I should be able to meet her—to see her. I had
nearly forgotten her last words—how stupid I am; I will get the mirror now
and see if it can possibly be true!”
Page 87
She dried her eyes quickly, and going to the cupboard took out the box
that contained the mirror, her heart beating with expectation as she lifted the
mirror out and gazed into its smooth face. Behold, her mother’s words were
true! In the round mirror before her she saw her mother’s face; but, oh, the
joyful surprise! It was not her mother thin and wasted by illness, but the
young and beautiful woman as she remembered her far back in the days of
her own earliest childhood. It seemed to the girl that the face in the mirror
must soon speak, almost that she heard the voice of her mother telling her
again to grow up a good woman and a dutiful daughter, so earnestly did the
eyes in the mirror look back into her own.
“It is certainly my mother’s soul that I see. She knows how miserable I
am without her and she has come to comfort me. Whenever I long to see her
she will meet me here; how grateful I ought to be!”
And from this time the weight of sorrow was greatly lightened for her
young heart. Every morning, to gather strength for the day’s duties before
her, and every evening, for consolation before she lay down to rest, did the
young girl take out the mirror and gaze at the reflection which in the
simplicity of her innocent heart she believed to be her mother’s soul. Daily
she grew in the likeness of her dead mother’s character, and was gentle and
kind to all, and a dutiful daughter to her father.
A year spent in mourning had thus passed away in the little household,
when, by the advice of his relations, the man married again, and the
daughter now found herself under the authority of a step-mother. It was a
trying position; but her days spent in the recollection of her own beloved
mother, and of trying to be what that mother would wish her to be, had
made the young girl docile and patient, and she now determined to be filial
and dutiful to her father’s wife, in all respects. Everything went on
apparently smoothly in the family for some time under the new regime;
there were no winds or waves of discord to ruffle the surface of every-day
life, and the father was content.
But it is a woman’s danger to be petty and mean, and step-mothers are
proverbial all the world over, and this one’s heart was not as her first smiles
were. As the days and weeks grew into months, the step-mother began to
treat the motherless girl unkindly and to try and come between the father
and child.
that contained the mirror, her heart beating with expectation as she lifted the
mirror out and gazed into its smooth face. Behold, her mother’s words were
true! In the round mirror before her she saw her mother’s face; but, oh, the
joyful surprise! It was not her mother thin and wasted by illness, but the
young and beautiful woman as she remembered her far back in the days of
her own earliest childhood. It seemed to the girl that the face in the mirror
must soon speak, almost that she heard the voice of her mother telling her
again to grow up a good woman and a dutiful daughter, so earnestly did the
eyes in the mirror look back into her own.
“It is certainly my mother’s soul that I see. She knows how miserable I
am without her and she has come to comfort me. Whenever I long to see her
she will meet me here; how grateful I ought to be!”
And from this time the weight of sorrow was greatly lightened for her
young heart. Every morning, to gather strength for the day’s duties before
her, and every evening, for consolation before she lay down to rest, did the
young girl take out the mirror and gaze at the reflection which in the
simplicity of her innocent heart she believed to be her mother’s soul. Daily
she grew in the likeness of her dead mother’s character, and was gentle and
kind to all, and a dutiful daughter to her father.
A year spent in mourning had thus passed away in the little household,
when, by the advice of his relations, the man married again, and the
daughter now found herself under the authority of a step-mother. It was a
trying position; but her days spent in the recollection of her own beloved
mother, and of trying to be what that mother would wish her to be, had
made the young girl docile and patient, and she now determined to be filial
and dutiful to her father’s wife, in all respects. Everything went on
apparently smoothly in the family for some time under the new regime;
there were no winds or waves of discord to ruffle the surface of every-day
life, and the father was content.
But it is a woman’s danger to be petty and mean, and step-mothers are
proverbial all the world over, and this one’s heart was not as her first smiles
were. As the days and weeks grew into months, the step-mother began to
treat the motherless girl unkindly and to try and come between the father
and child.
Page 88
Sometimes she went to her husband and complained of her step-
daughter’s behavior, but the father knowing that this was to be expected,
took no notice of her ill-natured complaints. Instead of lessening his
affection for his daughter, as the woman desired, her grumblings only made
him think of her the more. The woman soon saw that he began to show
more concern for his lonely child than before. This did not please her at all,
and she began to turn over in her mind how she could, by some means or
other, drive her step-child out of the house. So crooked did the woman’s
heart become.
She watched the girl carefully, and one day peeping into her room in the
early morning, she thought she discovered a grave enough sin of which to
accuse the child to her father. The woman herself was a little frightened too
at what she had seen.
So she went at once to her husband, and wiping away some false tears
she said in a sad voice:
“Please give me permission to leave you today.”
The man was completely taken by surprise at the suddenness of her
request, and wondered whatever was the matter.
“Do you find it so disagreeable,” he asked, “in my house, that you can
stay no longer?”
“No! no! it has nothing to do with you—even in my dreams I have never
thought that I wished to leave your side; but if I go on living here I am in
danger of losing my life, so I think it best for all concerned that you should
allow me to go home!”
And the woman began to weep afresh. Her husband, distressed to see her
so unhappy, and thinking that he could not have heard aright, said:
“Tell me what you mean! How is your life in danger here?”
“I will tell you since you ask me. Your daughter dislikes me as her step-
mother. For some time past she has shut herself up in her room morning and
evening, and looking in as I pass by, I am convinced that she has made an
image of me and is trying to kill me by magic art, cursing me daily. It is not
safe for me to stay here, such being the case; indeed, indeed, I must go
away, we cannot live under the same roof any more.”
The husband listened to the dreadful tale, but he could not believe his
gentle daughter guilty of such an evil act. He knew that by popular
daughter’s behavior, but the father knowing that this was to be expected,
took no notice of her ill-natured complaints. Instead of lessening his
affection for his daughter, as the woman desired, her grumblings only made
him think of her the more. The woman soon saw that he began to show
more concern for his lonely child than before. This did not please her at all,
and she began to turn over in her mind how she could, by some means or
other, drive her step-child out of the house. So crooked did the woman’s
heart become.
She watched the girl carefully, and one day peeping into her room in the
early morning, she thought she discovered a grave enough sin of which to
accuse the child to her father. The woman herself was a little frightened too
at what she had seen.
So she went at once to her husband, and wiping away some false tears
she said in a sad voice:
“Please give me permission to leave you today.”
The man was completely taken by surprise at the suddenness of her
request, and wondered whatever was the matter.
“Do you find it so disagreeable,” he asked, “in my house, that you can
stay no longer?”
“No! no! it has nothing to do with you—even in my dreams I have never
thought that I wished to leave your side; but if I go on living here I am in
danger of losing my life, so I think it best for all concerned that you should
allow me to go home!”
And the woman began to weep afresh. Her husband, distressed to see her
so unhappy, and thinking that he could not have heard aright, said:
“Tell me what you mean! How is your life in danger here?”
“I will tell you since you ask me. Your daughter dislikes me as her step-
mother. For some time past she has shut herself up in her room morning and
evening, and looking in as I pass by, I am convinced that she has made an
image of me and is trying to kill me by magic art, cursing me daily. It is not
safe for me to stay here, such being the case; indeed, indeed, I must go
away, we cannot live under the same roof any more.”
The husband listened to the dreadful tale, but he could not believe his
gentle daughter guilty of such an evil act. He knew that by popular
Page 89
superstition people believed that one person could cause the gradual death
of another by making an image of the hated one and cursing it daily; but
where had his young daughter learned such knowledge?—the thing was
impossible. Yet he remembered having noticed that his daughter stayed
much in her room of late and kept herself away from every one, even when
visitors came to the house. Putting this fact together with his wife’s alarm,
he thought that there might be something to account for the strange story.
His heart was torn between doubting his wife and trusting his child, and
he knew not what to do. He decided to go at once to his daughter and try to
find out the truth. Comforting his wife and assuring her that her fears were
groundless, he glided quietly to his daughter’s room.
The girl had for a long time past been very unhappy. She had tried by
amiability and obedience to show her goodwill and to mollify the new wife,
and to break down that wall of prejudice and misunderstanding that she
knew generally stood between step-parents and their step-children. But she
soon found that her efforts were in vain. The step-mother never trusted her,
and seemed to misinterpret all her actions, and the poor child knew very
well that she often carried unkind and untrue tales to her father. She could
not help comparing her present unhappy condition with the time when her
own mother was alive only a little more than a year ago—so great a change
in this short time! Morning and evening she wept over the remembrance.
Whenever she could she went to her room, and sliding the screens to, took
out the mirror and gazed, as she thought, at her mother’s face. It was the
only comfort that she had in these wretched days.
Her father found her occupied in this way. Pushing aside the fusama, he
saw her bending over something or other very intently. Looking over her
shoulder, to see who was entering her room, the girl was surprised to see
her father, for he generally sent for her when he wished to speak to her. She
was also confused at being found looking at the mirror, for she had never
told any one of her mother’s last promise, but had kept it as the sacred
secret of her heart. So before turning to her father she slipped the mirror
into her long sleeve. Her father noting her confusion, and her act of hiding
something, said in a severe manner:
“Daughter, what are you doing here? And what is that that you have
hidden in your sleeve?”
of another by making an image of the hated one and cursing it daily; but
where had his young daughter learned such knowledge?—the thing was
impossible. Yet he remembered having noticed that his daughter stayed
much in her room of late and kept herself away from every one, even when
visitors came to the house. Putting this fact together with his wife’s alarm,
he thought that there might be something to account for the strange story.
His heart was torn between doubting his wife and trusting his child, and
he knew not what to do. He decided to go at once to his daughter and try to
find out the truth. Comforting his wife and assuring her that her fears were
groundless, he glided quietly to his daughter’s room.
The girl had for a long time past been very unhappy. She had tried by
amiability and obedience to show her goodwill and to mollify the new wife,
and to break down that wall of prejudice and misunderstanding that she
knew generally stood between step-parents and their step-children. But she
soon found that her efforts were in vain. The step-mother never trusted her,
and seemed to misinterpret all her actions, and the poor child knew very
well that she often carried unkind and untrue tales to her father. She could
not help comparing her present unhappy condition with the time when her
own mother was alive only a little more than a year ago—so great a change
in this short time! Morning and evening she wept over the remembrance.
Whenever she could she went to her room, and sliding the screens to, took
out the mirror and gazed, as she thought, at her mother’s face. It was the
only comfort that she had in these wretched days.
Her father found her occupied in this way. Pushing aside the fusama, he
saw her bending over something or other very intently. Looking over her
shoulder, to see who was entering her room, the girl was surprised to see
her father, for he generally sent for her when he wished to speak to her. She
was also confused at being found looking at the mirror, for she had never
told any one of her mother’s last promise, but had kept it as the sacred
secret of her heart. So before turning to her father she slipped the mirror
into her long sleeve. Her father noting her confusion, and her act of hiding
something, said in a severe manner:
“Daughter, what are you doing here? And what is that that you have
hidden in your sleeve?”
Page 90
The girl was frightened by her father’s severity. Never had he spoken to
her in such a tone. Her confusion changed to apprehension, her color from
scarlet to white. She sat dumb and shamefaced, unable to reply.
Appearances were certainly against her; the young girl looked guilty, and
the father thinking that perhaps after all what his wife had told him was
true, spoke angrily:
“Then, is it really true that you are daily cursing your step-mother and
praying for her death? Have you forgotten what I told you, that although she
is your step-mother you must be obedient and loyal to her? What evil spirit
has taken possession of your heart that you should be so wicked? You have
certainly changed, my daughter! What has made you so disobedient and
unfaithful?”
And the father’s eyes filled with sudden tears to think that he should have
to upbraid his daughter in this way.
She on her part did not know what he meant, for she had never heard of
the superstition that by praying over an image it is possible to cause the
death of a hated person. But she saw that she must speak and clear herself
somehow. She loved her father dearly, and could not bear the idea of his
anger. She put out her hand on his knee deprecatingly:
“Father! father! do not say such dreadful things to me. I am still your
obedient child. Indeed, I am. However stupid I may be, I should never be
able to curse any one who belonged to you, much less pray for the death of
one you love. Surely some one has been telling you lies, and you are dazed,
and you know not what you say—or some evil spirit has taken possession
of YOUR heart. As for me I do not know—no, not so much as a dew-drop,
of the evil thing of which you accuse me.”
But the father remembered that she had hidden something away when he
first entered the room, and even this earnest protest did not satisfy him. He
wished to clear up his doubts once for all.
“Then why are you always alone in your room these days? And tell me
what is that that you have hidden in your sleeve—show it to me at once.”
Then the daughter, though shy of confessing how she had cherished her
mother’s memory, saw that she must tell her father all in order to clear
herself. So she slipped the mirror out from her long sleeve and laid it before
him.
her in such a tone. Her confusion changed to apprehension, her color from
scarlet to white. She sat dumb and shamefaced, unable to reply.
Appearances were certainly against her; the young girl looked guilty, and
the father thinking that perhaps after all what his wife had told him was
true, spoke angrily:
“Then, is it really true that you are daily cursing your step-mother and
praying for her death? Have you forgotten what I told you, that although she
is your step-mother you must be obedient and loyal to her? What evil spirit
has taken possession of your heart that you should be so wicked? You have
certainly changed, my daughter! What has made you so disobedient and
unfaithful?”
And the father’s eyes filled with sudden tears to think that he should have
to upbraid his daughter in this way.
She on her part did not know what he meant, for she had never heard of
the superstition that by praying over an image it is possible to cause the
death of a hated person. But she saw that she must speak and clear herself
somehow. She loved her father dearly, and could not bear the idea of his
anger. She put out her hand on his knee deprecatingly:
“Father! father! do not say such dreadful things to me. I am still your
obedient child. Indeed, I am. However stupid I may be, I should never be
able to curse any one who belonged to you, much less pray for the death of
one you love. Surely some one has been telling you lies, and you are dazed,
and you know not what you say—or some evil spirit has taken possession
of YOUR heart. As for me I do not know—no, not so much as a dew-drop,
of the evil thing of which you accuse me.”
But the father remembered that she had hidden something away when he
first entered the room, and even this earnest protest did not satisfy him. He
wished to clear up his doubts once for all.
“Then why are you always alone in your room these days? And tell me
what is that that you have hidden in your sleeve—show it to me at once.”
Then the daughter, though shy of confessing how she had cherished her
mother’s memory, saw that she must tell her father all in order to clear
herself. So she slipped the mirror out from her long sleeve and laid it before
him.
Page 91
“This,” she said, “is what you saw me looking at just now.”
“Why,” he said in great surprise, “this is the mirror that I brought as a gift
to your mother when I went up to the capital many years ago! And so you
have kept it all this time? Now, why do you spend so much of your time
before this mirror?”
Then she told him of her mother’s last words, and of how she had
promised to meet her child whenever she looked into the glass. But still the
father could not understand the simplicity of his daughter’s character in not
knowing that what she saw reflected in the mirror was in reality her own
face, and not that of her mother.
“What do you mean?” he asked. “I do not understand how you can meet
the soul of your lost mother by looking in this mirror?”
“It is indeed true,” said the girl: “and if you don’t believe what I say, look
for yourself,” and she placed the mirror before her. There, looking back
from the smooth metal disk, was her own sweet face. She pointed to the
reflection seriously:
“Do you doubt me still?” she asked earnestly, looking up into his face.
With an exclamation of sudden understanding the father smote his two
hands together.
“How stupid I am! At last I understand. Your face is as like your mother’s
as the two sides of a melon—thus you have looked at the reflection of your
face all this time, thinking that you were brought face to face with your lost
mother! You are truly a faithful child. It seems at first a stupid thing to have
done, but it is not really so, It shows how deep has been your filial piety,
and how innocent your heart. Living in constant remembrance of your lost
mother has helped you to grow like her in character. How clever it was of
her to tell you to do this. I admire and respect you, my daughter, and I am
ashamed to think that for one instant I believed your suspicious step-
mother’s story and suspected you of evil, and came with the intention of
scolding you severely, while all this time you have been so true and good.
Before you I have no countenance left, and I beg you to forgive me.”
And here the father wept. He thought of how lonely the poor girl must
have been, and of all that she must have suffered under her step-mother’s
treatment. His daughter steadfastly keeping her faith and simplicity in the
midst of such adverse circumstances—bearing all her troubles with so much
“Why,” he said in great surprise, “this is the mirror that I brought as a gift
to your mother when I went up to the capital many years ago! And so you
have kept it all this time? Now, why do you spend so much of your time
before this mirror?”
Then she told him of her mother’s last words, and of how she had
promised to meet her child whenever she looked into the glass. But still the
father could not understand the simplicity of his daughter’s character in not
knowing that what she saw reflected in the mirror was in reality her own
face, and not that of her mother.
“What do you mean?” he asked. “I do not understand how you can meet
the soul of your lost mother by looking in this mirror?”
“It is indeed true,” said the girl: “and if you don’t believe what I say, look
for yourself,” and she placed the mirror before her. There, looking back
from the smooth metal disk, was her own sweet face. She pointed to the
reflection seriously:
“Do you doubt me still?” she asked earnestly, looking up into his face.
With an exclamation of sudden understanding the father smote his two
hands together.
“How stupid I am! At last I understand. Your face is as like your mother’s
as the two sides of a melon—thus you have looked at the reflection of your
face all this time, thinking that you were brought face to face with your lost
mother! You are truly a faithful child. It seems at first a stupid thing to have
done, but it is not really so, It shows how deep has been your filial piety,
and how innocent your heart. Living in constant remembrance of your lost
mother has helped you to grow like her in character. How clever it was of
her to tell you to do this. I admire and respect you, my daughter, and I am
ashamed to think that for one instant I believed your suspicious step-
mother’s story and suspected you of evil, and came with the intention of
scolding you severely, while all this time you have been so true and good.
Before you I have no countenance left, and I beg you to forgive me.”
And here the father wept. He thought of how lonely the poor girl must
have been, and of all that she must have suffered under her step-mother’s
treatment. His daughter steadfastly keeping her faith and simplicity in the
midst of such adverse circumstances—bearing all her troubles with so much
Page 92
patience and amiability—made him compare her to the lotus which rears its
blossom of dazzling beauty out of the slime and mud of the moats and
ponds, fitting emblem of a heart which keeps itself unsullied while passing
through the world.
The step-mother, anxious to know what would happen, had all this while
been standing outside the room. She had grown interested, and had
gradually pushed the sliding screen back till she could see all that went on.
At this moment she suddenly entered the room, and dropping to the mats,
she bowed her head over her outspread hands before her step-daughter.
“I am ashamed! I am ashamed!” she exclaimed in broken tones. “I did
not know what a filial child you were. Through no fault of yours, but with a
step-mother’s jealous heart, I have disliked you all the time. Hating you so
much myself, it was but natural that I should think you reciprocated the
feeling, and thus when I saw you retire so often to your room I followed
you, and when I saw you gaze daily into the mirror for long intervals, I
concluded that you had found out how I disliked you, and that you were out
of revenge trying to take my life by magic art. As long as I live I shall never
forget the wrong I have done you in so misjudging you, and in causing your
father to suspect you. From this day I throw away my old and wicked heart,
and in its place I put a new one, clean and full of repentance. I shall think of
you as a child that I have borne myself. I shall love and cherish you with all
my heart, and thus try to make up for all the unhappiness I have caused you.
Therefore, please throw into the water all that has gone before, and give me,
I beg of you, some of the filial love that you have hitherto given to your
own lost mother.”
Thus did the unkind step-mother humble herself and ask forgiveness of
the girl she had so wronged.
Such was the sweetness of the girl’s disposition that she willingly forgave
her step-mother, and never bore a moment’s resentment or malice towards
her afterwards. The father saw by his wife’s face that she was truly sorry for
the past, and was greatly relieved to see the terrible misunderstanding
wiped out of remembrance by both the wrong-doer and the wronged.
From this time on, the three lived together as happily as fish in water. No
such trouble ever darkened the home again, and the young girl gradually
forgot that year of unhappiness in the tender love and care that her step-
blossom of dazzling beauty out of the slime and mud of the moats and
ponds, fitting emblem of a heart which keeps itself unsullied while passing
through the world.
The step-mother, anxious to know what would happen, had all this while
been standing outside the room. She had grown interested, and had
gradually pushed the sliding screen back till she could see all that went on.
At this moment she suddenly entered the room, and dropping to the mats,
she bowed her head over her outspread hands before her step-daughter.
“I am ashamed! I am ashamed!” she exclaimed in broken tones. “I did
not know what a filial child you were. Through no fault of yours, but with a
step-mother’s jealous heart, I have disliked you all the time. Hating you so
much myself, it was but natural that I should think you reciprocated the
feeling, and thus when I saw you retire so often to your room I followed
you, and when I saw you gaze daily into the mirror for long intervals, I
concluded that you had found out how I disliked you, and that you were out
of revenge trying to take my life by magic art. As long as I live I shall never
forget the wrong I have done you in so misjudging you, and in causing your
father to suspect you. From this day I throw away my old and wicked heart,
and in its place I put a new one, clean and full of repentance. I shall think of
you as a child that I have borne myself. I shall love and cherish you with all
my heart, and thus try to make up for all the unhappiness I have caused you.
Therefore, please throw into the water all that has gone before, and give me,
I beg of you, some of the filial love that you have hitherto given to your
own lost mother.”
Thus did the unkind step-mother humble herself and ask forgiveness of
the girl she had so wronged.
Such was the sweetness of the girl’s disposition that she willingly forgave
her step-mother, and never bore a moment’s resentment or malice towards
her afterwards. The father saw by his wife’s face that she was truly sorry for
the past, and was greatly relieved to see the terrible misunderstanding
wiped out of remembrance by both the wrong-doer and the wronged.
From this time on, the three lived together as happily as fish in water. No
such trouble ever darkened the home again, and the young girl gradually
forgot that year of unhappiness in the tender love and care that her step-
Page 93
mother now bestowed on her. Her patience and goodness were rewarded at
last.
last.
Page 94
THE GOBLIN OF ADACHIGAHARA
Long, long ago there was a large plain called Adachigahara, in the
province of Mutsu in Japan. This place was said to be haunted by a cannibal
goblin who took the form of an old woman. From time to time many
travelers disappeared and were never heard of more, and the old women
round the charcoal braziers in the evenings, and the girls washing the
household rice at the wells in the mornings, whispered dreadful stories of
how the missing folk had been lured to the goblin’s cottage and devoured,
for the goblin lived only on human flesh. No one dared to venture near the
haunted spot after sunset, and all those who could, avoided it in the
daytime, and travelers were warned of the dreaded place.
One day as the sun was setting, a priest came to the plain. He was a
belated traveler, and his robe showed that he was a Buddhist pilgrim
walking from shrine to shrine to pray for some blessing or to crave for
forgiveness of sins. He had apparently lost his way, and as it was late he
met no one who could show him the road or warn him of the haunted spot.
He had walked the whole day and was now tired and hungry, and the
evenings were chilly, for it was late autumn, and he began to be very
anxious to find some house where he could obtain a night’s lodging. He
found himself lost in the midst of the large plain, and looked about in vain
for some sign of human habitation.
At last, after wandering about for some hours, he saw a clump of trees in
the distance, and through the trees he caught sight of the glimmer of a
single ray of light. He exclaimed with joy:
“Oh. surely that is some cottage where I can get a night’s lodging!”
Keeping the light before his eyes he dragged his weary, aching feet as
quickly as he could towards the spot, and soon came to a miserable-looking
little cottage. As he drew near he saw that it was in a tumble-down
condition, the bamboo fence was broken and weeds and grass pushed their
Long, long ago there was a large plain called Adachigahara, in the
province of Mutsu in Japan. This place was said to be haunted by a cannibal
goblin who took the form of an old woman. From time to time many
travelers disappeared and were never heard of more, and the old women
round the charcoal braziers in the evenings, and the girls washing the
household rice at the wells in the mornings, whispered dreadful stories of
how the missing folk had been lured to the goblin’s cottage and devoured,
for the goblin lived only on human flesh. No one dared to venture near the
haunted spot after sunset, and all those who could, avoided it in the
daytime, and travelers were warned of the dreaded place.
One day as the sun was setting, a priest came to the plain. He was a
belated traveler, and his robe showed that he was a Buddhist pilgrim
walking from shrine to shrine to pray for some blessing or to crave for
forgiveness of sins. He had apparently lost his way, and as it was late he
met no one who could show him the road or warn him of the haunted spot.
He had walked the whole day and was now tired and hungry, and the
evenings were chilly, for it was late autumn, and he began to be very
anxious to find some house where he could obtain a night’s lodging. He
found himself lost in the midst of the large plain, and looked about in vain
for some sign of human habitation.
At last, after wandering about for some hours, he saw a clump of trees in
the distance, and through the trees he caught sight of the glimmer of a
single ray of light. He exclaimed with joy:
“Oh. surely that is some cottage where I can get a night’s lodging!”
Keeping the light before his eyes he dragged his weary, aching feet as
quickly as he could towards the spot, and soon came to a miserable-looking
little cottage. As he drew near he saw that it was in a tumble-down
condition, the bamboo fence was broken and weeds and grass pushed their
Page 95
way through the gaps. The paper screens which serve as windows and doors
in Japan were full of holes, and the posts of the house were bent with age
and seemed scarcely able to support the old thatched roof. The hut was
open, and by the light of an old lantern an old woman sat industriously
spinning.
The pilgrim called to her across the bamboo fence and said:
“O Baa San (old woman), good evening! I am a traveler! Please excuse
me, but I have lost my way and do not know what to do, for I have nowhere
to rest to-night. I beg you to be good enough to let me spend the night under
your roof.”
The old woman as soon as she heard herself spoken to stopped spinning,
rose from her seat and approached the intruder.
“I am very sorry for you. You must indeed be distressed to have lost your
way in such a lonely spot so late at night. Unfortunately I cannot put you
up, for I have no bed to offer you, and no accommodation whatsoever for a
guest in this poor place!”
“Oh, that does not matter,” said the priest; “all I want is a shelter under
some roof for the night, and if you will be good enough just to let me lie on
the kitchen floor I shall be grateful. I am too tired to walk further to-night,
so I hope you will not refuse me, otherwise I shall have to sleep out on the
cold plain.” And in this way he pressed the old woman to let him stay.
She seemed very reluctant, but at last she said:
“Very well, I will let you stay here. I can offer you a very poor welcome
only, but come in now and I will make a fire, for the night is cold.”
The pilgrim was only too glad to do as he was told. He took off his
sandals and entered the hut. The old woman then brought some sticks of
wood and lit the fire, and bade her guest draw near and warm himself.
“You must be hungry after your long tramp,” said the old woman. “I will
go and cook some supper for you.” She then went to the kitchen to cook
some rice.
After the priest had finished his supper the old woman sat down by the
fire-place, and they talked together for a long time. The pilgrim thought to
himself that he had been very lucky to come across such a kind, hospitable
old woman. At last the wood gave out, and as the fire died slowly down he
began to shiver with cold just as he had done when he arrived.
in Japan were full of holes, and the posts of the house were bent with age
and seemed scarcely able to support the old thatched roof. The hut was
open, and by the light of an old lantern an old woman sat industriously
spinning.
The pilgrim called to her across the bamboo fence and said:
“O Baa San (old woman), good evening! I am a traveler! Please excuse
me, but I have lost my way and do not know what to do, for I have nowhere
to rest to-night. I beg you to be good enough to let me spend the night under
your roof.”
The old woman as soon as she heard herself spoken to stopped spinning,
rose from her seat and approached the intruder.
“I am very sorry for you. You must indeed be distressed to have lost your
way in such a lonely spot so late at night. Unfortunately I cannot put you
up, for I have no bed to offer you, and no accommodation whatsoever for a
guest in this poor place!”
“Oh, that does not matter,” said the priest; “all I want is a shelter under
some roof for the night, and if you will be good enough just to let me lie on
the kitchen floor I shall be grateful. I am too tired to walk further to-night,
so I hope you will not refuse me, otherwise I shall have to sleep out on the
cold plain.” And in this way he pressed the old woman to let him stay.
She seemed very reluctant, but at last she said:
“Very well, I will let you stay here. I can offer you a very poor welcome
only, but come in now and I will make a fire, for the night is cold.”
The pilgrim was only too glad to do as he was told. He took off his
sandals and entered the hut. The old woman then brought some sticks of
wood and lit the fire, and bade her guest draw near and warm himself.
“You must be hungry after your long tramp,” said the old woman. “I will
go and cook some supper for you.” She then went to the kitchen to cook
some rice.
After the priest had finished his supper the old woman sat down by the
fire-place, and they talked together for a long time. The pilgrim thought to
himself that he had been very lucky to come across such a kind, hospitable
old woman. At last the wood gave out, and as the fire died slowly down he
began to shiver with cold just as he had done when he arrived.
Page 96
“I see you are cold,” said the old woman; “I will go out and gather some
wood, for we have used it all. You must stay and take care of the house
while I am gone.”
“No, no,” said the pilgrim, “let me go instead, for you are old, and I
cannot think of letting you go out to get wood for me this cold night!”
The old woman shook her head and said:
“You must stay quietly here, for you are my guest.” Then she left him
and went out.
In a minute she came back and said:
“You must sit where you are and not move, and whatever happens don’t
go near or look into the inner room. Now mind what I tell you!”
“If you tell me not to go near the back room, of course I won’t,” said the
priest, rather bewildered.
The old woman then went out again, and the priest was left alone. The
fire had died out, and the only light in the hut was that of a dim lantern. For
the first time that night he began to feel that he was in a weird place, and
the old woman’s words, “Whatever you do don’t peep into the back room,”
aroused his curiosity and his fear.
What hidden thing could be in that room that she did not wish him to
see? For some time the remembrance of his promise to the old woman kept
him still, but at last he could no longer resist his curiosity to peep into the
forbidden place.
He got up and began to move slowly towards the back room. Then the
thought that the old woman would be very angry with him if he disobeyed
her made him come back to his place by the fireside.
As the minutes went slowly by and the old woman did not return, he
began to feel more and more frightened, and to wonder what dreadful secret
was in the room behind him. He must find out.
“She will not know that I have looked unless I tell her. I will just have a
peep before she comes back,” said the man to himself.
With these words he got up on his feet (for he had been sitting all this
time in Japanese fashion with his feet under him) and stealthily crept
towards the forbidden spot. With trembling hands he pushed back the
sliding door and looked in. What he saw froze the blood in his veins. The
wood, for we have used it all. You must stay and take care of the house
while I am gone.”
“No, no,” said the pilgrim, “let me go instead, for you are old, and I
cannot think of letting you go out to get wood for me this cold night!”
The old woman shook her head and said:
“You must stay quietly here, for you are my guest.” Then she left him
and went out.
In a minute she came back and said:
“You must sit where you are and not move, and whatever happens don’t
go near or look into the inner room. Now mind what I tell you!”
“If you tell me not to go near the back room, of course I won’t,” said the
priest, rather bewildered.
The old woman then went out again, and the priest was left alone. The
fire had died out, and the only light in the hut was that of a dim lantern. For
the first time that night he began to feel that he was in a weird place, and
the old woman’s words, “Whatever you do don’t peep into the back room,”
aroused his curiosity and his fear.
What hidden thing could be in that room that she did not wish him to
see? For some time the remembrance of his promise to the old woman kept
him still, but at last he could no longer resist his curiosity to peep into the
forbidden place.
He got up and began to move slowly towards the back room. Then the
thought that the old woman would be very angry with him if he disobeyed
her made him come back to his place by the fireside.
As the minutes went slowly by and the old woman did not return, he
began to feel more and more frightened, and to wonder what dreadful secret
was in the room behind him. He must find out.
“She will not know that I have looked unless I tell her. I will just have a
peep before she comes back,” said the man to himself.
With these words he got up on his feet (for he had been sitting all this
time in Japanese fashion with his feet under him) and stealthily crept
towards the forbidden spot. With trembling hands he pushed back the
sliding door and looked in. What he saw froze the blood in his veins. The
Page 97
room was full of dead men’s bones and the walls were splashed and the
floor was covered with human blood. In one corner skull upon skull rose to
the ceiling, in another was a heap of arm bones, in another a heap of leg
bones. The sickening smell made him faint. He fell backwards with horror,
and for some time lay in a heap with fright on the floor, a pitiful sight. He
trembled all over and his teeth chattered, and he could hardly crawl away
from the dreadful spot.
“How horrible!” he cried out. “What awful den have I come to in my
travels? May Buddha help me or I am lost. Is it possible that that kind old
woman is really the cannibal goblin? When she comes back she will show
herself in her true character and eat me up at one mouthful!”
With these words his strength came back to him and, snatching up his hat
and staff, he rushed out of the house as fast as his legs could carry him. Out
into the night he ran, his one thought to get as far as he could from the
goblin’s haunt. He had not gone far when he heard steps behind him and a
voice crying: “Stop! stop!”
He ran on, redoubling his speed, pretending not to hear. As he ran he
heard the steps behind him come nearer and nearer, and at last he
recognized the old woman’s voice which grew louder and louder as she
came nearer.
“Stop! stop, you wicked man, why did you look into the forbidden
room?”
The priest quite forgot how tired he was and his feet flew over the ground
faster than ever. Fear gave him strength, for he knew that if the goblin
caught him he would soon be one of her victims. With all his heart he
repeated the prayer to Buddha:
“Namu Amida Butsu, Namu Amida Butsu.”
And after him rushed the dreadful old hag, her hair flying in the wind,
and her face changing with rage into the demon that she was. In her hand
she carried a large blood-stained knife, and she still shrieked after him,
“Stop! stop!”
At last, when the priest felt he could run no more, the dawn broke, and
with the darkness of night the goblin vanished and he was safe. The priest
now knew that he had met the Goblin of Adachigahara, the story of whom
he had often heard but never believed to be true. He felt that he owed his
floor was covered with human blood. In one corner skull upon skull rose to
the ceiling, in another was a heap of arm bones, in another a heap of leg
bones. The sickening smell made him faint. He fell backwards with horror,
and for some time lay in a heap with fright on the floor, a pitiful sight. He
trembled all over and his teeth chattered, and he could hardly crawl away
from the dreadful spot.
“How horrible!” he cried out. “What awful den have I come to in my
travels? May Buddha help me or I am lost. Is it possible that that kind old
woman is really the cannibal goblin? When she comes back she will show
herself in her true character and eat me up at one mouthful!”
With these words his strength came back to him and, snatching up his hat
and staff, he rushed out of the house as fast as his legs could carry him. Out
into the night he ran, his one thought to get as far as he could from the
goblin’s haunt. He had not gone far when he heard steps behind him and a
voice crying: “Stop! stop!”
He ran on, redoubling his speed, pretending not to hear. As he ran he
heard the steps behind him come nearer and nearer, and at last he
recognized the old woman’s voice which grew louder and louder as she
came nearer.
“Stop! stop, you wicked man, why did you look into the forbidden
room?”
The priest quite forgot how tired he was and his feet flew over the ground
faster than ever. Fear gave him strength, for he knew that if the goblin
caught him he would soon be one of her victims. With all his heart he
repeated the prayer to Buddha:
“Namu Amida Butsu, Namu Amida Butsu.”
And after him rushed the dreadful old hag, her hair flying in the wind,
and her face changing with rage into the demon that she was. In her hand
she carried a large blood-stained knife, and she still shrieked after him,
“Stop! stop!”
At last, when the priest felt he could run no more, the dawn broke, and
with the darkness of night the goblin vanished and he was safe. The priest
now knew that he had met the Goblin of Adachigahara, the story of whom
he had often heard but never believed to be true. He felt that he owed his
Page 98
wonderful escape to the protection of Buddha to whom he had prayed for
help, so he took out his rosary and bowing his head as the sun rose he said
his prayers and made his thanksgiving earnestly. He then set forward for
another part of the country, only too glad to leave the haunted plain behind
him.
help, so he took out his rosary and bowing his head as the sun rose he said
his prayers and made his thanksgiving earnestly. He then set forward for
another part of the country, only too glad to leave the haunted plain behind
him.
Page 99
THE SAGACIOUS MONKEY AND THE BOAR
Long, long ago, there lived in the province of Shinshin in Japan, a
traveling monkey-man, who earned his living by taking round a monkey
and showing off the animal’s tricks.
One evening the man came home in a very bad temper and told his wife
to send for the butcher the next morning.
The wife was very bewildered and asked her husband:
“Why do you wish me to send for the butcher?”
“It’s no use taking that monkey round any longer, he’s too old and forgets
his tricks. I beat him with my stick all I know how, but he won’t dance
properly. I must now sell him to the butcher and make what money out of
him I can. There is nothing else to be done.”
The woman felt very sorry for the poor little animal, and pleaded for her
husband to spare the monkey, but her pleading was all in vain, the man was
determined to sell him to the butcher.
Now the monkey was in the next room and overheard every word of the
conversation. He soon understood that he was to be killed, and he said to
himself:
“Barbarous, indeed, is my master! Here I have served him faithfully for
years, and instead of allowing me to end my days comfortably and in peace,
he is going to let me be cut up by the butcher, and my poor body is to be
roasted and stewed and eaten? Woe is me! What am I to do. Ah! a bright
thought has struck me! There is, I know, a wild boar living in the forest near
by. I have often heard tell of his wisdom. Perhaps if I go to him and tell him
the strait I am in he will give me his counsel. I will go and try.”
There was no time to lose. The monkey slipped out of the house and ran
as quickly as he could to the forest to find the boar. The boar was at home,
and the monkey began his tale of woe at once.
Long, long ago, there lived in the province of Shinshin in Japan, a
traveling monkey-man, who earned his living by taking round a monkey
and showing off the animal’s tricks.
One evening the man came home in a very bad temper and told his wife
to send for the butcher the next morning.
The wife was very bewildered and asked her husband:
“Why do you wish me to send for the butcher?”
“It’s no use taking that monkey round any longer, he’s too old and forgets
his tricks. I beat him with my stick all I know how, but he won’t dance
properly. I must now sell him to the butcher and make what money out of
him I can. There is nothing else to be done.”
The woman felt very sorry for the poor little animal, and pleaded for her
husband to spare the monkey, but her pleading was all in vain, the man was
determined to sell him to the butcher.
Now the monkey was in the next room and overheard every word of the
conversation. He soon understood that he was to be killed, and he said to
himself:
“Barbarous, indeed, is my master! Here I have served him faithfully for
years, and instead of allowing me to end my days comfortably and in peace,
he is going to let me be cut up by the butcher, and my poor body is to be
roasted and stewed and eaten? Woe is me! What am I to do. Ah! a bright
thought has struck me! There is, I know, a wild boar living in the forest near
by. I have often heard tell of his wisdom. Perhaps if I go to him and tell him
the strait I am in he will give me his counsel. I will go and try.”
There was no time to lose. The monkey slipped out of the house and ran
as quickly as he could to the forest to find the boar. The boar was at home,
and the monkey began his tale of woe at once.
Page 100
“Good Mr. Boar, I have heard of your excellent wisdom. I am in great
trouble, you alone can help me. I have grown old in the service of my
master, and because I cannot dance properly now he intends to sell me to
the butcher. What do you advise me to do? I know how clever you are!”
The boar was pleased at the flattery and determined to help the monkey.
He thought for a little while and then said:
“Hasn’t your master a baby?”
“Oh, yes,” said the monkey, “he has one infant son.”
“Doesn’t it lie by the door in the morning when your mistress begins the
work of the day? Well, I will come round early and when I see my
opportunity I will seize the child and run off with it.”
“What then?” said the monkey.
“Why the mother will be in a tremendous scare, and before your master
and mistress know what to do, you must run after me and rescue the child
and take it home safely to its parents, and you will see that when the
butcher comes they won’t have the heart to sell you.”
The monkey thanked the boar many times and then went home. He did
not sleep much that night, as you may imagine, for thinking of the morrow.
His life depended on whether the boar’s plan succeeded or not. He was the
first up, waiting anxiously for what was to happen. It seemed to him a very
long time before his master’s wife began to move about and open the
shutters to let in the light of day. Then all happened as the boar had planned.
The mother placed her child near the porch as usual while she tidied up the
house and got her breakfast ready.
The child was crooning happily in the morning sunlight, dabbing on the
mats at the play of light and shadow. Suddenly there was a noise in the
porch and a loud cry from the child. The mother ran out from the kitchen to
the spot, only just in time to see the boar disappearing through the gate with
her child in its clutch. She flung out her hands with a loud cry of despair
and rushed into the inner room where her husband was still sleeping
soundly.
He sat up slowly and rubbed his eyes, and crossly demanded what his
wife was making all that noise about. By the time that the man was alive to
what had happened, and they both got outside the gate, the boar had got
trouble, you alone can help me. I have grown old in the service of my
master, and because I cannot dance properly now he intends to sell me to
the butcher. What do you advise me to do? I know how clever you are!”
The boar was pleased at the flattery and determined to help the monkey.
He thought for a little while and then said:
“Hasn’t your master a baby?”
“Oh, yes,” said the monkey, “he has one infant son.”
“Doesn’t it lie by the door in the morning when your mistress begins the
work of the day? Well, I will come round early and when I see my
opportunity I will seize the child and run off with it.”
“What then?” said the monkey.
“Why the mother will be in a tremendous scare, and before your master
and mistress know what to do, you must run after me and rescue the child
and take it home safely to its parents, and you will see that when the
butcher comes they won’t have the heart to sell you.”
The monkey thanked the boar many times and then went home. He did
not sleep much that night, as you may imagine, for thinking of the morrow.
His life depended on whether the boar’s plan succeeded or not. He was the
first up, waiting anxiously for what was to happen. It seemed to him a very
long time before his master’s wife began to move about and open the
shutters to let in the light of day. Then all happened as the boar had planned.
The mother placed her child near the porch as usual while she tidied up the
house and got her breakfast ready.
The child was crooning happily in the morning sunlight, dabbing on the
mats at the play of light and shadow. Suddenly there was a noise in the
porch and a loud cry from the child. The mother ran out from the kitchen to
the spot, only just in time to see the boar disappearing through the gate with
her child in its clutch. She flung out her hands with a loud cry of despair
and rushed into the inner room where her husband was still sleeping
soundly.
He sat up slowly and rubbed his eyes, and crossly demanded what his
wife was making all that noise about. By the time that the man was alive to
what had happened, and they both got outside the gate, the boar had got
Page 101
well away, but they saw the monkey running after the thief as hard as his
legs would carry him.
Both the man and wife were moved to admiration at the plucky conduct
of the sagacious monkey, and their gratitude knew no bounds when the
faithful monkey brought the child safely back to their arms.
“There!” said the wife. “This is the animal you want to kill—if the
monkey hadn’t been here we should have lost our child forever.”
“You are right, wife, for once,” said the man as he carried the child into
the house. “You may send the butcher back when he comes, and now give
us all a good breakfast and the monkey too.”
When the butcher arrived he was sent away with an order for some boar’s
meat for the evening dinner, and the monkey was petted and lived the rest
of his days in peace, nor did his master ever strike him again.
legs would carry him.
Both the man and wife were moved to admiration at the plucky conduct
of the sagacious monkey, and their gratitude knew no bounds when the
faithful monkey brought the child safely back to their arms.
“There!” said the wife. “This is the animal you want to kill—if the
monkey hadn’t been here we should have lost our child forever.”
“You are right, wife, for once,” said the man as he carried the child into
the house. “You may send the butcher back when he comes, and now give
us all a good breakfast and the monkey too.”
When the butcher arrived he was sent away with an order for some boar’s
meat for the evening dinner, and the monkey was petted and lived the rest
of his days in peace, nor did his master ever strike him again.
Page 102
THE HAPPY HUNTER AND THE SKILLFUL
FISHER
Long, long ago Japan was governed by Hohodemi, the fourth Mikoto (or
Augustness) in descent from the illustrious Amaterasu, the Sun Goddess.
He was not only as handsome as his ancestress was beautiful, but he was
also very strong and brave, and was famous for being the greatest hunter in
the land. Because of his matchless skill as a hunter, he was called “Yama-
sachi-hiko” or “The Happy Hunter of the Mountains.”
His elder brother was a very skillful fisher, and as he far surpassed all
rivals in fishing, he was named “Umi-sachi-hiko” or the “Skillful Fisher of
the Sea.” The brothers thus led happy lives, thoroughly enjoying their
respective occupations, and the days passed quickly and pleasantly while
each pursued his own way, the one hunting and the other fishing.
One day the Happy Hunter came to his brother, the Skillful Fisher, and
said:
“Well, my brother, I see you go to the sea every day with your fishing rod
in your hand, and when you return you come laden with fish. And as for
me, it is my pleasure to take my bow and arrow and to hunt the wild
animals up the mountains and down in the valleys. For a long time we have
each followed our favorite occupation, so that now we must both be tired,
you of your fishing and I of my hunting. Would it not be wise for us to
make a change? Will you try hunting in the mountains and I will go and fish
in the sea?”
The Skillful Fisher listened in silence to his brother, and for a moment
was thoughtful, but at last he answered:
“O yes, why not? Your idea is not a bad one at all. Give me your bow and
arrow and I will set out at once for the mountains and hunt for game.”
FISHER
Long, long ago Japan was governed by Hohodemi, the fourth Mikoto (or
Augustness) in descent from the illustrious Amaterasu, the Sun Goddess.
He was not only as handsome as his ancestress was beautiful, but he was
also very strong and brave, and was famous for being the greatest hunter in
the land. Because of his matchless skill as a hunter, he was called “Yama-
sachi-hiko” or “The Happy Hunter of the Mountains.”
His elder brother was a very skillful fisher, and as he far surpassed all
rivals in fishing, he was named “Umi-sachi-hiko” or the “Skillful Fisher of
the Sea.” The brothers thus led happy lives, thoroughly enjoying their
respective occupations, and the days passed quickly and pleasantly while
each pursued his own way, the one hunting and the other fishing.
One day the Happy Hunter came to his brother, the Skillful Fisher, and
said:
“Well, my brother, I see you go to the sea every day with your fishing rod
in your hand, and when you return you come laden with fish. And as for
me, it is my pleasure to take my bow and arrow and to hunt the wild
animals up the mountains and down in the valleys. For a long time we have
each followed our favorite occupation, so that now we must both be tired,
you of your fishing and I of my hunting. Would it not be wise for us to
make a change? Will you try hunting in the mountains and I will go and fish
in the sea?”
The Skillful Fisher listened in silence to his brother, and for a moment
was thoughtful, but at last he answered:
“O yes, why not? Your idea is not a bad one at all. Give me your bow and
arrow and I will set out at once for the mountains and hunt for game.”
Page 103
So the matter was settled by this talk, and the two brothers each started
out to try the other’s occupation, little dreaming of all that would happen. It
was very unwise of them, for the Happy Hunter knew nothing of fishing,
and the Skillful Fisher, who was bad tempered, knew as much about
hunting.
The Happy Hunter took his brother’s much-prized fishing hook and rod
and went down to the seashore and sat down on the rocks. He baited his
hook and then threw it into the sea clumsily. He sat and gazed at the little
float bobbing up and down in the water, and longed for a good fish to come
and be caught. Every time the buoy moved a little he pulled up his rod, but
there was never a fish at the end of it, only the hook and the bait. If he had
known how to fish properly, he would have been able to catch plenty of
fish, but although he was the greatest hunter in the land he could not help
being the most bungling fisher.
The whole day passed in this way, while he sat on the rocks holding the
fishing rod and waiting in vain for his luck to turn. At last the day began to
darken, and the evening came; still he had caught not a single fish. Drawing
up his line for the last time before going home, he found that he had lost his
hook without even knowing when he had dropped it.
He now began to feel extremely anxious, for he knew that his brother
would be angry at his having lost his hook, for, it being his only one, he
valued it above all other things. The Happy Hunter now set to work to look
among the rocks and on the sand for the lost hook, and while he was
searching to and fro, his brother, the Skillful Fisher, arrived on the scene.
He had failed to find any game while hunting that day, and was not only in
a bad temper, but looked fearfully cross. When he saw the Happy Hunter
searching about on the shore he knew that something must have gone
wrong, so he said at once:
“What are you doing, my brother?”
The Happy Hunter went forward timidly, for he feared his brother’s
anger, and said:
“Oh, my brother, I have indeed done badly.”
“What is the matter?—what have you done?” asked the elder brother
impatiently.
“I have lost your precious fishing hook—”
out to try the other’s occupation, little dreaming of all that would happen. It
was very unwise of them, for the Happy Hunter knew nothing of fishing,
and the Skillful Fisher, who was bad tempered, knew as much about
hunting.
The Happy Hunter took his brother’s much-prized fishing hook and rod
and went down to the seashore and sat down on the rocks. He baited his
hook and then threw it into the sea clumsily. He sat and gazed at the little
float bobbing up and down in the water, and longed for a good fish to come
and be caught. Every time the buoy moved a little he pulled up his rod, but
there was never a fish at the end of it, only the hook and the bait. If he had
known how to fish properly, he would have been able to catch plenty of
fish, but although he was the greatest hunter in the land he could not help
being the most bungling fisher.
The whole day passed in this way, while he sat on the rocks holding the
fishing rod and waiting in vain for his luck to turn. At last the day began to
darken, and the evening came; still he had caught not a single fish. Drawing
up his line for the last time before going home, he found that he had lost his
hook without even knowing when he had dropped it.
He now began to feel extremely anxious, for he knew that his brother
would be angry at his having lost his hook, for, it being his only one, he
valued it above all other things. The Happy Hunter now set to work to look
among the rocks and on the sand for the lost hook, and while he was
searching to and fro, his brother, the Skillful Fisher, arrived on the scene.
He had failed to find any game while hunting that day, and was not only in
a bad temper, but looked fearfully cross. When he saw the Happy Hunter
searching about on the shore he knew that something must have gone
wrong, so he said at once:
“What are you doing, my brother?”
The Happy Hunter went forward timidly, for he feared his brother’s
anger, and said:
“Oh, my brother, I have indeed done badly.”
“What is the matter?—what have you done?” asked the elder brother
impatiently.
“I have lost your precious fishing hook—”
Page 104
While he was still speaking his brother stopped him, and cried out
fiercely:
“Lost my hook! It is just what I expected. For this reason, when you first
proposed your plan of changing over our occupations I was really against it,
but you seemed to wish it so much that I gave in and allowed you to do as
you wished. The mistake of our trying unfamiliar tasks is soon seen! And
you have done badly. I will not return you your bow and arrow till you have
found my hook. Look to it that you find it and return it to me quickly.”
The Happy Hunter felt that he was to blame for all that had come to pass,
and bore his brother’s scornful scolding with humility and patience. He
hunted everywhere for the hook most diligently, but it was nowhere to be
found. He was at last obliged to give up all hope of finding it. He then went
home, and in desperation broke his beloved sword into pieces and made
five hundred hooks out of it.
He took these to his angry brother and offered them to him, asking his
forgiveness, and begging him to accept them in the place of the one he had
lost for him. It was useless; his brother would not listen to him, much less
grant his request.
The Happy Hunter then made another five hundred hooks, and again took
them to his brother, beseeching him to pardon him.
“Though you make a million hooks,” said the Skillful Fisher, shaking his
head, “they are of no use to me. I cannot forgive you unless you bring me
back my own hook.”
Nothing would appease the anger of the Skillful Fisher, for he had a bad
disposition, and had always hated his brother because of his virtues, and
now with the excuse of the lost fishing hook he planned to kill him and to
usurp his place as ruler of Japan. The Happy Hunter knew all this full well,
but he could say nothing, for being the younger he owed his elder brother
obedience; so he returned to the seashore and once more began to look for
the missing hook. He was much cast down, for he had lost all hope of ever
finding his brother’s hook now. While he stood on the beach, lost in
perplexity and wondering what he had best do next, an old man suddenly
appeared carrying a stick in his hand. The Happy Hunter afterwards
remembered that he did not see from whence the old man came, neither did
he know how he was there—he happened to look up and saw the old man
coming towards him.
fiercely:
“Lost my hook! It is just what I expected. For this reason, when you first
proposed your plan of changing over our occupations I was really against it,
but you seemed to wish it so much that I gave in and allowed you to do as
you wished. The mistake of our trying unfamiliar tasks is soon seen! And
you have done badly. I will not return you your bow and arrow till you have
found my hook. Look to it that you find it and return it to me quickly.”
The Happy Hunter felt that he was to blame for all that had come to pass,
and bore his brother’s scornful scolding with humility and patience. He
hunted everywhere for the hook most diligently, but it was nowhere to be
found. He was at last obliged to give up all hope of finding it. He then went
home, and in desperation broke his beloved sword into pieces and made
five hundred hooks out of it.
He took these to his angry brother and offered them to him, asking his
forgiveness, and begging him to accept them in the place of the one he had
lost for him. It was useless; his brother would not listen to him, much less
grant his request.
The Happy Hunter then made another five hundred hooks, and again took
them to his brother, beseeching him to pardon him.
“Though you make a million hooks,” said the Skillful Fisher, shaking his
head, “they are of no use to me. I cannot forgive you unless you bring me
back my own hook.”
Nothing would appease the anger of the Skillful Fisher, for he had a bad
disposition, and had always hated his brother because of his virtues, and
now with the excuse of the lost fishing hook he planned to kill him and to
usurp his place as ruler of Japan. The Happy Hunter knew all this full well,
but he could say nothing, for being the younger he owed his elder brother
obedience; so he returned to the seashore and once more began to look for
the missing hook. He was much cast down, for he had lost all hope of ever
finding his brother’s hook now. While he stood on the beach, lost in
perplexity and wondering what he had best do next, an old man suddenly
appeared carrying a stick in his hand. The Happy Hunter afterwards
remembered that he did not see from whence the old man came, neither did
he know how he was there—he happened to look up and saw the old man
coming towards him.
Page 105
“You are Hohodemi, the Augustness, sometimes called the Happy
Hunter, are you not?” asked the old man. “What are you doing alone in such
a place?”
“Yes, I am he,” answered the unhappy young man. “Unfortunately, while
fishing I lost my brother’s precious fishing hook. I have hunted this shore
all over, but alas! I cannot find it, and I am very troubled, for my brother
won’t forgive me till I restore it to him. But who are you?”
“My name is Shiwozuchino Okina, and I live near by on this shore. I am
sorry to hear what misfortune has befallen you. You must indeed be
anxious. But if I tell you what I think, the hook is nowhere here—it is either
at the bottom of the sea or in the body of some fish who has swallowed it,
and for this reason, though you spend your whole life in looking for it here,
you will never find it.”
“Then what can I do?” asked the distressed man.
“You had better go down to Ryn Gu and tell Ryn Jin, the Dragon King of
the Sea, what your trouble is and ask him to find the hook for you. I think
that would be the best way.”
“Your idea is a splendid one,” said the Happy Hunter, “but I fear I cannot
get to the Sea King’s realm, for I have always heard that it is situated at the
bottom of the sea.”
“Oh, there will be no difficulty about your getting there,” said the old
man; “I can soon make something for you to ride on through the sea.”
“Thank you,” said the Happy Hunter, “I shall be very grateful to you if
you will be so kind.”
The old man at once set to work, and soon made a basket and offered it to
the Happy Hunter. He received it with joy, and taking it to the water,
mounted it, and prepared to start. He bade good by to the kind old man who
had helped him so much, and told him that he would certainly reward him
as soon as he found his hook and could return to Japan without fear of his
brother’s anger. The old man pointed out the direction he must take, and
told him how to reach the realm of Ryn Gu, and watched him ride out to sea
on the basket, which resembled a small boat.
The Happy Hunter made all the haste he could, riding on the basket
which had been given him by his friend. His queer boat seemed to go
through the water of its own accord, and the distance was much shorter than
Hunter, are you not?” asked the old man. “What are you doing alone in such
a place?”
“Yes, I am he,” answered the unhappy young man. “Unfortunately, while
fishing I lost my brother’s precious fishing hook. I have hunted this shore
all over, but alas! I cannot find it, and I am very troubled, for my brother
won’t forgive me till I restore it to him. But who are you?”
“My name is Shiwozuchino Okina, and I live near by on this shore. I am
sorry to hear what misfortune has befallen you. You must indeed be
anxious. But if I tell you what I think, the hook is nowhere here—it is either
at the bottom of the sea or in the body of some fish who has swallowed it,
and for this reason, though you spend your whole life in looking for it here,
you will never find it.”
“Then what can I do?” asked the distressed man.
“You had better go down to Ryn Gu and tell Ryn Jin, the Dragon King of
the Sea, what your trouble is and ask him to find the hook for you. I think
that would be the best way.”
“Your idea is a splendid one,” said the Happy Hunter, “but I fear I cannot
get to the Sea King’s realm, for I have always heard that it is situated at the
bottom of the sea.”
“Oh, there will be no difficulty about your getting there,” said the old
man; “I can soon make something for you to ride on through the sea.”
“Thank you,” said the Happy Hunter, “I shall be very grateful to you if
you will be so kind.”
The old man at once set to work, and soon made a basket and offered it to
the Happy Hunter. He received it with joy, and taking it to the water,
mounted it, and prepared to start. He bade good by to the kind old man who
had helped him so much, and told him that he would certainly reward him
as soon as he found his hook and could return to Japan without fear of his
brother’s anger. The old man pointed out the direction he must take, and
told him how to reach the realm of Ryn Gu, and watched him ride out to sea
on the basket, which resembled a small boat.
The Happy Hunter made all the haste he could, riding on the basket
which had been given him by his friend. His queer boat seemed to go
through the water of its own accord, and the distance was much shorter than
Page 106
he had expected, for in a few hours he caught sight of the gate and the roof
of the Sea King’s Palace. And what a large place it was, with its numberless
sloping roofs and gables, its huge gateways, and its gray stone walls! He
soon landed, and leaving his basket on the beach, he walked up to the large
gateway. The pillars of the gate were made of beautiful red coral, and the
gate itself was adorned with glittering gems of all kinds. Large katsura trees
overshadowed it. Our hero had often heard of the wonders of the Sea King’s
Palace beneath the sea, but all the stories he had ever heard fell short of the
reality which he now saw for the first time.
The Happy Hunter would have liked to enter the gate there and then, but
he saw that it was fast closed, and also that there was no one about whom
he could ask to open it for him, so he stopped to think what he should do. In
the shade of the trees before the gate he noticed a well full of fresh spring
water. Surely some one would come out to draw water from the well some
time, he thought. Then he climbed into the tree overhanging the well, and
seated himself to rest on one of the branches, and waited for what might
happen. Ere long he saw the huge gate swing open, and two beautiful
women came out. Now the Mikoto (Augustness) had always heard that Ryn
Gu was the realm of the Dragon King under the Sea, and had naturally
supposed that the place was inhabited by dragons and similar terrible
creatures, so that when he saw these two lovely princesses, whose beauty
would be rare even in the world from which he had just come, he was
exceedingly surprised, and wondered what it could mean.
He said not a word, however, but silently gazed at them through the
foliage of the trees, waiting to see what they would do. He saw that in their
hands they carried golden buckets. Slowly and gracefully in their trailing
garments they approached the well, standing in the shade of the katsura
trees, and were about to draw water, all unknowing of the stranger who was
watching them, for the Happy Hunter was quite hidden among the branches
of the tree where he had posted himself.
As the two ladies leaned over the side of the well to let down their golden
buckets, which they did every day in the year, they saw reflected in the deep
still water the face of a handsome youth gazing at them from amidst the
branches of the tree in whose shade they stood. Never before had they seen
the face of mortal man; they were frightened, and drew back quickly with
their golden buckets in their hands. Their curiosity, however, soon gave
of the Sea King’s Palace. And what a large place it was, with its numberless
sloping roofs and gables, its huge gateways, and its gray stone walls! He
soon landed, and leaving his basket on the beach, he walked up to the large
gateway. The pillars of the gate were made of beautiful red coral, and the
gate itself was adorned with glittering gems of all kinds. Large katsura trees
overshadowed it. Our hero had often heard of the wonders of the Sea King’s
Palace beneath the sea, but all the stories he had ever heard fell short of the
reality which he now saw for the first time.
The Happy Hunter would have liked to enter the gate there and then, but
he saw that it was fast closed, and also that there was no one about whom
he could ask to open it for him, so he stopped to think what he should do. In
the shade of the trees before the gate he noticed a well full of fresh spring
water. Surely some one would come out to draw water from the well some
time, he thought. Then he climbed into the tree overhanging the well, and
seated himself to rest on one of the branches, and waited for what might
happen. Ere long he saw the huge gate swing open, and two beautiful
women came out. Now the Mikoto (Augustness) had always heard that Ryn
Gu was the realm of the Dragon King under the Sea, and had naturally
supposed that the place was inhabited by dragons and similar terrible
creatures, so that when he saw these two lovely princesses, whose beauty
would be rare even in the world from which he had just come, he was
exceedingly surprised, and wondered what it could mean.
He said not a word, however, but silently gazed at them through the
foliage of the trees, waiting to see what they would do. He saw that in their
hands they carried golden buckets. Slowly and gracefully in their trailing
garments they approached the well, standing in the shade of the katsura
trees, and were about to draw water, all unknowing of the stranger who was
watching them, for the Happy Hunter was quite hidden among the branches
of the tree where he had posted himself.
As the two ladies leaned over the side of the well to let down their golden
buckets, which they did every day in the year, they saw reflected in the deep
still water the face of a handsome youth gazing at them from amidst the
branches of the tree in whose shade they stood. Never before had they seen
the face of mortal man; they were frightened, and drew back quickly with
their golden buckets in their hands. Their curiosity, however, soon gave
Page 107
them courage, and they glanced timidly upwards to see the cause of the
unusual reflection, and then they beheld the Happy Hunter sitting in the tree
looking down at them with surprise and admiration. They gazed at him face
to face, but their tongues were still with wonder and could not find a word
to say to him.
When the Mikoto saw that he was discovered, he sprang down lightly
from the tree and said:
“I am a traveler, and as I was very thirsty I came to the well in the hopes
of quenching my thirst, but I could find no bucket with which to draw the
water. So I climbed into the tree, much vexed, and waited for some one to
come. Just at that moment, while I was thirstily and impatiently waiting,
you noble ladies appeared, as if in answer to my great need. Therefore I
pray you of your mercy give me some water to drink, for I am a thirsty
traveler in a strange land.”
His dignity and graciousness overruled their timidity, and bowing in
silence they both once more approached the well, and letting down their
golden buckets drew up some water and poured it into a jeweled cup and
offered it to the stranger.
He received it from them with both hands, raising it to the height of his
forehead in token of high respect and pleasure, and then drank the water
quickly, for his thirst was great. When he had finished his long draught he
set the cup down on the edge of the well, and drawing his short sword he
cut off one of the strange curved jewels (magatama), a necklace of which
hung round his neck and fell over his breast. He placed the jewel in the cup
and returned it to them, and said, bowing deeply:
“This is a token of my thanks!”
The two ladies took the cup, and looking into it to see what he had put
inside—for they did not yet know what it was—they gave a start of
surprise, for there lay a beautiful gem at the bottom of the cup.
“No ordinary mortal would give away a jewel so freely. Will you not
honor us by telling us who you are?” said the elder damsel.
“Certainly,” said the Happy Hunter, “I am Hohodemi, the fourth Mikoto,
also called in Japan, the Happy Hunter.”
“Are you indeed Hohodemi, the grandson of Amaterasu, the Sun
Goddess?” asked the damsel who had spoken first. “I am the eldest
unusual reflection, and then they beheld the Happy Hunter sitting in the tree
looking down at them with surprise and admiration. They gazed at him face
to face, but their tongues were still with wonder and could not find a word
to say to him.
When the Mikoto saw that he was discovered, he sprang down lightly
from the tree and said:
“I am a traveler, and as I was very thirsty I came to the well in the hopes
of quenching my thirst, but I could find no bucket with which to draw the
water. So I climbed into the tree, much vexed, and waited for some one to
come. Just at that moment, while I was thirstily and impatiently waiting,
you noble ladies appeared, as if in answer to my great need. Therefore I
pray you of your mercy give me some water to drink, for I am a thirsty
traveler in a strange land.”
His dignity and graciousness overruled their timidity, and bowing in
silence they both once more approached the well, and letting down their
golden buckets drew up some water and poured it into a jeweled cup and
offered it to the stranger.
He received it from them with both hands, raising it to the height of his
forehead in token of high respect and pleasure, and then drank the water
quickly, for his thirst was great. When he had finished his long draught he
set the cup down on the edge of the well, and drawing his short sword he
cut off one of the strange curved jewels (magatama), a necklace of which
hung round his neck and fell over his breast. He placed the jewel in the cup
and returned it to them, and said, bowing deeply:
“This is a token of my thanks!”
The two ladies took the cup, and looking into it to see what he had put
inside—for they did not yet know what it was—they gave a start of
surprise, for there lay a beautiful gem at the bottom of the cup.
“No ordinary mortal would give away a jewel so freely. Will you not
honor us by telling us who you are?” said the elder damsel.
“Certainly,” said the Happy Hunter, “I am Hohodemi, the fourth Mikoto,
also called in Japan, the Happy Hunter.”
“Are you indeed Hohodemi, the grandson of Amaterasu, the Sun
Goddess?” asked the damsel who had spoken first. “I am the eldest
Page 108
daughter of Ryn Jin, the King of the Sea, and my name is Princess
Tayotama.”
“And,” said the younger maiden, who at last found her tongue, “I am her
sister, the Princess Tamayori.”
“Are you indeed the daughters of Ryn Jin, the King of the Sea? I cannot
tell you how glad I am to meet you,” said the Happy Hunter. And without
waiting for them to reply he went on:
“The other day I went fishing with my brother’s hook and dropped it,
how, I am sure I can’t tell. As my brother prizes his fishing hook above all
his other possessions, this is the greatest calamity that could have befallen
me. Unless I find it again I can never hope to win my brother’s forgiveness,
for he is very angry at what I have done. I have searched for it many, many
times, but I cannot find it, therefore I am much troubled. While I was
hunting for the hook, in great distress, I met a wise old man, and he told me
that the best thing I could do was to come to Ryn Gu, and to Ryn Jin, the
Dragon King of the Sea, and ask him to help me. This kind old man also
showed me how to come. Now you know how it is I am here and why. I
want to ask Ryn Jin, if he knows where the lost hook is. Will you be so kind
as to take me to your father? And do you think he will see me?” asked the
Happy Hunter anxiously.
Princess Tayotama listened to this long story, and then said:
“Not only is it easy for you to see my father, but he will be much pleased
to meet you. I am sure he will say that good fortune has befallen him, that
so great and noble a man as you, the grandson of Amaterasu, should come
down to the bottom of the sea.” And then turning to her younger sister, she
said:
“Do you not think so, Tamayori?”
“Yes, indeed,” answered the Princess Tamayori, in her sweet voice. “As
you say, we can know no greater honor than to welcome the Mikoto to our
home.”
“Then I ask you to be so kind as to lead the way,” said the Happy Hunter.
“Condescend to enter, Mikoto (Augustness),” said both the sisters, and
bowing low, they led him through the gate.
The younger Princess left her sister to take charge of the Happy Hunter,
and going faster than they, she reached the Sea King’s Palace first, and
Tayotama.”
“And,” said the younger maiden, who at last found her tongue, “I am her
sister, the Princess Tamayori.”
“Are you indeed the daughters of Ryn Jin, the King of the Sea? I cannot
tell you how glad I am to meet you,” said the Happy Hunter. And without
waiting for them to reply he went on:
“The other day I went fishing with my brother’s hook and dropped it,
how, I am sure I can’t tell. As my brother prizes his fishing hook above all
his other possessions, this is the greatest calamity that could have befallen
me. Unless I find it again I can never hope to win my brother’s forgiveness,
for he is very angry at what I have done. I have searched for it many, many
times, but I cannot find it, therefore I am much troubled. While I was
hunting for the hook, in great distress, I met a wise old man, and he told me
that the best thing I could do was to come to Ryn Gu, and to Ryn Jin, the
Dragon King of the Sea, and ask him to help me. This kind old man also
showed me how to come. Now you know how it is I am here and why. I
want to ask Ryn Jin, if he knows where the lost hook is. Will you be so kind
as to take me to your father? And do you think he will see me?” asked the
Happy Hunter anxiously.
Princess Tayotama listened to this long story, and then said:
“Not only is it easy for you to see my father, but he will be much pleased
to meet you. I am sure he will say that good fortune has befallen him, that
so great and noble a man as you, the grandson of Amaterasu, should come
down to the bottom of the sea.” And then turning to her younger sister, she
said:
“Do you not think so, Tamayori?”
“Yes, indeed,” answered the Princess Tamayori, in her sweet voice. “As
you say, we can know no greater honor than to welcome the Mikoto to our
home.”
“Then I ask you to be so kind as to lead the way,” said the Happy Hunter.
“Condescend to enter, Mikoto (Augustness),” said both the sisters, and
bowing low, they led him through the gate.
The younger Princess left her sister to take charge of the Happy Hunter,
and going faster than they, she reached the Sea King’s Palace first, and
Page 109
running quickly to her father’s room, she told him of all that had happened
to them at the gate, and that her sister was even now bringing the
Augustness to him. The Dragon King of the Sea was much surprised at the
news, for it was but seldom, perhaps only once in several hundred years,
that the Sea King’s Palace was visited by mortals.
Ryn Jin at once clapped his hands and summoned all his courtiers and the
servants of the Palace, and the chief fish of the sea together, and solemnly
told them that the grandson of the Sun Goddess, Amaterasu, was coming to
the Palace, and that they must be very ceremonious and polite in serving the
august visitor. He then ordered them all to the entrance of the Palace to
welcome the Happy Hunter.
Ryn Jin then dressed himself in his robes of ceremony, and went out to
welcome him. In a few moments the Princess Tayotama and the Happy
Hunter reached the entrance, and the Sea King and his wife bowed to the
ground and thanked him for the honor he did them in coming to see them.
The Sea King then led the Happy Hunter to the guest room, and placing him
in the uppermost seat, he bowed respectfully before him, and said:
“I am Ryn Jin, the Dragon King of the Sea, and this is my wife.
Condescend to remember us forever!”
“Are you indeed Ryn Jin, the King of the Sea, of whom I have so often
heard?” answered the Happy Hunter, saluting his host most ceremoniously.
“I must apologize for all the trouble I am giving you by my unexpected
visit.” And he bowed again, and thanked the Sea King.
“You need not thank me,” said Ryn Jin. “It is I who must thank you for
coming. Although the Sea Palace is a poor place, as you see, I shall be
highly honored if you will make us a long visit.”
There was much gladness between the Sea King and the Happy Hunter,
and they sat and talked for a long time. At last the Sea King clapped his
hands, and then a huge retinue of fishes appeared, all robed in ceremonial
garments, and bearing in their fins various trays on which all kinds of sea
delicacies were served. A great feast was now spread before the King and
his Royal guest. All the fishes-in-waiting were chosen from amongst the
finest fish in the sea, so you can imagine what a wonderful array of sea
creatures it was that waited upon the Happy Hunter that day. All in the
Palace tried to do their best to please him and to show him that he was a
much honored guest. During the long repast, which lasted for hours, Ryn
to them at the gate, and that her sister was even now bringing the
Augustness to him. The Dragon King of the Sea was much surprised at the
news, for it was but seldom, perhaps only once in several hundred years,
that the Sea King’s Palace was visited by mortals.
Ryn Jin at once clapped his hands and summoned all his courtiers and the
servants of the Palace, and the chief fish of the sea together, and solemnly
told them that the grandson of the Sun Goddess, Amaterasu, was coming to
the Palace, and that they must be very ceremonious and polite in serving the
august visitor. He then ordered them all to the entrance of the Palace to
welcome the Happy Hunter.
Ryn Jin then dressed himself in his robes of ceremony, and went out to
welcome him. In a few moments the Princess Tayotama and the Happy
Hunter reached the entrance, and the Sea King and his wife bowed to the
ground and thanked him for the honor he did them in coming to see them.
The Sea King then led the Happy Hunter to the guest room, and placing him
in the uppermost seat, he bowed respectfully before him, and said:
“I am Ryn Jin, the Dragon King of the Sea, and this is my wife.
Condescend to remember us forever!”
“Are you indeed Ryn Jin, the King of the Sea, of whom I have so often
heard?” answered the Happy Hunter, saluting his host most ceremoniously.
“I must apologize for all the trouble I am giving you by my unexpected
visit.” And he bowed again, and thanked the Sea King.
“You need not thank me,” said Ryn Jin. “It is I who must thank you for
coming. Although the Sea Palace is a poor place, as you see, I shall be
highly honored if you will make us a long visit.”
There was much gladness between the Sea King and the Happy Hunter,
and they sat and talked for a long time. At last the Sea King clapped his
hands, and then a huge retinue of fishes appeared, all robed in ceremonial
garments, and bearing in their fins various trays on which all kinds of sea
delicacies were served. A great feast was now spread before the King and
his Royal guest. All the fishes-in-waiting were chosen from amongst the
finest fish in the sea, so you can imagine what a wonderful array of sea
creatures it was that waited upon the Happy Hunter that day. All in the
Palace tried to do their best to please him and to show him that he was a
much honored guest. During the long repast, which lasted for hours, Ryn
Page 110
Jin commanded his daughters to play some music, and the two Princesses
came in and performed on the KOTO (the Japanese harp), and sang and
danced in turns. The time passed so pleasantly that the Happy Hunter
seemed to forget his trouble and why he had come at all to the Sea King’s
Realm, and he gave himself up to the enjoyment of this wonderful place,
the land of fairy fishes! Who has ever heard of such a marvelous place? But
the Mikoto soon remembered what had brought him to Ryn Gu, and said to
his host:
“Perhaps your daughters have told you, King Ryn Jin, that I have come
here to try and recover my brother’s fishing hook, which I lost while fishing
the other day. May I ask you to be so kind as to inquire of all your subjects
if any of them have seen a fishing hook lost in the sea?”
“Certainly,” said the obliging Sea King, “I will immediately summon
them all here and ask them.”
As soon as he had issued his command, the octopus, the cuttlefish, the
bonito, the oxtail fish, the eel, the jelly fish, the shrimp, and the plaice, and
many other fishes of all kinds came in and sat down before Ryn Jin their
King, and arranged themselves and their fins in order. Then the Sea King
said solemnly:
“Our visitor who is sitting before you all is the august grandson of
Amaterasu. His name is Hohodemi, the fourth Augustness, and he is also
called the Happy Hunter of the Mountains. While he was fishing the other
day upon the shore of Japan, some one robbed him of his brother’s fishing
hook. He has come all this way down to the bottom of the sea to our
Kingdom because he thought that one of you fishes may have taken the
hook from him in mischievous play. If any of you have done so you must
immediately return it, or if any of you know who the thief is you must at
once tell us his name and where he is now.”
All the fishes were taken by surprise when they heard these words, and
could say nothing for some time. They sat looking at each other and at the
Dragon King. At last the cuttlefish came forward and said:
“I think the TAI (the red bream) must be the thief who has stolen the
hook!”
“Where is your proof?” asked the King.
came in and performed on the KOTO (the Japanese harp), and sang and
danced in turns. The time passed so pleasantly that the Happy Hunter
seemed to forget his trouble and why he had come at all to the Sea King’s
Realm, and he gave himself up to the enjoyment of this wonderful place,
the land of fairy fishes! Who has ever heard of such a marvelous place? But
the Mikoto soon remembered what had brought him to Ryn Gu, and said to
his host:
“Perhaps your daughters have told you, King Ryn Jin, that I have come
here to try and recover my brother’s fishing hook, which I lost while fishing
the other day. May I ask you to be so kind as to inquire of all your subjects
if any of them have seen a fishing hook lost in the sea?”
“Certainly,” said the obliging Sea King, “I will immediately summon
them all here and ask them.”
As soon as he had issued his command, the octopus, the cuttlefish, the
bonito, the oxtail fish, the eel, the jelly fish, the shrimp, and the plaice, and
many other fishes of all kinds came in and sat down before Ryn Jin their
King, and arranged themselves and their fins in order. Then the Sea King
said solemnly:
“Our visitor who is sitting before you all is the august grandson of
Amaterasu. His name is Hohodemi, the fourth Augustness, and he is also
called the Happy Hunter of the Mountains. While he was fishing the other
day upon the shore of Japan, some one robbed him of his brother’s fishing
hook. He has come all this way down to the bottom of the sea to our
Kingdom because he thought that one of you fishes may have taken the
hook from him in mischievous play. If any of you have done so you must
immediately return it, or if any of you know who the thief is you must at
once tell us his name and where he is now.”
All the fishes were taken by surprise when they heard these words, and
could say nothing for some time. They sat looking at each other and at the
Dragon King. At last the cuttlefish came forward and said:
“I think the TAI (the red bream) must be the thief who has stolen the
hook!”
“Where is your proof?” asked the King.
Page 111
“Since yesterday evening the TAI has not been able to eat anything, and
he seems to be suffering from a bad throat! For this reason I think the hook
may be in his throat. You had better send for him at once!”
All the fish agreed to this, and said:
“It is certainly strange that the TAI is the only fish who has not obeyed
your summons. Will you send for him and inquire into the matter. Then our
innocence will be proved.”
“Yes,” said the Sea King, “it is strange that the TAI has not come, for he
ought to be the first to be here. Send for him at once!”
Without waiting for the King’s order the cuttlefish had already started for
the TAI’S dwelling, and he now returned, bringing the TAI with him. He led
him before the King.
The TAI sat there looking frightened and ill. He certainly was in pain, for
his usually red face was pale, and his eyes were nearly closed and looked
but half their usual size.
“Answer, O TAI!” cried the Sea King, “why did you not come in answer
to my summons today?”
“I have been ill since yesterday,” answered the TAI; “that is why I could
not come.”
“Don’t say another word!” cried out Ryn Jin angrily. “Your illness is the
punishment of the gods for stealing the Mikoto’s hook.”
“It is only too true!” said the TAI; “the hook is still in my throat, and all
my efforts to get it out have been useless. I can’t eat, and I can scarcely
breathe, and each moment I feel that it will choke me, and sometimes it
gives me great pain. I had no intention of stealing the Mikoto’s hook. I
heedlessly snapped at the bait which I saw in the water, and the hook came
off and stuck in my throat. So I hope you will pardon me.”
The cuttlefish now came forward, and said to the King:
“What I said was right. You see the hook still sticks in the TAI’S throat. I
hope to be able to pull it out in the presence of the Mikoto, and then we can
return it to him safely!”
“O please make haste and pull it out!” cried the TAI, pitifully, for he felt
the pains in his throat coming on again; “I do so want to return the hook to
the Mikoto.”
he seems to be suffering from a bad throat! For this reason I think the hook
may be in his throat. You had better send for him at once!”
All the fish agreed to this, and said:
“It is certainly strange that the TAI is the only fish who has not obeyed
your summons. Will you send for him and inquire into the matter. Then our
innocence will be proved.”
“Yes,” said the Sea King, “it is strange that the TAI has not come, for he
ought to be the first to be here. Send for him at once!”
Without waiting for the King’s order the cuttlefish had already started for
the TAI’S dwelling, and he now returned, bringing the TAI with him. He led
him before the King.
The TAI sat there looking frightened and ill. He certainly was in pain, for
his usually red face was pale, and his eyes were nearly closed and looked
but half their usual size.
“Answer, O TAI!” cried the Sea King, “why did you not come in answer
to my summons today?”
“I have been ill since yesterday,” answered the TAI; “that is why I could
not come.”
“Don’t say another word!” cried out Ryn Jin angrily. “Your illness is the
punishment of the gods for stealing the Mikoto’s hook.”
“It is only too true!” said the TAI; “the hook is still in my throat, and all
my efforts to get it out have been useless. I can’t eat, and I can scarcely
breathe, and each moment I feel that it will choke me, and sometimes it
gives me great pain. I had no intention of stealing the Mikoto’s hook. I
heedlessly snapped at the bait which I saw in the water, and the hook came
off and stuck in my throat. So I hope you will pardon me.”
The cuttlefish now came forward, and said to the King:
“What I said was right. You see the hook still sticks in the TAI’S throat. I
hope to be able to pull it out in the presence of the Mikoto, and then we can
return it to him safely!”
“O please make haste and pull it out!” cried the TAI, pitifully, for he felt
the pains in his throat coming on again; “I do so want to return the hook to
the Mikoto.”
Page 112
“All right, TAI SAN,” said his friend the cuttlefish, and then opening the
TAI’S mouth as wide as he could and putting one of his feelers down the
TAI’S throat, he quickly and easily drew the hook out of the sufferer’s large
mouth. He then washed it and brought it to the King.
Ryn Jin took the hook from his subject, and then respectfully returned it
to the Happy Hunter (the Mikoto or Augustness, the fishes called him), who
was overjoyed at getting back his hook. He thanked Ryn Jin many times,
his face beaming with gratitude, and said that he owed the happy ending of
his quest to the Sea King’s wise authority and kindness.
Ryn Jin now desired to punish the TAI, but the Happy Hunter begged him
not to do so; since his lost hook was thus happily recovered he did not wish
to make more trouble for the poor TAI. It was indeed the TAI who had
taken the hook, but he had already suffered enough for his fault, if fault it
could be called. What had been done was done in heedlessness and not by
intention. The Happy Hunter said he blamed himself; if he had understood
how to fish properly he would never have lost his hook, and therefore all
this trouble had been caused in the first place by his trying to do something
which he did not know how to do. So he begged the Sea King to forgive his
subject.
Who could resist the pleading of so wise and compassionate a judge?
Ryn Jin forgave his subject at once at the request of his august guest. The
TAI was so glad that he shook his fins for joy, and he and all the other fish
went out from the presence of their King, praising the virtues of the Happy
Hunter.
Now that the hook was found the Happy Hunter had nothing to keep him
in Ryn Gu, and he was anxious to get back to his own kingdom and to make
peace with his angry brother, the Skillful Fisher; but the Sea King, who had
learnt to love him and would fain have kept him as a son, begged him not to
go so soon, but to make the Sea Palace his home as long as ever he liked.
While the Happy Hunter was still hesitating, the two lovely Princesses,
Tayotama and Tamayori, came, and with the sweetest of bows and voices
joined with their father in pressing him to stay, so that without seeming
ungracious he could not say them “Nay,” and was obliged to stay on for
some time.
Between the Sea Realm and the Earth there was no difference in the night
of time, and the Happy Hunter found that three years went fleeting quickly
TAI’S mouth as wide as he could and putting one of his feelers down the
TAI’S throat, he quickly and easily drew the hook out of the sufferer’s large
mouth. He then washed it and brought it to the King.
Ryn Jin took the hook from his subject, and then respectfully returned it
to the Happy Hunter (the Mikoto or Augustness, the fishes called him), who
was overjoyed at getting back his hook. He thanked Ryn Jin many times,
his face beaming with gratitude, and said that he owed the happy ending of
his quest to the Sea King’s wise authority and kindness.
Ryn Jin now desired to punish the TAI, but the Happy Hunter begged him
not to do so; since his lost hook was thus happily recovered he did not wish
to make more trouble for the poor TAI. It was indeed the TAI who had
taken the hook, but he had already suffered enough for his fault, if fault it
could be called. What had been done was done in heedlessness and not by
intention. The Happy Hunter said he blamed himself; if he had understood
how to fish properly he would never have lost his hook, and therefore all
this trouble had been caused in the first place by his trying to do something
which he did not know how to do. So he begged the Sea King to forgive his
subject.
Who could resist the pleading of so wise and compassionate a judge?
Ryn Jin forgave his subject at once at the request of his august guest. The
TAI was so glad that he shook his fins for joy, and he and all the other fish
went out from the presence of their King, praising the virtues of the Happy
Hunter.
Now that the hook was found the Happy Hunter had nothing to keep him
in Ryn Gu, and he was anxious to get back to his own kingdom and to make
peace with his angry brother, the Skillful Fisher; but the Sea King, who had
learnt to love him and would fain have kept him as a son, begged him not to
go so soon, but to make the Sea Palace his home as long as ever he liked.
While the Happy Hunter was still hesitating, the two lovely Princesses,
Tayotama and Tamayori, came, and with the sweetest of bows and voices
joined with their father in pressing him to stay, so that without seeming
ungracious he could not say them “Nay,” and was obliged to stay on for
some time.
Between the Sea Realm and the Earth there was no difference in the night
of time, and the Happy Hunter found that three years went fleeting quickly
Page 113
by in this delightful land. The years pass swiftly when any one is truly
happy. But though the wonders of that enchanted land seemed to be new
every day, and though the Sea King’s kindness seemed rather to increase
than to grow less with time, the Happy Hunter grew more and more
homesick as the days passed, and he could not repress a great anxiety to
know what had happened to his home and his country and his brother while
he had been away.
So at last he went to the Sea King and said:
“My stay with you here has been most happy and I am very grateful to
you for all your kindness to me, but I govern Japan, and, delightful as this
place is, I cannot absent myself forever from my country. I must also return
the fishing hook to my brother and ask his forgiveness for having deprived
him of it for so long. I am indeed very sorry to part from you, but this time
it cannot be helped. With your gracious permission, I will take my leave to-
day. I hope to make you another visit some day. Please give up the idea of
my staying longer now.”
King Ryn Jin was overcome with sorrow at the thought that he must lose
his friend who had made a great diversion in the Palace of the Sea, and his
tears fell fast as he answered:
“We are indeed very sorry to part with you, Mikoto, for we have enjoyed
your stay with us very much. You have been a noble and honored guest and
we have heartily made you welcome. I quite understand that as you govern
Japan you ought to be there and not here, and that it is vain for us to try and
keep you longer with us, much as we would like to have you stay. I hope
you will not forget us. Strange circumstances have brought us together and I
trust the friendship thus begun between the Land and the Sea will last and
grow stronger than it has ever been before.”
When the Sea King had finished speaking he turned to his two daughters
and bade them bring him the two Tide-Jewels of the Sea. The two
Princesses bowed low, rose and glided out of the hall. In a few minutes they
returned, each one carrying in her hands a flashing gem which filled the
room with light. As the Happy Hunter looked at them he wondered what
they could be. The Sea King took them from his daughters and said to his
guest:
“These two valuable talismans we have inherited from our ancestors
from time immemorial. We now give them to you as a parting gift in token
happy. But though the wonders of that enchanted land seemed to be new
every day, and though the Sea King’s kindness seemed rather to increase
than to grow less with time, the Happy Hunter grew more and more
homesick as the days passed, and he could not repress a great anxiety to
know what had happened to his home and his country and his brother while
he had been away.
So at last he went to the Sea King and said:
“My stay with you here has been most happy and I am very grateful to
you for all your kindness to me, but I govern Japan, and, delightful as this
place is, I cannot absent myself forever from my country. I must also return
the fishing hook to my brother and ask his forgiveness for having deprived
him of it for so long. I am indeed very sorry to part from you, but this time
it cannot be helped. With your gracious permission, I will take my leave to-
day. I hope to make you another visit some day. Please give up the idea of
my staying longer now.”
King Ryn Jin was overcome with sorrow at the thought that he must lose
his friend who had made a great diversion in the Palace of the Sea, and his
tears fell fast as he answered:
“We are indeed very sorry to part with you, Mikoto, for we have enjoyed
your stay with us very much. You have been a noble and honored guest and
we have heartily made you welcome. I quite understand that as you govern
Japan you ought to be there and not here, and that it is vain for us to try and
keep you longer with us, much as we would like to have you stay. I hope
you will not forget us. Strange circumstances have brought us together and I
trust the friendship thus begun between the Land and the Sea will last and
grow stronger than it has ever been before.”
When the Sea King had finished speaking he turned to his two daughters
and bade them bring him the two Tide-Jewels of the Sea. The two
Princesses bowed low, rose and glided out of the hall. In a few minutes they
returned, each one carrying in her hands a flashing gem which filled the
room with light. As the Happy Hunter looked at them he wondered what
they could be. The Sea King took them from his daughters and said to his
guest:
“These two valuable talismans we have inherited from our ancestors
from time immemorial. We now give them to you as a parting gift in token
Page 114
of our great affection for you. These two gems are called the nanjiu and the
kanjiu.”
The Happy Hunter bowed low to the ground and said:
“I can never thank you enough for all your kindness to me. And now will
you add one more favor to the rest and tell me what these jewels are and
what I am to do with them?”
“The nanjiu,” answered the Sea King, “is also called the Jewel of the
Flood Tide, and whoever holds it in his possession can command the sea to
roll in and to flood the land at any time that he wills. The kanjiu is also
called the Jewel of the Ebbing Tide, and this gem controls the sea and the
waves thereof, and will cause even a tidal wave to recede.”
Then Ryn Jin showed his friend how to use the talismans one by one and
handed them to him. The Happy Hunter was very glad to have these two
wonderful gems, the Jewel of the Flood Tide and the Jewel of the Ebbing
Tide, to take back with him, for he felt that they would preserve him in case
of danger from enemies at any time. After thanking his kind host again and
again, he prepared to depart. The Sea King and the two Princesses,
Tayotama and Tamayori, and all the inmates of the Palace, came out to say
“Good-by,” and before the sound of the last farewell had died away the
Happy Hunter passed out from under the gateway, past the well of happy
memory standing in the shade of the great KATSURA trees on his way to
the beach.
Here he found, instead of the queer basket on which he had come to the
Realm of Ryn Gu, a large crocodile waiting for him. Never had he seen
such a huge creature. It measured eight fathoms in length from the tip of its
tail to the end of its long mouth. The Sea King had ordered the monster to
carry the Happy Hunter back to Japan. Like the wonderful basket which
Shiwozuchino Okina had made, it could travel faster than any steamboat,
and in this strange way, riding on the back of a crocodile, the Happy Hunter
returned to his own land.
As soon as the crocodile landed him, the Happy Hunter hastened to tell
the Skillful Fisher of his safe return. He then gave him back the fishing
hook which had been found in the mouth of the TAI and which had been the
cause of so much trouble between them. He earnestly begged his brother’s
forgiveness, telling him all that had happened to him in the Sea King’s
Palace and what wonderful adventures had led to the finding of the hook.
kanjiu.”
The Happy Hunter bowed low to the ground and said:
“I can never thank you enough for all your kindness to me. And now will
you add one more favor to the rest and tell me what these jewels are and
what I am to do with them?”
“The nanjiu,” answered the Sea King, “is also called the Jewel of the
Flood Tide, and whoever holds it in his possession can command the sea to
roll in and to flood the land at any time that he wills. The kanjiu is also
called the Jewel of the Ebbing Tide, and this gem controls the sea and the
waves thereof, and will cause even a tidal wave to recede.”
Then Ryn Jin showed his friend how to use the talismans one by one and
handed them to him. The Happy Hunter was very glad to have these two
wonderful gems, the Jewel of the Flood Tide and the Jewel of the Ebbing
Tide, to take back with him, for he felt that they would preserve him in case
of danger from enemies at any time. After thanking his kind host again and
again, he prepared to depart. The Sea King and the two Princesses,
Tayotama and Tamayori, and all the inmates of the Palace, came out to say
“Good-by,” and before the sound of the last farewell had died away the
Happy Hunter passed out from under the gateway, past the well of happy
memory standing in the shade of the great KATSURA trees on his way to
the beach.
Here he found, instead of the queer basket on which he had come to the
Realm of Ryn Gu, a large crocodile waiting for him. Never had he seen
such a huge creature. It measured eight fathoms in length from the tip of its
tail to the end of its long mouth. The Sea King had ordered the monster to
carry the Happy Hunter back to Japan. Like the wonderful basket which
Shiwozuchino Okina had made, it could travel faster than any steamboat,
and in this strange way, riding on the back of a crocodile, the Happy Hunter
returned to his own land.
As soon as the crocodile landed him, the Happy Hunter hastened to tell
the Skillful Fisher of his safe return. He then gave him back the fishing
hook which had been found in the mouth of the TAI and which had been the
cause of so much trouble between them. He earnestly begged his brother’s
forgiveness, telling him all that had happened to him in the Sea King’s
Palace and what wonderful adventures had led to the finding of the hook.
Page 115
Now the Skillful Fisher had used the lost hook as an excuse for driving
his brother out of the country. When his brother had left him that day three
years ago, and had not returned, he had been very glad in his evil heart and
had at once usurped his brother’s place as ruler of the land, and had become
powerful and rich. Now in the midst of enjoying what did not belong to
him, and hoping that his brother might never return to claim his rights, quite
unexpectedly there stood the Happy Hunter before him.
The Skillful Fisher feigned forgiveness, for he could make no more
excuses for sending his brother away again, but in his heart he was very
angry and hated his brother more and more, till at last he could no longer
bear the sight of him day after day, and planned and watched for an
opportunity to kill him.
One day when the Happy Hunter was walking in the rice fields his
brother followed him with a dagger. The Happy Hunter knew that his
brother was following him to kill him, and he felt that now, in this hour of
great danger, was the time to use the Jewels of the Flow and Ebb of the Tide
and prove whether what the Sea King had told him was true or not.
So he took out the Jewel of the Flood Tide from the bosom of his dress
and raised it to his forehead. Instantly over the fields and over the farms the
sea came rolling in wave upon wave till it reached the spot where his
brother was standing. The Skillful Fisher stood amazed and terrified to see
what was happening. In another minute he was struggling in the water and
calling on his brother to save him from drowning.
The Happy Hunter had a kind heart and could not bear the sight of his
brother’s distress. He at once put back the Jewel of the Flood Tide and took
out the Jewel of the Ebb Tide. No sooner did he hold it up as high as his
forehead than the sea ran back and back, and ere long the tossing rolling
floods had vanished, and the farms and fields and dry land appeared as
before.
The Skillful Fisher was very frightened at the peril of death in which he
had stood, and was greatly impressed by the wonderful things he had seen
his brother do. He learned now that he was making a fatal mistake to set
himself against his brother, younger than he thought he was, for he now had
become so powerful that the sea would flow in and the tide ebb at his word
of command. So he humbled himself before the Happy Hunter and asked
him to forgive him all the wrong he had done him. The Skillful Fisher
his brother out of the country. When his brother had left him that day three
years ago, and had not returned, he had been very glad in his evil heart and
had at once usurped his brother’s place as ruler of the land, and had become
powerful and rich. Now in the midst of enjoying what did not belong to
him, and hoping that his brother might never return to claim his rights, quite
unexpectedly there stood the Happy Hunter before him.
The Skillful Fisher feigned forgiveness, for he could make no more
excuses for sending his brother away again, but in his heart he was very
angry and hated his brother more and more, till at last he could no longer
bear the sight of him day after day, and planned and watched for an
opportunity to kill him.
One day when the Happy Hunter was walking in the rice fields his
brother followed him with a dagger. The Happy Hunter knew that his
brother was following him to kill him, and he felt that now, in this hour of
great danger, was the time to use the Jewels of the Flow and Ebb of the Tide
and prove whether what the Sea King had told him was true or not.
So he took out the Jewel of the Flood Tide from the bosom of his dress
and raised it to his forehead. Instantly over the fields and over the farms the
sea came rolling in wave upon wave till it reached the spot where his
brother was standing. The Skillful Fisher stood amazed and terrified to see
what was happening. In another minute he was struggling in the water and
calling on his brother to save him from drowning.
The Happy Hunter had a kind heart and could not bear the sight of his
brother’s distress. He at once put back the Jewel of the Flood Tide and took
out the Jewel of the Ebb Tide. No sooner did he hold it up as high as his
forehead than the sea ran back and back, and ere long the tossing rolling
floods had vanished, and the farms and fields and dry land appeared as
before.
The Skillful Fisher was very frightened at the peril of death in which he
had stood, and was greatly impressed by the wonderful things he had seen
his brother do. He learned now that he was making a fatal mistake to set
himself against his brother, younger than he thought he was, for he now had
become so powerful that the sea would flow in and the tide ebb at his word
of command. So he humbled himself before the Happy Hunter and asked
him to forgive him all the wrong he had done him. The Skillful Fisher
Page 116
promised to restore his brother to his rights and also swore that though the
Happy Hunter was the younger brother and owed him allegiance by right of
birth, that he, the Skillful Fisher, would exalt him as his superior and bow
before him as Lord of all Japan.
Then the Happy Hunter said that he would forgive his brother if he would
throw into the receding tide all his evil ways. The Skillful Fisher promised
and there was peace between the two brothers. From this time he kept his
word and became a good man and a kind brother.
The Happy Hunter now ruled his Kingdom without being disturbed by
family strife, and there was peace in Japan for a long, long time. Above all
the treasures in his house he prized the wonderful Jewels of the Flow and
Ebb of the Tide which had been given him by Ryn Jin, the Dragon King of
the Sea.
This is the congratulatory ending of the Happy Hunter and the Skillful
Fisher.
Happy Hunter was the younger brother and owed him allegiance by right of
birth, that he, the Skillful Fisher, would exalt him as his superior and bow
before him as Lord of all Japan.
Then the Happy Hunter said that he would forgive his brother if he would
throw into the receding tide all his evil ways. The Skillful Fisher promised
and there was peace between the two brothers. From this time he kept his
word and became a good man and a kind brother.
The Happy Hunter now ruled his Kingdom without being disturbed by
family strife, and there was peace in Japan for a long, long time. Above all
the treasures in his house he prized the wonderful Jewels of the Flow and
Ebb of the Tide which had been given him by Ryn Jin, the Dragon King of
the Sea.
This is the congratulatory ending of the Happy Hunter and the Skillful
Fisher.
Page 117
THE STORY OF THE OLD MAN WHO MADE
WITHERED TREES TO FLOWER
Long, long ago there lived an old man and his wife who supported
themselves by cultivating a small plot of land. Their life had been a very
happy and peaceful one save for one great sorrow, and this was they had no
child. Their only pet was a dog named Shiro, and on him they lavished all
the affection of their old age. Indeed, they loved him so much that
whenever they had anything nice to eat they denied themselves to give it to
Shiro. Now Shiro means “white,” and he was so called because of his color.
He was a real Japanese dog, and very like a small wolf in appearance.
The happiest hour of the day both for the old man and his dog was when
the man returned from his work in the field, and having finished his frugal
supper of rice and vegetables, would take what he had saved from the meal
out to the little veranda that ran round the cottage. Sure enough, Shiro was
waiting for his master and the evening tit-bit. Then the old man said “Chin,
chin!” and Shiro sat up and begged, and his master gave him the food. Next
door to this good old couple there lived another old man and his wife who
were both wicked and cruel, and who hated their good neighbors and the
dog Shiro with all their might. Whenever Shiro happened to look into their
kitchen they at once kicked him or threw something at him, sometimes even
wounding him.
One day Shiro was heard barking for a long time in the field at the back
of his master’s house. The old man, thinking that perhaps some birds were
attacking the corn, hurried out to see what was the matter. As soon as Shiro
saw his master he ran to meet him, wagging his tail, and, seizing the end of
his kimono, dragged him under a large yenoki tree. Here he began to dig
very industriously with his paws, yelping with joy all the time. The old
man, unable to understand what it all meant, stood looking on in
bewilderment. But Shiro went on barking and digging with all his might.
WITHERED TREES TO FLOWER
Long, long ago there lived an old man and his wife who supported
themselves by cultivating a small plot of land. Their life had been a very
happy and peaceful one save for one great sorrow, and this was they had no
child. Their only pet was a dog named Shiro, and on him they lavished all
the affection of their old age. Indeed, they loved him so much that
whenever they had anything nice to eat they denied themselves to give it to
Shiro. Now Shiro means “white,” and he was so called because of his color.
He was a real Japanese dog, and very like a small wolf in appearance.
The happiest hour of the day both for the old man and his dog was when
the man returned from his work in the field, and having finished his frugal
supper of rice and vegetables, would take what he had saved from the meal
out to the little veranda that ran round the cottage. Sure enough, Shiro was
waiting for his master and the evening tit-bit. Then the old man said “Chin,
chin!” and Shiro sat up and begged, and his master gave him the food. Next
door to this good old couple there lived another old man and his wife who
were both wicked and cruel, and who hated their good neighbors and the
dog Shiro with all their might. Whenever Shiro happened to look into their
kitchen they at once kicked him or threw something at him, sometimes even
wounding him.
One day Shiro was heard barking for a long time in the field at the back
of his master’s house. The old man, thinking that perhaps some birds were
attacking the corn, hurried out to see what was the matter. As soon as Shiro
saw his master he ran to meet him, wagging his tail, and, seizing the end of
his kimono, dragged him under a large yenoki tree. Here he began to dig
very industriously with his paws, yelping with joy all the time. The old
man, unable to understand what it all meant, stood looking on in
bewilderment. But Shiro went on barking and digging with all his might.
Page 118
The thought that something might be hidden beneath the tree, and that the
dog had scented it, at last struck the old man. He ran back to the house,
fetched his spade and began to dig the ground at that spot. What was his
astonishment when, after digging for some time, he came upon a heap of
old and valuable coins, and the deeper he dug the more gold coins did he
find. So intent was the old man on his work that he never saw the cross face
of his neighbor peering at him through the bamboo hedge. At last all the
gold coins lay shining on the ground. Shiro sat by erect with pride and
looking fondly at his master as if to say, “You see, though only a dog, I can
make some return for all the kindness you show me.”
The old man ran in to call his wife, and together they carried home the
treasure. Thus in one day the poor old man became rich. His gratitude to the
faithful dog knew no bounds, and he loved and petted him more than ever,
if that were possible.
The cross old neighbor, attracted by Shiro’s barking, had been an unseen
and envious witness of the finding of the treasure. He began to think that
he, too, would like to find a fortune. So a few days later he called at the old
man’s house and very ceremoniously asked permission to borrow Shiro for
a short time.
Shiro’s master thought this a strange request, because he knew quite well
that not only did his neighbor not love his pet dog, but that he never lost an
opportunity of striking and tormenting him whenever the dog crossed his
path. But the good old man was too kind-hearted to refuse his neighbor, so
he consented to lend the dog on condition that he should be taken great care
of.
The wicked old man returned to his home with an evil smile on his face,
and told his wife how he had succeeded in his crafty intentions. He then
took his spade and hastened to his own field, forcing the unwilling Shiro to
follow him. As soon as he reached a yenoki tree, he said to the dog,
threateningly:
“If there were gold coins under your master’s tree, there must also be
gold coins under my tree. You must find them for me! Where are they?
Where? Where?”
And catching hold of Shiro’s neck he held the dog’s head to the ground,
so that Shiro began to scratch and dig in order to free himself from the
horrid old man’s grasp.
dog had scented it, at last struck the old man. He ran back to the house,
fetched his spade and began to dig the ground at that spot. What was his
astonishment when, after digging for some time, he came upon a heap of
old and valuable coins, and the deeper he dug the more gold coins did he
find. So intent was the old man on his work that he never saw the cross face
of his neighbor peering at him through the bamboo hedge. At last all the
gold coins lay shining on the ground. Shiro sat by erect with pride and
looking fondly at his master as if to say, “You see, though only a dog, I can
make some return for all the kindness you show me.”
The old man ran in to call his wife, and together they carried home the
treasure. Thus in one day the poor old man became rich. His gratitude to the
faithful dog knew no bounds, and he loved and petted him more than ever,
if that were possible.
The cross old neighbor, attracted by Shiro’s barking, had been an unseen
and envious witness of the finding of the treasure. He began to think that
he, too, would like to find a fortune. So a few days later he called at the old
man’s house and very ceremoniously asked permission to borrow Shiro for
a short time.
Shiro’s master thought this a strange request, because he knew quite well
that not only did his neighbor not love his pet dog, but that he never lost an
opportunity of striking and tormenting him whenever the dog crossed his
path. But the good old man was too kind-hearted to refuse his neighbor, so
he consented to lend the dog on condition that he should be taken great care
of.
The wicked old man returned to his home with an evil smile on his face,
and told his wife how he had succeeded in his crafty intentions. He then
took his spade and hastened to his own field, forcing the unwilling Shiro to
follow him. As soon as he reached a yenoki tree, he said to the dog,
threateningly:
“If there were gold coins under your master’s tree, there must also be
gold coins under my tree. You must find them for me! Where are they?
Where? Where?”
And catching hold of Shiro’s neck he held the dog’s head to the ground,
so that Shiro began to scratch and dig in order to free himself from the
horrid old man’s grasp.
Page 119
The old man was very pleased when he saw the dog begin to scratch and
dig, for he at once supposed that some gold coins lay buried under his tree
as well as under his neighbor’s, and that the dog had scented them as
before; so pushing Shiro away he began to dig himself, but there was
nothing to be found. As he went on digging a foul smell was noticeable, and
he at last came upon a refuse heap.
The old man’s disgust can be imagined. This soon gave way to anger. He
had seen his neighbor’s good fortune, and hoping for the same luck himself,
he had borrowed the dog Shiro; and now, just as he seemed on the point of
finding what he sought, only a horrid smelling refuse heap had rewarded
him for a morning’s digging. Instead of blaming his own greed for his
disappointment, he blamed the poor dog. He seized his spade, and with all
his strength struck Shiro and killed him on the spot. He then threw the dog’s
body into the hole which he had dug in the hope of finding a treasure of
gold coins, and covered it over with the earth. Then he returned to the
house, telling no one, not even his wife, what he had done.
After waiting several days, as the dog Shiro did not return, his master
began to grow anxious. Day after day went by and the good old man waited
in vain. Then he went to his neighbor and asked him to give him back his
dog. Without any shame or hesitation, the wicked neighbor answered that
he had killed Shiro because of his bad behavior. At this dreadful news
Shiro’s master wept many sad and bitter tears. Great indeed, was his woful
surprise, but he was too good and gentle to reproach his bad neighbor.
Learning that Shiro was buried under the yenoki tree in the field, he asked
the old man to give him the tree, in remembrance of his poor dog Shiro.
Even the cross old neighbor could not refuse such a simple request, so he
consented to give the old man the tree under which Shiro lay buried. Shiro’s
master then cut the tree down and carried it home. Out of the trunk he made
a mortar. In this his wife put some rice, and he began to pound it with the
intention of making a festival to the memory of his dog Shiro.
A strange thing happened! His wife put the rice into the mortar, and no
sooner had he begun to pound it to make the cakes, than it began to increase
in quantity gradually till it was about five times the original amount, and the
cakes were turned out of the mortar as if an invisible hand were at work.
When the old man and his wife saw this, they understood that it was a
reward to them from Shiro for their faithful love to him. They tasted the
dig, for he at once supposed that some gold coins lay buried under his tree
as well as under his neighbor’s, and that the dog had scented them as
before; so pushing Shiro away he began to dig himself, but there was
nothing to be found. As he went on digging a foul smell was noticeable, and
he at last came upon a refuse heap.
The old man’s disgust can be imagined. This soon gave way to anger. He
had seen his neighbor’s good fortune, and hoping for the same luck himself,
he had borrowed the dog Shiro; and now, just as he seemed on the point of
finding what he sought, only a horrid smelling refuse heap had rewarded
him for a morning’s digging. Instead of blaming his own greed for his
disappointment, he blamed the poor dog. He seized his spade, and with all
his strength struck Shiro and killed him on the spot. He then threw the dog’s
body into the hole which he had dug in the hope of finding a treasure of
gold coins, and covered it over with the earth. Then he returned to the
house, telling no one, not even his wife, what he had done.
After waiting several days, as the dog Shiro did not return, his master
began to grow anxious. Day after day went by and the good old man waited
in vain. Then he went to his neighbor and asked him to give him back his
dog. Without any shame or hesitation, the wicked neighbor answered that
he had killed Shiro because of his bad behavior. At this dreadful news
Shiro’s master wept many sad and bitter tears. Great indeed, was his woful
surprise, but he was too good and gentle to reproach his bad neighbor.
Learning that Shiro was buried under the yenoki tree in the field, he asked
the old man to give him the tree, in remembrance of his poor dog Shiro.
Even the cross old neighbor could not refuse such a simple request, so he
consented to give the old man the tree under which Shiro lay buried. Shiro’s
master then cut the tree down and carried it home. Out of the trunk he made
a mortar. In this his wife put some rice, and he began to pound it with the
intention of making a festival to the memory of his dog Shiro.
A strange thing happened! His wife put the rice into the mortar, and no
sooner had he begun to pound it to make the cakes, than it began to increase
in quantity gradually till it was about five times the original amount, and the
cakes were turned out of the mortar as if an invisible hand were at work.
When the old man and his wife saw this, they understood that it was a
reward to them from Shiro for their faithful love to him. They tasted the
Page 120
cakes and found them nicer than any other food. So from this time they
never troubled about food, for they lived upon the cakes with which the
mortar never ceased to supply them.
The greedy neighbor, hearing of this new piece of good luck, was filled
with envy as before, and called on the old man and asked leave to borrow
the wonderful mortar for a short time, pretending that he, too, sorrowed for
the death of Shiro, and wished to make cakes for a festival to the dog’s
memory.
The old man did not in the least wish to lend it to his cruel neighbor, but
he was too kind to refuse. So the envious man carried home the mortar, but
he never brought it back.
Several days passed, and Shiro’s master waited in vain for the mortar, so
he went to call on the borrower, and asked him to be good enough to return
the mortar if he had finished with it. He found him sitting by a big fire made
of pieces of wood. On the ground lay what looked very much like pieces of
a broken mortar. In answer to the old man’s inquiry, the wicked neighbor
answered haughtily:
“Have you come to ask me for your mortar? I broke it to pieces, and now
I am making a fire of the wood, for when I tried to pound cakes in it only
some horrid smelling stuff came out.”
The good old man said:
“I am very sorry for that. It is a great pity you did not ask me for the
cakes if you wanted them. I would have given you as many as ever you
wanted. Now please give me the ashes of the mortar, as I wish to keep them
in remembrance of my dog.”
The neighbor consented at once, and the old man carried home a basket
full of ashes.
Not long after this the old man accidentally scattered some of the ashes
made by the burning of the mortar on the trees of his garden. A wonderful
thing happened!
It was late in autumn and all the trees had shed their leaves, but no sooner
did the ashes touch their branches than the cherry trees, the plum trees, and
all other blossoming shrubs burst into bloom, so that the old man’s garden
was suddenly transformed into a beautiful picture of spring. The old man’s
delight knew no bounds, and he carefully preserved the remaining ashes.
never troubled about food, for they lived upon the cakes with which the
mortar never ceased to supply them.
The greedy neighbor, hearing of this new piece of good luck, was filled
with envy as before, and called on the old man and asked leave to borrow
the wonderful mortar for a short time, pretending that he, too, sorrowed for
the death of Shiro, and wished to make cakes for a festival to the dog’s
memory.
The old man did not in the least wish to lend it to his cruel neighbor, but
he was too kind to refuse. So the envious man carried home the mortar, but
he never brought it back.
Several days passed, and Shiro’s master waited in vain for the mortar, so
he went to call on the borrower, and asked him to be good enough to return
the mortar if he had finished with it. He found him sitting by a big fire made
of pieces of wood. On the ground lay what looked very much like pieces of
a broken mortar. In answer to the old man’s inquiry, the wicked neighbor
answered haughtily:
“Have you come to ask me for your mortar? I broke it to pieces, and now
I am making a fire of the wood, for when I tried to pound cakes in it only
some horrid smelling stuff came out.”
The good old man said:
“I am very sorry for that. It is a great pity you did not ask me for the
cakes if you wanted them. I would have given you as many as ever you
wanted. Now please give me the ashes of the mortar, as I wish to keep them
in remembrance of my dog.”
The neighbor consented at once, and the old man carried home a basket
full of ashes.
Not long after this the old man accidentally scattered some of the ashes
made by the burning of the mortar on the trees of his garden. A wonderful
thing happened!
It was late in autumn and all the trees had shed their leaves, but no sooner
did the ashes touch their branches than the cherry trees, the plum trees, and
all other blossoming shrubs burst into bloom, so that the old man’s garden
was suddenly transformed into a beautiful picture of spring. The old man’s
delight knew no bounds, and he carefully preserved the remaining ashes.
Page 121
The story of the old man’s garden spread far and wide, and people from
far and near came to see the wonderful sight.
One day, soon after this, the old man heard some one knocking at his
door, and going to the porch to see who it was he was surprised to see a
Knight standing there. This Knight told him that he was a retainer of a great
Daimio (Earl); that one of the favorite cherry trees in this nobleman’s
garden had withered, and that though every one in his service had tried all
manner of means to revive it, none took effect. The Knight was sore
perplexed when he saw what great displeasure the loss of his favorite cherry
tree caused the Daimio. At this point, fortunately, they had heard that there
was a wonderful old man who could make withered trees to blossom, and
that his Lord had sent him to ask the old man to come to him.
“And,” added the Knight, “I shall be very much obliged if you will come
at once.”
The good old man was greatly surprised at what he heard, but
respectfully followed the Knight to the nobleman’s Palace.
The Daimio, who had been impatiently awaiting the old man’s coming,
as soon as he saw him asked him at once:
“Are you the old man who can make withered trees flower even out of
season?”
The old man made an obeisance, and replied:
“I am that old man!”
Then the Daimio said:
“You must make that dead cherry tree in my garden blossom again by
means of your famous ashes. I shall look on.”
Then they all went into the garden—the Daimio and his retainers and the
ladies-in waiting, who carried the Daimio’s sword.
The old man now tucked up his kimono and made ready to climb the tree.
Saying “Excuse me,” he took the pot of ashes which he had brought with
him, and began to climb the tree, every one watching his movements with
great interest.
At last he climbed to the spot where the tree divided into two great
branches, and taking up his position here, the old man sat down and
scattered the ashes right and left all over the branches and twigs.
far and near came to see the wonderful sight.
One day, soon after this, the old man heard some one knocking at his
door, and going to the porch to see who it was he was surprised to see a
Knight standing there. This Knight told him that he was a retainer of a great
Daimio (Earl); that one of the favorite cherry trees in this nobleman’s
garden had withered, and that though every one in his service had tried all
manner of means to revive it, none took effect. The Knight was sore
perplexed when he saw what great displeasure the loss of his favorite cherry
tree caused the Daimio. At this point, fortunately, they had heard that there
was a wonderful old man who could make withered trees to blossom, and
that his Lord had sent him to ask the old man to come to him.
“And,” added the Knight, “I shall be very much obliged if you will come
at once.”
The good old man was greatly surprised at what he heard, but
respectfully followed the Knight to the nobleman’s Palace.
The Daimio, who had been impatiently awaiting the old man’s coming,
as soon as he saw him asked him at once:
“Are you the old man who can make withered trees flower even out of
season?”
The old man made an obeisance, and replied:
“I am that old man!”
Then the Daimio said:
“You must make that dead cherry tree in my garden blossom again by
means of your famous ashes. I shall look on.”
Then they all went into the garden—the Daimio and his retainers and the
ladies-in waiting, who carried the Daimio’s sword.
The old man now tucked up his kimono and made ready to climb the tree.
Saying “Excuse me,” he took the pot of ashes which he had brought with
him, and began to climb the tree, every one watching his movements with
great interest.
At last he climbed to the spot where the tree divided into two great
branches, and taking up his position here, the old man sat down and
scattered the ashes right and left all over the branches and twigs.
Page 122
Wonderful, indeed, was the result! The withered tree at once burst into
full bloom! The Daimio was so transported with joy that he looked as if he
would go mad. He rose to his feet and spread out his fan, calling the old
man down from the tree. He himself gave the old man a wine cup filled
with the best SAKE, and rewarded him with much silver and gold and
many other precious things. The Daimio ordered that henceforth the old
man should call himself by the name of Hana-Saka-Jijii, or “The Old Man
who makes the Trees to Blossom,” and that henceforth all were to recognize
him by this name, and he sent him home with great honor.
The wicked neighbor, as before, heard of the good old man’s fortune, and
of all that had so auspiciously befallen him, and he could not suppress all
the envy and jealousy that filled his heart. He called to mind how he had
failed in his attempt to find the gold coins, and then in making the magic
cakes; this time surely he must succeed if he imitated the old man, who
made withered trees to flower simply by sprinkling ashes on them. This
would be the simplest task of all.
So he set to work and gathered together all the ashes which remained in
the fire-place from the burning of the wonderful mortar. Then he set out in
the hope of finding some great man to employ him, calling out loudly as he
went along:
“Here comes the wonderful man who can make withered trees blossom!
Here comes the old man who can make dead trees blossom!”
The Daimio in his Palace heard this cry, and said:
“That must be the Hana-Saka-Jijii passing. I have nothing to do to-day.
Let him try his art again; it will amuse me to look on.”
So the retainers went out and brought in the impostor before their Lord.
The satisfaction of false old man can now be imagined.
But the Daimio looking at him, thought it strange that he was not at all
like the old man he had seen before, so he asked him:
“Are you the man whom I named Hana-Saka-Jijii?”
And the envious neighbor answered with a lie:
“Yes, my Lord!”
“That is strange!” said the Daimio. “I thought there was only one Hana-
Saka-Jijii in the world! Has he now some disciples?”
full bloom! The Daimio was so transported with joy that he looked as if he
would go mad. He rose to his feet and spread out his fan, calling the old
man down from the tree. He himself gave the old man a wine cup filled
with the best SAKE, and rewarded him with much silver and gold and
many other precious things. The Daimio ordered that henceforth the old
man should call himself by the name of Hana-Saka-Jijii, or “The Old Man
who makes the Trees to Blossom,” and that henceforth all were to recognize
him by this name, and he sent him home with great honor.
The wicked neighbor, as before, heard of the good old man’s fortune, and
of all that had so auspiciously befallen him, and he could not suppress all
the envy and jealousy that filled his heart. He called to mind how he had
failed in his attempt to find the gold coins, and then in making the magic
cakes; this time surely he must succeed if he imitated the old man, who
made withered trees to flower simply by sprinkling ashes on them. This
would be the simplest task of all.
So he set to work and gathered together all the ashes which remained in
the fire-place from the burning of the wonderful mortar. Then he set out in
the hope of finding some great man to employ him, calling out loudly as he
went along:
“Here comes the wonderful man who can make withered trees blossom!
Here comes the old man who can make dead trees blossom!”
The Daimio in his Palace heard this cry, and said:
“That must be the Hana-Saka-Jijii passing. I have nothing to do to-day.
Let him try his art again; it will amuse me to look on.”
So the retainers went out and brought in the impostor before their Lord.
The satisfaction of false old man can now be imagined.
But the Daimio looking at him, thought it strange that he was not at all
like the old man he had seen before, so he asked him:
“Are you the man whom I named Hana-Saka-Jijii?”
And the envious neighbor answered with a lie:
“Yes, my Lord!”
“That is strange!” said the Daimio. “I thought there was only one Hana-
Saka-Jijii in the world! Has he now some disciples?”
Page 123
“I am the true Hana-Saka-Jijii. The one who came to you before was only
my disciple!” replied the old man again.
“Then you must be more skillful than the other. Try what you can do and
let me see!”
The envious neighbor, with the Daimio and his Court following, then
went into the garden, and approaching a dead tree, took out a handful of the
ashes which he carried with him, and scattered them over the tree.
But not only did the tree not burst into flower, but not even a bud came
forth. Thinking that he had not used enough ashes, the old man took
handfuls and again sprinkled them over the withered tree. But all to no
effect. After trying several times, the ashes were blown into the Daimio’s
eyes. This made him very angry, and he ordered his retainers to arrest the
false Hana-Saka-Jijii at once and put him in prison for an impostor. From
this imprisonment the wicked old man was never freed. Thus did he meet
with punishment at last for all his evil doings.
The good old man, however, with the treasure of gold coins which Shiro
had found for him, and with all the gold and the silver which the Daimio
had showered on him, became a rich and prosperous man in his old age, and
lived a long and happy life, beloved and respected by all.
my disciple!” replied the old man again.
“Then you must be more skillful than the other. Try what you can do and
let me see!”
The envious neighbor, with the Daimio and his Court following, then
went into the garden, and approaching a dead tree, took out a handful of the
ashes which he carried with him, and scattered them over the tree.
But not only did the tree not burst into flower, but not even a bud came
forth. Thinking that he had not used enough ashes, the old man took
handfuls and again sprinkled them over the withered tree. But all to no
effect. After trying several times, the ashes were blown into the Daimio’s
eyes. This made him very angry, and he ordered his retainers to arrest the
false Hana-Saka-Jijii at once and put him in prison for an impostor. From
this imprisonment the wicked old man was never freed. Thus did he meet
with punishment at last for all his evil doings.
The good old man, however, with the treasure of gold coins which Shiro
had found for him, and with all the gold and the silver which the Daimio
had showered on him, became a rich and prosperous man in his old age, and
lived a long and happy life, beloved and respected by all.
Page 124
THE JELLY FISH AND THE MONKEY
Long, long ago, in old Japan, the Kingdom of the Sea was governed by a
wonderful King. He was called Rin Jin, or the Dragon King of the Sea. His
power was immense, for he was the ruler of all sea creatures both great and
small, and in his keeping were the Jewels of the Ebb and Flow of the Tide.
The Jewel of the Ebbing Tide when thrown into the ocean caused the sea to
recede from the land, and the Jewel of the Flowing Tide made the waves to
rise mountains high and to flow in upon the shore like a tidal wave.
The Palace of Rin Jin was at the bottom of the sea, and was so beautiful
that no one has ever seen anything like it even in dreams. The walls were of
coral, the roof of jadestone and chrysoprase, and the floors were of the
finest mother-of-pearl. But the Dragon King, in spite of his wide-spreading
Kingdom, his beautiful Palace and all its wonders, and his power which
none disputed throughout the whole sea, was not at all happy, for he reigned
alone. At last he thought that if he married he would not only be happier,
but also more powerful. So he decided to take a wife. Calling all his fish
retainers together, he chose several of them as ambassadors to go through
the sea and seek for a young Dragon Princess who would be his bride.
At last they returned to the Palace bringing with them a lovely young
dragon. Her scales were of glittering green like the wings of summer
beetles, her eyes threw out glances of fire, and she was dressed in gorgeous
robes. All the jewels of the sea worked in with embroidery adorned them.
The King fell in love with her at once, and the wedding ceremony was
celebrated with great splendor. Every living thing in the sea, from the great
whales down to the little shrimps, came in shoals to offer their
congratulations to the bride and bridegroom and to wish them a long and
prosperous life. Never had there been such an assemblage or such gay
festivities in the Fish-World before. The train of bearers who carried the
bride’s possessions to her new home seemed to reach across the waves from
one end of the sea to the other. Each fish carried a phosphorescent lantern
Long, long ago, in old Japan, the Kingdom of the Sea was governed by a
wonderful King. He was called Rin Jin, or the Dragon King of the Sea. His
power was immense, for he was the ruler of all sea creatures both great and
small, and in his keeping were the Jewels of the Ebb and Flow of the Tide.
The Jewel of the Ebbing Tide when thrown into the ocean caused the sea to
recede from the land, and the Jewel of the Flowing Tide made the waves to
rise mountains high and to flow in upon the shore like a tidal wave.
The Palace of Rin Jin was at the bottom of the sea, and was so beautiful
that no one has ever seen anything like it even in dreams. The walls were of
coral, the roof of jadestone and chrysoprase, and the floors were of the
finest mother-of-pearl. But the Dragon King, in spite of his wide-spreading
Kingdom, his beautiful Palace and all its wonders, and his power which
none disputed throughout the whole sea, was not at all happy, for he reigned
alone. At last he thought that if he married he would not only be happier,
but also more powerful. So he decided to take a wife. Calling all his fish
retainers together, he chose several of them as ambassadors to go through
the sea and seek for a young Dragon Princess who would be his bride.
At last they returned to the Palace bringing with them a lovely young
dragon. Her scales were of glittering green like the wings of summer
beetles, her eyes threw out glances of fire, and she was dressed in gorgeous
robes. All the jewels of the sea worked in with embroidery adorned them.
The King fell in love with her at once, and the wedding ceremony was
celebrated with great splendor. Every living thing in the sea, from the great
whales down to the little shrimps, came in shoals to offer their
congratulations to the bride and bridegroom and to wish them a long and
prosperous life. Never had there been such an assemblage or such gay
festivities in the Fish-World before. The train of bearers who carried the
bride’s possessions to her new home seemed to reach across the waves from
one end of the sea to the other. Each fish carried a phosphorescent lantern
Page 125
and was dressed in ceremonial robes, gleaming blue and pink and silver;
and the waves as they rose and fell and broke that night seemed to be
rolling masses of white and green fire, for the phosphorus shone with
double brilliancy in honor of the event.
Now for a time the Dragon King and his bride lived very happily. They
loved each other dearly, and the bridegroom day after day took delight in
showing his bride all the wonders and treasures of his coral Palace, and she
was never tired of wandering with him through its vast halls and gardens.
Life seemed to them both like a long summer’s day.
Two months passed in this happy way, and then the Dragon Queen fell ill
and was obliged to stay in bed. The King was sorely troubled when he saw
his precious bride so ill, and at once sent for the fish doctor to come and
give her some medicine. He gave special orders to the servants to nurse her
carefully and to wait upon her with diligence, but in spite of all the nurses’
assiduous care and the medicine that the doctor prescribed, the young
Queen showed no signs of recovery, but grew daily worse.
Then the Dragon King interviewed the doctor and blamed him for not
curing the Queen. The doctor was alarmed at Rin Jin’s evident displeasure,
and excused his want of skill by saying that although he knew the right kind
of medicine to give the invalid, it was impossible to find it in the sea.
“Do you mean to tell me that you can’t get the medicine here?” asked the
Dragon King.
“It is just as you say!” said the doctor.
“Tell me what it is you want for the Queen?” demanded Rin Jin.
“I want the liver of a live monkey!” answered the doctor.
“The liver of a live monkey! Of course that will be most difficult to get,”
said the King.
“If we could only get that for the Queen, Her Majesty would soon
recover,” said the doctor.
“Very well, that decides it; we MUST get it somehow or other. But where
are we most likely to find a monkey?” asked the King.
Then the doctor told the Dragon King that some distance to the south
there was a Monkey Island where a great many monkeys lived.
“If only you could capture one of these monkeys?” said the doctor.
and the waves as they rose and fell and broke that night seemed to be
rolling masses of white and green fire, for the phosphorus shone with
double brilliancy in honor of the event.
Now for a time the Dragon King and his bride lived very happily. They
loved each other dearly, and the bridegroom day after day took delight in
showing his bride all the wonders and treasures of his coral Palace, and she
was never tired of wandering with him through its vast halls and gardens.
Life seemed to them both like a long summer’s day.
Two months passed in this happy way, and then the Dragon Queen fell ill
and was obliged to stay in bed. The King was sorely troubled when he saw
his precious bride so ill, and at once sent for the fish doctor to come and
give her some medicine. He gave special orders to the servants to nurse her
carefully and to wait upon her with diligence, but in spite of all the nurses’
assiduous care and the medicine that the doctor prescribed, the young
Queen showed no signs of recovery, but grew daily worse.
Then the Dragon King interviewed the doctor and blamed him for not
curing the Queen. The doctor was alarmed at Rin Jin’s evident displeasure,
and excused his want of skill by saying that although he knew the right kind
of medicine to give the invalid, it was impossible to find it in the sea.
“Do you mean to tell me that you can’t get the medicine here?” asked the
Dragon King.
“It is just as you say!” said the doctor.
“Tell me what it is you want for the Queen?” demanded Rin Jin.
“I want the liver of a live monkey!” answered the doctor.
“The liver of a live monkey! Of course that will be most difficult to get,”
said the King.
“If we could only get that for the Queen, Her Majesty would soon
recover,” said the doctor.
“Very well, that decides it; we MUST get it somehow or other. But where
are we most likely to find a monkey?” asked the King.
Then the doctor told the Dragon King that some distance to the south
there was a Monkey Island where a great many monkeys lived.
“If only you could capture one of these monkeys?” said the doctor.
Page 126
“How can any of my people capture a monkey?” said the Dragon King,
greatly puzzled. “The monkeys live on dry land, while we live in the water;
and out of our element we are quite powerless! I don’t see what we can do!”
“That has been my difficulty too,” said the doctor. “But amongst your
innumerable servants you surely can find one who can go on shore for that
express purpose!”
“Something must be done,” said the King, and calling his chief steward
he consulted him on the matter.
The chief steward thought for some time, and then, as if struck by a
sudden thought, said joyfully:
“I know what we must do! There is the kurage (jelly fish). He is certainly
ugly to look at, but he is proud of being able to walk on land with his four
legs like a tortoise. Let us send him to the Island of Monkeys to catch one.”
The jelly fish was then summoned to the King’s presence, and was told
by His Majesty what was required of him.
The jelly fish, on being told of the unexpected mission which was to be
intrusted to him, looked very troubled, and said that he had never been to
the island in question, and as he had never had any experience in catching
monkeys he was afraid that he would not be able to get one.
“Well,” said the chief steward, “if you depend on your strength or
dexterity you will never catch a monkey. The only way is to play a trick on
one!”
“How can I play a trick on a monkey? I don’t know how to do it,” said
the perplexed jelly fish.
“This is what you must do,” said the wily chief steward. “When you
approach the Island of Monkeys and meet some of them, you must try to get
very friendly with one. Tell him that you are a servant of the Dragon King,
and invite him to come and visit you and see the Dragon King’s Palace. Try
and describe to him as vividly as you can the grandeur of the Palace and the
wonders of the sea so as to arouse his curiosity and make him long to see it
all!”
“But how am I to get the monkey here? You know monkeys don’t
swim?” said the reluctant jelly fish.
“You must carry him on your back. What is the use of your shell if you
can’t do that!” said the chief steward.
greatly puzzled. “The monkeys live on dry land, while we live in the water;
and out of our element we are quite powerless! I don’t see what we can do!”
“That has been my difficulty too,” said the doctor. “But amongst your
innumerable servants you surely can find one who can go on shore for that
express purpose!”
“Something must be done,” said the King, and calling his chief steward
he consulted him on the matter.
The chief steward thought for some time, and then, as if struck by a
sudden thought, said joyfully:
“I know what we must do! There is the kurage (jelly fish). He is certainly
ugly to look at, but he is proud of being able to walk on land with his four
legs like a tortoise. Let us send him to the Island of Monkeys to catch one.”
The jelly fish was then summoned to the King’s presence, and was told
by His Majesty what was required of him.
The jelly fish, on being told of the unexpected mission which was to be
intrusted to him, looked very troubled, and said that he had never been to
the island in question, and as he had never had any experience in catching
monkeys he was afraid that he would not be able to get one.
“Well,” said the chief steward, “if you depend on your strength or
dexterity you will never catch a monkey. The only way is to play a trick on
one!”
“How can I play a trick on a monkey? I don’t know how to do it,” said
the perplexed jelly fish.
“This is what you must do,” said the wily chief steward. “When you
approach the Island of Monkeys and meet some of them, you must try to get
very friendly with one. Tell him that you are a servant of the Dragon King,
and invite him to come and visit you and see the Dragon King’s Palace. Try
and describe to him as vividly as you can the grandeur of the Palace and the
wonders of the sea so as to arouse his curiosity and make him long to see it
all!”
“But how am I to get the monkey here? You know monkeys don’t
swim?” said the reluctant jelly fish.
“You must carry him on your back. What is the use of your shell if you
can’t do that!” said the chief steward.
Page 127
“Won’t he be very heavy?” queried kurage again.
“You mustn’t mind that, for you are working for the Dragon King,”
replied the chief steward.
“I will do my best then,” said the jelly fish, and he swam away from the
Palace and started off towards the Monkey Island. Swimming swiftly he
reached his destination in a few hours, and landed by a convenient wave
upon the shore. On looking round he saw not far away a big pine-tree with
drooping branches and on one of those branches was just what he was
looking for—a live monkey.
“I’m in luck!” thought the jelly fish. “Now I must flatter the creature and
try to entice him to come back with me to the Palace, and my part will be
done!”
So the jelly fish slowly walked towards the pine-tree. In those ancient
days the jelly fish had four legs and a hard shell like a tortoise. When he got
to the pine-tree he raised his voice and said:
“How do you do, Mr. Monkey? Isn’t it a lovely day?”
“A very fine day,” answered the monkey from the tree. “I have never
seen you in this part of the world before. Where have you come from and
what is your name?”
“My name is kurage or jelly fish. I am one of the servants of the Dragon
King. I have heard so much of your beautiful island that I have come on
purpose to see it,” answered the jelly fish.
“I am very glad to see you,” said the monkey.
“By the bye,” said the jelly fish, “have you ever seen the Palace of the
Dragon King of the Sea where I live?”
“I have often heard of it, but I have never seen it!” answered the monkey.
“Then you ought most surely to come. It is a great pity for you to go
through life without seeing it. The beauty of the Palace is beyond all
description—it is certainly to my mind the most lovely place in the world,”
said the jelly fish.
“Is it so beautiful as all that?” asked the monkey in astonishment.
Then the jelly fish saw his chance, and went on describing to the best of
his ability the beauty and grandeur of the Sea King’s Palace, and the
wonders of the garden with its curious trees of white, pink and red coral,
“You mustn’t mind that, for you are working for the Dragon King,”
replied the chief steward.
“I will do my best then,” said the jelly fish, and he swam away from the
Palace and started off towards the Monkey Island. Swimming swiftly he
reached his destination in a few hours, and landed by a convenient wave
upon the shore. On looking round he saw not far away a big pine-tree with
drooping branches and on one of those branches was just what he was
looking for—a live monkey.
“I’m in luck!” thought the jelly fish. “Now I must flatter the creature and
try to entice him to come back with me to the Palace, and my part will be
done!”
So the jelly fish slowly walked towards the pine-tree. In those ancient
days the jelly fish had four legs and a hard shell like a tortoise. When he got
to the pine-tree he raised his voice and said:
“How do you do, Mr. Monkey? Isn’t it a lovely day?”
“A very fine day,” answered the monkey from the tree. “I have never
seen you in this part of the world before. Where have you come from and
what is your name?”
“My name is kurage or jelly fish. I am one of the servants of the Dragon
King. I have heard so much of your beautiful island that I have come on
purpose to see it,” answered the jelly fish.
“I am very glad to see you,” said the monkey.
“By the bye,” said the jelly fish, “have you ever seen the Palace of the
Dragon King of the Sea where I live?”
“I have often heard of it, but I have never seen it!” answered the monkey.
“Then you ought most surely to come. It is a great pity for you to go
through life without seeing it. The beauty of the Palace is beyond all
description—it is certainly to my mind the most lovely place in the world,”
said the jelly fish.
“Is it so beautiful as all that?” asked the monkey in astonishment.
Then the jelly fish saw his chance, and went on describing to the best of
his ability the beauty and grandeur of the Sea King’s Palace, and the
wonders of the garden with its curious trees of white, pink and red coral,
Page 128
and the still more curious fruits like great jewels hanging on the branches.
The monkey grew more and more interested, and as he listened he came
down the tree step by step so as not to lose a word of the wonderful story.
“I have got him at last!” thought the jelly fish, but aloud he said:
“Mr. Monkey. I must now go back. As you have never seen the Palace of
the Dragon King, won’t you avail yourself of this splendid opportunity by
coming with me? I shall then be able to act as guide and show you all the
sights of the sea, which will be even more wonderful to you—a land-
lubber.”
“I should love to go,” said the monkey, “but how am I to cross the water!
I can’t swim, as you surely know!”
“There is no difficulty about that. I can carry you on my back.”
“That will be troubling you too much,” said the monkey.
“I can do it quite easily. I am stronger than I look, so you needn’t
hesitate,” said the jelly fish, and taking the monkey on his back he stepped
into the sea.
“Keep very still, Mr. monkey,” said the jelly fish. “You mustn’t fall into
the sea; I am responsible for your safe arrival at the King’s Palace.”
“Please don’t go so fast, or I am sure I shall fall off,” said the monkey.
Thus they went along, the jelly fish skimming through the waves with the
monkey sitting on his back. When they were about half-way, the jelly fish,
who knew very little of anatomy, began to wonder if the monkey had his
liver with him or not!
“Mr. Monkey, tell me, have you such a thing as a liver with you?”
The monkey was very much surprised at this queer question, and asked
what the jelly fish wanted with a liver.
“That is the most important thing of all,” said the stupid jelly fish, “so as
soon as I recollected it, I asked you if you had yours with you?”
“Why is my liver so important to you?” asked the monkey.
“Oh! you will learn the reason later,” said the jelly fish.
The monkey grew more and more curious and suspicious, and urged the
jelly fish to tell him for what his liver was wanted, and ended up by
appealing to his hearer’s feelings by saying that he was very troubled at
what he had been told.
The monkey grew more and more interested, and as he listened he came
down the tree step by step so as not to lose a word of the wonderful story.
“I have got him at last!” thought the jelly fish, but aloud he said:
“Mr. Monkey. I must now go back. As you have never seen the Palace of
the Dragon King, won’t you avail yourself of this splendid opportunity by
coming with me? I shall then be able to act as guide and show you all the
sights of the sea, which will be even more wonderful to you—a land-
lubber.”
“I should love to go,” said the monkey, “but how am I to cross the water!
I can’t swim, as you surely know!”
“There is no difficulty about that. I can carry you on my back.”
“That will be troubling you too much,” said the monkey.
“I can do it quite easily. I am stronger than I look, so you needn’t
hesitate,” said the jelly fish, and taking the monkey on his back he stepped
into the sea.
“Keep very still, Mr. monkey,” said the jelly fish. “You mustn’t fall into
the sea; I am responsible for your safe arrival at the King’s Palace.”
“Please don’t go so fast, or I am sure I shall fall off,” said the monkey.
Thus they went along, the jelly fish skimming through the waves with the
monkey sitting on his back. When they were about half-way, the jelly fish,
who knew very little of anatomy, began to wonder if the monkey had his
liver with him or not!
“Mr. Monkey, tell me, have you such a thing as a liver with you?”
The monkey was very much surprised at this queer question, and asked
what the jelly fish wanted with a liver.
“That is the most important thing of all,” said the stupid jelly fish, “so as
soon as I recollected it, I asked you if you had yours with you?”
“Why is my liver so important to you?” asked the monkey.
“Oh! you will learn the reason later,” said the jelly fish.
The monkey grew more and more curious and suspicious, and urged the
jelly fish to tell him for what his liver was wanted, and ended up by
appealing to his hearer’s feelings by saying that he was very troubled at
what he had been told.
Page 129
Then the jelly fish, seeing how anxious the monkey looked, was sorry for
him, and told him everything. How the Dragon Queen had fallen ill, and
how the doctor had said that only the liver of a live monkey would cure her,
and how the Dragon King had sent him to find one.
“Now I have done as I was told, and as soon as we arrive at the Palace
the doctor will want your liver, so I feel sorry for you!” said the silly jelly
fish.
The poor monkey was horrified when he learnt all this, and very angry at
the trick played upon him. He trembled with fear at the thought of what was
in store for him.
But the monkey was a clever animal, and he thought it the wisest plan not
to show any sign of the fear he felt, so he tried to calm himself and to think
of some way by which he might escape.
“The doctor means to cut me open and then take my liver out! Why I
shall die!” thought the monkey. At last a bright thought struck him, so he
said quite cheerfully to the jelly fish:
“What a pity it was, Mr. Jelly Fish, that you did not speak of this before
we left the island!”
“If I had told why I wanted you to accompany me you would certainly
have refused to come,” answered the jelly fish.
“You are quite mistaken,” said the monkey. “Monkeys can very well
spare a liver or two, especially when it is wanted for the Dragon Queen of
the Sea. If I had only guessed of what you were in need. I should have
presented you with one without waiting to be asked. I have several livers.
But the greatest pity is, that as you did not speak in time, I have left all my
livers hanging on the pine-tree.”
“Have you left your liver behind you?” asked the jelly fish.
“Yes,” said the cunning monkey, “during the daytime I usually leave my
liver hanging up on the branch of a tree, as it is very much in the way when
I am climbing about from tree to tree. To-day, listening to your interesting
conversation, I quite forgot it, and left it behind when I came off with you.
If only you had spoken in time I should have remembered it, and should
have brought it along with me!”
The jelly fish was very disappointed when he heard this, for he believed
every word the monkey said. The monkey was of no good without a liver.
him, and told him everything. How the Dragon Queen had fallen ill, and
how the doctor had said that only the liver of a live monkey would cure her,
and how the Dragon King had sent him to find one.
“Now I have done as I was told, and as soon as we arrive at the Palace
the doctor will want your liver, so I feel sorry for you!” said the silly jelly
fish.
The poor monkey was horrified when he learnt all this, and very angry at
the trick played upon him. He trembled with fear at the thought of what was
in store for him.
But the monkey was a clever animal, and he thought it the wisest plan not
to show any sign of the fear he felt, so he tried to calm himself and to think
of some way by which he might escape.
“The doctor means to cut me open and then take my liver out! Why I
shall die!” thought the monkey. At last a bright thought struck him, so he
said quite cheerfully to the jelly fish:
“What a pity it was, Mr. Jelly Fish, that you did not speak of this before
we left the island!”
“If I had told why I wanted you to accompany me you would certainly
have refused to come,” answered the jelly fish.
“You are quite mistaken,” said the monkey. “Monkeys can very well
spare a liver or two, especially when it is wanted for the Dragon Queen of
the Sea. If I had only guessed of what you were in need. I should have
presented you with one without waiting to be asked. I have several livers.
But the greatest pity is, that as you did not speak in time, I have left all my
livers hanging on the pine-tree.”
“Have you left your liver behind you?” asked the jelly fish.
“Yes,” said the cunning monkey, “during the daytime I usually leave my
liver hanging up on the branch of a tree, as it is very much in the way when
I am climbing about from tree to tree. To-day, listening to your interesting
conversation, I quite forgot it, and left it behind when I came off with you.
If only you had spoken in time I should have remembered it, and should
have brought it along with me!”
The jelly fish was very disappointed when he heard this, for he believed
every word the monkey said. The monkey was of no good without a liver.
Page 130
Finally the jelly fish stopped and told the monkey so.
“Well,” said the monkey, “that is soon remedied. I am really sorry to
think of all your trouble; but if you will only take me back to the place
where you found me, I shall soon be able to get my liver.”
The jelly fish did not at all like the idea of going all the way back to the
island again; but the monkey assured him that if he would be so kind as to
take him back he would get his very best liver, and bring it with him the
next time. Thus persuaded, the jelly fish turned his course towards the
Monkey Island once more.
No sooner had the jelly fish reached the shore than the sly monkey
landed, and getting up into the pine-tree where the jelly fish had first seen
him, he cut several capers amongst the branches with joy at being safe
home again, and then looking down at the jelly fish said:
“So many thanks for all the trouble you have taken! Please present my
compliments to the Dragon King on your return!”
The jelly fish wondered at this speech and the mocking tone in which it
was uttered. Then he asked the monkey if it wasn’t his intention to come
with him at once after getting his liver.
The monkey replied laughingly that he couldn’t afford to lose his liver: it
was too precious.
“But remember your promise!” pleaded the jelly fish, now very
discouraged.
“That promise was false, and anyhow it is now broken!” answered the
monkey. Then he began to jeer at the jelly fish and told him that he had
been deceiving him the whole time; that he had no wish to lose his life,
which he certainly would have done had he gone on to the Sea King’s
Palace to the old doctor waiting for him, instead of persuading the jelly fish
to return under false pretenses.
“Of course, I won’t GIVE you my liver, but come and get it if you can!”
added the monkey mockingly from the tree.
There was nothing for the jelly fish to do now but to repent of his
stupidity, and to return to the Dragon King of the Sea and to confess his
failure, so he started sadly and slowly to swim back. The last thing he heard
as he glided away, leaving the island behind him, was the monkey laughing
at him.
“Well,” said the monkey, “that is soon remedied. I am really sorry to
think of all your trouble; but if you will only take me back to the place
where you found me, I shall soon be able to get my liver.”
The jelly fish did not at all like the idea of going all the way back to the
island again; but the monkey assured him that if he would be so kind as to
take him back he would get his very best liver, and bring it with him the
next time. Thus persuaded, the jelly fish turned his course towards the
Monkey Island once more.
No sooner had the jelly fish reached the shore than the sly monkey
landed, and getting up into the pine-tree where the jelly fish had first seen
him, he cut several capers amongst the branches with joy at being safe
home again, and then looking down at the jelly fish said:
“So many thanks for all the trouble you have taken! Please present my
compliments to the Dragon King on your return!”
The jelly fish wondered at this speech and the mocking tone in which it
was uttered. Then he asked the monkey if it wasn’t his intention to come
with him at once after getting his liver.
The monkey replied laughingly that he couldn’t afford to lose his liver: it
was too precious.
“But remember your promise!” pleaded the jelly fish, now very
discouraged.
“That promise was false, and anyhow it is now broken!” answered the
monkey. Then he began to jeer at the jelly fish and told him that he had
been deceiving him the whole time; that he had no wish to lose his life,
which he certainly would have done had he gone on to the Sea King’s
Palace to the old doctor waiting for him, instead of persuading the jelly fish
to return under false pretenses.
“Of course, I won’t GIVE you my liver, but come and get it if you can!”
added the monkey mockingly from the tree.
There was nothing for the jelly fish to do now but to repent of his
stupidity, and to return to the Dragon King of the Sea and to confess his
failure, so he started sadly and slowly to swim back. The last thing he heard
as he glided away, leaving the island behind him, was the monkey laughing
at him.
Page 131
Meanwhile the Dragon King, the doctor, the chief steward, and all the
servants were waiting impatiently for the return of the jelly fish. When they
caught sight of him approaching the Palace, they hailed him with delight.
They began to thank him profusely for all the trouble he had taken in going
to Monkey Island, and then they asked him where the monkey was.
Now the day of reckoning had come for the jelly fish. He quaked all over
as he told his story. How he had brought the monkey halfway over the sea,
and then had stupidly let out the secret of his commission; how the monkey
had deceived him by making him believe that he had left his liver behind
him.
The Dragon King’s wrath was great, and he at once gave orders that the
jelly fish was to be severely punished. The punishment was a horrible one.
All the bones were to be drawn out from his living body, and he was to be
beaten with sticks.
The poor jelly fish, humiliated and horrified beyond all words, cried out
for pardon. But the Dragon King’s order had to be obeyed. The servants of
the Palace forthwith each brought out a stick and surrounded the jelly fish,
and after pulling out his bones they beat him to a flat pulp, and then took
him out beyond the Palace gates and threw him into the water. Here he was
left to suffer and repent his foolish chattering, and to grow accustomed to
his new state of bonelessness.
From this story it is evident that in former times the jelly fish once had a
shell and bones something like a tortoise, but, ever since the Dragon King’s
sentence was carried out on the ancestor of the jelly fishes, his descendants
have all been soft and boneless just as you see them to-day thrown up by
the waves high upon the shores of Japan.
servants were waiting impatiently for the return of the jelly fish. When they
caught sight of him approaching the Palace, they hailed him with delight.
They began to thank him profusely for all the trouble he had taken in going
to Monkey Island, and then they asked him where the monkey was.
Now the day of reckoning had come for the jelly fish. He quaked all over
as he told his story. How he had brought the monkey halfway over the sea,
and then had stupidly let out the secret of his commission; how the monkey
had deceived him by making him believe that he had left his liver behind
him.
The Dragon King’s wrath was great, and he at once gave orders that the
jelly fish was to be severely punished. The punishment was a horrible one.
All the bones were to be drawn out from his living body, and he was to be
beaten with sticks.
The poor jelly fish, humiliated and horrified beyond all words, cried out
for pardon. But the Dragon King’s order had to be obeyed. The servants of
the Palace forthwith each brought out a stick and surrounded the jelly fish,
and after pulling out his bones they beat him to a flat pulp, and then took
him out beyond the Palace gates and threw him into the water. Here he was
left to suffer and repent his foolish chattering, and to grow accustomed to
his new state of bonelessness.
From this story it is evident that in former times the jelly fish once had a
shell and bones something like a tortoise, but, ever since the Dragon King’s
sentence was carried out on the ancestor of the jelly fishes, his descendants
have all been soft and boneless just as you see them to-day thrown up by
the waves high upon the shores of Japan.
Page 132
THE QUARREL OF THE MONKEY AND THE
CRAB
Long, long ago, one bright autumn day in Japan, it happened, that a pink-
faced monkey and a yellow crab were playing together along the bank of a
river. As they were running about, the crab found a rice-dumpling and the
monkey a persimmon-seed.
The crab picked up the rice-dumpling and showed it to the monkey,
saying:
“Look what a nice thing I have found!”
Then the monkey held up his persimmon-seed and said:
“I also have found something good! Look!”
Now though the monkey is always very fond of persimmon fruit, he had
no use for the seed he had just found. The persimmon-seed is as hard and
uneatable as a stone. He, therefore, in his greedy nature, felt very envious of
the crab’s nice dumpling, and he proposed an exchange. The crab naturally
did not see why he should give up his prize for a hard stone-like seed, and
would not consent to the monkey’s proposition.
Then the cunning monkey began to persuade the crab, saying:
“How unwise you are not to think of the future! Your rice-dumpling can
be eaten now, and is certainly much bigger than my seed; but if you sow
this seed in the ground it will soon grow and become a great tree in a few
years, and bear an abundance of fine ripe persimmons year after year. If
only I could show it to you then with the yellow fruit hanging on its
branches! Of course, if you don’t believe me I shall sow it myself; though I
am sure, later on, you will be very sorry that you did not take my advice.”
The simple-minded crab could not resist the monkey’s clever persuasion.
He at last gave in and consented to the monkey’s proposal, and the
exchange was made. The greedy monkey soon gobbled up the dumpling,
CRAB
Long, long ago, one bright autumn day in Japan, it happened, that a pink-
faced monkey and a yellow crab were playing together along the bank of a
river. As they were running about, the crab found a rice-dumpling and the
monkey a persimmon-seed.
The crab picked up the rice-dumpling and showed it to the monkey,
saying:
“Look what a nice thing I have found!”
Then the monkey held up his persimmon-seed and said:
“I also have found something good! Look!”
Now though the monkey is always very fond of persimmon fruit, he had
no use for the seed he had just found. The persimmon-seed is as hard and
uneatable as a stone. He, therefore, in his greedy nature, felt very envious of
the crab’s nice dumpling, and he proposed an exchange. The crab naturally
did not see why he should give up his prize for a hard stone-like seed, and
would not consent to the monkey’s proposition.
Then the cunning monkey began to persuade the crab, saying:
“How unwise you are not to think of the future! Your rice-dumpling can
be eaten now, and is certainly much bigger than my seed; but if you sow
this seed in the ground it will soon grow and become a great tree in a few
years, and bear an abundance of fine ripe persimmons year after year. If
only I could show it to you then with the yellow fruit hanging on its
branches! Of course, if you don’t believe me I shall sow it myself; though I
am sure, later on, you will be very sorry that you did not take my advice.”
The simple-minded crab could not resist the monkey’s clever persuasion.
He at last gave in and consented to the monkey’s proposal, and the
exchange was made. The greedy monkey soon gobbled up the dumpling,
Page 133
and with great reluctance gave up the persimmon-seed to the crab. He
would have liked to keep that too, but he was afraid of making the crab
angry and of being pinched by his sharp scissor-like claws. They then
separated, the monkey going home to his forest trees and the crab to his
stones along the river-side. As soon as the crab reached home he put the
persimmon-seed in the ground as the monkey had told him.
In the following spring the crab was delighted to see the shoot of a young
tree push its way up through the ground. Each year it grew bigger, till at last
it blossomed one spring, and in the following autumn bore some fine large
persimmons. Among the broad smooth green leaves the fruit hung like
golden balls, and as they ripened they mellowed to a deep orange. It was the
little crab’s pleasure to go out day by day and sit in the sun and put out his
long eyes in the same way as a snail puts out its horn, and watch the
persimmons ripening to perfection.
“How delicious they will be to eat!” he said to himself.
At last, one day, he knew the persimmons must be quite ripe and he
wanted very much to taste one. He made several attempts to climb the tree,
in the vain hope of reaching one of the beautiful persimmons hanging above
him; but he failed each time, for a crab’s legs are not made for climbing
trees but only for running along the ground and over stones, both of which
he can do most cleverly. In his dilemma he thought of his old playmate the
monkey, who, he knew, could climb trees better than any one else in the
world. He determined to ask the monkey to help him, and set out to find
him.
Running crab-fashion up the stony river bank, over the pathways into the
shadowy forest, the crab at last found the monkey taking an afternoon nap
in his favorite pine-tree, with his tail curled tight around a branch to prevent
him from falling off in his dreams. He was soon wide awake, however,
when he heard himself called, and eagerly listening to what the crab told
him. When he heard that the seed which he had long ago exchanged for a
rice-dumpling had grown into a tree and was now bearing good fruit, he
was delighted, for he at once devised a cunning plan which would give him
all the persimmons for himself.
He consented to go with the crab to pick the fruit for him. When they
both reached the spot, the monkey was astonished to see what a fine tree
would have liked to keep that too, but he was afraid of making the crab
angry and of being pinched by his sharp scissor-like claws. They then
separated, the monkey going home to his forest trees and the crab to his
stones along the river-side. As soon as the crab reached home he put the
persimmon-seed in the ground as the monkey had told him.
In the following spring the crab was delighted to see the shoot of a young
tree push its way up through the ground. Each year it grew bigger, till at last
it blossomed one spring, and in the following autumn bore some fine large
persimmons. Among the broad smooth green leaves the fruit hung like
golden balls, and as they ripened they mellowed to a deep orange. It was the
little crab’s pleasure to go out day by day and sit in the sun and put out his
long eyes in the same way as a snail puts out its horn, and watch the
persimmons ripening to perfection.
“How delicious they will be to eat!” he said to himself.
At last, one day, he knew the persimmons must be quite ripe and he
wanted very much to taste one. He made several attempts to climb the tree,
in the vain hope of reaching one of the beautiful persimmons hanging above
him; but he failed each time, for a crab’s legs are not made for climbing
trees but only for running along the ground and over stones, both of which
he can do most cleverly. In his dilemma he thought of his old playmate the
monkey, who, he knew, could climb trees better than any one else in the
world. He determined to ask the monkey to help him, and set out to find
him.
Running crab-fashion up the stony river bank, over the pathways into the
shadowy forest, the crab at last found the monkey taking an afternoon nap
in his favorite pine-tree, with his tail curled tight around a branch to prevent
him from falling off in his dreams. He was soon wide awake, however,
when he heard himself called, and eagerly listening to what the crab told
him. When he heard that the seed which he had long ago exchanged for a
rice-dumpling had grown into a tree and was now bearing good fruit, he
was delighted, for he at once devised a cunning plan which would give him
all the persimmons for himself.
He consented to go with the crab to pick the fruit for him. When they
both reached the spot, the monkey was astonished to see what a fine tree
Page 134
had sprung from the seed, and with what a number of ripe persimmons the
branches were loaded.
He quickly climbed the tree and began to pluck and eat, as fast as he
could, one persimmon after another. Each time he chose the best and ripest
he could find, and went on eating till he could eat no more. Not one would
he give to the poor hungry crab waiting below, and when he had finished
there was little but the hard, unripe fruit left.
You can imagine the feelings of the poor crab after waiting patiently, for
so long as he had done, for the tree to grow and the fruit to ripen, when he
saw the monkey devouring all the good persimmons. He was so
disappointed that he ran round and round the tree calling to the monkey to
remember his promise. The monkey at first took no notice of the crab’s
complaints, but at last he picked out the hardest, greenest persimmon he
could find and aimed it at the crab’s head. The persimmon is as hard as
stone when it is unripe. The monkey’s missile struck home and the crab was
sorely hurt by the blow. Again and again, as fast as he could pick them, the
monkey pulled off the hard persimmons and threw them at the defenseless
crab till he dropped dead, covered with wounds all over his body. There he
lay a pitiful sight at the foot of the tree he had himself planted.
When the wicked monkey saw that he had killed the crab he ran away
from the spot as fast as he could, in fear and trembling, like a coward as he
was.
Now the crab had a son who had been playing with a friend not far from
the spot where this sad work had taken place. On the way home he came
across his father dead, in a most dreadful condition—his head was smashed
and his shell broken in several places, and around his body lay the unripe
persimmons which had done their deadly work. At this dreadful sight the
poor young crab sat down and wept.
But when he had wept for some time he told himself that this crying
would do no good; it was his duty to avenge his father’s murder, and this he
determined to do. He looked about for some clue which would lead him to
discover the murderer. Looking up at the tree he noticed that the best fruit
had gone, and that all around lay bits of peel and numerous seeds strewn on
the ground as well as the unripe persimmons which had evidently been
thrown at his father. Then he understood that the monkey was the murderer,
for he now remembered that his father had once told him the story of the
branches were loaded.
He quickly climbed the tree and began to pluck and eat, as fast as he
could, one persimmon after another. Each time he chose the best and ripest
he could find, and went on eating till he could eat no more. Not one would
he give to the poor hungry crab waiting below, and when he had finished
there was little but the hard, unripe fruit left.
You can imagine the feelings of the poor crab after waiting patiently, for
so long as he had done, for the tree to grow and the fruit to ripen, when he
saw the monkey devouring all the good persimmons. He was so
disappointed that he ran round and round the tree calling to the monkey to
remember his promise. The monkey at first took no notice of the crab’s
complaints, but at last he picked out the hardest, greenest persimmon he
could find and aimed it at the crab’s head. The persimmon is as hard as
stone when it is unripe. The monkey’s missile struck home and the crab was
sorely hurt by the blow. Again and again, as fast as he could pick them, the
monkey pulled off the hard persimmons and threw them at the defenseless
crab till he dropped dead, covered with wounds all over his body. There he
lay a pitiful sight at the foot of the tree he had himself planted.
When the wicked monkey saw that he had killed the crab he ran away
from the spot as fast as he could, in fear and trembling, like a coward as he
was.
Now the crab had a son who had been playing with a friend not far from
the spot where this sad work had taken place. On the way home he came
across his father dead, in a most dreadful condition—his head was smashed
and his shell broken in several places, and around his body lay the unripe
persimmons which had done their deadly work. At this dreadful sight the
poor young crab sat down and wept.
But when he had wept for some time he told himself that this crying
would do no good; it was his duty to avenge his father’s murder, and this he
determined to do. He looked about for some clue which would lead him to
discover the murderer. Looking up at the tree he noticed that the best fruit
had gone, and that all around lay bits of peel and numerous seeds strewn on
the ground as well as the unripe persimmons which had evidently been
thrown at his father. Then he understood that the monkey was the murderer,
for he now remembered that his father had once told him the story of the
Page 135
rice-dumpling and the persimmon-seed. The young crab knew that monkeys
liked persimmons above all other fruit, and he felt sure that his greed for the
coveted fruit had been the cause of the old crab’s death. Alas!
He at first thought of going to attack the monkey at once, for he burned
with rage. Second thoughts, however, told him that this was useless, for the
monkey was an old and cunning animal and would be hard to overcome. He
must meet cunning with cunning and ask some of his friends to help him,
for he knew it would be quite out of his power to kill him alone.
The young crab set out at once to call on the mortar, his father’s old
friend, and told him of all that had happened. He besought the mortar with
tears to help him avenge his father’s death. The mortar was very sorry when
he heard the woful tale and promised at once to help the young crab punish
the monkey to death. He warned him that he must be very careful in what
he did, for the monkey was a strong and cunning enemy. The mortar now
sent to fetch the bee and the chestnut (also the crab’s old friends) to consult
them about the matter. In a short time the bee and the chestnut arrived.
When they were told all the details of the old crab’s death and of the
monkey’s wickedness and greed, they both gladly consented to help the
young crab in his revenge.
After talking for a long time as to the ways and means of carrying out
their plans they separated, and Mr. Mortar went home with the young crab
to help him bury his poor father.
While all this was taking place the monkey was congratulating himself
(as the wicked often do before their punishment comes upon them) on all he
had done so neatly. He thought it quite a fine thing that he had robbed his
friend of all his ripe persimmons and then that he had killed him. Still,
smile as hard as he might, he could not banish altogether the fear of the
consequences should his evil deeds be discovered. IF he were found out
(and he told himself that this could not be for he had escaped unseen) the
crab’s family would be sure to bear him hatred and seek to take revenge on
him. So he would not go out, and kept himself at home for several days. He
found this kind of life, however, extremely dull, accustomed as he was to
the free life of the woods, and at last he said:
“No one knows that it was I who killed the crab! I am sure that the old
thing breathed his last before I left him. Dead crabs have no mouths! Who
is there to tell that I am the murderer? Since no one knows, what is the use
liked persimmons above all other fruit, and he felt sure that his greed for the
coveted fruit had been the cause of the old crab’s death. Alas!
He at first thought of going to attack the monkey at once, for he burned
with rage. Second thoughts, however, told him that this was useless, for the
monkey was an old and cunning animal and would be hard to overcome. He
must meet cunning with cunning and ask some of his friends to help him,
for he knew it would be quite out of his power to kill him alone.
The young crab set out at once to call on the mortar, his father’s old
friend, and told him of all that had happened. He besought the mortar with
tears to help him avenge his father’s death. The mortar was very sorry when
he heard the woful tale and promised at once to help the young crab punish
the monkey to death. He warned him that he must be very careful in what
he did, for the monkey was a strong and cunning enemy. The mortar now
sent to fetch the bee and the chestnut (also the crab’s old friends) to consult
them about the matter. In a short time the bee and the chestnut arrived.
When they were told all the details of the old crab’s death and of the
monkey’s wickedness and greed, they both gladly consented to help the
young crab in his revenge.
After talking for a long time as to the ways and means of carrying out
their plans they separated, and Mr. Mortar went home with the young crab
to help him bury his poor father.
While all this was taking place the monkey was congratulating himself
(as the wicked often do before their punishment comes upon them) on all he
had done so neatly. He thought it quite a fine thing that he had robbed his
friend of all his ripe persimmons and then that he had killed him. Still,
smile as hard as he might, he could not banish altogether the fear of the
consequences should his evil deeds be discovered. IF he were found out
(and he told himself that this could not be for he had escaped unseen) the
crab’s family would be sure to bear him hatred and seek to take revenge on
him. So he would not go out, and kept himself at home for several days. He
found this kind of life, however, extremely dull, accustomed as he was to
the free life of the woods, and at last he said:
“No one knows that it was I who killed the crab! I am sure that the old
thing breathed his last before I left him. Dead crabs have no mouths! Who
is there to tell that I am the murderer? Since no one knows, what is the use
Page 136
of shutting myself up and brooding over the matter? What is done cannot be
undone!”
With this he wandered out into the crab settlement and crept about as
slyly as possible near the crab’s house and tried to hear the neighbors’
gossip round about. He wanted to find out what the crabs were saving about
their chief’s death, for the old crab had been the chief of the tribe. But he
heard nothing and said to himself:
“They are all such fools that they don’t know and don’t care who
murdered their chief!”
Little did he know in his so-called “monkey’s wisdom” that this seeming
unconcern was part of the young crab’s plan. He purposely pretended not to
know who killed his father, and also to believe that he had met his death
through his own fault. By this means he could the better keep secret the
revenge on the monkey, which he was meditating.
So the monkey returned home from his walk quite content. He told
himself he had nothing now to fear.
One fine day, when the monkey was sitting at home, he was surprised by
the appearance of a messenger from the young crab. While he was
wondering what this might mean, the messenger bowed before him and
said:
“I have been sent by my master to inform you that his father died the
other day in falling from a persimmon tree while trying to climb the tree
after fruit. This, being the seventh day, is the first anniversary after his
death, and my master has prepared a little festival in his father’s honor, and
bids you come to participate in it as you were one of his best friends. My
master hopes you will honor his house with your kind visit.”
When the monkey heard these words he rejoiced in his inmost heart, for
all his fears of being suspected were now at rest. He could not guess that a
plot had just been set in motion against him. He pretended to be very
surprised at the news of the crab’s death, and said:
“I am, indeed, very sorry to hear of your chief’s death. We were great
friends as you know. I remember that we once exchanged a rice-dumpling
for a persimmon-seed. It grieves me much to think that that seed was in the
end the cause of his death. I accept your kind invitation with many thanks. I
undone!”
With this he wandered out into the crab settlement and crept about as
slyly as possible near the crab’s house and tried to hear the neighbors’
gossip round about. He wanted to find out what the crabs were saving about
their chief’s death, for the old crab had been the chief of the tribe. But he
heard nothing and said to himself:
“They are all such fools that they don’t know and don’t care who
murdered their chief!”
Little did he know in his so-called “monkey’s wisdom” that this seeming
unconcern was part of the young crab’s plan. He purposely pretended not to
know who killed his father, and also to believe that he had met his death
through his own fault. By this means he could the better keep secret the
revenge on the monkey, which he was meditating.
So the monkey returned home from his walk quite content. He told
himself he had nothing now to fear.
One fine day, when the monkey was sitting at home, he was surprised by
the appearance of a messenger from the young crab. While he was
wondering what this might mean, the messenger bowed before him and
said:
“I have been sent by my master to inform you that his father died the
other day in falling from a persimmon tree while trying to climb the tree
after fruit. This, being the seventh day, is the first anniversary after his
death, and my master has prepared a little festival in his father’s honor, and
bids you come to participate in it as you were one of his best friends. My
master hopes you will honor his house with your kind visit.”
When the monkey heard these words he rejoiced in his inmost heart, for
all his fears of being suspected were now at rest. He could not guess that a
plot had just been set in motion against him. He pretended to be very
surprised at the news of the crab’s death, and said:
“I am, indeed, very sorry to hear of your chief’s death. We were great
friends as you know. I remember that we once exchanged a rice-dumpling
for a persimmon-seed. It grieves me much to think that that seed was in the
end the cause of his death. I accept your kind invitation with many thanks. I
Page 137
shall be delighted to do honor to my poor old friend!” And he screwed some
false tears from his eyes.
The messenger laughed inwardly and thought, “The wicked monkey is
now dropping false tears, but within a short time he shall shed real ones.”
But aloud he thanked the monkey politely and went home.
When he had gone, the wicked monkey laughed aloud at what he thought
was the young crab’s innocence, and without the least feeling began to look
forward to the feast to be held that day in honor of the dead crab, to which
he had been invited. He changed his dress and set out solemnly to visit the
young crab.
He found all the members of the crab’s family and his relatives waiting to
receive and welcome him. As soon as the bows of meeting were over they
led him to a hall. Here the young chief mourner came to receive him.
Expressions of condolence and thanks were exchanged between them, and
then they all sat down to a luxurious feast and entertained the monkey as
the guest of honor.
The feast over, he was next invited to the tea-ceremony room to drink a
cup of tea. When the young crab had conducted the monkey to the tearoom
he left him and retired. Time passed and still he did not return. At last the
monkey became impatient. He said to himself:
“This tea ceremony is always a very slow affair. I am tired of waiting so
long. I am very thirsty after drinking so much sake at the dinner!”
He then approached the charcoal fire-place and began to pour out some
hot water from the kettle boiling there, when something burst out from the
ashes with a great pop and hit the monkey right in the neck. It was the
chestnut, one of the crab’s friends, who had hidden himself in the fireplace.
The monkey, taken by surprise, jumped backward, and then started to run
out of the room.
The bee, who was hiding outside the screens, now flew out and stung him
on the cheek. The monkey was in great pain, his neck was burned by the
chestnut and his face badly stung by the bee, but he ran on screaming and
chattering with rage.
Now the stone mortar had hidden himself with several other stones on the
top of the crab’s gate, and as the monkey ran underneath, the mortar and all
fell down on the top of the monkey’s head. Was it possible for the monkey
false tears from his eyes.
The messenger laughed inwardly and thought, “The wicked monkey is
now dropping false tears, but within a short time he shall shed real ones.”
But aloud he thanked the monkey politely and went home.
When he had gone, the wicked monkey laughed aloud at what he thought
was the young crab’s innocence, and without the least feeling began to look
forward to the feast to be held that day in honor of the dead crab, to which
he had been invited. He changed his dress and set out solemnly to visit the
young crab.
He found all the members of the crab’s family and his relatives waiting to
receive and welcome him. As soon as the bows of meeting were over they
led him to a hall. Here the young chief mourner came to receive him.
Expressions of condolence and thanks were exchanged between them, and
then they all sat down to a luxurious feast and entertained the monkey as
the guest of honor.
The feast over, he was next invited to the tea-ceremony room to drink a
cup of tea. When the young crab had conducted the monkey to the tearoom
he left him and retired. Time passed and still he did not return. At last the
monkey became impatient. He said to himself:
“This tea ceremony is always a very slow affair. I am tired of waiting so
long. I am very thirsty after drinking so much sake at the dinner!”
He then approached the charcoal fire-place and began to pour out some
hot water from the kettle boiling there, when something burst out from the
ashes with a great pop and hit the monkey right in the neck. It was the
chestnut, one of the crab’s friends, who had hidden himself in the fireplace.
The monkey, taken by surprise, jumped backward, and then started to run
out of the room.
The bee, who was hiding outside the screens, now flew out and stung him
on the cheek. The monkey was in great pain, his neck was burned by the
chestnut and his face badly stung by the bee, but he ran on screaming and
chattering with rage.
Now the stone mortar had hidden himself with several other stones on the
top of the crab’s gate, and as the monkey ran underneath, the mortar and all
fell down on the top of the monkey’s head. Was it possible for the monkey
Page 138
to bear the weight of the mortar falling on him from the top of the gate? He
lay crushed and in great pain, quite unable to get up. As he lay there
helpless the young crab came up, and, holding his great claw scissors over
the monkey, he said:
“Do you now remember that you murdered my father?”
“Then you—are—my—enemy?” gasped the monkey brokenly.
“Of course,” said the young crab.
“It—was—your—father’s—fault—not—mine!” gasped the unrepentant
monkey.
“Can you still lie? I will soon put an end to your breath!” and with that he
cut off the monkey’s head with his pitcher claws. Thus the wicked monkey
met his well-merited punishment, and the young crab avenged his father’s
death.
This is the end of the story of the monkey, the crab, and the persimmon-
seed.
lay crushed and in great pain, quite unable to get up. As he lay there
helpless the young crab came up, and, holding his great claw scissors over
the monkey, he said:
“Do you now remember that you murdered my father?”
“Then you—are—my—enemy?” gasped the monkey brokenly.
“Of course,” said the young crab.
“It—was—your—father’s—fault—not—mine!” gasped the unrepentant
monkey.
“Can you still lie? I will soon put an end to your breath!” and with that he
cut off the monkey’s head with his pitcher claws. Thus the wicked monkey
met his well-merited punishment, and the young crab avenged his father’s
death.
This is the end of the story of the monkey, the crab, and the persimmon-
seed.
Page 139
THE WHITE HARE AND THE CROCODILES
Long, long ago, when all the animals could talk, there lived in the
province of Inaba in Japan, a little white hare. His home was on the island
of Oki, and just across the sea was the mainland of Inaba.
Now the hare wanted very much to cross over to Inaba. Day after day he
would go out and sit on the shore and look longingly over the water in the
direction of Inaba, and day after day he hoped to find some way of getting
across.
One day as usual, the hare was standing on the beach, looking towards
the mainland across the water, when he saw a great crocodile swimming
near the island.
“This is very lucky!” thought the hare. “Now I shall be able to get my
wish. I will ask the crocodile to carry me across the sea!”
But he was doubtful whether the crocodile would consent to do what
wanted. So he thought instead of asking a favor he would try to get what he
wanted by a trick.
So with a loud voice he called to the crocodile, and said:
“Oh, Mr. Crocodile, isn’t it a lovely day?”
The crocodile, who had come out all by itself that day to enjoy the bright
sunshine, was just beginning to feel a bit lonely when the hare’s cheerful
greeting broke the silence. The crocodile swam nearer the shore, very
pleased to hear some one speak.
“I wonder who it was that spoke to me just now! Was it you, Mr. Hare?
You must be very lonely all by yourself!”
“Oh, no, I am not at all lonely,” said the hare, “but as it was such a fine
day I came out here to enjoy myself. Won’t you stop and play with me a
little while?”
Long, long ago, when all the animals could talk, there lived in the
province of Inaba in Japan, a little white hare. His home was on the island
of Oki, and just across the sea was the mainland of Inaba.
Now the hare wanted very much to cross over to Inaba. Day after day he
would go out and sit on the shore and look longingly over the water in the
direction of Inaba, and day after day he hoped to find some way of getting
across.
One day as usual, the hare was standing on the beach, looking towards
the mainland across the water, when he saw a great crocodile swimming
near the island.
“This is very lucky!” thought the hare. “Now I shall be able to get my
wish. I will ask the crocodile to carry me across the sea!”
But he was doubtful whether the crocodile would consent to do what
wanted. So he thought instead of asking a favor he would try to get what he
wanted by a trick.
So with a loud voice he called to the crocodile, and said:
“Oh, Mr. Crocodile, isn’t it a lovely day?”
The crocodile, who had come out all by itself that day to enjoy the bright
sunshine, was just beginning to feel a bit lonely when the hare’s cheerful
greeting broke the silence. The crocodile swam nearer the shore, very
pleased to hear some one speak.
“I wonder who it was that spoke to me just now! Was it you, Mr. Hare?
You must be very lonely all by yourself!”
“Oh, no, I am not at all lonely,” said the hare, “but as it was such a fine
day I came out here to enjoy myself. Won’t you stop and play with me a
little while?”
Page 140
The crocodile came out of the sea and sat on the shore, and the two
played together for some time. Then the hare said:
“Mr. Crocodile, you live in the sea and I live on this island, and we do
not often meet, so I know very little about you. Tell me, do you think the
number of your company is greater than mine?”
“Of course, there are more crocodiles than hares,” answered the
crocodile. “Can you not see that for yourself? You live on this small island,
while I live in the sea, which spreads through all parts of the world, so if I
call together all the crocodiles who dwell in the sea you hares will be as
nothing compared to us!” The crocodile was very conceited.
The hare, who meant to play a trick on the crocodile, said:
“Do you think it possible for you to call up enough crocodiles to form a
line from this island across the sea to Inaba?”
The crocodile thought for a moment and then answered:
“Of course, it is possible.”
“Then do try,” said the artful hare, “and I will count the number from
here!”
The crocodile, who was very simple-minded, and who hadn’t the least
idea that the hare intended to play a trick on him, agreed to do what the hare
asked, and said:
“Wait a little while I go back into the sea and call my company together!”
The crocodile plunged into the sea and was gone for some time. The
hare, meanwhile, waited patiently on the shore. At last the crocodile
appeared, bringing with him a large number of other crocodiles.
“Look, Mr. Hare!” said the crocodile, “it is nothing for my friends to
form a line between here and Inaba. There are enough crocodiles to stretch
from here even as far as China or India. Did you ever see so many
crocodiles?”
Then the whole company of crocodiles arranged themselves in the water
so as to form a bridge between the Island of Oki and the mainland of Inaba.
When the hare saw the bridge of crocodiles, he said:
“How splendid! I did not believe this was possible. Now let me count
you all! To do this, however, with your permission, I must walk over on
played together for some time. Then the hare said:
“Mr. Crocodile, you live in the sea and I live on this island, and we do
not often meet, so I know very little about you. Tell me, do you think the
number of your company is greater than mine?”
“Of course, there are more crocodiles than hares,” answered the
crocodile. “Can you not see that for yourself? You live on this small island,
while I live in the sea, which spreads through all parts of the world, so if I
call together all the crocodiles who dwell in the sea you hares will be as
nothing compared to us!” The crocodile was very conceited.
The hare, who meant to play a trick on the crocodile, said:
“Do you think it possible for you to call up enough crocodiles to form a
line from this island across the sea to Inaba?”
The crocodile thought for a moment and then answered:
“Of course, it is possible.”
“Then do try,” said the artful hare, “and I will count the number from
here!”
The crocodile, who was very simple-minded, and who hadn’t the least
idea that the hare intended to play a trick on him, agreed to do what the hare
asked, and said:
“Wait a little while I go back into the sea and call my company together!”
The crocodile plunged into the sea and was gone for some time. The
hare, meanwhile, waited patiently on the shore. At last the crocodile
appeared, bringing with him a large number of other crocodiles.
“Look, Mr. Hare!” said the crocodile, “it is nothing for my friends to
form a line between here and Inaba. There are enough crocodiles to stretch
from here even as far as China or India. Did you ever see so many
crocodiles?”
Then the whole company of crocodiles arranged themselves in the water
so as to form a bridge between the Island of Oki and the mainland of Inaba.
When the hare saw the bridge of crocodiles, he said:
“How splendid! I did not believe this was possible. Now let me count
you all! To do this, however, with your permission, I must walk over on
Page 141
your backs to the other side, so please be so good as not to move, or else I
shall fall into the sea and be drowned!”
So the hare hopped off the island on to the strange bridge of crocodiles,
counting as he jumped from one crocodile’s back to the other:
“Please keep quite still, or I shall not be able to count. One, two, three,
four, five, six, seven, eight, nine—”
Thus the cunning hare walked right across to the mainland of Inaba. Not
content with getting his wish, he began to jeer at the crocodiles instead of
thanking them, and said, as he leapt off the last one’s back:
“Oh! you stupid crocodiles, now I have done with you!”
And he was just about to run away as fast as he could. But he did not
escape so easily, for so soon as the crocodiles understood that this was a
trick played upon them by the hare so as to enable him to cross the sea, and
that the hare was now laughing at them for their stupidity, they became
furiously angry and made up their minds to take revenge. So some of them
ran after the hare and caught him. Then they all surrounded the poor little
animal and pulled out all his fur. He cried out loudly and entreated them to
spare him, but with each tuft of fur they pulled out they said:
“Serve you right!”
When the crocodiles had pulled out the last bit of fur, they threw the poor
hare on the beach, and all swam away laughing at what they had done.
The hare was now in a pitiful plight, all his beautiful white fur had been
pulled out, and his bare little body was quivering with pain and bleeding all
over. He could hardly move, and all he could do was to lie on the beach
quite helpless and weep over the misfortune that had befallen him.
Notwithstanding that it was his own fault that had brought all this misery
and suffering upon the white hare of Inaba, any one seeing the poor little
creature could not help feeling sorry for him in his sad condition, for the
crocodiles had been very cruel in their revenge.
Just at this time a number of men, who looked like King’s sons, happened
to pass by, and seeing the hare lying on the beach crying, stopped and asked
what was the matter.
The hare lifted up his head from between his paws, and answered them,
saying:
shall fall into the sea and be drowned!”
So the hare hopped off the island on to the strange bridge of crocodiles,
counting as he jumped from one crocodile’s back to the other:
“Please keep quite still, or I shall not be able to count. One, two, three,
four, five, six, seven, eight, nine—”
Thus the cunning hare walked right across to the mainland of Inaba. Not
content with getting his wish, he began to jeer at the crocodiles instead of
thanking them, and said, as he leapt off the last one’s back:
“Oh! you stupid crocodiles, now I have done with you!”
And he was just about to run away as fast as he could. But he did not
escape so easily, for so soon as the crocodiles understood that this was a
trick played upon them by the hare so as to enable him to cross the sea, and
that the hare was now laughing at them for their stupidity, they became
furiously angry and made up their minds to take revenge. So some of them
ran after the hare and caught him. Then they all surrounded the poor little
animal and pulled out all his fur. He cried out loudly and entreated them to
spare him, but with each tuft of fur they pulled out they said:
“Serve you right!”
When the crocodiles had pulled out the last bit of fur, they threw the poor
hare on the beach, and all swam away laughing at what they had done.
The hare was now in a pitiful plight, all his beautiful white fur had been
pulled out, and his bare little body was quivering with pain and bleeding all
over. He could hardly move, and all he could do was to lie on the beach
quite helpless and weep over the misfortune that had befallen him.
Notwithstanding that it was his own fault that had brought all this misery
and suffering upon the white hare of Inaba, any one seeing the poor little
creature could not help feeling sorry for him in his sad condition, for the
crocodiles had been very cruel in their revenge.
Just at this time a number of men, who looked like King’s sons, happened
to pass by, and seeing the hare lying on the beach crying, stopped and asked
what was the matter.
The hare lifted up his head from between his paws, and answered them,
saying:
Page 142
“I had a fight with some crocodiles, but I was beaten, and they pulled out
all my fur and left me to suffer here—that is why I am crying.”
Now one of these young men had a bad and spiteful disposition. But he
feigned kindness, and said to the hare:
“I feel very sorry for you. If you will only try it, I know of a remedy
which will cure your sore body. Go and bathe yourself in the sea, and then
come and sit in the wind. This will make your fur grow again, and you will
be just as you were before.”
Then all the young men passed on. The hare was very pleased, thinking
that he had found a cure. He went and bathed in the sea and then came out
and sat where the wind could blow upon him.
But as the wind blew and dried him, his skin became drawn and
hardened, and the salt increased the pain so much that he rolled on the sand
in his agony and cried aloud.
Just then another King’s son passed by, carrying a great bag on his back.
He saw the hare, and stopped and asked why he was crying so loudly.
But the poor hare, remembering that he had been deceived by one very
like the man who now spoke to him, did not answer, but continued to cry.
But this man had a kind heart, and looked at the hare very pityingly, and
said:
“You poor thing! I see that your fur is all pulled out and that your skin is
quite bare. Who can have treated you so cruelly?”
When the hare heard these kind words he felt very grateful to the man,
and encouraged by his gentle manner the hare told him all that had befallen
him. The little animal hid nothing from his friend, but told him frankly how
he had played a trick on the crocodiles and how he had come across the
bridge they had made, thinking that he wished to count their number: how
he had jeered at them for their stupidity, and then how the crocodiles had
revenged themselves on him. Then he went on to say how he had been
deceived by a party of men who looked very like his kind friend: and the
hare ended his long tale of woe by begging the man to give him some
medicine that would cure him and make his fur grow again.
When the hare had finished his story, the man was full of pity towards
him, and said:
all my fur and left me to suffer here—that is why I am crying.”
Now one of these young men had a bad and spiteful disposition. But he
feigned kindness, and said to the hare:
“I feel very sorry for you. If you will only try it, I know of a remedy
which will cure your sore body. Go and bathe yourself in the sea, and then
come and sit in the wind. This will make your fur grow again, and you will
be just as you were before.”
Then all the young men passed on. The hare was very pleased, thinking
that he had found a cure. He went and bathed in the sea and then came out
and sat where the wind could blow upon him.
But as the wind blew and dried him, his skin became drawn and
hardened, and the salt increased the pain so much that he rolled on the sand
in his agony and cried aloud.
Just then another King’s son passed by, carrying a great bag on his back.
He saw the hare, and stopped and asked why he was crying so loudly.
But the poor hare, remembering that he had been deceived by one very
like the man who now spoke to him, did not answer, but continued to cry.
But this man had a kind heart, and looked at the hare very pityingly, and
said:
“You poor thing! I see that your fur is all pulled out and that your skin is
quite bare. Who can have treated you so cruelly?”
When the hare heard these kind words he felt very grateful to the man,
and encouraged by his gentle manner the hare told him all that had befallen
him. The little animal hid nothing from his friend, but told him frankly how
he had played a trick on the crocodiles and how he had come across the
bridge they had made, thinking that he wished to count their number: how
he had jeered at them for their stupidity, and then how the crocodiles had
revenged themselves on him. Then he went on to say how he had been
deceived by a party of men who looked very like his kind friend: and the
hare ended his long tale of woe by begging the man to give him some
medicine that would cure him and make his fur grow again.
When the hare had finished his story, the man was full of pity towards
him, and said:
Page 143
“I am very sorry for all you have suffered, but remember, it was only the
consequence of the deceit you practiced on the crocodiles.”
“I know,” answered the sorrowful hare, “but I have repented and made up
my mind never to use deceit again, so I beg you to show me how I may cure
my sore body and make the fur grow again.”
“Then I will tell you of a good remedy,” said the man. “First go and bathe
well in that pond over there and try to wash all the salt from your body.
Then pick some of those kaba flowers that are growing near the edge of the
water, spread them on the ground and roll yourself on them. If you do this
the pollen will cause your fur to grow again, and you will be quite well in a
little while.”
The hare was very glad to be told what to do, so kindly. He crawled to
the pond pointed out to him, bathed well in it, and then picked the kaba
flowers growing near the water, and rolled himself on them.
To his amazement, even while he was doing this, he saw his nice white
fur growing again, the pain ceased, and he felt just as he had done before all
his misfortunes.
The hare was overjoyed at his quick recovery, and went hopping joyfully
towards the young man who had so helped him, and kneeling down at his
feet, said:
“I cannot express my thanks for all you have done for me! It is my
earnest wish to do something for you in return. Please tell me who you
are?”
“I am no King’s son as you think me. I am a fairy, and my name is
Okuni-nushi-no-Mikoto,” answered the man, “and those beings who passed
here before me are my brothers. They have heard of a beautiful Princess
called Yakami who lives in this province of Inaba, and they are on their way
to find her and to ask her to marry one of them. But on this expedition I am
only an attendant, so I am walking behind them with this great big bag on
my back.”
The hare humbled himself before this great fairy Okuni-nushi-no-Mikoto,
whom many in that part of the land worshiped as a god.
“Oh, I did not know that you were Okuni-nushi-no-Mikoto. How kind
you have been to me! It is impossible to believe that that unkind fellow who
sent me to bathe in the sea is one of your brothers. I am quite sure that the
consequence of the deceit you practiced on the crocodiles.”
“I know,” answered the sorrowful hare, “but I have repented and made up
my mind never to use deceit again, so I beg you to show me how I may cure
my sore body and make the fur grow again.”
“Then I will tell you of a good remedy,” said the man. “First go and bathe
well in that pond over there and try to wash all the salt from your body.
Then pick some of those kaba flowers that are growing near the edge of the
water, spread them on the ground and roll yourself on them. If you do this
the pollen will cause your fur to grow again, and you will be quite well in a
little while.”
The hare was very glad to be told what to do, so kindly. He crawled to
the pond pointed out to him, bathed well in it, and then picked the kaba
flowers growing near the water, and rolled himself on them.
To his amazement, even while he was doing this, he saw his nice white
fur growing again, the pain ceased, and he felt just as he had done before all
his misfortunes.
The hare was overjoyed at his quick recovery, and went hopping joyfully
towards the young man who had so helped him, and kneeling down at his
feet, said:
“I cannot express my thanks for all you have done for me! It is my
earnest wish to do something for you in return. Please tell me who you
are?”
“I am no King’s son as you think me. I am a fairy, and my name is
Okuni-nushi-no-Mikoto,” answered the man, “and those beings who passed
here before me are my brothers. They have heard of a beautiful Princess
called Yakami who lives in this province of Inaba, and they are on their way
to find her and to ask her to marry one of them. But on this expedition I am
only an attendant, so I am walking behind them with this great big bag on
my back.”
The hare humbled himself before this great fairy Okuni-nushi-no-Mikoto,
whom many in that part of the land worshiped as a god.
“Oh, I did not know that you were Okuni-nushi-no-Mikoto. How kind
you have been to me! It is impossible to believe that that unkind fellow who
sent me to bathe in the sea is one of your brothers. I am quite sure that the
Page 144
Princess, whom your brothers have gone to seek, will refuse to be the bride
of any of them, and will prefer you for your goodness of heart. I am quite
sure that you will win her heart without intending to do so, and she will ask
to be your bride.”
Okuni-nushi-no-Mikoto took no notice of what the hare said, but bidding
the little animal goodby, went on his way quickly and soon overtook his
brothers. He found them just entering the Princess’s gate.
Just as the hare had said, the Princess could not be persuaded to become
the bride of any of the brothers, but when she looked at the kind brother’s
face she went straight up to him and said:
“To you I give myself,” and so they were married.
This is the end of the story. Okuni-nushi-no-Mikoto is worshiped by the
people in some parts of Japan, as a god, and the hare has become famous as
“The White Hare of Inaba.” But what became of the crocodiles nobody
knows.
of any of them, and will prefer you for your goodness of heart. I am quite
sure that you will win her heart without intending to do so, and she will ask
to be your bride.”
Okuni-nushi-no-Mikoto took no notice of what the hare said, but bidding
the little animal goodby, went on his way quickly and soon overtook his
brothers. He found them just entering the Princess’s gate.
Just as the hare had said, the Princess could not be persuaded to become
the bride of any of the brothers, but when she looked at the kind brother’s
face she went straight up to him and said:
“To you I give myself,” and so they were married.
This is the end of the story. Okuni-nushi-no-Mikoto is worshiped by the
people in some parts of Japan, as a god, and the hare has become famous as
“The White Hare of Inaba.” But what became of the crocodiles nobody
knows.
Page 145
THE STORY OF PRINCE YAMATO TAKE
The insignia of the great Japanese Empire is composed of three treasures
which have been considered sacred, and guarded with jealous care from
time immemorial. These are the Yatano-no-Kagami or the Mirror of Yata,
the Yasakami-no-Magatama or the Jewel of Yasakami, and the Murakumo-
no-Tsurugi or the Sword of Murakumo.
Of these three treasures of the Empire, the sword of Murakumo,
afterwards known as Kusanagi-no-Tsrugugi, or the grass-cleaving sword, is
considered the most precious and most highly to be honored, for it is the
symbol of strength to this nation of warriors and the talisman of
invincibility for the Emperor, while he holds it sacred in the shrine of his
ancestors.
Nearly two thousand years ago this sword was kept at the shrines of Ite,
the temples dedicated to the worship of Amaterasu, the great and beautiful
Sun Goddess from whom the Japanese Emperors are said to be descended.
There is a story of knightly adventure and daring which explains why the
name of the sword was changed from that of Murakumo to Kasanagi, which
means grass clearing.
Once, many, many years ago, there was born a son to the Emperor Keiko,
the twelfth in descent from the great Jimmu, the founder of the Japanese
dynasty. This Prince was the second son of the Emperor Keiko, and he was
named Yamato. From his childhood he proved himself to be of remarkable
strength, wisdom and courage, and his father noticed with pride that he
gave promise of great things, and he loved him even more than he did his
elder son.
Now when Prince Yamato had grown to manhood (in the olden days of
Japanese history, a boy was considered to have reached man’s estate at the
early age of sixteen) the realm was much troubled by a band of outlaws
whose chiefs were two brothers, Kumaso and Takeru. These rebels seemed
The insignia of the great Japanese Empire is composed of three treasures
which have been considered sacred, and guarded with jealous care from
time immemorial. These are the Yatano-no-Kagami or the Mirror of Yata,
the Yasakami-no-Magatama or the Jewel of Yasakami, and the Murakumo-
no-Tsurugi or the Sword of Murakumo.
Of these three treasures of the Empire, the sword of Murakumo,
afterwards known as Kusanagi-no-Tsrugugi, or the grass-cleaving sword, is
considered the most precious and most highly to be honored, for it is the
symbol of strength to this nation of warriors and the talisman of
invincibility for the Emperor, while he holds it sacred in the shrine of his
ancestors.
Nearly two thousand years ago this sword was kept at the shrines of Ite,
the temples dedicated to the worship of Amaterasu, the great and beautiful
Sun Goddess from whom the Japanese Emperors are said to be descended.
There is a story of knightly adventure and daring which explains why the
name of the sword was changed from that of Murakumo to Kasanagi, which
means grass clearing.
Once, many, many years ago, there was born a son to the Emperor Keiko,
the twelfth in descent from the great Jimmu, the founder of the Japanese
dynasty. This Prince was the second son of the Emperor Keiko, and he was
named Yamato. From his childhood he proved himself to be of remarkable
strength, wisdom and courage, and his father noticed with pride that he
gave promise of great things, and he loved him even more than he did his
elder son.
Now when Prince Yamato had grown to manhood (in the olden days of
Japanese history, a boy was considered to have reached man’s estate at the
early age of sixteen) the realm was much troubled by a band of outlaws
whose chiefs were two brothers, Kumaso and Takeru. These rebels seemed
Page 146
to delight in rebelling against the King, in breaking the laws and defying all
authority.
At last King Keiko ordered his younger son Prince Yamato to subdue the
brigands and, if possible, to rid the land of their evil lives. Prince Yamato
was only sixteen years of age, he had but reached his manhood according to
the law, yet though he was such a youth in years he possessed the dauntless
spirit of a warrior of fuller age and knew not what fear was. Even then there
was no man who could rival him for courage and bold deeds, and he
received his father’s command with great joy.
He at once made ready to start, and great was the stir in the precincts of
the Palace as he and his trusty followers gathered together and prepared for
the expedition, and polished up their armor and donned it. Before he left his
father’s Court he went to pray at the shrine of Ise and to take leave of his
aunt the Princess Yamato, for his heart was somewhat heavy at the thought
of the dangers he had to face, and he felt that he needed the protection of his
ancestress, Amaterasu, the Sun Goddess. The Princess his aunt came out to
give him glad welcome, and congratulated him on being trusted with so
great a mission by his father the King. She then gave him one of her
gorgeous robes as a keepsake to go with him and to bring him good luck,
saying that it would surely be of service to him on this adventure. She then
wished him all success in his undertaking and bade him good speed.
The young Prince bowed low before his aunt, and received her gracious
gift with much pleasure and many respectful bows.
“I will now set out,” said the Prince, and returning to the Palace he put
himself at the head of his troops. Thus cheered by his aunt’s blessing, he felt
ready for all that might befall, and marching through the land he went down
to the Southern Island of Kiushiu, the home of the brigands.
Before many days had passed he reached the Southern Island, and then
slowly but surely made his way to the head-quarters of the chiefs Kumaso
and Takeru. He now met with great difficulties, for he found the country
exceedingly wild and rough. The mountains were high and steep, the
valleys dark and deep, and huge trees and bowlders of rock blocked up the
road and stopped the progress of his army. It was all but impossible to go
on.
Though the Prince was but a youth he had the wisdom of years, and,
seeing that it was vain to try and lead his men further, he said to himself:
authority.
At last King Keiko ordered his younger son Prince Yamato to subdue the
brigands and, if possible, to rid the land of their evil lives. Prince Yamato
was only sixteen years of age, he had but reached his manhood according to
the law, yet though he was such a youth in years he possessed the dauntless
spirit of a warrior of fuller age and knew not what fear was. Even then there
was no man who could rival him for courage and bold deeds, and he
received his father’s command with great joy.
He at once made ready to start, and great was the stir in the precincts of
the Palace as he and his trusty followers gathered together and prepared for
the expedition, and polished up their armor and donned it. Before he left his
father’s Court he went to pray at the shrine of Ise and to take leave of his
aunt the Princess Yamato, for his heart was somewhat heavy at the thought
of the dangers he had to face, and he felt that he needed the protection of his
ancestress, Amaterasu, the Sun Goddess. The Princess his aunt came out to
give him glad welcome, and congratulated him on being trusted with so
great a mission by his father the King. She then gave him one of her
gorgeous robes as a keepsake to go with him and to bring him good luck,
saying that it would surely be of service to him on this adventure. She then
wished him all success in his undertaking and bade him good speed.
The young Prince bowed low before his aunt, and received her gracious
gift with much pleasure and many respectful bows.
“I will now set out,” said the Prince, and returning to the Palace he put
himself at the head of his troops. Thus cheered by his aunt’s blessing, he felt
ready for all that might befall, and marching through the land he went down
to the Southern Island of Kiushiu, the home of the brigands.
Before many days had passed he reached the Southern Island, and then
slowly but surely made his way to the head-quarters of the chiefs Kumaso
and Takeru. He now met with great difficulties, for he found the country
exceedingly wild and rough. The mountains were high and steep, the
valleys dark and deep, and huge trees and bowlders of rock blocked up the
road and stopped the progress of his army. It was all but impossible to go
on.
Though the Prince was but a youth he had the wisdom of years, and,
seeing that it was vain to try and lead his men further, he said to himself:
Page 147
“To attempt to fight a battle in this impassable country unknown to my
men only makes my task harder. We cannot clear the roads and fight as
well. It is wiser for me to resort to stratagem and come upon my enemies
unawares. In that way I may be able to kill them without much exertion.”
So he now bade his army halt by the way. His wife, the Princess
Ototachibana, had accompanied him, and he bade her bring him the robe his
aunt the priestess of Ise had given him, and to help him attire himself as a
woman. With her help he put on the robe, and let his hair down till it flowed
over his shoulders. Ototachibana then brought him her comb, which he put
in his black tresses, and then adorned himself with strings of strange jewels
just as you see in the picture. When he had finished his unusual toilet,
Ototachibana brought him her mirror. He smiled as he gazed at himself—
the disguise was so perfect.
He hardly knew himself, so changed was he. All traces of the warrior had
disappeared, and in the shining surface only a beautiful lady looked back at
him.
Thus completely disguised, he set out for the enemy’s camp alone. In the
folds of his silk gown, next his strong heart, was hidden a sharp dagger.
The two chiefs Kumaso and Takeru wore sitting in their tent, resting in
the cool of the evening, when the Prince approached. They were talking of
the news which had recently been carried to them, that the King’s son had
entered their country with a large army determined to exterminate their
band. They had both heard of the young warrior’s renown, and for the first
time in their wicked lives they felt afraid. In a pause in their talk they
happened to look up, and saw through the door of the tent a beautiful
woman robed in sumptuous garments coming towards them. Like an
apparition of loveliness she appeared in the soft twilight. Little did they
dream that it was their enemy whose coming they so dreaded who now
stood before them in this disguise.
“What a beautiful woman! Where has she come from?” said the
astonished Kumaso, forgetting war and council and everything as he looked
at the gentle intruder.
He beckoned to the disguised Prince and bade him sit down and serve
them with wine. Yamato Take felt his heart swell with a fierce glee for he
now knew that his plan would succeed. However, he dissembled cleverly,
and putting on a sweet air of shyness he approached the rebel chief with
men only makes my task harder. We cannot clear the roads and fight as
well. It is wiser for me to resort to stratagem and come upon my enemies
unawares. In that way I may be able to kill them without much exertion.”
So he now bade his army halt by the way. His wife, the Princess
Ototachibana, had accompanied him, and he bade her bring him the robe his
aunt the priestess of Ise had given him, and to help him attire himself as a
woman. With her help he put on the robe, and let his hair down till it flowed
over his shoulders. Ototachibana then brought him her comb, which he put
in his black tresses, and then adorned himself with strings of strange jewels
just as you see in the picture. When he had finished his unusual toilet,
Ototachibana brought him her mirror. He smiled as he gazed at himself—
the disguise was so perfect.
He hardly knew himself, so changed was he. All traces of the warrior had
disappeared, and in the shining surface only a beautiful lady looked back at
him.
Thus completely disguised, he set out for the enemy’s camp alone. In the
folds of his silk gown, next his strong heart, was hidden a sharp dagger.
The two chiefs Kumaso and Takeru wore sitting in their tent, resting in
the cool of the evening, when the Prince approached. They were talking of
the news which had recently been carried to them, that the King’s son had
entered their country with a large army determined to exterminate their
band. They had both heard of the young warrior’s renown, and for the first
time in their wicked lives they felt afraid. In a pause in their talk they
happened to look up, and saw through the door of the tent a beautiful
woman robed in sumptuous garments coming towards them. Like an
apparition of loveliness she appeared in the soft twilight. Little did they
dream that it was their enemy whose coming they so dreaded who now
stood before them in this disguise.
“What a beautiful woman! Where has she come from?” said the
astonished Kumaso, forgetting war and council and everything as he looked
at the gentle intruder.
He beckoned to the disguised Prince and bade him sit down and serve
them with wine. Yamato Take felt his heart swell with a fierce glee for he
now knew that his plan would succeed. However, he dissembled cleverly,
and putting on a sweet air of shyness he approached the rebel chief with
Page 148
slow steps and eyes glancing like a frightened deer. Charmed to distraction
by the girl’s loveliness Kumaso drank cup after cup of wine for the pleasure
of seeing her pour it out for him, till at last he was quite overcome with the
quantity he had drunk.
This was the moment for which the brave Prince had been waiting.
Flinging down the wine jar, he seized the tipsy and astonished Kumaso and
quickly stabbed him to death with the dagger which he had secretly carried
hidden in his breast.
Takeru, the brigand’s brother, was terror-struck as soon as he saw what
was happening and tried to escape, but Prince Yamato was too quick for
him. Ere he could reach the tent door the Prince was at his heel, his
garments were clutched by a hand of iron, and a dagger flashed before his
eyes and he lay stabbed to the earth, dying but not yet dead.
“Wait one moment!” gasped the brigand painfully, and he seized the
Prince’s hand.
Yamato relaxed his hold somewhat and said.
“Why should I pause, thou villain?”
The brigand raised himself fearfully and said:
“Tell me from whence you come, and whom I have the honor of
addressing? Hitherto I believed that my dead brother and I were the
strongest men in the land, and that there was no one who could overcome
us. Alone you have ventured into our stronghold, alone you have attacked
and killed us! Surely you are more than mortal?”
Then the young Prince answered with a proud smile:—“I am the son of
the King and my name is Yamato, and I have been sent by my father as the
avenger of evil to bring death to all rebels! No longer shall robbery and
murder hold my people in terror!” and he held the dagger dripping red
above the rebel’s head.
“Ah,” gasped the dying man with a great effort, “I have often heard of
you. You are indeed a strong man to have so easily overcome us. Allow me
to give you a new name. From henceforth you shall be known as Yamato
Take. Our title I bequeath to you as the bravest man in Yamato.”
And with these noble words, Takeru fell back and died.
The Prince having thus successfully put an end to his father’s enemies in
the world, was prepared to return to the capital. On the way back he passed
by the girl’s loveliness Kumaso drank cup after cup of wine for the pleasure
of seeing her pour it out for him, till at last he was quite overcome with the
quantity he had drunk.
This was the moment for which the brave Prince had been waiting.
Flinging down the wine jar, he seized the tipsy and astonished Kumaso and
quickly stabbed him to death with the dagger which he had secretly carried
hidden in his breast.
Takeru, the brigand’s brother, was terror-struck as soon as he saw what
was happening and tried to escape, but Prince Yamato was too quick for
him. Ere he could reach the tent door the Prince was at his heel, his
garments were clutched by a hand of iron, and a dagger flashed before his
eyes and he lay stabbed to the earth, dying but not yet dead.
“Wait one moment!” gasped the brigand painfully, and he seized the
Prince’s hand.
Yamato relaxed his hold somewhat and said.
“Why should I pause, thou villain?”
The brigand raised himself fearfully and said:
“Tell me from whence you come, and whom I have the honor of
addressing? Hitherto I believed that my dead brother and I were the
strongest men in the land, and that there was no one who could overcome
us. Alone you have ventured into our stronghold, alone you have attacked
and killed us! Surely you are more than mortal?”
Then the young Prince answered with a proud smile:—“I am the son of
the King and my name is Yamato, and I have been sent by my father as the
avenger of evil to bring death to all rebels! No longer shall robbery and
murder hold my people in terror!” and he held the dagger dripping red
above the rebel’s head.
“Ah,” gasped the dying man with a great effort, “I have often heard of
you. You are indeed a strong man to have so easily overcome us. Allow me
to give you a new name. From henceforth you shall be known as Yamato
Take. Our title I bequeath to you as the bravest man in Yamato.”
And with these noble words, Takeru fell back and died.
The Prince having thus successfully put an end to his father’s enemies in
the world, was prepared to return to the capital. On the way back he passed
Page 149
through the province of Idum. Here he met with another outlaw named
Idzumo Takeru who he knew had done much harm in the land. He again
resorted to stratagem, and feigned friendship with the rebel under an
assumed name. Having done this he made a sword of wood and jammed it
tightly in the shaft of his own strong sword. This he purposedly buckled to
his side and wore on every occasion when he expected to meet the third
robber Takeru.
He now invited Takeru to the bank of the River Hinokawa, and persuaded
him to try a swim with him in the cool refreshing waters of the river.
As it was a hot summer’s day, the rebel was nothing loath to take a
plunge in the river, while his enemy was still swimming down the stream
the Prince turned back and landed with all possible haste. Unperceived, he
managed to change swords, putting his wooden one in place of the keen
steel sword of Takeru.
Knowing nothing of this, the brigand came up to the bank shortly. As
soon as he had landed and donned his clothes, the Prince came forward and
asked him to cross swords with him to prove his skill, saying:
“Let us two prove which is the better swordsman of the two!”
The robber agreed with delight, feeling certain of victory, for he was
famous as a fencer in his province and he did not know who his adversary
was. He seized quickly what he thought was his sword and stood on guard
to defend himself. Alas! for the rebel the sword was the wooden one of the
young Prince and in vain Takeru tried to unsheathe it—it was jammed fast,
not all his exerted strength could move it. Even if his efforts had been
successful the sword would have been of no use to him for it was of wood.
Yamato Take saw that his enemy was in his power, and swinging high the
sword he had taken from Takeru he brought it down with great might and
dexterity and cut off the robber’s head.
In this way, sometimes by using his wisdom and sometimes by using his
bodily strength, and at other times by resorting to craftiness, which was as
much esteemed in those days as it is despised in these, he prevailed against
all the King’s foes one by one, and brought peace and rest to the land and
the people.
When he returned to the capital the King praised him for his brave deeds,
and held a feast in the Palace in honor of his safe coming home and
presented him with many rare gifts. From this time forth the King loved
Idzumo Takeru who he knew had done much harm in the land. He again
resorted to stratagem, and feigned friendship with the rebel under an
assumed name. Having done this he made a sword of wood and jammed it
tightly in the shaft of his own strong sword. This he purposedly buckled to
his side and wore on every occasion when he expected to meet the third
robber Takeru.
He now invited Takeru to the bank of the River Hinokawa, and persuaded
him to try a swim with him in the cool refreshing waters of the river.
As it was a hot summer’s day, the rebel was nothing loath to take a
plunge in the river, while his enemy was still swimming down the stream
the Prince turned back and landed with all possible haste. Unperceived, he
managed to change swords, putting his wooden one in place of the keen
steel sword of Takeru.
Knowing nothing of this, the brigand came up to the bank shortly. As
soon as he had landed and donned his clothes, the Prince came forward and
asked him to cross swords with him to prove his skill, saying:
“Let us two prove which is the better swordsman of the two!”
The robber agreed with delight, feeling certain of victory, for he was
famous as a fencer in his province and he did not know who his adversary
was. He seized quickly what he thought was his sword and stood on guard
to defend himself. Alas! for the rebel the sword was the wooden one of the
young Prince and in vain Takeru tried to unsheathe it—it was jammed fast,
not all his exerted strength could move it. Even if his efforts had been
successful the sword would have been of no use to him for it was of wood.
Yamato Take saw that his enemy was in his power, and swinging high the
sword he had taken from Takeru he brought it down with great might and
dexterity and cut off the robber’s head.
In this way, sometimes by using his wisdom and sometimes by using his
bodily strength, and at other times by resorting to craftiness, which was as
much esteemed in those days as it is despised in these, he prevailed against
all the King’s foes one by one, and brought peace and rest to the land and
the people.
When he returned to the capital the King praised him for his brave deeds,
and held a feast in the Palace in honor of his safe coming home and
presented him with many rare gifts. From this time forth the King loved
Page 150
him more than ever and would not let Yamato Take go from his side, for he
said that his son was now as precious to him as one of his arms.
But the Prince was not allowed to live an idle life long. When he was
about thirty years old, news was brought that the Ainu race, the aborigines
of the islands of Japan, who had been conquered and pushed northwards by
the Japanese, had rebelled in the Eastern provinces, and leaving the vicinity
which had been allotted to them were causing great trouble in the land. The
King decided that it was necessary to send an army to do battle with them
and bring them to reason. But who was to lead the men?
Prince Yamato Take at once offered to go and bring the newly arisen
rebels into subjection. Now as the King loved the Prince dearly, and could
not bear to have him go out of his sight even for the length of one day, he
was of course very loath to send him on his dangerous expedition. But in
the whole army there was no warrior so strong or so brave as the Prince his
son, so that His Majesty, unable to do otherwise, reluctantly complied with
Yamato’s wish.
When the time came for the Prince to start, the King gave him a spear
called the Eight-Arms-Length-Spear of the Holly Tree (the handle was
probably made from the wood of the holly tree), and ordered him to set out
to subjugate the Eastern Barbarians as the Ainu were then called.
The Eight-Arms-Length-Spear of the Holly Tree of those old days, was
prized by warriors just as much as the Standard or Banner is valued by a
regiment in these modern days, when given by the King to his soldiers on
the occasion of setting out for war.
The Prince respectfully and with great reverence received the King’s
spear, and leaving the capital, marched with his army to the East. On his
way he visited first of all the temples of Ise for worship, and his aunt the
Princess of Yamato and High Priestess came out to greet him. She it was
who had given him her robe which had proved such a boon to him before in
helping him to overcome and slay the brigands of the West.
He told her all that had happened to him, and of the great part her
keepsake had played in the success of his previous undertaking, and
thanked her very heartily. When she heard that he was starting out once
again to do battle with his father’s enemies, she went into the temple, and
reappeared bearing a sword and a beautiful bag which she had made herself,
said that his son was now as precious to him as one of his arms.
But the Prince was not allowed to live an idle life long. When he was
about thirty years old, news was brought that the Ainu race, the aborigines
of the islands of Japan, who had been conquered and pushed northwards by
the Japanese, had rebelled in the Eastern provinces, and leaving the vicinity
which had been allotted to them were causing great trouble in the land. The
King decided that it was necessary to send an army to do battle with them
and bring them to reason. But who was to lead the men?
Prince Yamato Take at once offered to go and bring the newly arisen
rebels into subjection. Now as the King loved the Prince dearly, and could
not bear to have him go out of his sight even for the length of one day, he
was of course very loath to send him on his dangerous expedition. But in
the whole army there was no warrior so strong or so brave as the Prince his
son, so that His Majesty, unable to do otherwise, reluctantly complied with
Yamato’s wish.
When the time came for the Prince to start, the King gave him a spear
called the Eight-Arms-Length-Spear of the Holly Tree (the handle was
probably made from the wood of the holly tree), and ordered him to set out
to subjugate the Eastern Barbarians as the Ainu were then called.
The Eight-Arms-Length-Spear of the Holly Tree of those old days, was
prized by warriors just as much as the Standard or Banner is valued by a
regiment in these modern days, when given by the King to his soldiers on
the occasion of setting out for war.
The Prince respectfully and with great reverence received the King’s
spear, and leaving the capital, marched with his army to the East. On his
way he visited first of all the temples of Ise for worship, and his aunt the
Princess of Yamato and High Priestess came out to greet him. She it was
who had given him her robe which had proved such a boon to him before in
helping him to overcome and slay the brigands of the West.
He told her all that had happened to him, and of the great part her
keepsake had played in the success of his previous undertaking, and
thanked her very heartily. When she heard that he was starting out once
again to do battle with his father’s enemies, she went into the temple, and
reappeared bearing a sword and a beautiful bag which she had made herself,
Page 151
and which was full of flints, which in those times people used instead of
matches for making fire. These she presented to him as a parting gift.
The sword was the sword of Murakumo, one of the three sacred treasures
which comprise the insignia of the Imperial House of Japan. No more
auspicious talisman of luck and success could she have given her nephew,
and she bade him use it in the hour of his greatest need.
Yamato Take now bade farewell to his aunt, and once more placing
himself at the head of his men he marched to the farthest East through the
province of Owari, and then he reached the province of Suruga. Here the
governor welcomed the Prince right heartily and entertained him royally
with many feasts. When these were over, the governor told his guest that his
country was famous for its fine deer, and proposed a deer hunt for the
Prince’s amusement. The Prince was utterly deceived by the cordiality of
his host, which was all feigned, and gladly consented to join in the hunt.
The governor then led the Prince to a wild and extensive plain where the
grass grew high and in great abundance. Quite ignorant that the governor
had laid a trap for him with the desire to compass his death, the Prince
began to ride hard and hunt down the deer, when all of a sudden to his
amazement he saw flames and smoke bursting out from the bush in front of
him. Realizing his danger he tried to retreat, but no sooner did he turn his
horse in the opposite direction than he saw that even there the prairie was
on fire. At the same time the grass on his left and right burst into flames,
and these began to spread swiftly towards him on all sides. He looked round
for a chance of escape. There was none. He was surrounded by fire.
“This deer hunt was then only a cunning trick of the enemy!” said the
Prince, looking round on the flames and the smoke that crackled and rolled
in towards him on every side. “What a fool I was to be lured into this trap
like a wild beast!” and he ground his teeth with rage as he thought of the
governor’s smiling treachery.
Dangerous as was his situation now, the Prince was not in the least
confounded. In his dire extremity he remembered the gifts his aunt had
given him when they parted, and it seemed to him as if she must, with
prophetic foresight, have divined this hour of need. He coolly opened the
flint-bag that his aunt had given him and set fire to the grass near him. Then
drawing the sword of Murakumo from its sheath he set to work to cut down
the grass on either side of him with all speed. He determined to die, if that
matches for making fire. These she presented to him as a parting gift.
The sword was the sword of Murakumo, one of the three sacred treasures
which comprise the insignia of the Imperial House of Japan. No more
auspicious talisman of luck and success could she have given her nephew,
and she bade him use it in the hour of his greatest need.
Yamato Take now bade farewell to his aunt, and once more placing
himself at the head of his men he marched to the farthest East through the
province of Owari, and then he reached the province of Suruga. Here the
governor welcomed the Prince right heartily and entertained him royally
with many feasts. When these were over, the governor told his guest that his
country was famous for its fine deer, and proposed a deer hunt for the
Prince’s amusement. The Prince was utterly deceived by the cordiality of
his host, which was all feigned, and gladly consented to join in the hunt.
The governor then led the Prince to a wild and extensive plain where the
grass grew high and in great abundance. Quite ignorant that the governor
had laid a trap for him with the desire to compass his death, the Prince
began to ride hard and hunt down the deer, when all of a sudden to his
amazement he saw flames and smoke bursting out from the bush in front of
him. Realizing his danger he tried to retreat, but no sooner did he turn his
horse in the opposite direction than he saw that even there the prairie was
on fire. At the same time the grass on his left and right burst into flames,
and these began to spread swiftly towards him on all sides. He looked round
for a chance of escape. There was none. He was surrounded by fire.
“This deer hunt was then only a cunning trick of the enemy!” said the
Prince, looking round on the flames and the smoke that crackled and rolled
in towards him on every side. “What a fool I was to be lured into this trap
like a wild beast!” and he ground his teeth with rage as he thought of the
governor’s smiling treachery.
Dangerous as was his situation now, the Prince was not in the least
confounded. In his dire extremity he remembered the gifts his aunt had
given him when they parted, and it seemed to him as if she must, with
prophetic foresight, have divined this hour of need. He coolly opened the
flint-bag that his aunt had given him and set fire to the grass near him. Then
drawing the sword of Murakumo from its sheath he set to work to cut down
the grass on either side of him with all speed. He determined to die, if that
Page 152
were necessary, fighting for his life and not standing still waiting for death
to come to him.
Strange to say the wind began to change and to blow from the opposite
direction, and the fiercest portion of the burning bush which had hitherto
threatened to come upon him was now blown right away from him, and the
Prince, without even a scratch on his body or a single hair burned, lived to
tell the tale of his wonderful escape, while the wind rising to a gale
overtook the governor, and he was burned to death in the flames he had set
alight to kill Yamato Take.
Now the Prince ascribed his escape entirely to the virtue of the sword of
Murakumo, and to the protection of Amaterasu, the Sun Goddess of Ise,
who controls the wind and all the elements and insures the safety of all who
pray to her in the hour of danger. Lifting the precious sword he raised it
above his head many times in token of his great respect, and as he did this
he re-named it Kusanagi-no-Tsurugi or the Grass-Cleaving Sword, and the
place where he set fire to the grass round him and escaped from death in the
burning prairie, he called Yaidzu. To this day there is a spot along the great
Tokaido railway named Yaidzu, which is said to be the very place where
this thrilling event took place.
Thus did the brave Prince Yamato Take escape out of the snare laid for
him by his enemy. He was full of resource and courage, and finally
outwitted and subdued all his foes. Leaving Yaidzu he marched eastward,
and came to the shore at Idzu from whence he wished to cross to Kadzusa.
In these dangers and adventures he had been followed by his faithful
loving wife the Princess Ototachibana. For his sake she counted the
weariness of the long journeys and the dangers of war as nothing, and her
love for her warrior husband was so great that she felt well repaid for all her
wanderings if she could but hand him his sword when he sallied forth to
battle, or minister to his wants when he returned weary to the camp.
But the heart of the Prince was full of war and conquest and he cared
little for the faithful Ototachibana. From long exposure in traveling, and
from care and grief at her lord’s coldness to her, her beauty had faded, and
her ivory skin was burnt brown by the sun, and the Prince told her one day
that her place was in the Palace behind the screens at home and not with
him upon the warpath. But in spite of rebuffs and indifference on her
husband’s part, Ototachibana could not find it in her heart to leave him. But
to come to him.
Strange to say the wind began to change and to blow from the opposite
direction, and the fiercest portion of the burning bush which had hitherto
threatened to come upon him was now blown right away from him, and the
Prince, without even a scratch on his body or a single hair burned, lived to
tell the tale of his wonderful escape, while the wind rising to a gale
overtook the governor, and he was burned to death in the flames he had set
alight to kill Yamato Take.
Now the Prince ascribed his escape entirely to the virtue of the sword of
Murakumo, and to the protection of Amaterasu, the Sun Goddess of Ise,
who controls the wind and all the elements and insures the safety of all who
pray to her in the hour of danger. Lifting the precious sword he raised it
above his head many times in token of his great respect, and as he did this
he re-named it Kusanagi-no-Tsurugi or the Grass-Cleaving Sword, and the
place where he set fire to the grass round him and escaped from death in the
burning prairie, he called Yaidzu. To this day there is a spot along the great
Tokaido railway named Yaidzu, which is said to be the very place where
this thrilling event took place.
Thus did the brave Prince Yamato Take escape out of the snare laid for
him by his enemy. He was full of resource and courage, and finally
outwitted and subdued all his foes. Leaving Yaidzu he marched eastward,
and came to the shore at Idzu from whence he wished to cross to Kadzusa.
In these dangers and adventures he had been followed by his faithful
loving wife the Princess Ototachibana. For his sake she counted the
weariness of the long journeys and the dangers of war as nothing, and her
love for her warrior husband was so great that she felt well repaid for all her
wanderings if she could but hand him his sword when he sallied forth to
battle, or minister to his wants when he returned weary to the camp.
But the heart of the Prince was full of war and conquest and he cared
little for the faithful Ototachibana. From long exposure in traveling, and
from care and grief at her lord’s coldness to her, her beauty had faded, and
her ivory skin was burnt brown by the sun, and the Prince told her one day
that her place was in the Palace behind the screens at home and not with
him upon the warpath. But in spite of rebuffs and indifference on her
husband’s part, Ototachibana could not find it in her heart to leave him. But
Page 153
perhaps it would have been better for her if she had done so, for on the way
to Idzu, when they came to Owari, her heart was well-nigh broken.
Here dwelt in a Palace shaded by pine-trees and approached by imposing
gates, the Princess Miyadzu, beautiful as the cherry blossom in the blushing
dawn of a spring morning. Her garments were dainty and bright, and her
skin was white as snow, for she had never known what it was to be weary
along the path of duty or to walk in the heat of a summer’s sun. And the
Prince was ashamed of his sunburnt wife in her travel-stained garments, and
bade her remain behind while he went to visit the Princess Miyadzu. Day
after day he spent hours in the gardens and the Palace of his new friend,
thinking only of his pleasure, and caring little for his poor wife who
remained behind to weep in the tent at the misery which had come into her
life. Yet she was so faithful a wife, and her character so patient, that she
never allowed a reproach to escape her lips, or a frown to mar the sweet
sadness of her face, and she was ever ready with a smile to welcome her
husband back or usher him forth wherever he went.
At last the day came when the Prince Yamato Take must depart for Idzu
and cross over the sea to Kadzusa, and he bade his wife follow in his
retinue as an attendant while he went to take a ceremonious farewell of the
Princess Miyadzu. She came out to greet him dressed in gorgeous robes,
and she seemed more beautiful than ever, and when Yamato Take saw her
he forgot his wife, his duty, and everything except the joy of the idle
present, and swore that he would return to Owari and marry her when the
war was over. And as he looked up when he had said these words he met the
large almond eyes of Ototachibana fixed full upon him in unspeakable
sadness and wonder, and he knew that he had done wrong, but he hardened
his heart and rode on, caring little for the pain he had caused her.
When they reached the seashore at Idzu his men sought for boats in
which to cross the straits to Kadzusa, but it was difficult to find boats
enough to allow all the soldiers to embark. Then the Prince stood on the
beach, and in the pride of his strength he scoffed and said:
“This is not the sea! This is only a brook! Why do you men want so many
boats? I could jump this if I would.”
When at last they had all embarked and were fairly on their way across
the straits, the sky suddenly clouded and a great storm arose. The waves
rose mountains high, the wind howled, the lightning flashed and the thunder
to Idzu, when they came to Owari, her heart was well-nigh broken.
Here dwelt in a Palace shaded by pine-trees and approached by imposing
gates, the Princess Miyadzu, beautiful as the cherry blossom in the blushing
dawn of a spring morning. Her garments were dainty and bright, and her
skin was white as snow, for she had never known what it was to be weary
along the path of duty or to walk in the heat of a summer’s sun. And the
Prince was ashamed of his sunburnt wife in her travel-stained garments, and
bade her remain behind while he went to visit the Princess Miyadzu. Day
after day he spent hours in the gardens and the Palace of his new friend,
thinking only of his pleasure, and caring little for his poor wife who
remained behind to weep in the tent at the misery which had come into her
life. Yet she was so faithful a wife, and her character so patient, that she
never allowed a reproach to escape her lips, or a frown to mar the sweet
sadness of her face, and she was ever ready with a smile to welcome her
husband back or usher him forth wherever he went.
At last the day came when the Prince Yamato Take must depart for Idzu
and cross over the sea to Kadzusa, and he bade his wife follow in his
retinue as an attendant while he went to take a ceremonious farewell of the
Princess Miyadzu. She came out to greet him dressed in gorgeous robes,
and she seemed more beautiful than ever, and when Yamato Take saw her
he forgot his wife, his duty, and everything except the joy of the idle
present, and swore that he would return to Owari and marry her when the
war was over. And as he looked up when he had said these words he met the
large almond eyes of Ototachibana fixed full upon him in unspeakable
sadness and wonder, and he knew that he had done wrong, but he hardened
his heart and rode on, caring little for the pain he had caused her.
When they reached the seashore at Idzu his men sought for boats in
which to cross the straits to Kadzusa, but it was difficult to find boats
enough to allow all the soldiers to embark. Then the Prince stood on the
beach, and in the pride of his strength he scoffed and said:
“This is not the sea! This is only a brook! Why do you men want so many
boats? I could jump this if I would.”
When at last they had all embarked and were fairly on their way across
the straits, the sky suddenly clouded and a great storm arose. The waves
rose mountains high, the wind howled, the lightning flashed and the thunder
Page 154
rolled, and the boat which held Ototachibana and the Prince and his men
was tossed from crest to crest of the rolling waves, till it seemed that every
moment must be their last and that they must all be swallowed up in the
angry sea. For Kin Jin, the Dragon King of the Sea, had heard Yamato Take
jeer, and had raised this terrible storm in anger, to show the scoffing Prince
how awful the sea could be though it did but look like a brook.
The terrified crew lowered the sails and looked after the rudder, and
worked for their dear lives’ sake, but all in vain—the storm only seemed to
increase in violence, and all gave themselves up for lost. Then the faithful
Ototachibana rose, and forgetting all the grief that her husband had caused
her, forgetting even that he had wearied of her, in the one great desire of her
love to save him, she determined to sacrifice her life to rescue him from
death if it were possible.
While the waves dashed over the ship and the wind whirled round them
in fury she stood up and said:
“Surely all this has come because the Prince has angered Rin Jin, the God
of the Sea, by his jesting. If so, I, Ototachibana, will appease the wrath of
the Sea God who desires nothing less than my husband’s life!”
Then addressing the sea she said:
“I will take the place of His Augustness, Yamato Take. I will now cast
myself into your outraged depths, giving my life for his. Therefore hear me
and bring him safely to the shore of Kadzusa.”
With these words she leaped quickly into the boisterous sea, and the
waves soon whirled her away and she was lost to sight. Strange to say, the
storm ceased at once, and the sea became as calm and smooth as the
matting on which the astonished onlookers were sitting. The gods of the sea
were now appeased, and the weather cleared and the sun shone as on a
summer’s day.
Yamato Take soon reached the opposite shore and landed safely, even as
his wife Ototachibana had prayed. His prowess in war was marvelous, and
he succeeded after some time in conquering the Eastern Barbarians, the
Ainu.
He ascribed his safe landing wholly to the faithfulness of his wife, who
had so willingly and lovingly sacrificed herself in the hour of his utmost
peril. His heart was softened at the remembrance of her, and he never
was tossed from crest to crest of the rolling waves, till it seemed that every
moment must be their last and that they must all be swallowed up in the
angry sea. For Kin Jin, the Dragon King of the Sea, had heard Yamato Take
jeer, and had raised this terrible storm in anger, to show the scoffing Prince
how awful the sea could be though it did but look like a brook.
The terrified crew lowered the sails and looked after the rudder, and
worked for their dear lives’ sake, but all in vain—the storm only seemed to
increase in violence, and all gave themselves up for lost. Then the faithful
Ototachibana rose, and forgetting all the grief that her husband had caused
her, forgetting even that he had wearied of her, in the one great desire of her
love to save him, she determined to sacrifice her life to rescue him from
death if it were possible.
While the waves dashed over the ship and the wind whirled round them
in fury she stood up and said:
“Surely all this has come because the Prince has angered Rin Jin, the God
of the Sea, by his jesting. If so, I, Ototachibana, will appease the wrath of
the Sea God who desires nothing less than my husband’s life!”
Then addressing the sea she said:
“I will take the place of His Augustness, Yamato Take. I will now cast
myself into your outraged depths, giving my life for his. Therefore hear me
and bring him safely to the shore of Kadzusa.”
With these words she leaped quickly into the boisterous sea, and the
waves soon whirled her away and she was lost to sight. Strange to say, the
storm ceased at once, and the sea became as calm and smooth as the
matting on which the astonished onlookers were sitting. The gods of the sea
were now appeased, and the weather cleared and the sun shone as on a
summer’s day.
Yamato Take soon reached the opposite shore and landed safely, even as
his wife Ototachibana had prayed. His prowess in war was marvelous, and
he succeeded after some time in conquering the Eastern Barbarians, the
Ainu.
He ascribed his safe landing wholly to the faithfulness of his wife, who
had so willingly and lovingly sacrificed herself in the hour of his utmost
peril. His heart was softened at the remembrance of her, and he never
Page 155
allowed her to pass from his thoughts even for a moment. Too late had he
learned to esteem the goodness of her heart and the greatness of her love for
him.
As he was returning on his homeward way he came to the high pass of
the Usui Toge, and here he stood and gazed at the wonderful prospect
beneath him. The country, from this great elevation, all lay open to his
sight, a vast panorama of mountain and plain and forest, with rivers
winding like silver ribbons through the land; then far off he saw the distant
sea, which shimmered like a luminous mist in the great distance, where
Ototachibana had given her life for him, and as he turned towards it he
stretched out his arms, and thinking of her love which he had scorned and
his faithlessness to her, his heart burst out into a sorrowful and bitter cry:
“Azuma, Azuma, Ya!” (Oh! my wife, my wife!) And to this day there is a
district in Tokio called Azuma, which commemorates the words of Prince
Yamato Take, and the place where his faithful wife leapt into the sea to save
him is still pointed out. So, though in life the Princess Ototachibana was
unhappy, history keeps her memory green, and the story of her
unselfishness and heroic death will never pass away.
Yamato Take had now fulfilled all his father’s orders, he had subdued all
rebels, and rid the land of all robbers and enemies to the peace, and his
renown was great, for in the whole land there was no one who could stand
up against him, he was so strong in battle and wise in council.
He was about to return straight for home by the way he had come, when
the thought struck him that he would find it more interesting to take another
route, so he passed through the province of Owari and came to the province
of Omi.
When the Prince reached Omi he found the people in a state of great
excitement and fear. In many houses as he passed along he saw the signs of
mourning and heard loud lamentations. On inquiring the cause of this he
was told that a terrible monster had appeared in the mountains, who daily
came down from thence and made raids on the villages, devouring whoever
he could seize. Many homes had been made desolate and the men were
afraid to go out to their daily work in the fields, or the women to go to the
rivers to wash their rice.
When Yamato Take heard this his wrath was kindled, and he said
fiercely:
learned to esteem the goodness of her heart and the greatness of her love for
him.
As he was returning on his homeward way he came to the high pass of
the Usui Toge, and here he stood and gazed at the wonderful prospect
beneath him. The country, from this great elevation, all lay open to his
sight, a vast panorama of mountain and plain and forest, with rivers
winding like silver ribbons through the land; then far off he saw the distant
sea, which shimmered like a luminous mist in the great distance, where
Ototachibana had given her life for him, and as he turned towards it he
stretched out his arms, and thinking of her love which he had scorned and
his faithlessness to her, his heart burst out into a sorrowful and bitter cry:
“Azuma, Azuma, Ya!” (Oh! my wife, my wife!) And to this day there is a
district in Tokio called Azuma, which commemorates the words of Prince
Yamato Take, and the place where his faithful wife leapt into the sea to save
him is still pointed out. So, though in life the Princess Ototachibana was
unhappy, history keeps her memory green, and the story of her
unselfishness and heroic death will never pass away.
Yamato Take had now fulfilled all his father’s orders, he had subdued all
rebels, and rid the land of all robbers and enemies to the peace, and his
renown was great, for in the whole land there was no one who could stand
up against him, he was so strong in battle and wise in council.
He was about to return straight for home by the way he had come, when
the thought struck him that he would find it more interesting to take another
route, so he passed through the province of Owari and came to the province
of Omi.
When the Prince reached Omi he found the people in a state of great
excitement and fear. In many houses as he passed along he saw the signs of
mourning and heard loud lamentations. On inquiring the cause of this he
was told that a terrible monster had appeared in the mountains, who daily
came down from thence and made raids on the villages, devouring whoever
he could seize. Many homes had been made desolate and the men were
afraid to go out to their daily work in the fields, or the women to go to the
rivers to wash their rice.
When Yamato Take heard this his wrath was kindled, and he said
fiercely:
Page 156
“From the western end of Kiushiu to the eastern corner of Yezo I have
subdued all the King’s enemies—there is no one who dares to break the
laws or to rebel against the King. It is indeed a matter for wonder that here
in this place, so near the capital, a wicked monster has dared to take up his
abode and be the terror of the King’s subjects. Not long shall it find
pleasure in devouring innocent folk. I will start out and kill it at once.”
With these words he set out for the Ibuki Mountain, where the monster
was said to live. He climbed up a good distance, when all of a sudden, at a
winding in the path, a monster serpent appeared before him and stopped the
way.
“This must be the monster,” said the Prince; “I do not need my sword for
a serpent. I can kill him with my hands.”
He thereupon sprang upon the serpent and tried to strangle it to death
with his bare arms. It was not long before his prodigious strength gained the
mastery and the serpent lay dead at his feet. Now a sudden darkness came
over the mountain and rain began to fall, so that for the gloom and the rain
the Prince could hardly see which way to take. In a short time, however,
while he was groping his way down the pass, the weather cleared, and our
brave hero was able to make his way quickly down the mountain.
When he got back he began to feel ill and to have burning pains in his
feet, so he knew that the serpent had poisoned him. So great was his
suffering that he could hardly move, much less walk, so he had himself
carried to a place in the mountains famous for its hot mineral springs, which
rose bubbling out of the earth, and almost boiling from the volcanic fires
beneath.
Yamato Take bathed daily in these waters, and gradually he felt his
strength come again, and the pains left him, till at last one day he found
with great joy that he was quite recovered. He now hastened to the temples
of Ise, where you will remember that he prayed before undertaking this long
expedition. His aunt, priestess of the shrine, who had blessed him on his
setting out, now came to welcome him back. He told her of the many
dangers he had encountered and of how marvelously his life had been
preserved through all—and she praised his courage and his warrior’s
prowess, and then putting on her most magnificent robes she returned
thanks to their ancestress the Sun Goddess Amaterasu, to whose protection
they both ascribed the Prince’s wonderful preservation.
subdued all the King’s enemies—there is no one who dares to break the
laws or to rebel against the King. It is indeed a matter for wonder that here
in this place, so near the capital, a wicked monster has dared to take up his
abode and be the terror of the King’s subjects. Not long shall it find
pleasure in devouring innocent folk. I will start out and kill it at once.”
With these words he set out for the Ibuki Mountain, where the monster
was said to live. He climbed up a good distance, when all of a sudden, at a
winding in the path, a monster serpent appeared before him and stopped the
way.
“This must be the monster,” said the Prince; “I do not need my sword for
a serpent. I can kill him with my hands.”
He thereupon sprang upon the serpent and tried to strangle it to death
with his bare arms. It was not long before his prodigious strength gained the
mastery and the serpent lay dead at his feet. Now a sudden darkness came
over the mountain and rain began to fall, so that for the gloom and the rain
the Prince could hardly see which way to take. In a short time, however,
while he was groping his way down the pass, the weather cleared, and our
brave hero was able to make his way quickly down the mountain.
When he got back he began to feel ill and to have burning pains in his
feet, so he knew that the serpent had poisoned him. So great was his
suffering that he could hardly move, much less walk, so he had himself
carried to a place in the mountains famous for its hot mineral springs, which
rose bubbling out of the earth, and almost boiling from the volcanic fires
beneath.
Yamato Take bathed daily in these waters, and gradually he felt his
strength come again, and the pains left him, till at last one day he found
with great joy that he was quite recovered. He now hastened to the temples
of Ise, where you will remember that he prayed before undertaking this long
expedition. His aunt, priestess of the shrine, who had blessed him on his
setting out, now came to welcome him back. He told her of the many
dangers he had encountered and of how marvelously his life had been
preserved through all—and she praised his courage and his warrior’s
prowess, and then putting on her most magnificent robes she returned
thanks to their ancestress the Sun Goddess Amaterasu, to whose protection
they both ascribed the Prince’s wonderful preservation.
Page 157
Here ends the story of Prince Yamato Take of Japan.
Page 158
MOMOTARO, OR THE STORY OF THE SON OF
A PEACH
Long, long ago there lived, an old man and an old woman; they were
peasants, and had to work hard to earn their daily rice. The old man used to
go and cut grass for the farmers around, and while he was gone the old
woman, his wife, did the work of the house and worked in their own little
rice field.
One day the old man went to the hills as usual to cut grass and the old
woman took some clothes to the river to wash.
It was nearly summer, and the country was very beautiful to see in its
fresh greenness as the two old people went on their way to work. The grass
on the banks of the river looked like emerald velvet, and the pussy willows
along the edge of the water were shaking out their soft tassels.
The breezes blew and ruffled the smooth surface of the water into
wavelets, and passing on touched the cheeks of the old couple who, for
some reason they could not explain, felt very happy that morning.
The old woman at last found a nice spot by the river bank and put her
basket down. Then she set to work to wash the clothes; she took them one
by one out of the basket and washed them in the river and rubbed them on
the stones. The water was as clear as crystal, and she could see the tiny fish
swimming to and fro, and the pebbles at the bottom.
As she was busy washing her clothes a great peach came bumping down
the stream. The old woman looked up from her work and saw this large
peach. She was sixty years of age, yet in all her life she had never seen such
a big peach as this.
“How delicious that peach must be!” she said to herself. “I must certainly
get it and take it home to my old man.”
A PEACH
Long, long ago there lived, an old man and an old woman; they were
peasants, and had to work hard to earn their daily rice. The old man used to
go and cut grass for the farmers around, and while he was gone the old
woman, his wife, did the work of the house and worked in their own little
rice field.
One day the old man went to the hills as usual to cut grass and the old
woman took some clothes to the river to wash.
It was nearly summer, and the country was very beautiful to see in its
fresh greenness as the two old people went on their way to work. The grass
on the banks of the river looked like emerald velvet, and the pussy willows
along the edge of the water were shaking out their soft tassels.
The breezes blew and ruffled the smooth surface of the water into
wavelets, and passing on touched the cheeks of the old couple who, for
some reason they could not explain, felt very happy that morning.
The old woman at last found a nice spot by the river bank and put her
basket down. Then she set to work to wash the clothes; she took them one
by one out of the basket and washed them in the river and rubbed them on
the stones. The water was as clear as crystal, and she could see the tiny fish
swimming to and fro, and the pebbles at the bottom.
As she was busy washing her clothes a great peach came bumping down
the stream. The old woman looked up from her work and saw this large
peach. She was sixty years of age, yet in all her life she had never seen such
a big peach as this.
“How delicious that peach must be!” she said to herself. “I must certainly
get it and take it home to my old man.”
Page 159
She stretched out her arm to try and get it, but it was quite out of her
reach. She looked about for a stick, but there was not one to be seen, and if
she went to look for one she would lose the peach.
Stopping a moment to think what she would do, she remembered an old
charm-verse. Now she began to clap her hands to keep time to the rolling of
the peach down stream, and while she clapped she sang this song:
“Distant water is bitter,
The near water is sweet;
Pass by the distant water
And come into the sweet.”
Strange to say, as soon as she began to repeat this little song the peach
began to come nearer and nearer the bank where the old woman was
standing, till at last it stopped just in front of her so that she was able to take
it up in her hands. The old woman was delighted. She could not go on with
her work, so happy and excited was she, so she put all the clothes back in
her bamboo basket, and with the basket on her back and the peach in her
hand she hurried homewards.
It seemed a very long time to her to wait till her husband returned. The
old man at last came back as the sun was setting, with a big bundle of grass
on his back—so big that he was almost hidden and she could hardly see
him. He seemed very tired and used the scythe for a walking stick, leaning
on it as he walked along.
As soon as the old woman saw him she called out:
“O Fii San! (old man) I have been waiting for you to come home for such
a long time to-day!”
“What is the matter? Why are you so impatient?” asked the old man,
wondering at her unusual eagerness. “Has anything happened while I have
been away?”
“Oh, no!” answered the old woman, “nothing has happened, only I have
found a nice present for you!”
“That is good,” said the old man. He then washed his feet in a basin of
water and stepped up to the veranda.
The old woman now ran into the little room and brought out from the
cupboard the big peach. It felt even heavier than before. She held it up to
him, saying:
reach. She looked about for a stick, but there was not one to be seen, and if
she went to look for one she would lose the peach.
Stopping a moment to think what she would do, she remembered an old
charm-verse. Now she began to clap her hands to keep time to the rolling of
the peach down stream, and while she clapped she sang this song:
“Distant water is bitter,
The near water is sweet;
Pass by the distant water
And come into the sweet.”
Strange to say, as soon as she began to repeat this little song the peach
began to come nearer and nearer the bank where the old woman was
standing, till at last it stopped just in front of her so that she was able to take
it up in her hands. The old woman was delighted. She could not go on with
her work, so happy and excited was she, so she put all the clothes back in
her bamboo basket, and with the basket on her back and the peach in her
hand she hurried homewards.
It seemed a very long time to her to wait till her husband returned. The
old man at last came back as the sun was setting, with a big bundle of grass
on his back—so big that he was almost hidden and she could hardly see
him. He seemed very tired and used the scythe for a walking stick, leaning
on it as he walked along.
As soon as the old woman saw him she called out:
“O Fii San! (old man) I have been waiting for you to come home for such
a long time to-day!”
“What is the matter? Why are you so impatient?” asked the old man,
wondering at her unusual eagerness. “Has anything happened while I have
been away?”
“Oh, no!” answered the old woman, “nothing has happened, only I have
found a nice present for you!”
“That is good,” said the old man. He then washed his feet in a basin of
water and stepped up to the veranda.
The old woman now ran into the little room and brought out from the
cupboard the big peach. It felt even heavier than before. She held it up to
him, saying:
Page 160
“Just look at this! Did you ever see such a large peach in all your life?”
When the old man looked at the peach he was greatly astonished and
said:
“This is indeed the largest peach I have ever seen! Wherever did you buy
it?”
“I did not buy it,” answered the old woman. “I found it in the river where
I was washing.” And she told him the whole story.
“I am very glad that you have found it. Let us eat it now, for I am
hungry,” said the O Fii San.
He brought out the kitchen knife, and, placing the peach on a board, was
about to cut it when, wonderful to tell, the peach split in two of itself and a
clear voice said:
“Wait a bit, old man!” and out stepped a beautiful little child.
The old man and his wife were both so astonished at what they saw that
they fell to the ground. The child spoke again:
“Don’t be afraid. I am no demon or fairy. I will tell you the truth. Heaven
has had compassion on you. Every day and every night you have lamented
that you had no child. Your cry has been heard and I am sent to be the son
of your old age!”
On hearing this the old man and his wife were very happy. They had
cried night and day for sorrow at having no child to help them in their
lonely old age, and now that their prayer was answered they were so lost
with joy that they did not know where to put their hands or their feet. First
the old man took the child up in his arms, and then the old woman did the
same; and they named him MOMOTARO, OR SON OF A PEACH,
because he had come out of a peach.
The years passed quickly by and the child grew to be fifteen years of age.
He was taller and far stronger than any other boys of his own age, he had a
handsome face and a heart full of courage, and he was very wise for his
years. The old couple’s pleasure was very great when they looked at him,
for he was just what they thought a hero ought to be like.
One day Momotaro came to his foster-father and said solemnly:
“Father, by a strange chance we have become father and son. Your
goodness to me has been higher than the mountain grasses which it was
When the old man looked at the peach he was greatly astonished and
said:
“This is indeed the largest peach I have ever seen! Wherever did you buy
it?”
“I did not buy it,” answered the old woman. “I found it in the river where
I was washing.” And she told him the whole story.
“I am very glad that you have found it. Let us eat it now, for I am
hungry,” said the O Fii San.
He brought out the kitchen knife, and, placing the peach on a board, was
about to cut it when, wonderful to tell, the peach split in two of itself and a
clear voice said:
“Wait a bit, old man!” and out stepped a beautiful little child.
The old man and his wife were both so astonished at what they saw that
they fell to the ground. The child spoke again:
“Don’t be afraid. I am no demon or fairy. I will tell you the truth. Heaven
has had compassion on you. Every day and every night you have lamented
that you had no child. Your cry has been heard and I am sent to be the son
of your old age!”
On hearing this the old man and his wife were very happy. They had
cried night and day for sorrow at having no child to help them in their
lonely old age, and now that their prayer was answered they were so lost
with joy that they did not know where to put their hands or their feet. First
the old man took the child up in his arms, and then the old woman did the
same; and they named him MOMOTARO, OR SON OF A PEACH,
because he had come out of a peach.
The years passed quickly by and the child grew to be fifteen years of age.
He was taller and far stronger than any other boys of his own age, he had a
handsome face and a heart full of courage, and he was very wise for his
years. The old couple’s pleasure was very great when they looked at him,
for he was just what they thought a hero ought to be like.
One day Momotaro came to his foster-father and said solemnly:
“Father, by a strange chance we have become father and son. Your
goodness to me has been higher than the mountain grasses which it was
Page 161
your daily work to cut, and deeper than the river where my mother washes
the clothes. I do not know how to thank you enough.”
“Why,” answered the old man, “it is a matter of course that a father
should bring up his son. When you are older it will be your turn to take care
of us, so after all there will be no profit or loss between us—all will be
equal. Indeed, I am rather surprised that you should thank me in this way!”
and the old man looked bothered.
“I hope you will be patient with me,” said Momotaro; “but before I begin
to pay back your goodness to me I have a request to make which I hope you
will grant me above everything else.”
“I will let you do whatever you wish, for you are quite different to all
other boys!”
“Then let me go away at once!”
“What do you say? Do you wish to leave your old father and mother and
go away from your old home?”
“I will surely come back again, if you let me go now!”
“Where are you going?”
“You must think it strange that I want to go away,” said Momotaro,
“because I have not yet told you my reason. Far away from here to the
northeast of Japan there is an island in the sea. This island is the stronghold
of a band of devils. I have often heard how they invade this land, kill and
rob the people, and carry off all they can find. They are not only very
wicked but they are disloyal to our Emperor and disobey his laws. They are
also cannibals, for they kill and eat some of the poor people who are so
unfortunate as to fall into their hands. These devils are very hateful beings. I
must go and conquer them and bring back all the plunder of which they
have robbed this land. It is for this reason that I want to go away for a short
time!”
The old man was much surprised at hearing all this from a mere boy of
fifteen. He thought it best to let the boy go. He was strong and fearless, and
besides all this, the old man knew he was no common child, for he had been
sent to them as a gift from Heaven, and he felt quite sure that the devils
would be powerless to harm him.
“All you say is very interesting, Momotaro,” said the old man. “I will not
hinder you in your determination. You may go if you wish. Go to the island
the clothes. I do not know how to thank you enough.”
“Why,” answered the old man, “it is a matter of course that a father
should bring up his son. When you are older it will be your turn to take care
of us, so after all there will be no profit or loss between us—all will be
equal. Indeed, I am rather surprised that you should thank me in this way!”
and the old man looked bothered.
“I hope you will be patient with me,” said Momotaro; “but before I begin
to pay back your goodness to me I have a request to make which I hope you
will grant me above everything else.”
“I will let you do whatever you wish, for you are quite different to all
other boys!”
“Then let me go away at once!”
“What do you say? Do you wish to leave your old father and mother and
go away from your old home?”
“I will surely come back again, if you let me go now!”
“Where are you going?”
“You must think it strange that I want to go away,” said Momotaro,
“because I have not yet told you my reason. Far away from here to the
northeast of Japan there is an island in the sea. This island is the stronghold
of a band of devils. I have often heard how they invade this land, kill and
rob the people, and carry off all they can find. They are not only very
wicked but they are disloyal to our Emperor and disobey his laws. They are
also cannibals, for they kill and eat some of the poor people who are so
unfortunate as to fall into their hands. These devils are very hateful beings. I
must go and conquer them and bring back all the plunder of which they
have robbed this land. It is for this reason that I want to go away for a short
time!”
The old man was much surprised at hearing all this from a mere boy of
fifteen. He thought it best to let the boy go. He was strong and fearless, and
besides all this, the old man knew he was no common child, for he had been
sent to them as a gift from Heaven, and he felt quite sure that the devils
would be powerless to harm him.
“All you say is very interesting, Momotaro,” said the old man. “I will not
hinder you in your determination. You may go if you wish. Go to the island
Page 162
as soon as ever you like and destroy the demons and bring peace to the
land.”
“Thank you, for all your kindness,” said Momotaro, who began to get
ready to go that very day. He was full of courage and did not know what
fear was.
The old man and woman at once set to work to pound rice in the kitchen
mortar to make cakes for Momotaro to take with him on his journey.
At last the cakes were made and Momotaro was ready to start on his long
journey.
Parting is always sad. So it was now. The eyes of the two old people were
filled with tears and their voices trembled as they said:
“Go with all care and speed. We expect you back victorious!”
Momotaro was very sorry to leave his old parents (though he knew he
was coming back as soon as he could), for he thought of how lonely they
would be while he was away. But he said “Good-by!” quite bravely.
“I am going now. Take good care of yourselves while I am away. Good-
by!” And he stepped quickly out of the house. In silence the eyes of
Momotaro and his parents met in farewell.
Momotaro now hurried on his way till it was midday. He began to feel
hungry, so he opened his bag and took out one of the rice-cakes and sat
down under a tree by the side of the road to eat it. While he was thus having
his lunch a dog almost as large as a colt came running out from the high
grass. He made straight for Momotaro, and showing his teeth, said in a
fierce way:
“You are a rude man to pass my field without asking permission first. If
you leave me all the cakes you have in your bag you may go; otherwise I
will bite you till I kill you!”
Momotaro only laughed scornfully:
“What is that you are saying? Do you know who I am? I am Momotaro,
and I am on my way to subdue the devils in their island stronghold in the
northeast of Japan. If you try to stop me on my way there I will cut you in
two from the head downwards!”
The dog’s manner at once changed. His tail dropped between his legs,
and coming near he bowed so low that his forehead touched the ground.
land.”
“Thank you, for all your kindness,” said Momotaro, who began to get
ready to go that very day. He was full of courage and did not know what
fear was.
The old man and woman at once set to work to pound rice in the kitchen
mortar to make cakes for Momotaro to take with him on his journey.
At last the cakes were made and Momotaro was ready to start on his long
journey.
Parting is always sad. So it was now. The eyes of the two old people were
filled with tears and their voices trembled as they said:
“Go with all care and speed. We expect you back victorious!”
Momotaro was very sorry to leave his old parents (though he knew he
was coming back as soon as he could), for he thought of how lonely they
would be while he was away. But he said “Good-by!” quite bravely.
“I am going now. Take good care of yourselves while I am away. Good-
by!” And he stepped quickly out of the house. In silence the eyes of
Momotaro and his parents met in farewell.
Momotaro now hurried on his way till it was midday. He began to feel
hungry, so he opened his bag and took out one of the rice-cakes and sat
down under a tree by the side of the road to eat it. While he was thus having
his lunch a dog almost as large as a colt came running out from the high
grass. He made straight for Momotaro, and showing his teeth, said in a
fierce way:
“You are a rude man to pass my field without asking permission first. If
you leave me all the cakes you have in your bag you may go; otherwise I
will bite you till I kill you!”
Momotaro only laughed scornfully:
“What is that you are saying? Do you know who I am? I am Momotaro,
and I am on my way to subdue the devils in their island stronghold in the
northeast of Japan. If you try to stop me on my way there I will cut you in
two from the head downwards!”
The dog’s manner at once changed. His tail dropped between his legs,
and coming near he bowed so low that his forehead touched the ground.
Page 163
“What do I hear? The name of Momotaro? Are you indeed Momotaro? I
have often heard of your great strength. Not knowing who you were I have
behaved in a very stupid way. Will you please pardon my rudeness? Are you
indeed on your way to invade the Island of Devils? If you will take such a
rude fellow with you as one of your followers, I shall be very grateful to
you.”
“I think I can take you with me if you wish to go,” said Momotaro.
“Thank you!” said the dog. “By the way, I am very very hungry. Will you
give me one of the cakes you are carrying?”
“This is the best kind of cake there is in Japan,” said Momotaro. “I
cannot spare you a whole one; I will give you half of one.”
“Thank you very much,” said the dog, taking the piece thrown to him.
Then Momotaro got up and the dog followed. For a long time they
walked over the hills and through the valleys. As they were going along an
animal came down from a tree a little ahead of them. The creature soon
came up to Momotaro and said:
“Good morning, Momotaro! You are welcome in this part of the country.
Will you allow me to go with you?”
The dog answered jealously:
“Momotaro already has a dog to accompany him. Of what use is a
monkey like you in battle? We are on our way to fight the devils! Get
away!”
The dog and the monkey began to quarrel and bite, for these two animals
always hate each other.
“Now, don’t quarrel!” said Momotaro, putting himself between them.
“Wait a moment, dog!”
“It is not at all dignified for you to have such a creature as that following
you!” said the dog.
“What do you know about it?” asked Momotaro; and pushing aside the
dog, he spoke to the monkey:
“Who are you?”
“I am a monkey living in these hills,” replied the monkey. “I heard of
your expedition to the Island of Devils, and I have come to go with you.
Nothing will please me more than to follow you!”
have often heard of your great strength. Not knowing who you were I have
behaved in a very stupid way. Will you please pardon my rudeness? Are you
indeed on your way to invade the Island of Devils? If you will take such a
rude fellow with you as one of your followers, I shall be very grateful to
you.”
“I think I can take you with me if you wish to go,” said Momotaro.
“Thank you!” said the dog. “By the way, I am very very hungry. Will you
give me one of the cakes you are carrying?”
“This is the best kind of cake there is in Japan,” said Momotaro. “I
cannot spare you a whole one; I will give you half of one.”
“Thank you very much,” said the dog, taking the piece thrown to him.
Then Momotaro got up and the dog followed. For a long time they
walked over the hills and through the valleys. As they were going along an
animal came down from a tree a little ahead of them. The creature soon
came up to Momotaro and said:
“Good morning, Momotaro! You are welcome in this part of the country.
Will you allow me to go with you?”
The dog answered jealously:
“Momotaro already has a dog to accompany him. Of what use is a
monkey like you in battle? We are on our way to fight the devils! Get
away!”
The dog and the monkey began to quarrel and bite, for these two animals
always hate each other.
“Now, don’t quarrel!” said Momotaro, putting himself between them.
“Wait a moment, dog!”
“It is not at all dignified for you to have such a creature as that following
you!” said the dog.
“What do you know about it?” asked Momotaro; and pushing aside the
dog, he spoke to the monkey:
“Who are you?”
“I am a monkey living in these hills,” replied the monkey. “I heard of
your expedition to the Island of Devils, and I have come to go with you.
Nothing will please me more than to follow you!”
Page 164
“Do you really wish to go to the Island of Devils and fight with me?”
“Yes, sir,” replied the monkey.
“I admire your courage,” said Momotaro. “Here is a piece of one of my
fine rice-cakes. Come along!”
So the monkey joined Momotaro. The dog and the monkey did not get on
well together. They were always snapping at each other as they went along,
and always wanting to have a fight. This made Momotaro very cross, and at
last he sent the dog on ahead with a flag and put the monkey behind with a
sword, and he placed himself between them with a war-fan, which is made
of iron.
By and by they came to a large field. Here a bird flew down and alighted
on the ground just in front of the little party. It was the most beautiful bird
Momotaro had ever seen. On its body were five different robes of feathers
and its head was covered with a scarlet cap.
The dog at once ran at the bird and tried to seize and kill it. But the bird
struck out its spurs and flew at the dog’s tail, and the fight went hard with
both.
Momotaro, as he looked on, could not help admiring the bird; it showed
so much spirit in the fight. It would certainly make a good fighter.
Momotaro went up to the two combatants, and holding the dog back, said
to the bird:
“You rascal! you are hindering my journey. Surrender at once, and I will
take you with me. If you don’t I will set this dog to bite your head off!”
Then the bird surrendered at once, and begged to be taken into
Momotaro’s company.
“I do not know what excuse to offer for quarreling with the dog, your
servant, but I did not see you. I am a miserable bird called a pheasant. It is
very generous of you to pardon my rudeness and to take me with you.
Please allow me to follow you behind the dog and the monkey!”
“I congratulate you on surrendering so soon,” said Momotaro, smiling.
“Come and join us in our raid on the devils.”
“Are you going to take this bird with you also?” asked the dog,
interrupting.
“Yes, sir,” replied the monkey.
“I admire your courage,” said Momotaro. “Here is a piece of one of my
fine rice-cakes. Come along!”
So the monkey joined Momotaro. The dog and the monkey did not get on
well together. They were always snapping at each other as they went along,
and always wanting to have a fight. This made Momotaro very cross, and at
last he sent the dog on ahead with a flag and put the monkey behind with a
sword, and he placed himself between them with a war-fan, which is made
of iron.
By and by they came to a large field. Here a bird flew down and alighted
on the ground just in front of the little party. It was the most beautiful bird
Momotaro had ever seen. On its body were five different robes of feathers
and its head was covered with a scarlet cap.
The dog at once ran at the bird and tried to seize and kill it. But the bird
struck out its spurs and flew at the dog’s tail, and the fight went hard with
both.
Momotaro, as he looked on, could not help admiring the bird; it showed
so much spirit in the fight. It would certainly make a good fighter.
Momotaro went up to the two combatants, and holding the dog back, said
to the bird:
“You rascal! you are hindering my journey. Surrender at once, and I will
take you with me. If you don’t I will set this dog to bite your head off!”
Then the bird surrendered at once, and begged to be taken into
Momotaro’s company.
“I do not know what excuse to offer for quarreling with the dog, your
servant, but I did not see you. I am a miserable bird called a pheasant. It is
very generous of you to pardon my rudeness and to take me with you.
Please allow me to follow you behind the dog and the monkey!”
“I congratulate you on surrendering so soon,” said Momotaro, smiling.
“Come and join us in our raid on the devils.”
“Are you going to take this bird with you also?” asked the dog,
interrupting.
Page 165
“Why do you ask such an unnecessary question? Didn’t you hear what I
said? I take the bird with me because I wish to!”
“Humph!” said the dog.
Then Momotaro stood and gave this order:
“Now all of you must listen to me. The first thing necessary in an army is
harmony. It is a wise saying which says that ‘Advantage on earth is better
than advantage in Heaven!’ Union amongst ourselves is better than any
earthly gain. When we are not at peace amongst ourselves it is no easy thing
to subdue an enemy. From now, you three, the dog, the monkey and the
pheasant, must be friends with one mind. The one who first begins a quarrel
will be discharged on the spot!”
All the three promised not to quarrel. The pheasant was now made a
member of Momotaro’s suite, and received half a cake.
Momotaro’s influence was so great that the three became good friends,
and hurried onwards with him as their leader.
Hurrying on day after day they at last came out upon the shore of the
North-Eastern Sea. There was nothing to be seen as far as the horizon—not
a sign of any island. All that broke the stillness was the rolling of the waves
upon the shore.
Now, the dog and the monkey and the pheasant had come very bravely
all the way through the long valleys and over the hills, but they had never
seen the sea before, and for the first time since they set out they were
bewildered and gazed at each other in silence. How were they to cross the
water and get to the Island of Devils?
Momotaro soon saw that they were daunted by the sight of the sea, and to
try them he spoke loudly and roughly:
“Why do you hesitate? Are you afraid of the sea? Oh! what cowards you
are! It is impossible to take such weak creatures as you with me to fight the
demons. It will be far better for me to go alone. I discharge you all at once!”
The three animals were taken aback at this sharp reproof, and clung to
Momotaro’s sleeve, begging him not to send them away.
“Please, Momotaro!” said the dog.
“We have come thus far!” said the monkey.
“It is inhuman to leave us here!” said the pheasant.
said? I take the bird with me because I wish to!”
“Humph!” said the dog.
Then Momotaro stood and gave this order:
“Now all of you must listen to me. The first thing necessary in an army is
harmony. It is a wise saying which says that ‘Advantage on earth is better
than advantage in Heaven!’ Union amongst ourselves is better than any
earthly gain. When we are not at peace amongst ourselves it is no easy thing
to subdue an enemy. From now, you three, the dog, the monkey and the
pheasant, must be friends with one mind. The one who first begins a quarrel
will be discharged on the spot!”
All the three promised not to quarrel. The pheasant was now made a
member of Momotaro’s suite, and received half a cake.
Momotaro’s influence was so great that the three became good friends,
and hurried onwards with him as their leader.
Hurrying on day after day they at last came out upon the shore of the
North-Eastern Sea. There was nothing to be seen as far as the horizon—not
a sign of any island. All that broke the stillness was the rolling of the waves
upon the shore.
Now, the dog and the monkey and the pheasant had come very bravely
all the way through the long valleys and over the hills, but they had never
seen the sea before, and for the first time since they set out they were
bewildered and gazed at each other in silence. How were they to cross the
water and get to the Island of Devils?
Momotaro soon saw that they were daunted by the sight of the sea, and to
try them he spoke loudly and roughly:
“Why do you hesitate? Are you afraid of the sea? Oh! what cowards you
are! It is impossible to take such weak creatures as you with me to fight the
demons. It will be far better for me to go alone. I discharge you all at once!”
The three animals were taken aback at this sharp reproof, and clung to
Momotaro’s sleeve, begging him not to send them away.
“Please, Momotaro!” said the dog.
“We have come thus far!” said the monkey.
“It is inhuman to leave us here!” said the pheasant.
Page 166
“We are not at all afraid of the sea,” said the monkey again.
“Please do take us with you,” said the pheasant.
“Do please,” said the dog.
They had now gained a little courage, so Momotaro said:
“Well, then, I will take you with me, but be careful!”
Momotaro now got a small ship, and they all got on board. The wind and
weather were fair, and the ship went like an arrow over the sea. It was the
first time they had ever been on the water, and so at first the dog, the
monkey and the pheasant were frightened at the waves and the rolling of the
vessel, but by degrees they grew accustomed to the water and were quite
happy again. Every day they paced the deck of their little ship, eagerly
looking out for the demons’ island.
When they grew tired of this, they told each other stories of all their
exploits of which they were proud, and then played games together; and
Momotaro found much to amuse him in listening to the three animals and
watching their antics, and in this way he forgot that the way was long and
that he was tired of the voyage and of doing nothing. He longed to be at
work killing the monsters who had done so much harm in his country.
As the wind blew in their favor and they met no storms the ship made a
quick voyage, and one day when the sun was shining brightly a sight of
land rewarded the four watchers at the bow.
Momotaro knew at once that what they saw was the devils’ stronghold.
On the top of the precipitous shore, looking out to sea, was a large castle.
Now that his enterprise was close at hand, he was deep in thought with his
head leaning on his hands, wondering how he should begin the attack. His
three followers watched him, waiting for orders. At last he called to the
pheasant:
“It is a great advantage for us to have you with us.” said Momotaro to the
bird, “for you have good wings. Fly at once to the castle and engage the
demons to fight. We will follow you.”
The pheasant at once obeyed. He flew off from the ship beating the air
gladly with his wings. The bird soon reached the island and took up his
position on the roof in the middle of the castle, calling out loudly:
“All you devils listen to me! The great Japanese general Momotaro has
come to fight you and to take your stronghold from you. If you wish to save
“Please do take us with you,” said the pheasant.
“Do please,” said the dog.
They had now gained a little courage, so Momotaro said:
“Well, then, I will take you with me, but be careful!”
Momotaro now got a small ship, and they all got on board. The wind and
weather were fair, and the ship went like an arrow over the sea. It was the
first time they had ever been on the water, and so at first the dog, the
monkey and the pheasant were frightened at the waves and the rolling of the
vessel, but by degrees they grew accustomed to the water and were quite
happy again. Every day they paced the deck of their little ship, eagerly
looking out for the demons’ island.
When they grew tired of this, they told each other stories of all their
exploits of which they were proud, and then played games together; and
Momotaro found much to amuse him in listening to the three animals and
watching their antics, and in this way he forgot that the way was long and
that he was tired of the voyage and of doing nothing. He longed to be at
work killing the monsters who had done so much harm in his country.
As the wind blew in their favor and they met no storms the ship made a
quick voyage, and one day when the sun was shining brightly a sight of
land rewarded the four watchers at the bow.
Momotaro knew at once that what they saw was the devils’ stronghold.
On the top of the precipitous shore, looking out to sea, was a large castle.
Now that his enterprise was close at hand, he was deep in thought with his
head leaning on his hands, wondering how he should begin the attack. His
three followers watched him, waiting for orders. At last he called to the
pheasant:
“It is a great advantage for us to have you with us.” said Momotaro to the
bird, “for you have good wings. Fly at once to the castle and engage the
demons to fight. We will follow you.”
The pheasant at once obeyed. He flew off from the ship beating the air
gladly with his wings. The bird soon reached the island and took up his
position on the roof in the middle of the castle, calling out loudly:
“All you devils listen to me! The great Japanese general Momotaro has
come to fight you and to take your stronghold from you. If you wish to save
Page 167
your lives surrender at once, and in token of your submission you must
break off the horns that grow on your forehead. If you do not surrender at
once, but make up your mind to fight, we, the pheasant, the dog and the
monkey, will kill you all by biting and tearing you to death!”
The horned demons looking up and only seeing a pheasant, laughed and
said:
“A wild pheasant, indeed! It is ridiculous to hear such words from a mean
thing like you. Wait till you get a blow from one of our iron bars!”
Very angry, indeed, were the devils. They shook their horns and their
shocks of red hair fiercely, and rushed to put on tiger skin trousers to make
themselves look more terrible. They then brought out great iron bars and
ran to where the pheasant perched over their heads, and tried to knock him
down. The pheasant flew to one side to escape the blow, and then attacked
the head of first one and then another demon. He flew round and round
them, beating the air with his wings so fiercely and ceaselessly, that the
devils began to wonder whether they had to fight one or many more birds.
In the meantime, Momotaro had brought his ship to land. As they had
approached, he saw that the shore was like a precipice, and that the large
castle was surrounded by high walls and large iron gates and was strongly
fortified.
Momotaro landed, and with the hope of finding some way of entrance,
walked up the path towards the top, followed by the monkey and the dog.
They soon came upon two beautiful damsels washing clothes in a stream.
Momotaro saw that the clothes were blood-stained, and that as the two
maidens washed, the tears were falling fast down their cheeks. He stopped
and spoke to them:
“Who are you, and why do you weep?”
“We are captives of the Demon King. We were carried away from our
homes to this island, and though we are the daughters of Daimios (Lords),
we are obliged to be his servants, and one day he will kill us”—and the
maidens held up the blood-stained clothes—“and eat us, and there is no one
to help us!”
And their tears burst out afresh at this horrible thought.
“I will rescue you,” said Momotaro. “Do not weep any more, only show
me how I may get into the castle.”
break off the horns that grow on your forehead. If you do not surrender at
once, but make up your mind to fight, we, the pheasant, the dog and the
monkey, will kill you all by biting and tearing you to death!”
The horned demons looking up and only seeing a pheasant, laughed and
said:
“A wild pheasant, indeed! It is ridiculous to hear such words from a mean
thing like you. Wait till you get a blow from one of our iron bars!”
Very angry, indeed, were the devils. They shook their horns and their
shocks of red hair fiercely, and rushed to put on tiger skin trousers to make
themselves look more terrible. They then brought out great iron bars and
ran to where the pheasant perched over their heads, and tried to knock him
down. The pheasant flew to one side to escape the blow, and then attacked
the head of first one and then another demon. He flew round and round
them, beating the air with his wings so fiercely and ceaselessly, that the
devils began to wonder whether they had to fight one or many more birds.
In the meantime, Momotaro had brought his ship to land. As they had
approached, he saw that the shore was like a precipice, and that the large
castle was surrounded by high walls and large iron gates and was strongly
fortified.
Momotaro landed, and with the hope of finding some way of entrance,
walked up the path towards the top, followed by the monkey and the dog.
They soon came upon two beautiful damsels washing clothes in a stream.
Momotaro saw that the clothes were blood-stained, and that as the two
maidens washed, the tears were falling fast down their cheeks. He stopped
and spoke to them:
“Who are you, and why do you weep?”
“We are captives of the Demon King. We were carried away from our
homes to this island, and though we are the daughters of Daimios (Lords),
we are obliged to be his servants, and one day he will kill us”—and the
maidens held up the blood-stained clothes—“and eat us, and there is no one
to help us!”
And their tears burst out afresh at this horrible thought.
“I will rescue you,” said Momotaro. “Do not weep any more, only show
me how I may get into the castle.”
Page 168
Then the two ladies led the way and showed Momotaro a little back door
in the lowest part of the castle wall—so small that Momotaro could hardly
crawl in.
The pheasant, who was all this time fighting hard, saw Momotaro and his
little band rush in at the back.
Momotaro’s onslaught was so furious that the devils could not stand
against him. At first their foe had been a single bird, the pheasant, but now
that Momotaro and the dog and the monkey had arrived they were
bewildered, for the four enemies fought like a hundred, so strong were they.
Some of the devils fell off the parapet of the castle and were dashed to
pieces on the rocks beneath; others fell into the sea and were drowned;
many were beaten to death by the three animals.
The chief of the devils at last was the only one left. He made up his mind
to surrender, for he knew that his enemy was stronger than mortal man.
He came up humbly to Momotaro and threw down his iron bar, and
kneeling down at the victor’s feet he broke off the horns on his head in
token of submission, for they were the sign of his strength and power.
“I am afraid of you,” he said meekly. “I cannot stand against you. I will
give you all the treasure hidden in this castle if you will spare my life!”
Momotaro laughed.
“It is not like you, big devil, to beg for mercy, is it? I cannot spare your
wicked life, however much you beg, for you have killed and tortured many
people and robbed our country for many years.”
Then Momotaro tied the devil chief up and gave him into the monkey’s
charge. Having done this, he went into all the rooms of the castle and set the
prisoners free and gathered together all the treasure he found.
The dog and the pheasant carried home the plunder, and thus Momotaro
returned triumphantly to his home, taking with him the devil chief as a
captive.
The two poor damsels, daughters of Daimios, and others whom the
wicked demon had carried off to be his slaves, were taken safely to their
own homes and delivered to their parents.
The whole country made a hero of Momotaro on his triumphant return,
and rejoiced that the country was now freed from the robber devils who had
been a terror of the land for a long time.
in the lowest part of the castle wall—so small that Momotaro could hardly
crawl in.
The pheasant, who was all this time fighting hard, saw Momotaro and his
little band rush in at the back.
Momotaro’s onslaught was so furious that the devils could not stand
against him. At first their foe had been a single bird, the pheasant, but now
that Momotaro and the dog and the monkey had arrived they were
bewildered, for the four enemies fought like a hundred, so strong were they.
Some of the devils fell off the parapet of the castle and were dashed to
pieces on the rocks beneath; others fell into the sea and were drowned;
many were beaten to death by the three animals.
The chief of the devils at last was the only one left. He made up his mind
to surrender, for he knew that his enemy was stronger than mortal man.
He came up humbly to Momotaro and threw down his iron bar, and
kneeling down at the victor’s feet he broke off the horns on his head in
token of submission, for they were the sign of his strength and power.
“I am afraid of you,” he said meekly. “I cannot stand against you. I will
give you all the treasure hidden in this castle if you will spare my life!”
Momotaro laughed.
“It is not like you, big devil, to beg for mercy, is it? I cannot spare your
wicked life, however much you beg, for you have killed and tortured many
people and robbed our country for many years.”
Then Momotaro tied the devil chief up and gave him into the monkey’s
charge. Having done this, he went into all the rooms of the castle and set the
prisoners free and gathered together all the treasure he found.
The dog and the pheasant carried home the plunder, and thus Momotaro
returned triumphantly to his home, taking with him the devil chief as a
captive.
The two poor damsels, daughters of Daimios, and others whom the
wicked demon had carried off to be his slaves, were taken safely to their
own homes and delivered to their parents.
The whole country made a hero of Momotaro on his triumphant return,
and rejoiced that the country was now freed from the robber devils who had
been a terror of the land for a long time.
Page 169
The old couple’s joy was greater than ever, and the treasure Momotaro
had brought home with him enabled them to live in peace and plenty to the
end of their days.
had brought home with him enabled them to live in peace and plenty to the
end of their days.
Page 170
THE OGRE OF RASHOMON
Long, long ago in Kyoto, the people of the city were terrified by accounts
of a dreadful ogre, who, it was said, haunted the Gate of Rashomon at
twilight and seized whoever passed by. The missing victims were never
seen again, so it was whispered that the ogre was a horrible cannibal, who
not only killed the unhappy victims but ate them also. Now everybody in
the town and neighborhood was in great fear, and no one durst venture out
after sunset near the Gate of Rashomon.
Now at this time there lived in Kyoto a general named Raiko, who had
made himself famous for his brave deeds. Some time before this he made
the country ring with his name, for he had attacked Oeyama, where a band
of ogres lived with their chief, who instead of wine drank the blood of
human beings. He had routed them all and cut off the head of the chief
monster.
This brave warrior was always followed by a band of faithful knights. In
this band there were five knights of great valor. One evening as the five
knights sat at a feast quaffing SAKE in their rice bowls and eating all kinds
of fish, raw, and stewed, and broiled, and toasting each other’s healths and
exploits, the first knight, Hojo, said to the others:
“Have you all heard the rumor that every evening after sunset there
comes an ogre to the Gate of Rashomon, and that he seizes all who pass
by?”
The second knight, Watanabe, answered him, saying:
“Do not talk such nonsense! All the ogres were killed by our chief Raiko
at Oeyama! It cannot be true, because even if any ogres did escape from
that great killing they would not dare to show themselves in this city, for
they know that our brave master would at once attack them if he knew that
any of them were still alive!”
Long, long ago in Kyoto, the people of the city were terrified by accounts
of a dreadful ogre, who, it was said, haunted the Gate of Rashomon at
twilight and seized whoever passed by. The missing victims were never
seen again, so it was whispered that the ogre was a horrible cannibal, who
not only killed the unhappy victims but ate them also. Now everybody in
the town and neighborhood was in great fear, and no one durst venture out
after sunset near the Gate of Rashomon.
Now at this time there lived in Kyoto a general named Raiko, who had
made himself famous for his brave deeds. Some time before this he made
the country ring with his name, for he had attacked Oeyama, where a band
of ogres lived with their chief, who instead of wine drank the blood of
human beings. He had routed them all and cut off the head of the chief
monster.
This brave warrior was always followed by a band of faithful knights. In
this band there were five knights of great valor. One evening as the five
knights sat at a feast quaffing SAKE in their rice bowls and eating all kinds
of fish, raw, and stewed, and broiled, and toasting each other’s healths and
exploits, the first knight, Hojo, said to the others:
“Have you all heard the rumor that every evening after sunset there
comes an ogre to the Gate of Rashomon, and that he seizes all who pass
by?”
The second knight, Watanabe, answered him, saying:
“Do not talk such nonsense! All the ogres were killed by our chief Raiko
at Oeyama! It cannot be true, because even if any ogres did escape from
that great killing they would not dare to show themselves in this city, for
they know that our brave master would at once attack them if he knew that
any of them were still alive!”
Page 171
“Then do you disbelieve what I say, and think that I am telling you a
falsehood?”
“No, I do not think that you are telling a lie,” said Watanabe; “but you
have heard some old woman’s story which is not worth believing.”
“Then the best plan is to prove what I say, by going there yourself and
finding out yourself whether it is true or not,” said Hojo.
Watanabe, the second knight, could not bear the thought that his
companion should believe he was afraid, so he answered quickly:
“Of course, I will go at once and find out for myself!”
So Watanabe at once got ready to go—he buckled on his long sword and
put on a coat of armor, and tied on his large helmet. When he was ready to
start he said to the others:
“Give me something so that I can prove I have been there!”
Then one of the men got a roll of writing paper and his box of Indian ink
and brushes, and the four comrades wrote their names on a piece of paper.
“I will take this,” said Watanabe, “and put it on the Gate of Rashomon, so
to-morrow morning will you all go and look at it? I may be able to catch an
ogre or two by then!” and he mounted his horse and rode off gallantly.
It was a very dark night, and there was neither moon nor star to light
Watanabe on his way. To make the darkness worse a storm came on, the
rain fell heavily and the wind howled like wolves in the mountains. Any
ordinary man would have trembled at the thought of going out of doors, but
Watanabe was a brave warrior and dauntless, and his honor and word were
at stake, so he sped on into the night, while his companions listened to the
sound of his horse’s hoofs dying away in the distance, then shut the sliding
shutters close and gathered round the charcoal fire and wondered what
would happen—and whether their comrade would encounter one of those
horrible Oni.
At last Watanabe reached the Gate of Rashomon, but peer as he might
through the darkness he could see no sign of an ogre.
“It is just as I thought,” said Watanabe to himself; “there are certainly no
ogres here; it is only an old woman’s story. I will stick this paper on the gate
so that the others can see I have been here when they come to-morrow, and
then I will take my way home and laugh at them all.”
falsehood?”
“No, I do not think that you are telling a lie,” said Watanabe; “but you
have heard some old woman’s story which is not worth believing.”
“Then the best plan is to prove what I say, by going there yourself and
finding out yourself whether it is true or not,” said Hojo.
Watanabe, the second knight, could not bear the thought that his
companion should believe he was afraid, so he answered quickly:
“Of course, I will go at once and find out for myself!”
So Watanabe at once got ready to go—he buckled on his long sword and
put on a coat of armor, and tied on his large helmet. When he was ready to
start he said to the others:
“Give me something so that I can prove I have been there!”
Then one of the men got a roll of writing paper and his box of Indian ink
and brushes, and the four comrades wrote their names on a piece of paper.
“I will take this,” said Watanabe, “and put it on the Gate of Rashomon, so
to-morrow morning will you all go and look at it? I may be able to catch an
ogre or two by then!” and he mounted his horse and rode off gallantly.
It was a very dark night, and there was neither moon nor star to light
Watanabe on his way. To make the darkness worse a storm came on, the
rain fell heavily and the wind howled like wolves in the mountains. Any
ordinary man would have trembled at the thought of going out of doors, but
Watanabe was a brave warrior and dauntless, and his honor and word were
at stake, so he sped on into the night, while his companions listened to the
sound of his horse’s hoofs dying away in the distance, then shut the sliding
shutters close and gathered round the charcoal fire and wondered what
would happen—and whether their comrade would encounter one of those
horrible Oni.
At last Watanabe reached the Gate of Rashomon, but peer as he might
through the darkness he could see no sign of an ogre.
“It is just as I thought,” said Watanabe to himself; “there are certainly no
ogres here; it is only an old woman’s story. I will stick this paper on the gate
so that the others can see I have been here when they come to-morrow, and
then I will take my way home and laugh at them all.”
Page 172
He fastened the piece of paper, signed by all his four companions, on the
gate, and then turned his horse’s head towards home.
As he did so he became aware that some one was behind him, and at the
same time a voice called out to him to wait. Then his helmet was seized
from the back. “Who are you?” said Watanabe fearlessly. He then put out
his hand and groped around to find out who or what it was that held him by
the helmet. As he did so he touched something that felt like an arm—it was
covered with hair and as big round as the trunk of a tree!
Watanabe knew at once that this was the arm of an ogre, so he drew his
sword and cut at it fiercely.
There was a loud yell of pain, and then the ogre dashed in front of the
warrior.
Watanabe’s eyes grew large with wonder, for he saw that the ogre was
taller than the great gate, his eyes were flashing like mirrors in the sunlight,
and his huge mouth was wide open, and as the monster breathed, flames of
fire shot out of his mouth.
The ogre thought to terrify his foe, but Watanabe never flinched. He
attacked the ogre with all his strength, and thus they fought face to face for
a long time. At last the ogre, finding that he could neither frighten nor beat
Watanabe and that he might himself be beaten, took to flight. But Watanabe,
determined not to let the monster escape, put spurs to his horse and gave
chase.
But though the knight rode very fast the ogre ran faster, and to his
disappointment he found himself unable to overtake the monster, who was
gradually lost to sight.
Watanabe returned to the gate where the fierce fight had taken place, and
got down from his horse. As he did so he stumbled upon something lying on
the ground.
Stooping to pick it up he found that it was one of the ogre’s huge arms
which he must have slashed off in the fight. His joy was great at having
secured such a prize, for this was the best of all proofs of his adventure with
the ogre. So he took it up carefully and carried it home as a trophy of his
victory.
When he got back, he showed the arm to his comrades, who one and all
called him the hero of their band and gave him a great feast. His wonderful
gate, and then turned his horse’s head towards home.
As he did so he became aware that some one was behind him, and at the
same time a voice called out to him to wait. Then his helmet was seized
from the back. “Who are you?” said Watanabe fearlessly. He then put out
his hand and groped around to find out who or what it was that held him by
the helmet. As he did so he touched something that felt like an arm—it was
covered with hair and as big round as the trunk of a tree!
Watanabe knew at once that this was the arm of an ogre, so he drew his
sword and cut at it fiercely.
There was a loud yell of pain, and then the ogre dashed in front of the
warrior.
Watanabe’s eyes grew large with wonder, for he saw that the ogre was
taller than the great gate, his eyes were flashing like mirrors in the sunlight,
and his huge mouth was wide open, and as the monster breathed, flames of
fire shot out of his mouth.
The ogre thought to terrify his foe, but Watanabe never flinched. He
attacked the ogre with all his strength, and thus they fought face to face for
a long time. At last the ogre, finding that he could neither frighten nor beat
Watanabe and that he might himself be beaten, took to flight. But Watanabe,
determined not to let the monster escape, put spurs to his horse and gave
chase.
But though the knight rode very fast the ogre ran faster, and to his
disappointment he found himself unable to overtake the monster, who was
gradually lost to sight.
Watanabe returned to the gate where the fierce fight had taken place, and
got down from his horse. As he did so he stumbled upon something lying on
the ground.
Stooping to pick it up he found that it was one of the ogre’s huge arms
which he must have slashed off in the fight. His joy was great at having
secured such a prize, for this was the best of all proofs of his adventure with
the ogre. So he took it up carefully and carried it home as a trophy of his
victory.
When he got back, he showed the arm to his comrades, who one and all
called him the hero of their band and gave him a great feast. His wonderful
Page 173
deed was soon noised abroad in Kyoto, and people from far and near came
to see the ogre’s arm.
Watanabe now began to grow uneasy as to how he should keep the arm in
safety, for he knew that the ogre to whom it belonged was still alive. He felt
sure that one day or other, as soon as the ogre got over his scare, he would
come to try to get his arm back again. Watanabe therefore had a box made
of the strongest wood and banded with iron. In this he placed the arm, and
then he sealed down the heavy lid, refusing to open it for anyone. He kept
the box in his own room and took charge of it himself, never allowing it out
of his sight.
Now one night he heard some one knocking at the porch, asking for
admittance.
When the servant went to the door to see who it was, there was only an
old woman, very respectable in appearance. On being asked who she was
and what was her business, the old woman replied with a smile that she had
been nurse to the master of the house when he was a little baby. If the lord
of the house were at home she begged to be allowed to see him.
The servant left the old woman at the door and went to tell his master that
his old nurse had come to see him. Watanabe thought it strange that she
should come at that time of night, but at the thought of his old nurse, who
had been like a foster-mother to him and whom he had not seen for a long
time, a very tender feeling sprang up for her in his heart. He ordered the
servant to show her in.
The old woman was ushered into the room, and after the customary bows
and greetings were over, she said:
“Master, the report of your brave fight with the ogre at the Gate of
Rashomon is so widely known that even your poor old nurse has heard of it.
Is it really true, what every one says, that you cut off one of the ogre’s
arms? If you did, your deed is highly to be praised!”
“I was very disappointed,” said Watanabe, “that I was not able take the
monster captive, which was what I wished to do, instead of only cutting off
an arm!”
“I am very proud to think,” answered the old woman, “that my master
was so brave as to dare to cut off an ogre’s arm. There is nothing that can be
to see the ogre’s arm.
Watanabe now began to grow uneasy as to how he should keep the arm in
safety, for he knew that the ogre to whom it belonged was still alive. He felt
sure that one day or other, as soon as the ogre got over his scare, he would
come to try to get his arm back again. Watanabe therefore had a box made
of the strongest wood and banded with iron. In this he placed the arm, and
then he sealed down the heavy lid, refusing to open it for anyone. He kept
the box in his own room and took charge of it himself, never allowing it out
of his sight.
Now one night he heard some one knocking at the porch, asking for
admittance.
When the servant went to the door to see who it was, there was only an
old woman, very respectable in appearance. On being asked who she was
and what was her business, the old woman replied with a smile that she had
been nurse to the master of the house when he was a little baby. If the lord
of the house were at home she begged to be allowed to see him.
The servant left the old woman at the door and went to tell his master that
his old nurse had come to see him. Watanabe thought it strange that she
should come at that time of night, but at the thought of his old nurse, who
had been like a foster-mother to him and whom he had not seen for a long
time, a very tender feeling sprang up for her in his heart. He ordered the
servant to show her in.
The old woman was ushered into the room, and after the customary bows
and greetings were over, she said:
“Master, the report of your brave fight with the ogre at the Gate of
Rashomon is so widely known that even your poor old nurse has heard of it.
Is it really true, what every one says, that you cut off one of the ogre’s
arms? If you did, your deed is highly to be praised!”
“I was very disappointed,” said Watanabe, “that I was not able take the
monster captive, which was what I wished to do, instead of only cutting off
an arm!”
“I am very proud to think,” answered the old woman, “that my master
was so brave as to dare to cut off an ogre’s arm. There is nothing that can be
Page 174
compared to your courage. Before I die it is the great wish of my life to see
this arm,” she added pleadingly.
“No,” said Watanabe, “I am sorry, but I cannot grant your request.”
“But why?” asked the old woman.
“Because,” replied Watanabe, “ogres are very revengeful creatures, and if
I open the box there is no telling but that the ogre may suddenly appear and
carry off his arm. I have had a box made on purpose with a very strong lid,
and in this box I keep the ogre’s arm secure; and I never show it to any one,
whatever happens.”
“Your precaution is very reasonable,” said the old woman. “But I am
your old nurse, so surely you will not refuse to show ME the arm. I have
only just heard of your brave act, and not being able to wait till the morning
I came at once to ask you to show it to me.”
Watanabe was very troubled at the old woman’s pleading, but he still
persisted in refusing. Then the old woman said:
“Do you suspect me of being a spy sent by the ogre?”
“No, of course I do not suspect you of being the ogre’s spy, for you are
my old nurse,” answered Watanabe.
“Then you cannot surely refuse to show me the arm any longer.”
entreated the old woman; “for it is the great wish of my heart to see for
once in my life the arm of an ogre!”
Watanabe could not hold out in his refusal any longer, so he gave in at
last, saying:
“Then I will show you the ogre’s arm, since you so earnestly wish to see
it. Come, follow me!” and he led the way to his own room, the old woman
following.
When they were both in the room Watanabe shut the door carefully, and
then going towards a big box which stood in a corner of the room, he took
off the heavy lid. He then called to the old woman to come near and look in,
for he never took the arm out of the box.
“What is it like? Let me have a good look at it,” said the old nurse, with a
joyful face.
She came nearer and nearer, as if she were afraid, till she stood right
against the box. Suddenly she plunged her hand into the box and seized the
this arm,” she added pleadingly.
“No,” said Watanabe, “I am sorry, but I cannot grant your request.”
“But why?” asked the old woman.
“Because,” replied Watanabe, “ogres are very revengeful creatures, and if
I open the box there is no telling but that the ogre may suddenly appear and
carry off his arm. I have had a box made on purpose with a very strong lid,
and in this box I keep the ogre’s arm secure; and I never show it to any one,
whatever happens.”
“Your precaution is very reasonable,” said the old woman. “But I am
your old nurse, so surely you will not refuse to show ME the arm. I have
only just heard of your brave act, and not being able to wait till the morning
I came at once to ask you to show it to me.”
Watanabe was very troubled at the old woman’s pleading, but he still
persisted in refusing. Then the old woman said:
“Do you suspect me of being a spy sent by the ogre?”
“No, of course I do not suspect you of being the ogre’s spy, for you are
my old nurse,” answered Watanabe.
“Then you cannot surely refuse to show me the arm any longer.”
entreated the old woman; “for it is the great wish of my heart to see for
once in my life the arm of an ogre!”
Watanabe could not hold out in his refusal any longer, so he gave in at
last, saying:
“Then I will show you the ogre’s arm, since you so earnestly wish to see
it. Come, follow me!” and he led the way to his own room, the old woman
following.
When they were both in the room Watanabe shut the door carefully, and
then going towards a big box which stood in a corner of the room, he took
off the heavy lid. He then called to the old woman to come near and look in,
for he never took the arm out of the box.
“What is it like? Let me have a good look at it,” said the old nurse, with a
joyful face.
She came nearer and nearer, as if she were afraid, till she stood right
against the box. Suddenly she plunged her hand into the box and seized the
Page 175
arm, crying with a fearful voice which made the room shake:
“Oh, joy! I have got my arm back again!”
And from an old woman she was suddenly transformed into the towering
figure of the frightful ogre!
Watanabe sprang back and was unable to move for a moment, so great
was his astonishment; but recognizing the ogre who had attacked him at the
Gate of Rashomon, he determined with his usual courage to put an end to
him this time. He seized his sword, drew it out of its sheath in a flash, and
tried to cut the ogre down.
So quick was Watanabe that the creature had a narrow escape. But the
ogre sprang up to the ceiling, and bursting through the roof, disappeared in
the mist and clouds.
In this way the ogre escaped with his arm. The knight gnashed his teeth
with disappointment, but that was all he could do. He waited in patience for
another opportunity to dispatch the ogre. But the latter was afraid of
Watanabe’s great strength and daring, and never troubled Kyoto again. So
once more the people of the city were able to go out without fear even at
night time, and the brave deeds of Watanabe have never been forgotten!
“Oh, joy! I have got my arm back again!”
And from an old woman she was suddenly transformed into the towering
figure of the frightful ogre!
Watanabe sprang back and was unable to move for a moment, so great
was his astonishment; but recognizing the ogre who had attacked him at the
Gate of Rashomon, he determined with his usual courage to put an end to
him this time. He seized his sword, drew it out of its sheath in a flash, and
tried to cut the ogre down.
So quick was Watanabe that the creature had a narrow escape. But the
ogre sprang up to the ceiling, and bursting through the roof, disappeared in
the mist and clouds.
In this way the ogre escaped with his arm. The knight gnashed his teeth
with disappointment, but that was all he could do. He waited in patience for
another opportunity to dispatch the ogre. But the latter was afraid of
Watanabe’s great strength and daring, and never troubled Kyoto again. So
once more the people of the city were able to go out without fear even at
night time, and the brave deeds of Watanabe have never been forgotten!
Page 176
HOW AN OLD MAN LOST HIS WEN
Many, many years ago there lived a good old man who had a wen like a
tennis-ball growing out of his right cheek. This lump was a great
disfigurement to the old man, and so annoyed him that for many years he
spent all his time and money in trying to get rid of it. He tried everything he
could think of. He consulted many doctors far and near, and took all kinds
of medicines both internally and externally. But it was all of no use. The
lump only grew bigger and bigger till it was nearly as big as his face, and in
despair he gave up all hopes of ever losing it, and resigned himself to the
thought of having to carry the lump on his face all his life.
One day the firewood gave out in his kitchen, so, as his wife wanted
some at once, the old man took his ax and set out for the woods up among
the hills not very far from his home. It was a fine day in the early autumn,
and the old man enjoyed the fresh air and was in no hurry to get home. So
the whole afternoon passed quickly while he was chopping wood, and he
had collected a goodly pile to take back to his wife. When the day began to
draw to a close, he turned his face homewards.
The old man had not gone far on his way down the mountain pass when
the sky clouded and rain began to fall heavily. He looked about for some
shelter, but there was not even a charcoal-burner’s hut near. At last he
espied a large hole in the hollow trunk of a tree. The hole was near the
ground, so he crept in easily, and sat down in hopes that he had only been
overtaken by a mountain shower, and that the weather would soon clear.
But much to the old man’s disappointment, instead of clearing the rain
fell more and more heavily, and finally a heavy thunderstorm broke over the
mountain. The thunder roared so terrifically, and the heavens seemed to be
so ablaze with lightning, that the old man could hardly believe himself to be
alive. He thought that he must die of fright. At last, however, the sky
cleared, and the whole country was aglow in the rays of the setting sun. The
old man’s spirits revived when he looked out at the beautiful twilight, and
Many, many years ago there lived a good old man who had a wen like a
tennis-ball growing out of his right cheek. This lump was a great
disfigurement to the old man, and so annoyed him that for many years he
spent all his time and money in trying to get rid of it. He tried everything he
could think of. He consulted many doctors far and near, and took all kinds
of medicines both internally and externally. But it was all of no use. The
lump only grew bigger and bigger till it was nearly as big as his face, and in
despair he gave up all hopes of ever losing it, and resigned himself to the
thought of having to carry the lump on his face all his life.
One day the firewood gave out in his kitchen, so, as his wife wanted
some at once, the old man took his ax and set out for the woods up among
the hills not very far from his home. It was a fine day in the early autumn,
and the old man enjoyed the fresh air and was in no hurry to get home. So
the whole afternoon passed quickly while he was chopping wood, and he
had collected a goodly pile to take back to his wife. When the day began to
draw to a close, he turned his face homewards.
The old man had not gone far on his way down the mountain pass when
the sky clouded and rain began to fall heavily. He looked about for some
shelter, but there was not even a charcoal-burner’s hut near. At last he
espied a large hole in the hollow trunk of a tree. The hole was near the
ground, so he crept in easily, and sat down in hopes that he had only been
overtaken by a mountain shower, and that the weather would soon clear.
But much to the old man’s disappointment, instead of clearing the rain
fell more and more heavily, and finally a heavy thunderstorm broke over the
mountain. The thunder roared so terrifically, and the heavens seemed to be
so ablaze with lightning, that the old man could hardly believe himself to be
alive. He thought that he must die of fright. At last, however, the sky
cleared, and the whole country was aglow in the rays of the setting sun. The
old man’s spirits revived when he looked out at the beautiful twilight, and
Page 177
he was about to step out from his strange hiding-place in the hollow tree
when the sound of what seemed like the approaching steps of several
people caught his ear. He at once thought that his friends had come to look
for him, and he was delighted at the idea of having some jolly companions
with whom to walk home. But on looking out from the tree, what was his
amazement to see, not his friends, but hundreds of demons coming towards
the spot. The more he looked, the greater was his astonishment. Some of
these demons were as large as giants, others had great big eyes out of all
proportion to the rest of their bodies, others again had absurdly long noses,
and some had such big mouths that they seemed to open from ear to ear. All
had horns growing on their foreheads. The old man was so surprised at what
he saw that he lost his balance and fell out of the hollow tree. Fortunately
for him the demons did not see him, as the tree was in the background. So
he picked himself up and crept back into the tree.
While he was sitting there and wondering impatiently when he would be
able to get home, he heard the sounds of gay music, and then some of the
demons began to sing.
“What are these creatures doing?” said the old man to himself. “I will
look out, it sounds very amusing.”
On peeping out, the old man saw that the demon chief himself was
actually sitting with his back against the tree in which he had taken refuge,
and all the other demons were sitting round, some drinking and some
dancing. Food and wine was spread before them on the ground, and the
demons were evidently having a great entertainment and enjoying
themselves immensely.
It made the old man laugh to see their strange antics.
“How amusing this is!” laughed the old man to himself “I am now quite
old, but I have never seen anything so strange in all my life.”
He was so interested and excited in watching all that the demons were
doing, that he forgot himself and stepped out of the tree and stood looking
on.
The demon chief was just taking a big cup of SAKE and watching one of
the demons dancing. In a little while he said with a bored air:
“Your dance is rather monotonous. I am tired of watching it. Isn’t there
any one amongst you all who can dance better than this fellow?”
when the sound of what seemed like the approaching steps of several
people caught his ear. He at once thought that his friends had come to look
for him, and he was delighted at the idea of having some jolly companions
with whom to walk home. But on looking out from the tree, what was his
amazement to see, not his friends, but hundreds of demons coming towards
the spot. The more he looked, the greater was his astonishment. Some of
these demons were as large as giants, others had great big eyes out of all
proportion to the rest of their bodies, others again had absurdly long noses,
and some had such big mouths that they seemed to open from ear to ear. All
had horns growing on their foreheads. The old man was so surprised at what
he saw that he lost his balance and fell out of the hollow tree. Fortunately
for him the demons did not see him, as the tree was in the background. So
he picked himself up and crept back into the tree.
While he was sitting there and wondering impatiently when he would be
able to get home, he heard the sounds of gay music, and then some of the
demons began to sing.
“What are these creatures doing?” said the old man to himself. “I will
look out, it sounds very amusing.”
On peeping out, the old man saw that the demon chief himself was
actually sitting with his back against the tree in which he had taken refuge,
and all the other demons were sitting round, some drinking and some
dancing. Food and wine was spread before them on the ground, and the
demons were evidently having a great entertainment and enjoying
themselves immensely.
It made the old man laugh to see their strange antics.
“How amusing this is!” laughed the old man to himself “I am now quite
old, but I have never seen anything so strange in all my life.”
He was so interested and excited in watching all that the demons were
doing, that he forgot himself and stepped out of the tree and stood looking
on.
The demon chief was just taking a big cup of SAKE and watching one of
the demons dancing. In a little while he said with a bored air:
“Your dance is rather monotonous. I am tired of watching it. Isn’t there
any one amongst you all who can dance better than this fellow?”
Page 178
Now the old man had been fond of dancing all his life, and was quite an
expert in the art, and he knew that he could do much better than the demon.
“Shall I go and dance before these demons and let them see what a
human being can do? It may be dangerous, for if I don’t please them they
may kill me!” said the old fellow to himself.
His fears, however, were soon overcome by his love of dancing. In a few
minutes he could restrain himself no longer, and came out before the whole
party of demons and began to dance at once. The old man, realizing that his
life probably depended on whether he pleased these strange creatures or
not, exerted his skill and wit to the utmost.
The demons were at first very surprised to see a man so fearlessly taking
part in their entertainment, and then their surprise soon gave place to
admiration.
“How strange!” exclaimed the horned chief. “I never saw such a skillful
dancer before! He dances admirably!”
When the old man had finished his dance, the big demon said:
“Thank you very much for your amusing dance. Now give us the
pleasure of drinking a cup of wine with us,” and with these words he
handed him his largest wine-cup.
The old man thanked him very humbly:
“I did not expect such kindness from your lordship. I fear I have only
disturbed your pleasant party by my unskillful dancing.”
“No, no,” answered the big demon. “You must come often and dance for
us. Your skill has given us much pleasure.”
The old man thanked him again and promised to do so.
“Then will you come again to-morrow, old man?” asked the demon.
“Certainly, I will,” answered the old man.
“Then you must leave some pledge of your word with us,” said the
demon.
“Whatever you like,” said the old man.
“Now what is the best thing he can leave with us as a pledge?” asked the
demon, looking round.
Then said one of the demon’s attendants kneeling behind the chief:
expert in the art, and he knew that he could do much better than the demon.
“Shall I go and dance before these demons and let them see what a
human being can do? It may be dangerous, for if I don’t please them they
may kill me!” said the old fellow to himself.
His fears, however, were soon overcome by his love of dancing. In a few
minutes he could restrain himself no longer, and came out before the whole
party of demons and began to dance at once. The old man, realizing that his
life probably depended on whether he pleased these strange creatures or
not, exerted his skill and wit to the utmost.
The demons were at first very surprised to see a man so fearlessly taking
part in their entertainment, and then their surprise soon gave place to
admiration.
“How strange!” exclaimed the horned chief. “I never saw such a skillful
dancer before! He dances admirably!”
When the old man had finished his dance, the big demon said:
“Thank you very much for your amusing dance. Now give us the
pleasure of drinking a cup of wine with us,” and with these words he
handed him his largest wine-cup.
The old man thanked him very humbly:
“I did not expect such kindness from your lordship. I fear I have only
disturbed your pleasant party by my unskillful dancing.”
“No, no,” answered the big demon. “You must come often and dance for
us. Your skill has given us much pleasure.”
The old man thanked him again and promised to do so.
“Then will you come again to-morrow, old man?” asked the demon.
“Certainly, I will,” answered the old man.
“Then you must leave some pledge of your word with us,” said the
demon.
“Whatever you like,” said the old man.
“Now what is the best thing he can leave with us as a pledge?” asked the
demon, looking round.
Then said one of the demon’s attendants kneeling behind the chief:
Page 179
“The token he leaves with us must be the most important thing to him in
his possession. I see the old man has a wen on his right cheek. Now mortal
men consider such a wen very fortunate. Let my lord take the lump from the
old man’s right cheek, and he will surely come to-morrow, if only to get
that back.”
“You are very clever,” said the demon chief, giving his horns an
approving nod. Then he stretched out a hairy arm and claw-like hand, and
took the great lump from the old man’s right cheek. Strange to say, it came
off as easily as a ripe plum from the tree at the demon’s touch, and then the
merry troop of demons suddenly vanished.
The old man was lost in bewilderment by all that had happened. He
hardly knew for some time where he was. When he came to understand
what had happened to him, he was delighted to find that the lump on his
face, which had for so many years disfigured him, had really been taken
away without any pain to himself. He put up his hand to feel if any scar
remained, but found that his right cheek was as smooth as his left.
The sun had long set, and the young moon had risen like a silver crescent
in the sky. The old man suddenly realized how late it was and began to
hurry home. He patted his right cheek all the time, as if to make sure of his
good fortune in having lost the wen. He was so happy that he found it
impossible to walk quietly—he ran and danced the whole way home.
He found his wife very anxious, wondering what had happened to make
him so late. He soon told her all that had passed since he left home that
afternoon. She was quite as happy as her husband when he showed her that
the ugly lump had disappeared from his face, for in her youth she had
prided herself on his good looks, and it had been a daily grief to her to see
the horrid growth.
Now next door to this good old couple there lived a wicked and
disagreeable old man. He, too, had for many years been troubled with the
growth of a wen on his left cheek, and he, too, had tried all manner of
things to get rid of it, but in vain.
He heard at once, through the servant, of his neighbor’s good luck in
losing the lump on his face, so he called that very evening and asked his
friend to tell him everything that concerned the loss of it. The good old man
told his disagreeable neighbor all that had happened to him. He described
his possession. I see the old man has a wen on his right cheek. Now mortal
men consider such a wen very fortunate. Let my lord take the lump from the
old man’s right cheek, and he will surely come to-morrow, if only to get
that back.”
“You are very clever,” said the demon chief, giving his horns an
approving nod. Then he stretched out a hairy arm and claw-like hand, and
took the great lump from the old man’s right cheek. Strange to say, it came
off as easily as a ripe plum from the tree at the demon’s touch, and then the
merry troop of demons suddenly vanished.
The old man was lost in bewilderment by all that had happened. He
hardly knew for some time where he was. When he came to understand
what had happened to him, he was delighted to find that the lump on his
face, which had for so many years disfigured him, had really been taken
away without any pain to himself. He put up his hand to feel if any scar
remained, but found that his right cheek was as smooth as his left.
The sun had long set, and the young moon had risen like a silver crescent
in the sky. The old man suddenly realized how late it was and began to
hurry home. He patted his right cheek all the time, as if to make sure of his
good fortune in having lost the wen. He was so happy that he found it
impossible to walk quietly—he ran and danced the whole way home.
He found his wife very anxious, wondering what had happened to make
him so late. He soon told her all that had passed since he left home that
afternoon. She was quite as happy as her husband when he showed her that
the ugly lump had disappeared from his face, for in her youth she had
prided herself on his good looks, and it had been a daily grief to her to see
the horrid growth.
Now next door to this good old couple there lived a wicked and
disagreeable old man. He, too, had for many years been troubled with the
growth of a wen on his left cheek, and he, too, had tried all manner of
things to get rid of it, but in vain.
He heard at once, through the servant, of his neighbor’s good luck in
losing the lump on his face, so he called that very evening and asked his
friend to tell him everything that concerned the loss of it. The good old man
told his disagreeable neighbor all that had happened to him. He described
Page 180
the place where he would find the hollow tree in which to hide, and advised
him to be on the spot in the late afternoon towards the time of sunset.
The old neighbor started out the very next afternoon, and after hunting
about for some time, came to the hollow tree just as his friend had
described. Here he hid himself and waited for the twilight.
Just as he had been told, the band of demons came at that hour and held a
feast with dance and song. When this had gone on for some time the chief
of the demons looked around and said:
“It is now time for the old man to come as he promised us. Why doesn’t
he come?”
When the second old man heard these words he ran out of his hiding-
place in the tree and, kneeling down before the Oni, said:
“I have been waiting for a long time for you to speak!”
“Ah, you are the old man of yesterday,” said the demon chief. “Thank
you for coming, you must dance for us soon.”
The old man now stood up and opened his fan and began to dance. But
he had never learned to dance, and knew nothing about the necessary
gestures and different positions. He thought that anything would please the
demons, so he just hopped about, waving his arms and stamping his feet,
imitating as well as he could any dancing he had ever seen.
The Oni were very dissatisfied at this exhibition, and said amongst
themselves:
“How badly he dances to-day!”
Then to the old man the demon chief said:
“Your performance to-day is quite different from the dance of yesterday.
We don’t wish to see any more of such dancing. We will give you back the
pledge you left with us. You must go away at once.”
With these words he took out from a fold of his dress the lump which he
had taken from the face of the old man who had danced so well the day
before, and threw it at the right cheek of the old man who stood before him.
The lump immediately attached itself to his cheek as firmly as if it had
grown there always, and all attempts to pull it off were useless. The wicked
old man, instead of losing the lump on his left cheek as he had hoped, found
him to be on the spot in the late afternoon towards the time of sunset.
The old neighbor started out the very next afternoon, and after hunting
about for some time, came to the hollow tree just as his friend had
described. Here he hid himself and waited for the twilight.
Just as he had been told, the band of demons came at that hour and held a
feast with dance and song. When this had gone on for some time the chief
of the demons looked around and said:
“It is now time for the old man to come as he promised us. Why doesn’t
he come?”
When the second old man heard these words he ran out of his hiding-
place in the tree and, kneeling down before the Oni, said:
“I have been waiting for a long time for you to speak!”
“Ah, you are the old man of yesterday,” said the demon chief. “Thank
you for coming, you must dance for us soon.”
The old man now stood up and opened his fan and began to dance. But
he had never learned to dance, and knew nothing about the necessary
gestures and different positions. He thought that anything would please the
demons, so he just hopped about, waving his arms and stamping his feet,
imitating as well as he could any dancing he had ever seen.
The Oni were very dissatisfied at this exhibition, and said amongst
themselves:
“How badly he dances to-day!”
Then to the old man the demon chief said:
“Your performance to-day is quite different from the dance of yesterday.
We don’t wish to see any more of such dancing. We will give you back the
pledge you left with us. You must go away at once.”
With these words he took out from a fold of his dress the lump which he
had taken from the face of the old man who had danced so well the day
before, and threw it at the right cheek of the old man who stood before him.
The lump immediately attached itself to his cheek as firmly as if it had
grown there always, and all attempts to pull it off were useless. The wicked
old man, instead of losing the lump on his left cheek as he had hoped, found
Page 181
to his dismay that he had but added another to his right cheek in his attempt
to get rid of the first.
He put up first one hand and then the other to each side of his face to
make sure if he were not dreaming a horrible nightmare. No, sure enough
there was now a great wen on the right side of his face as on the left. The
demons had all disappeared, and there was nothing for him to do but to
return home. He was a pitiful sight, for his face, with the two large lumps,
one on each side, looked just like a Japanese gourd.
to get rid of the first.
He put up first one hand and then the other to each side of his face to
make sure if he were not dreaming a horrible nightmare. No, sure enough
there was now a great wen on the right side of his face as on the left. The
demons had all disappeared, and there was nothing for him to do but to
return home. He was a pitiful sight, for his face, with the two large lumps,
one on each side, looked just like a Japanese gourd.
Page 182
THE STONES OF FIVE COLORS AND THE
EMPRESS JOKWA.
AN OLD CHINESE STORY
Long, long ago there lived a great Chinese Empress who succeeded her
brother the Emperor Fuki. It was the age of giants, and the Empress Jokwa,
for that was her name, was twenty-five feet high, nearly as tall as her
brother. She was a wonderful woman, and an able ruler. There is an
interesting story of how she mended a part of the broken heavens and one
of the terrestrial pillars which upheld the sky, both of which were damaged
during a rebellion raised by one of King Fuki’s subjects.
The rebel’s name was Kokai. He was twenty-six feet high. His body was
entirely covered with hair, and his face was as black as iron. He was a
wizard and a very terrible character indeed. When the Emperor Fuki died,
Kokai was bitten with the ambition to be Emperor of China, but his plan
failed, and Jokwa, the dead Emperor’s sister, mounted the throne. Kokai
was so angry at being thwarted in his desire that he raised a revolt. His first
act was to employ the Water Devil, who caused a great flood to rush over
the country. This swamped the poor people out of their homes, and when
the Empress Jokwa saw the plight of her subjects, and knew it was Kokai’s
fault, she declared war against him.
Now Jokwa, the Empress, had two young warriors called Hako and Eiko,
and the former she made General of the front forces. Hako was delighted
that the Empress’s choice should fall on him, and he prepared himself for
battle. He took up the longest lance he could find and mounted a red horse,
and was just about to set out when he heard some one galloping hard behind
him and shouting:
“Hako! Stop! The general of the front forces must be I!”
EMPRESS JOKWA.
AN OLD CHINESE STORY
Long, long ago there lived a great Chinese Empress who succeeded her
brother the Emperor Fuki. It was the age of giants, and the Empress Jokwa,
for that was her name, was twenty-five feet high, nearly as tall as her
brother. She was a wonderful woman, and an able ruler. There is an
interesting story of how she mended a part of the broken heavens and one
of the terrestrial pillars which upheld the sky, both of which were damaged
during a rebellion raised by one of King Fuki’s subjects.
The rebel’s name was Kokai. He was twenty-six feet high. His body was
entirely covered with hair, and his face was as black as iron. He was a
wizard and a very terrible character indeed. When the Emperor Fuki died,
Kokai was bitten with the ambition to be Emperor of China, but his plan
failed, and Jokwa, the dead Emperor’s sister, mounted the throne. Kokai
was so angry at being thwarted in his desire that he raised a revolt. His first
act was to employ the Water Devil, who caused a great flood to rush over
the country. This swamped the poor people out of their homes, and when
the Empress Jokwa saw the plight of her subjects, and knew it was Kokai’s
fault, she declared war against him.
Now Jokwa, the Empress, had two young warriors called Hako and Eiko,
and the former she made General of the front forces. Hako was delighted
that the Empress’s choice should fall on him, and he prepared himself for
battle. He took up the longest lance he could find and mounted a red horse,
and was just about to set out when he heard some one galloping hard behind
him and shouting:
“Hako! Stop! The general of the front forces must be I!”
Page 183
He looked back and saw Eiko his comrade, riding on a white horse, in the
act of unsheathing a large sword to draw upon him. Hako’s anger was
kindled, and as he turned to face his rival he cried:
“Insolent wretch! I have been appointed by the Empress to lead the front
forces to battle. Do you dare to stop me?”
“Yes,” answered Eiko. “I ought to lead the army. It is you who should
follow me.”
At this bold reply Hako’s anger burst from a spark into a flame.
“Dare you answer me thus? Take that,” and he lunged at him with his
lance.
But Eiko moved quickly aside, and at the same time, raising his sword,
he wounded the head of the General’s horse. Obliged to dismount, Hako
was about to rush at his antagonist, when Eiko, as quick as lightning, tore
from his breast the badge of commandership and galloped away. The action
was so quick that Hako stood dazed, not knowing what to do.
The Empress had been a spectator of the scene, and she could not but
admire the quickness of the ambitious Eiko, and in order to pacify the rivals
she determined to appoint them both to the Generalship of the front army.
So Hako was made commander of the left wing of the front army, and
Eiko of the right. One hundred thousand soldiers followed them and
marched to put down the rebel Kokai.
Within a short time the two Generals reached the castle where Kokai had
fortified himself. When aware of their approach, the wizard said:
“I will blow these two poor children away with one breath.” (He little
thought how hard he would find the fight.)
With these words Kokai seized an iron rod and mounted a black horse,
and rushed forth like an angry tiger to meet his two foes.
As the two young warriors saw him tearing down upon them, they said to
each other: “We must not let him escape alive,” and they attacked him from
the right and from the left with sword and with lance. But the all-powerful
Kokai was not to be easily beaten—he whirled his iron rod round like a
great water-wheel, and for a long time they fought thus, neither side gaining
nor losing. At last, to avoid the wizard’s iron rod, Hako turned his horse too
quickly; the animal’s hoofs struck against a large stone, and in a fright the
act of unsheathing a large sword to draw upon him. Hako’s anger was
kindled, and as he turned to face his rival he cried:
“Insolent wretch! I have been appointed by the Empress to lead the front
forces to battle. Do you dare to stop me?”
“Yes,” answered Eiko. “I ought to lead the army. It is you who should
follow me.”
At this bold reply Hako’s anger burst from a spark into a flame.
“Dare you answer me thus? Take that,” and he lunged at him with his
lance.
But Eiko moved quickly aside, and at the same time, raising his sword,
he wounded the head of the General’s horse. Obliged to dismount, Hako
was about to rush at his antagonist, when Eiko, as quick as lightning, tore
from his breast the badge of commandership and galloped away. The action
was so quick that Hako stood dazed, not knowing what to do.
The Empress had been a spectator of the scene, and she could not but
admire the quickness of the ambitious Eiko, and in order to pacify the rivals
she determined to appoint them both to the Generalship of the front army.
So Hako was made commander of the left wing of the front army, and
Eiko of the right. One hundred thousand soldiers followed them and
marched to put down the rebel Kokai.
Within a short time the two Generals reached the castle where Kokai had
fortified himself. When aware of their approach, the wizard said:
“I will blow these two poor children away with one breath.” (He little
thought how hard he would find the fight.)
With these words Kokai seized an iron rod and mounted a black horse,
and rushed forth like an angry tiger to meet his two foes.
As the two young warriors saw him tearing down upon them, they said to
each other: “We must not let him escape alive,” and they attacked him from
the right and from the left with sword and with lance. But the all-powerful
Kokai was not to be easily beaten—he whirled his iron rod round like a
great water-wheel, and for a long time they fought thus, neither side gaining
nor losing. At last, to avoid the wizard’s iron rod, Hako turned his horse too
quickly; the animal’s hoofs struck against a large stone, and in a fright the
Page 184
horse reared as straight on end as a screen, throwing his master to the
ground.
Thereupon Kokai drew his three-edged sword and was about to kill the
prostrate Hako, but before the wizard could work his wicked will the brave
Eiko had wheeled his horse in front of Kokai and dared him to try his
strength with him, and not to kill a fallen man. But Kokai was tired, and he
did not feel inclined to face this fresh and dauntless young soldier, so
suddenly wheeling his horse round, he fled from the fray.
Hako, who had been only slightly stunned, had by this time got upon his
feet, and he and his comrade rushed after the retreating enemy, the one on
foot and the other on horseback.
Kokai, seeing that he was pursued, turned upon his nearest assailant, who
was, of course, the mounted Eiko, and drawing forth an arrow from the
quiver at his back, fitted it to his bow and drew upon Eiko.
As quick as lightning the wary Eiko avoided the shaft, which only
touched his helmet strings, and glancing off, fell harmless against Hako’s
coat of armor.
The wizard saw that both his enemies remained unscathed. He also knew
that there was no time to pull a second arrow before they would be upon
him, so to save himself he resorted to magic. He stretched forth his wand,
and immediately a great flood arose, and Jokwa’s army and her brave young
Generals were swept away like a falling of autumn leaves on a stream.
Hako and Eiko found themselves struggling neck deep in water, and
looking round they saw the ferocious Kokai making towards them through
the water with his iron rod on high. They thought every moment that they
would be cut down, but they bravely struck out to swim as far as they could
from Kokai’s reach. All of a sudden they found themselves in front of what
seemed to be an island rising straight out of the water. They looked up, and
there stood an old man with hair as white as snow, smiling at them. They
cried to him to help them. The old man nodded his head and came down to
the edge of the water. As soon as his feet touched the flood it divided, and a
good road appeared, to the amazement of the drowning men, who now
found themselves safe.
Kokai had by this time reached the island which had risen as if by a
miracle out of the water, and seeing his enemies thus saved he was furious.
He rushed through the water upon the old man, and it seemed as if he would
ground.
Thereupon Kokai drew his three-edged sword and was about to kill the
prostrate Hako, but before the wizard could work his wicked will the brave
Eiko had wheeled his horse in front of Kokai and dared him to try his
strength with him, and not to kill a fallen man. But Kokai was tired, and he
did not feel inclined to face this fresh and dauntless young soldier, so
suddenly wheeling his horse round, he fled from the fray.
Hako, who had been only slightly stunned, had by this time got upon his
feet, and he and his comrade rushed after the retreating enemy, the one on
foot and the other on horseback.
Kokai, seeing that he was pursued, turned upon his nearest assailant, who
was, of course, the mounted Eiko, and drawing forth an arrow from the
quiver at his back, fitted it to his bow and drew upon Eiko.
As quick as lightning the wary Eiko avoided the shaft, which only
touched his helmet strings, and glancing off, fell harmless against Hako’s
coat of armor.
The wizard saw that both his enemies remained unscathed. He also knew
that there was no time to pull a second arrow before they would be upon
him, so to save himself he resorted to magic. He stretched forth his wand,
and immediately a great flood arose, and Jokwa’s army and her brave young
Generals were swept away like a falling of autumn leaves on a stream.
Hako and Eiko found themselves struggling neck deep in water, and
looking round they saw the ferocious Kokai making towards them through
the water with his iron rod on high. They thought every moment that they
would be cut down, but they bravely struck out to swim as far as they could
from Kokai’s reach. All of a sudden they found themselves in front of what
seemed to be an island rising straight out of the water. They looked up, and
there stood an old man with hair as white as snow, smiling at them. They
cried to him to help them. The old man nodded his head and came down to
the edge of the water. As soon as his feet touched the flood it divided, and a
good road appeared, to the amazement of the drowning men, who now
found themselves safe.
Kokai had by this time reached the island which had risen as if by a
miracle out of the water, and seeing his enemies thus saved he was furious.
He rushed through the water upon the old man, and it seemed as if he would
Page 185
surely be killed. But the old man appeared not in the least dismayed, and
calmly awaited the wizard’s onslaught.
As Kokai drew near, the old man laughed aloud merrily, and turning into
a large and beautiful white crane, flapped his wings and flew upwards into
the heavens.
When Hako and Eiko saw this, they knew that their deliverer was no
mere human being—was perhaps a god in disguise—and they hoped later
on to find out who the venerable old man was.
In the meantime they had retreated, and it being now the close of day, for
the sun was setting, both Kokai and the young warriors gave up the idea of
fighting more that day.
That night Hako and Eiko decided that it was useless to fight against the
wizard Kokai, for he had supernatural powers, while they were only human.
So they presented themselves before the Empress Jokwa. After a long
consultation, the Empress decided to ask the Fire King, Shikuyu, to help her
against the rebel wizard and to lead her army against him.
Now Shikuyu, the Fire King, lived at the South Pole. It was the only safe
place for him to be in, for he burnt up everything around him anywhere
else, but it was impossible to burn up ice and snow. To look at he was a
giant, and stood thirty feet high. His face was just like marble, and his hair
and beard long and as white as snow. His strength was stupendous, and he
was master of all fire just as Kokai was of water.
“Surely,” thought the Empress, “Shikuyu can conquer Kokai.” So she
sent Eiko to the South Pole to beg Shikuyu to take the war against Kokai
into his own hands and conquer him once for all.
The Fire King, on hearing the Empress’s request, smiled and said:
“That is an easy matter, to be sure! It was none other than I who came to
your rescue when you and your companion were drowning in the flood
raised by Kokai!”
Eiko was surprised at learning this. He thanked the Fire King for coming
to the rescue in their dire need, and then besought him to return with him
and lead the war and defeat the wicked Kokai.
Shikuyu did as he was asked, and returned with Eiko to the Empress. She
welcomed the Fire King cordially, and at once told him why she had sent
calmly awaited the wizard’s onslaught.
As Kokai drew near, the old man laughed aloud merrily, and turning into
a large and beautiful white crane, flapped his wings and flew upwards into
the heavens.
When Hako and Eiko saw this, they knew that their deliverer was no
mere human being—was perhaps a god in disguise—and they hoped later
on to find out who the venerable old man was.
In the meantime they had retreated, and it being now the close of day, for
the sun was setting, both Kokai and the young warriors gave up the idea of
fighting more that day.
That night Hako and Eiko decided that it was useless to fight against the
wizard Kokai, for he had supernatural powers, while they were only human.
So they presented themselves before the Empress Jokwa. After a long
consultation, the Empress decided to ask the Fire King, Shikuyu, to help her
against the rebel wizard and to lead her army against him.
Now Shikuyu, the Fire King, lived at the South Pole. It was the only safe
place for him to be in, for he burnt up everything around him anywhere
else, but it was impossible to burn up ice and snow. To look at he was a
giant, and stood thirty feet high. His face was just like marble, and his hair
and beard long and as white as snow. His strength was stupendous, and he
was master of all fire just as Kokai was of water.
“Surely,” thought the Empress, “Shikuyu can conquer Kokai.” So she
sent Eiko to the South Pole to beg Shikuyu to take the war against Kokai
into his own hands and conquer him once for all.
The Fire King, on hearing the Empress’s request, smiled and said:
“That is an easy matter, to be sure! It was none other than I who came to
your rescue when you and your companion were drowning in the flood
raised by Kokai!”
Eiko was surprised at learning this. He thanked the Fire King for coming
to the rescue in their dire need, and then besought him to return with him
and lead the war and defeat the wicked Kokai.
Shikuyu did as he was asked, and returned with Eiko to the Empress. She
welcomed the Fire King cordially, and at once told him why she had sent
Page 186
for him—to ask him to be the Generalissimo of her army. His reply was
very reassuring:
“Do not have any anxiety. I will certainly kill Kokai.”
Shikuyu then placed himself at the head of thirty thousand soldiers, and
with Hako and Eiko showing him the way, marched to the enemy’s castle.
The Fire King knew the secret of Kokai’s power, and he now told all the
soldiers to gather a certain kind of shrub. This they burned in large
quantities, and each soldier was then ordered to fill a bag full of the ashes
thus obtained.
Kokai, on the other hand, in his own conceit, thought that Shikuyu was of
inferior power to himself, and he murmured angrily:
“Even though you are the Fire King, I can soon extinguish you.”
Then he repeated an incantation, and the water-floods rose and welled as
high as mountains. Shikuyu, not in the least frightened, ordered his soldiers
to scatter the ashes which he had caused them to make. Every man did as he
was bid, and such was the power of the plant that they had burned, that as
soon as the ashes mingled with the water a stiff mud was formed, and they
were all safe from drowning.
Now Kokai the wizard was dismayed when he saw that the Fire King was
superior in wisdom to himself, and his anger was so great that he rushed
headlong towards the enemy.
Eiko rode to meet him, and the two fought together for some time. They
were well matched in a hand-to-hand combat. Hako, who was carefully
watching the fray, saw that Eiko began to tire, and fearing that his
companion would be killed, he took his place.
But Kokai had tired as well, and feeling him self unable to hold out
against Hako, he said artfully:
“You are too magnanimous, thus to fight for your friend and run the risk
of being killed. I will not hurt such a good man.”
And he pretended to retreat, turning away the head of his horse. His
intention was to throw Hako off his guard and then to wheel round and take
him by surprise.
But Shikuyu understood the wily wizard, and he spoke at once:
“You are a coward! You cannot deceive me!”
very reassuring:
“Do not have any anxiety. I will certainly kill Kokai.”
Shikuyu then placed himself at the head of thirty thousand soldiers, and
with Hako and Eiko showing him the way, marched to the enemy’s castle.
The Fire King knew the secret of Kokai’s power, and he now told all the
soldiers to gather a certain kind of shrub. This they burned in large
quantities, and each soldier was then ordered to fill a bag full of the ashes
thus obtained.
Kokai, on the other hand, in his own conceit, thought that Shikuyu was of
inferior power to himself, and he murmured angrily:
“Even though you are the Fire King, I can soon extinguish you.”
Then he repeated an incantation, and the water-floods rose and welled as
high as mountains. Shikuyu, not in the least frightened, ordered his soldiers
to scatter the ashes which he had caused them to make. Every man did as he
was bid, and such was the power of the plant that they had burned, that as
soon as the ashes mingled with the water a stiff mud was formed, and they
were all safe from drowning.
Now Kokai the wizard was dismayed when he saw that the Fire King was
superior in wisdom to himself, and his anger was so great that he rushed
headlong towards the enemy.
Eiko rode to meet him, and the two fought together for some time. They
were well matched in a hand-to-hand combat. Hako, who was carefully
watching the fray, saw that Eiko began to tire, and fearing that his
companion would be killed, he took his place.
But Kokai had tired as well, and feeling him self unable to hold out
against Hako, he said artfully:
“You are too magnanimous, thus to fight for your friend and run the risk
of being killed. I will not hurt such a good man.”
And he pretended to retreat, turning away the head of his horse. His
intention was to throw Hako off his guard and then to wheel round and take
him by surprise.
But Shikuyu understood the wily wizard, and he spoke at once:
“You are a coward! You cannot deceive me!”
Page 187
Saying this, the Fire King made a sign to the unwary Hako to attack him.
Kokai now turned upon Shikuyu furiously, but he was tired and unable to
fight well, and he soon received a wound in his shoulder. He now broke
from the fray and tried to escape in earnest.
While the fight between their leaders had been going on the two armies
had stood waiting for the issue. Shikuyu now turned and bade Jokwa’s
soldiers charge the enemy’s forces. This they did, and routed them with
great slaughter, and the wizard barely escaped with his life.
It was in vain that Kokai called upon the Water Devil to help him, for
Shikuyu knew the counter-charm. The wizard found that the battle was
against him. Mad with pain, for his wound began to trouble him, and
frenzied with disappointment and fear, he dashed his head against the rocks
of Mount Shu and died on the spot.
There was an end of the wicked Kokai, but not of trouble in the Empress
Jokwa’s Kingdom, as you shall see. The force with which the wizard fell
against the rocks was so great that the mountain burst, and fire rushed out
from the earth, and one of the pillars upholding the Heavens was broken so
that one corner of the sky dropped till it touched the earth.
Shikuyu, the Fire King, took up the body of the wizard and carried it to
the Empress Jokwa, who rejoiced greatly that her enemy was vanquished,
and her generals victorious. She showered all manner of gifts and honors
upon Shikuyu.
But all this time fire was bursting from the mountain broken by the fall of
Kokai. Whole villages were destroyed, rice-fields burnt up, river beds filled
with the burning lava, and the homeless people were in great distress. So
the Empress left the capital as soon as she had rewarded the victor Shikuyu,
and journeyed with all speed to the scene of disaster. She found that both
Heaven and earth had sustained damage, and the place was so dark that she
had to light her lamp to find out the extent of the havoc that had been
wrought.
Having ascertained this, she set to work at repairs. To this end she
ordered her subjects to collect stones of five colors—blue, yellow, red,
white and black. When she had obtained these, she boiled them with a kind
of porcelain in a large caldron, and the mixture became a beautiful paste,
and with this she knew that she could mend the sky. Now all was ready.
Kokai now turned upon Shikuyu furiously, but he was tired and unable to
fight well, and he soon received a wound in his shoulder. He now broke
from the fray and tried to escape in earnest.
While the fight between their leaders had been going on the two armies
had stood waiting for the issue. Shikuyu now turned and bade Jokwa’s
soldiers charge the enemy’s forces. This they did, and routed them with
great slaughter, and the wizard barely escaped with his life.
It was in vain that Kokai called upon the Water Devil to help him, for
Shikuyu knew the counter-charm. The wizard found that the battle was
against him. Mad with pain, for his wound began to trouble him, and
frenzied with disappointment and fear, he dashed his head against the rocks
of Mount Shu and died on the spot.
There was an end of the wicked Kokai, but not of trouble in the Empress
Jokwa’s Kingdom, as you shall see. The force with which the wizard fell
against the rocks was so great that the mountain burst, and fire rushed out
from the earth, and one of the pillars upholding the Heavens was broken so
that one corner of the sky dropped till it touched the earth.
Shikuyu, the Fire King, took up the body of the wizard and carried it to
the Empress Jokwa, who rejoiced greatly that her enemy was vanquished,
and her generals victorious. She showered all manner of gifts and honors
upon Shikuyu.
But all this time fire was bursting from the mountain broken by the fall of
Kokai. Whole villages were destroyed, rice-fields burnt up, river beds filled
with the burning lava, and the homeless people were in great distress. So
the Empress left the capital as soon as she had rewarded the victor Shikuyu,
and journeyed with all speed to the scene of disaster. She found that both
Heaven and earth had sustained damage, and the place was so dark that she
had to light her lamp to find out the extent of the havoc that had been
wrought.
Having ascertained this, she set to work at repairs. To this end she
ordered her subjects to collect stones of five colors—blue, yellow, red,
white and black. When she had obtained these, she boiled them with a kind
of porcelain in a large caldron, and the mixture became a beautiful paste,
and with this she knew that she could mend the sky. Now all was ready.
Page 188
Summoning the clouds that were sailing ever so high above her head, she
mounted them, and rode heavenwards, carrying in her hands the vase
containing the paste made from the stones of five colors. She soon reached
the corner of the sky that was broken, and applied the paste and mended it.
Having done this, she turned her attention to the broken pillar, and with the
legs of a very large tortoise she mended it. When this was finished she
mounted the clouds and descended to the earth, hoping to find that all was
now right, but to her dismay she found that it was still quite dark. Neither
the sun shone by day nor the moon by night.
Greatly perplexed, she at last called a meeting of all the wise men of the
Kingdom, and asked their advice as to what she should do in this dilemma.
Two of the wisest said:
“The roads of Heaven have been damaged by the late accident, and the
Sun and Moon have been obliged to stay at home. Neither the Sun could
make his daily journey nor the Moon her nightly one because of the bad
roads. The Sun and Moon do not yet know that your Majesty has mended
all that was damaged, so we will go and inform them that since you have
repaired them the roads are safe.”
The Empress approved of what the wise men suggested, and ordered
them to set out on their mission. But this was not easy, for the Palace of the
Sun and Moon was many, many hundreds of thousands of miles distant into
the East. If they traveled on foot they might never reach the place, they
would die of old age on the road. But Jokwa had recourse to magic. She
gave her two ambassadors wonderful chariots which could whirl through
the air by magic power a thousand miles per minute. They set out in good
spirits, riding above the clouds, and after many days they reached the
country where the Sun and the Moon were living happily together.
The two ambassadors were granted an interview with their Majesties of
Light and asked them why they had for so many days secluded themselves
from the Universe? Did they not know that by doing so they plunged the
world and all its people into uttermost darkness both day and night?
Replied the Sun and the Moon:
“Surely you know that Mount Shu has suddenly burst forth with fire, and
the roads of Heaven have been greatly damaged! I, the Sun, found it
impossible to make my daily journey along such rough roads—and
mounted them, and rode heavenwards, carrying in her hands the vase
containing the paste made from the stones of five colors. She soon reached
the corner of the sky that was broken, and applied the paste and mended it.
Having done this, she turned her attention to the broken pillar, and with the
legs of a very large tortoise she mended it. When this was finished she
mounted the clouds and descended to the earth, hoping to find that all was
now right, but to her dismay she found that it was still quite dark. Neither
the sun shone by day nor the moon by night.
Greatly perplexed, she at last called a meeting of all the wise men of the
Kingdom, and asked their advice as to what she should do in this dilemma.
Two of the wisest said:
“The roads of Heaven have been damaged by the late accident, and the
Sun and Moon have been obliged to stay at home. Neither the Sun could
make his daily journey nor the Moon her nightly one because of the bad
roads. The Sun and Moon do not yet know that your Majesty has mended
all that was damaged, so we will go and inform them that since you have
repaired them the roads are safe.”
The Empress approved of what the wise men suggested, and ordered
them to set out on their mission. But this was not easy, for the Palace of the
Sun and Moon was many, many hundreds of thousands of miles distant into
the East. If they traveled on foot they might never reach the place, they
would die of old age on the road. But Jokwa had recourse to magic. She
gave her two ambassadors wonderful chariots which could whirl through
the air by magic power a thousand miles per minute. They set out in good
spirits, riding above the clouds, and after many days they reached the
country where the Sun and the Moon were living happily together.
The two ambassadors were granted an interview with their Majesties of
Light and asked them why they had for so many days secluded themselves
from the Universe? Did they not know that by doing so they plunged the
world and all its people into uttermost darkness both day and night?
Replied the Sun and the Moon:
“Surely you know that Mount Shu has suddenly burst forth with fire, and
the roads of Heaven have been greatly damaged! I, the Sun, found it
impossible to make my daily journey along such rough roads—and
Page 189
certainly the Moon could not issue forth at night! so we both retired into
private life for a time.”
Then the two wise men bowed themselves to the ground and said:
“Our Empress Jokwa has already repaired the roads with the wonderful
stones of five colors, so we beg to assure your Majesties that the roads are
just as they were before the eruption took place.”
But the Sun and the Moon still hesitated, saying that they had heard that
one of the pillars of Heaven had been broken as well, and they feared that,
even if the roads had been remade, it would still be dangerous for them to
sally forth on their usual journeys.
“You need have no anxiety about the broken pillar,” said the two
ambassadors. “Our Empress restored it with the legs of a great tortoise, and
it is as firm as ever it was.”
Then the Sun and Moon appeared satisfied, and they both set out to try
the roads. They found that what the Empress’s deputies had told them was
correct.
After the examination of the heavenly roads, the Sun and Moon again
gave light to the earth. All the people rejoiced greatly, and peace and
prosperity were secured in China for a long time under the reign of the wise
Empress Jokwa.
THE END.
private life for a time.”
Then the two wise men bowed themselves to the ground and said:
“Our Empress Jokwa has already repaired the roads with the wonderful
stones of five colors, so we beg to assure your Majesties that the roads are
just as they were before the eruption took place.”
But the Sun and the Moon still hesitated, saying that they had heard that
one of the pillars of Heaven had been broken as well, and they feared that,
even if the roads had been remade, it would still be dangerous for them to
sally forth on their usual journeys.
“You need have no anxiety about the broken pillar,” said the two
ambassadors. “Our Empress restored it with the legs of a great tortoise, and
it is as firm as ever it was.”
Then the Sun and Moon appeared satisfied, and they both set out to try
the roads. They found that what the Empress’s deputies had told them was
correct.
After the examination of the heavenly roads, the Sun and Moon again
gave light to the earth. All the people rejoiced greatly, and peace and
prosperity were secured in China for a long time under the reign of the wise
Empress Jokwa.
THE END.
Page 190
*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK JAPANESE FAIRY
TALES ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be
renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law
means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the
Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States
without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying
and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a
registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook,
except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge
anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg
eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by
U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
TALES ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be
renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law
means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the
Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States
without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying
and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a
registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook,
except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge
anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg
eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by
U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
Page 191
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any
other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you
agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License
available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work,
you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the
terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright)
agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement,
you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy
of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on
or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be
bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can
do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a
lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you
follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to
Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual
work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any
other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you
agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License
available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work,
you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the
terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright)
agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement,
you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy
of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on
or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be
bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can
do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a
lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you
follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to
Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual
work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are
Page 192
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are
removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing
Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can
easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you
share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a
constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the
laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before
downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work.
The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status
of any work in any country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country
where you are located before using this eBook.
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are
removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing
Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can
easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you
share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a
constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the
laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before
downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work.
The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status
of any work in any country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country
where you are located before using this eBook.
Page 193
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived from
texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice
indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the
work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a
work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on
the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs
1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the
permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply
with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed
by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the
copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License
terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any
other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently
displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or
immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the
official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no
additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of
exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work
in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph
1.E.1.
texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice
indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the
work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a
work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on
the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs
1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the
permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply
with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed
by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the
copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License
terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any
other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently
displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or
immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the
official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no
additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of
exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work
in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph
1.E.1.
Page 194
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing,
copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply
with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to
or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in
this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project
copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply
with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to
or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in
this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project
Page 195
Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works
not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and
the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription
errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or
damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that
damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except
for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to
you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you
can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund.
If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works
not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and
the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription
errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or
damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that
damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except
for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to
you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you
can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund.
If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to
Page 196
you may choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you
may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the
problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or
limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable
to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum
disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause
to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg
work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic
works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including
obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you
may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the
problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or
limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable
to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum
disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause
to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg
work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic
works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including
obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the
Page 197
efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks of
life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance
they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring
that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for
generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for
Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations
can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)
(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of
Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service.
The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541.
Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s
laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516,
Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the
number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance
they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring
that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for
generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for
Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations
can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)
(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of
Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service.
The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541.
Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s
laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516,
Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the
number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
Page 198
including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are
particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort,
much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not
received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have
not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against
accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us
with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any
statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the
United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods
and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including
checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with
anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg
eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions,
all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a
particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort,
much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not
received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have
not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against
accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us
with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any
statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the
United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods
and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including
checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with
anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg
eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions,
all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a
Page 199
copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in
compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how
to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email
newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how
to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email
newsletter to hear about new eBooks.